InstallationGuide I10 - 3 PDF

i
Scalar 6000
I nstallati on Guide Installation Guide Installation Guide Installat ion Guide
6-66881-05 Rev A
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide, 6-66881-05 Rev A, December 2012, Made in USA.
Quantum Corporation provides this publication “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including
but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Quantum Corporation
may revise this publication from time to time without notice.
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT
Copyright 2012 by Quantum Corporation. All rights reserved.
Your right to copy this manual is limited by copyright law. Making copies or adaptations without prior written
authorization of Quantum Corporation is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable violation of the law.
TRADEMARK STATEMENT
Quantum, ADIC, DLT, DLTtape, the Quantum logo, and the DLTtape logo are all registered trademarks of Quantum
Corporation.
SDLT and Super DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation.
Other trademarks may be mentioned herein which belong to other companies

Contents
1 About This Guide and Your Product 1
Product Safety Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Mechanical Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Door Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Power Button on the Library’s Indicator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Physically Accessing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Performing Mechanical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Working on Live Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Mercury Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Product Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Explanation of Symbols and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Other Documents you Might Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Getting More Information or Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Getting Started 9
Unpacking and Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Checking the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Initial Setup Procedure Road Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Illustrations of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3 Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module

(Gen 1 and Gen 2) 19
Positioning the Stand-Alone Control Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lowering the Leveling Legs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Raising the Control Module Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Verifying the System is Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Testing the Digital Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Verifying Level Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Additional Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lowering All Other Leveling Legs and Checking Library Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting the Leg Lock Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installing the Robot (Gen 2 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide iii

4 Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 1 43
Preparing to Install a New Multi-Module Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Attaching Control and Expansion Modules as a System Unit (Four Frames Maximum) . . . . . . . . . 44
Aligning and Bolting the Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Positioning the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Lowering the System Unit Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Raising the System Unit Off the Casters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Testing the Digital Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Verifying Level Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Additional Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Lowering All Other Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting the Leg Lock Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding an Expansion Module to an Existing System Unit or Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Installing Expansion Modules after Installing the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Positioning the New Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Lowering the Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Raising the Expansion Module Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Aligning the New Expansion Module with the System Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Inserting the Attachment Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tightening the Attachment Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting the Leg Lock Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Attaching the X-Axis Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Attaching and Aligning the Upper and Lower X-Axis Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Attaching the Middle X-Axis Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Aligning the Middle X-Axis Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Aligning the Middle X-Axis Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Verifying the Middle X-Axis Rail Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Additional Procedure For Verifying Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Verifying Accessor Assembly Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Attaching the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Eight Modules or Less Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Nine Modules or More Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Installing the X-Axis Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Installing the X-Axis Chain Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Installing the X-Axis Chain Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Routing and Connecting Module Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Assembling the Last Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Preparing an Existing Library to Receive an Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Positioning the Existing Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Removing the Right Side Panel from the Last Existing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Removing the X-Axis Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Removing the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Removing the Middle X-Axis Rail from Module Eight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Removing the X-Axis Chain Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Removing the LBX Terminator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Removing and Replacing the LBX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Removing the LBX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Replacing the LBX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing and Replacing the IEX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Removing the IEX Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Replacing the IEX Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
iv Contents
5 Installing a Multi-Module Library -
Gen 2 Single-Robot Configuration 111
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four Frames) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Aligning and Bolting the Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Verifying the Frames are Aligned Using Alignment Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Positioning the System Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Lowering the System Unit Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Raising the System Unit Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Verifying the System is Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Testing the Digital Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Verifying Level Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Additional Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Lowering All Other Leveling Legs and Checking Library Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setting the Leg Lock Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Single-Robot Library to Receive a New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Positioning the Existing Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right-most Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Removing and Installing the Right Hard Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks from the Former Last Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or Existing Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Positioning the New Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lowering the Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Raising the Expansion Module Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Aligning the New Expansion Module with the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Inserting the Attachment Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Tightening the Attachment Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Relocating the LBX Terminator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Removing the LBX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Replacing the LBX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Step 4: Installing the Gen 2 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Connecting and Securing the Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installing the Catch Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Installing the X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Routing and Connecting Module Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Installing the Side Cover on a New Last Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installing the Gen 2 Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Verifying The Robot is Ready for IVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Running IVT and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reinstalling the Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Notes for Configuring Partitions and Importing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide v

6 Installing a Multi-Module Library -
Gen 2 Dual-Robot Configuration 185
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
PM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
EM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four Frames) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Aligning and Bolting the Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Positioning the System Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Lowering the System Unit Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Raising the System Unit Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Dual-Robot Library to Receive a New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Moving the Right Robot Out of the Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Removing and Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks from the Former Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Removing the Top Rack Support from the New Right Parking Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Relocating the Loader Bracket, Loader Bracket Locator, and Top Rack Support, from the Former Right
Parking Module to the New Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Installing the Top Rack Support into the Former Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or Existing Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Positioning the New Expansion Module (or Right Parking Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Aligning the New Expansion Module with the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Step 4: Installing the Gen 2 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Connecting and Securing the Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Removing the Control Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Removing the Left Parking Module Cover Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
vi Contents
Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Connecting the Aisle Cable Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Checking the Display Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Routing and Connecting Module Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Installing the Side Cover on a New Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Installing the Gen 2 Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Verifying Both Robots are Ready for IVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Running IVT and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Reinstalling the Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Notes for Configuring Partitions and Importing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7 Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to a Gen 2

Single-Robot Library 275
Upgrade Process Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Upgrade Kits - Included Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
CM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
EM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Important Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Preparing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Before You Go to the Customer’s Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
At the Customer’s Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Removing Left and Right Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Removing the Left Side Cover of Existing Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Removing the Right Side Cover from the Right-most Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
What to do if You Cannot Remove Both Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
If Left Side Cover Remains Installed: Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly (Including Motor)
291
If Right Side Cover Remains Installed: Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 293
Removing the Control Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Removing Gen 1 Hardware and Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Removing the X-Axis Hard Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Removing the X-Axis Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Removing the X-Axis Belt Tensioner and Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Removing the X-Axis Chain Restraint Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Removing the Gen 1 Aisle Accessor Cable Assembly (W10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Removing the Upper X-Axis Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Removing the Lower X-Axis Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Removing the Middle X-Axis Rails and Substrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Removing the LMD from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Removing the Gen 1 Library Motor Drive (LMD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Moving the Library to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bolting the Modules Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Positioning the New Module(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Raising the New Module(s) Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Aligning the New Module(s) with the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide vii

Verifying the System is Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Testing the Digital Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Verifying Level Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Additional Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Lowering All Other Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Removing the Control Module Cover Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Installing the Remaining Gen 2 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Installing the Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Installing the Bottom Rack Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Installing the Middle Rack Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Installing the Right Hard Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Attaching the Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Locator to the Top Rack Support . . . . . . . . . . 329
Installing the Top Rack Supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Installing, Replacing, and Restraining Magazines, and Positioning Calibration Targets. . . . . . . . . . . 338
Calibration Target Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Magazine Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Removing Calibration Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Replacing Calibration Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Installing Gen 2 Boards and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Connecting Modules Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Reinstalling Service Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Installing the Gen 2 Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Reinstalling the Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Verifying The Robots is Ready for IVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Running IVT and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Reconfiguring Partitions and Importing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Closing the Service and Access Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Dispositioning the Removed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Reinstalling the Left and Right Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
8 Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to

a Gen 2 Dual-Robot Library 391
Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Upgrade Kits - Included Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Installed in PM and need to be moved to right parking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
PM Kit (items needed to convert a standard expansion module into a right parking module) . 397
CM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
EM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Important Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Preparing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Before You Go to the Customer’s Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
At the Customer’s Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
viii Contents
Removing Left and Right Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Removing the Left Side Cover of Existing Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Removing the Right Side Cover from the Right-most Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Removing the Control Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Removing Gen 1 Hardware and Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Removing the X-Axis Hard Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Removing the X-Axis Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Removing the X-Axis Belt Tensioner and Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Removing the X-Axis Chain Restraint Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Removing the Gen 1 Aisle Accessor Cable Assembly (W10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Removing the Upper X-Axis Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Removing the Lower X-Axis Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Removing the Middle X-Axis Rails and Substrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Removing the Velcro Strap(s) from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Removing the LMD from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Removing the Gen 1 Library Motor Drive (LMD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Moving the Library to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Swapping Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Bolting the Modules Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Positioning the New Module(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Raising the New Module(s) Off the Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Aligning the New Module(s) with the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Verifying the System is Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Testing the Digital Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Verifying Level Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Additional Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Lowering All Other Leveling Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Removing the Left Parking Module Cover Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Installing the Remaining Gen 2 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Installing the Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Installing the Bottom Rack Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Installing the Middle Rack Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Installing, Replacing, and Restraining Magazines, and Positioning Calibration Targets. . . . . . . . . . . 463
Calibration Target Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Magazine Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Removing Calibration Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Replacing Calibration Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Installing Gen 2 Boards and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide ix

Connecting Modules Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Reinstalling Service Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Installing the Gen 2 Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Reinstalling the Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Installing the Right Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Verifying Both Robots are Ready for IVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Running IVT and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Reconfiguring Partitions and Importing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Closing the Service and Access Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Dispositioning the Removed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
9 Upgrading a Gen2 Single-Robot Library to a Gen2

Dual-Robot Library 527
Step 1: Installing the Left Parking Module and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right-most Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Positioning the New Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Bolting Modules Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Inserting the Attachment Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Tightening the Attachment Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Step 2: Removing the Single Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Step 3: Removing the Single-Robot Aisle Cable Assembly from the CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Removing the Aisle Cable Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Step 4: Removing and Replacing the 4-pack Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Removing the 4-Pack Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Installing 7-Pack Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Step 5: Installing the Dual-Robot Aisle Cable Assembly in the LPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Step 6: Installing Additional Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Slots vs. Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
x Contents
Step 7: Changing out the Left Home Sensor/Parking Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Step 8: Converting an EM to be the Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Installing the Side Cover on the New Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Installing the Gen 2 Robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Verifying Both Robots are Ready for IVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
10 Applying Power 593

Supported Power Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Powering on the Library - AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Powering on the Library - DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
11 Installing Drives and Blades 601

Referencing Tape Drive Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
LTO Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Numbering Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Drive Numbering Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
FC I/O Blade Numbering Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB) Numbering Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
I/O Management Unit Bay Numbering Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Installing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Installing Blades in the I/O Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
12 Cabling 615
Attaching Drives to FC I/O Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Connecting FC Drives to FC I/O Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Attaching FC LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives to Ethernet Expansion Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Connecting LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives to Ethernet Expansion Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Attaching Hosts to FC Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Attaching FC and SCSI Drives Directly to Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Connecting FC Drives to Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Connecting SCSI Drives to Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
13 Installing Cartridges 633

Loading Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Storage Addressing System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Installing Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Barcode Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Importing Cartridges Using the I/E Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Manually Bulk Loading Cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
14 Setting up Your Library for Access 647

Launching the Remote Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Configuring Library Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xi

Changing Internal IP Network Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Changing the Library Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Accessing the Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Configuring Access for Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Configuring Access for Remote LMC Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Configuring Access for SNMP and SMI-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
15 Configuring the Library 655

Addressing Configuration Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Logging on to the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Performing Basic Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Deleting the Default Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Running the Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Performing Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Enabling Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Setting Up the Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Setting up E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Setting up Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Enabling Logical Serial Number Addressing for Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Using LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
LDAP Server Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
User and Group Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
OpenLDAP 2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Configuring LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Working with Library Control Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Control Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Determining a Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Creating Partitions Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Creating Partitions Manually – Simple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Creating Partitions Manually - Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Monitoring Partition Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Configuring FC I/O Blade Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Configuring FC Host Port Failover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Enabling a Disabled Target Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Configuring Datapath Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Configuring Switch Zoning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Configuring Host Access - FC I/O Blade Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
FC Host LUN Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Configuring FC Host LUN Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Channel Zoning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Configuring FC Channel Zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
LUN Mapping Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Using Storage Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Licensing a Storage Networking Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Configuring Control Path and Control Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Configuring Data Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Requirements for Host Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Configuring Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Create Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
xii Contents
Modify Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Delete Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Host Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Creating Host Access Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Changing an Access Group Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Deleting a Host Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Adding a Host to an Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Removing a Host from an Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Adding and Removing Drives and Partitions to/from Host Access Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Viewing All Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Putting Physical Library and Partitions Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Putting a Partition Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Putting the Physical Library Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Online and Offline Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Configuring Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Assigning Cleaning Magazines and Importing Cleaning Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Exporting Cleaning Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Unassigning a Cleaning Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Configuring Screen Saver Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Saving the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Logging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
16 Adding Optional Hardware 751

Shutting Down the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Adding Drives to an Existing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Drive Numbering Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Adding a Power Supply Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Adding a Redundant Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Adding an I/O Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Adding Blades to the I/O Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Installing the I/O Management Unit Cooling Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Installing a Control Management Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Installing an FC I/O Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Installing an Ethernet Expansion Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Adding a 24-Slot I/E Station to an Expansion Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Adding a 72-slot I/E Station to an Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Adding Aisle Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Installing a Webcam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Entering the Webcam’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
17 Installation Testing and Verification 833

Verifying the Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Installation Verification Test Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Installation Verification Test Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Library Alignment Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Get/Put Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Accessor Assembly Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Picker Assembly Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Drive Sled Assembly Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
I/E Assembly Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Scan Barcode Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xiii

Scanner Fiducial Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Library Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Drive Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Blade Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Test Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Verification Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Joint Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Vertical Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Horizontal Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Calibration Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Boundary/Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Get/Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Scan Fiducials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Picker Pivot/Reach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Verification Test Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Running the Installation Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Completing the Installation Verification Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
A Testing and Calibrating the Digital Level 865

Testing the Digital Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Calibrating the Digital Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
B LBX Board and Terminator 873

LBX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
LBX Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
C Interpreting LED Codes 879

Interpreting Robot Status LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Interpreting Blade Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Actions Based on LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Interpreting Drive Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Interpreting Fibre Port Link LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Drive Sled Fibre Channel Link LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
FC I/O Blade Fibre Port Link LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Interpreting MCB Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
MCB Ethernet Port LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
LBX Terminator Version 01 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
LBX Terminator Version 03 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Interpreting Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
D Special Instructions For 13+ Modules 897

Alignment Instructions For 13+ Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
xiv Contents
Determining Where to Measure and Shim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Measuring the Library Width and Making Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Installing The X-Axis Rail Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
E Glossary 903
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xv

xvi Contents
Tables
Table 1 Required Tools for Installing a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 2 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 3 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Table 4 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Table 5 Electrical Specifications for Control and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Table 6 LTO Drive and Cartridge Compatibility (N/C = Not Compatible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Table 7 Cable Connection Requirements for FC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Table 8 Cable Connection Recommendations for Ethernet Expansion Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Table 9 Control Path Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Table 10 Return Media Identifier Behavior Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Table 11 FC I/O Blade Default Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Table 12 Library Functions Requiring Online or Offline State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Table 13 Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Table 14 Automatic E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Table 15 Customer License Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Table 16 Library Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Table 17 FC I/O Blade Default Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Table 18 Robot Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Table 19 Explanations of Blade Status LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Table 20 Explanations of Blade Status LED States Under Normal Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Table 21 Explanations of Drive Sled Status LED States (UDS-2 and UDS-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Table 22 Explanations of Drive Sled Status LED States Under Normal Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Table 23 Explanations of Ethernet Port LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Table 24 Explanations of Fibre Drive Sled Link LED States (UDS-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xvii

Table 25 Explanations of Fibre Drive Sled Link LED States (UDS-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Table 26 Explanations of I/O Blade Link LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Table 27 Explanations of Ethernet Expansion Blade LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Table 28 Explanations of EEB Ethernet Port LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Table 29 Explanations of MCB Ethernet Port LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Table 30 Explanations of LBX Terminator LED States (Version 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Table 31 Explanations of LBX Terminator LED States (Version 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Table 32 Explanations of AC Power Supply LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Table 33 Explanations of DC Power Supply LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
xviii Tables
Figures
Figure 1 Front View of an 8-Module Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 2 Front View of a Two-Module Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 3 Control Module, Front View Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 4 Control Module, Rear View Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 5 Expansion Module, Back View Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 6 Robot Handle and Lift Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 7 Closing/Opening the Collector Door (view shows robot lying on side with handle facing UP) 27
Figure 8 Setting the Power Rail collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 9 X-Preload Tensioner – Inserting Pin Into Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 10 Lifting the Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 11 Engaging the Kickstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 12 Robot Loader Bracket Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 13 Robot Rollers Lined Up With Cutouts in Gear Racks (Not Engaged Yet) . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 14 Position of Robot Wheels on Middle and Bottom Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 15 Gear Pre-load Mechanism - Load Position, Pin Disengaged (Not in Hole) . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 16 Verifying Robot is Vertical by Checking Scribe Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 17 Power Rail Load Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 18 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 19 Robot Shipping Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 20 Robot Locking Lever in Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 21 Types of X-axis Gear Racks to Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 22 Removing Bottom and Middle X-Axis Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 23 Removing Top X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 24 Power Rail Position in Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xix

Figure 25 Power Rail, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 26 Catch Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 27 Types of X-axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 28 Installing Bottom and Middle Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 29 Installing Top X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 30 Robot Handle and Lift Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 31 Closing/Opening the Collector Door (view shows robot lying on side with handle facing UP)
164
Figure 32 Setting the Power Rail collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 33 X-Preload Tensioner – Inserting Pin Into Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 34 Lifting the Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 35 Engaging the Kickstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 36 Robot Loader Bracket Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 37 Robot Rollers Lined Up With Cutouts in Gear Racks (Not Engaged Yet) . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 38 Position of Robot Wheels on Middle and Bottom Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 39 Gear Pre-load Mechanism - Load Position, Pin Disengaged (Not in Hole) . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 40 Verifying Robot is Vertical by Checking Scribe Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 41 Power Rail Load Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 42 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 43 Robot Shipping Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 44 Robot Locking Lever in Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 45 Replacing the Control Module and Expansion Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 46 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 47 Types of X-axis Gear Racks to Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 48 Removing Bottom and Middle X-Axis Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 49 Robot Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Adapter Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 50 Removing Top X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 51 Removing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 52 Installing the Top Rack Supports in Right Parking Module (Loader Bracket Attached) 209
Figure 53 Removing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
xx Figures
Figure 58 Installing Bottom and Middle Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 59 Installing Top X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 60 Robot Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Adapter Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 61 Removing Cover Plates from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 62 Removing a Cover Plate from the Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 63 Door Switch Loop Cable - Picture for reference only. The cable will NOT be loose; it will be par-
tially pre-installed in the left parking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 64 Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable in the Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 65 Securing the Door Switch Loop Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 66 Cable Aisle Assembly Installed in Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 67 Aisle Cable Assembly Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 68 Display Cable Connector on LMM Backplane - J16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 69 Robot Handle and Lift Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
254
Figure 71 Setting the Power Rail collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 72 X-Preload Tensioner – Inserting Pin Into Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 73 Robot Shipping Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 74 Lifting the Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 75 Engaging the Kickstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 76 Robot Loader Bracket Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 77 Robot Rollers Lined Up With Cutouts in Gear Racks (Not Engaged Yet) . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 78 Position of Robot Wheels on Middle and Bottom Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 79 Gear Pre-load Mechanism - Load Position, Pin Disengaged (Not in Hole) . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 80 Verifying Robot is Vertical by Checking Scribe Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 81 Power Rail Load Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 82 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Left Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 83 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Right Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 84 Robot Locking Lever in Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 85 Replacing the Control Module and Left Parking Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xxi

Figure 86 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 87 Do not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 88 Removing Magazines from Right-Most Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 89 Removing Cover Plates from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 90 Removing a Cover Plate from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 93 Bottom Rack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 94 Bottom Rack Support Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 96 Loader Bracket Attached to Top Rack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 97 Installing the Top Rack Supports in the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 98 Installing the Top Rack Supports in the Control Module (Loader Bracket Attached) . . 332
Figure 100 Installing Bottom and Middle X-Axis Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 101 Installing Top X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 102 Magazine Restraint Clips and Glued Calibration Targets in Section 10 on Rear Wall 341
Figure 103 Magazines with Glued-on Calibration Targets and restraint Clips in Section 5 on Rear Wall
342
Figure 104 Calibration Targets in Control Module Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 105 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall) . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 106 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 2 (Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 107 Calibration Targets in Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 108 Calibration Targets in Standard Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Figure 109 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall) . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 110 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 2 (Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 111 Magazine Restraint Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 112 Installing the Magazine Restraint Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 113 Removing the Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 114 Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 115 Gen 2 Connectors on LMM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 116 Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
xxii Figures
Figure 117 Disconnecting the Gen 1 Power Cable from the Power Supply Connector and the
LMM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 118 Power Cable Connectors on LMM Backplane and Power Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 119 Power Cable Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 120 Securing the Power Rail Power Cable Mounting Plate to the Control Module . . . . . . 361
Figure 121 Aisle Cable Assembly Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 122 Display Cable Connector on LMM Backplane - J16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 123 Robot Handle and Lift Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
369
Figure 125 Setting the Power Rail collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 126 X-Preload Tensioner – Inserting Pin Into Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 127 Lifting the Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 128 Engaging the Kickstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 129 Robot Loader Bracket Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 130 Robot Rollers Lined Up With Cutouts in Gear Racks (Not Engaged Yet) . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 131 Position of Robot Wheels on Middle and Bottom Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 132 Gear Pre-load Mechanism - Load Position, Pin Disengaged (Not in Hole) . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 133 Verifying Robot is Vertical by Checking Scribe Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 134 Robot Shipping Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 135 Robot Locking Lever in Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 136 Replacing the Control Module and Expansion Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 137 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 138 Removing Cartridges and Partition Elements from Right-Most Expansion Module . . 403
Figure 139 Removing Magazines from Right-Most Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Figure 140 Removing Cover Plates from the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 141 Removing a Cover Plate from the Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Figure 142 Power Rail, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Figure 143 Power Rail, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Figure 144 Power Rail Position in Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Figure 145 Bottom Rack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Figure 146 Bottom Rack Support Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xxiii

Figure 147 Catch Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Figure 148 Right Loader Bracket and Locator Attached to Top Rack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Figure 149 Installing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Figure 151 Types of X-axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Figure 154 Robot Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Adapter Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Figure 155 Magazine Restraint Clips and Glued Calibration Targets in Section 10 on Rear Wall 466
467
Figure 157 Calibration Targets in Control Module Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Figure 158 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Figure 159 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 2 (Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Figure 160 Calibration Targets in Left Parking Module (all calibration tabs are glued on and pre-installed)
470
Figure 161 Calibration Targets in Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Figure 162 Calibration Targets in Standard Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Figure 163 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Figure 164 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 2 (Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Figure 165 Magazine Restraint Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Figure 166 Installing the Magazine Restraint Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Figure 167 Removing the Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Figure 168 Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Figure 169 Gen 2 Connectors on LMM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Figure 170 Door Switch Loop Cable - Picture for reference only. The cable will NOT be loose -- it will be
partially pre-installed in the left parking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Figure 171 Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable in the Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Figure 172 Installed View - LBX Board Showing LPM Door Switch Loop Cable Connection . . . . 484
Figure 173 Flat View - LBX Board Showing LPM Door Switch Loop Cable Connection . . . . . . . . 484
Figure 174 Securing the Door Switch Loop Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Figure 175 Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
xxiv Figures
LMM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Figure 177 Power Cable Connectors on LMM Backplane and Power Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Figure 178 Power Cable Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Figure 179 Cable Aisle Assembly Installed in Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Figure 181 Display Cable Connector on LMM Backplane - J16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
498
Figure 187 Lifting the Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Figure 194 Power Rail Load Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Figure 195 Right Robot Collector Sagging Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 196 Bracket Position - Right Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 197 Fixing the Collector Sagging Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Figure 198 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Left Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 199 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Right Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 201 Replacing the Control Module and Left Parking Module Cover Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Figure 202 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Left Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Figure 203 Do not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Right Parking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Figure 204 Types of X-axis Gear Racks to Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Figure 205 Removing Bottom and Middle X-Axis Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xxv

Figure 206 Removing Top X-Axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Figure 207 Cable Aisle Assembly Installed in Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Figure 213 Power Rail, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Figure 215 Catch Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Figure 216 Right Loader Bracket and Locator Attached to Top Rack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Figure 217 Installing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Figure 219 Types of X-axis Gear Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Figure 222 Robot Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Adapter Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
577
Figure 234 Power Rail Load Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Figure 235 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Left Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Figure 236 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Right Side Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
xxvi Figures
Figure 238 Library Management Console Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Figure 239 Library Management Console Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Figure 240 Drive Numbering Sequence in the Control Module and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . 604
Figure 241 Fibre Channel I/O Blade Connection Numbering Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Figure 242 Ethernet Expansion Blade Connection Numbering Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Figure 243 I/O Management Unit Bay Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Figure 244 LTO drive examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Figure 245 Example of Drives Connected to FC I/O Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Figure 246 Example of LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives Connected to Ethernet Expansion Blades . . . . . 623
Figure 247 Example of Direct Attached Library With SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Figure 248 Example of Direct Attached Library with FC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Figure 249 Aisle, Module, and Rack Numbering Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Figure 250 Section, Column, and Row Numbering Locations for Rack 1 Using LTO Cartridges . 635
Figure 251 Section, Column, and Row Numbering Location for Rack 2 Using LTO Cartridges . . 636
Figure 252 Example Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Figure 253 Location Coordinates Used in the Load Drives Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Figure 254 Applying Barcode Labels to LTO Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Figure 255 Cartridge Insertion Into Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Figure 256 Drive Sled Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Figure 257 I/O Management Unit Bay Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Figure 258 Verification Tests Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Figure 259 Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Figure 260 Joint Alignments Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Figure 261 Vertical Alignments Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Figure 262 Horizontal Alignments Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Figure 263 Calibration Offsets Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Figure 264 Boundary/Accessibility Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Figure 265 Get/Put Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Figure 266 Scan Fiducials Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Figure 267 Picker Pivot/Reach Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xxvii

Figure 268 Example Test Log Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Figure 269 Comparison of LBX Board Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
Figure 270 LBX Connections (LBX2 Gen 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Figure 271 LBX Connections (LBX2 Gen 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Figure 272 Comparison of LBX Terminator Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Figure 273 LBX Board and Terminator Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Figure 274 Robot Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Figure 275 Locations and Colors of Blade Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Figure 276 Rear View of Fibre Channel Drive Sled (UDS-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Figure 277 Rear View of Fibre Channel Drive Sled (UDS-3 LTO-4 and LTO-5 Drives)) . . . . . . . . 885
Figure 278 Locations and Colors of I/O Blade Fibre Port Link LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Figure 279 Location and Colors of Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Figure 280 Locations and Colors of MCB Ethernet Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Figure 281 Locations and Colors of MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Figure 282 Locations of LBX Terminator LEDs (Version 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Figure 283 Locations of LBX Terminator LEDs (Version 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Figure 284 Locations and Colors of AC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
xxviii Figures
About This Guide and Your Product
This guide contains information and instructions necessary for the installation and configuration of the
Scalar® i6000.
Be sure to read all operating instructions in this manual and in the System, Safety, and
Note
Regulatory Information Guide before operating this product.
This guide is intended to be used by Quantum professional services and service personnel who will service
the library.
Product Safety Statements

This product is designed for data storage and retrieval using magnetic tape. Any other application is not
considered the intended use. Quantum will not be held liable for damage arising from unauthorized use of
the product. The user assumes all risk in this aspect.
This unit is engineered and manufactured to meet all safety and regulatory requirements. Be aware that
improper use may result in bodily injury, damage to the equipment, or interference with other equipment.
Do not obstruct the top or bottom airflow by placing objects above or

CAUTION below the library. Do not cover ventilation areas on the library.
Do not expose the library to moisture or store the library in

temperatures higher than 60°C (140°F) or extremely low
temperatures. For information about operating temperatures and
humidity, see the Scalar i6000 Planning Guide.
CREATING A HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT EARTH CONNECTION IS

WARNING ESSENTIAL BEFORE YOU CONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY.
BEFORE POWERING ON OR USING THIS EQUIPMENT, READ THE

WARNING SYSTEM, SAFETY, AND REGULATORY INFORMATION GUIDE. KEEP
THE GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Scalar i6000 Installation Guide 1

Mechanical Locks
The access and service doors can only be opened with a key. The key should be kept by an authorized
person at your company. Access to the interior of the library is both a data integrity and a safety issue.
Door Interlock Switches

Door interlock switches detect when the access door has been opened and automatically remove power
from the picker.
DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCHES ARE PROVIDED FOR YOUR SAFETY.

WARNING YOU SHOULD NOT INTERFERE WITH THEIR NORMAL OPERATION.
Power Button on the Library’s Indicator Panel

Switching off the Power button on the indicator panel, located on the front of the library, removes power
from the electronics, which causes the picker to stop immediately. This button also removes power from the
drives.
THIS POWER BUTTON FUNCTIONS AS A POWER INTERRUPT ONLY.

WARNING TO COMPLETELY REMOVE ALL POWER BEFORE SERVICING OR IN
AN EMERGENCY, TURN OFF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ON THE
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT, AND THEN DISCONNECT THE POWER
CORD FROM THE ELECTRICAL SOURCE.
Physically Accessing the Library

The library is completely enclosed in a housing that serves as a guard, separating the danger area of the
library from the normal working area. You can access the internal components of the library through the
access and service doors only. When the library is powered on, the interlock on the access door is active.
MOVEMENTS OF MECHANICAL PARTS IN THE LIBRARY CAN

WARNING CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. ACCESS TO INTERNAL
LIBRARY COMPONENTS IS RESTRICTED TO AUTHORIZED
PERSONNEL. DO NOT ENTER THE LIBRARY UNLESS YOU ARE
AUTHORIZED BY YOUR COMPANY AND TRAINED ON HOW TO
ENTER THE LIBRARY SAFELY.
WHEN DRIVE SLED POSITIONS ARE EMPTY, DRIVE COVER PLATES

WARNING MUST BE INSTALLED AND IN PLACE AT ALL TIMES TO PREVENT
ACCESS INTO THE EMPTY DRIVE SLED POSITIONS.
2 About This Guide and Your Product

Authorized persons can access the library only when one or more of the following conditions are true:
• The library has been taken offline and the Robotics Enabled button on the library’s indicator panel
has been turned off.
• The access door has been opened.
• The Power button on the Library’s indicator panel has been turned off.
• The AC line cord has been disconnected from the main power source.
THE AC POWER CORD MUST BE INSTALLED NEAR THE LIBRARY

WARNING AND MUST BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE AT ALL TIMES.
Performing Mechanical Maintenance

Observe the following safety guidelines while performing maintenance on the library.
General Guidelines
Before you begin performing maintenance on the library, perform the following tasks:
• Locate escape routes and emergency exits, and clear them of obstacles.
• Identify a safe location for library components and other parts that you will remove from the library.
Unauthorized persons should not have access to this location.
• Have a plan to keep components and equipment clean during work. Maintaining a clean working
environment promotes safety.
Clothing must be in compliance with the following safety guidelines:
• Clothing must not have metal fasteners.

• Clothing must be close-fitting so that it cannot be caught in moving machine parts.
• Long sleeves must be buttoned up or rolled up.
• Scarves must be removed or the ends must be tucked into other clothing.
• Long hair must be fully covered.
• Remove watches, rings, jewelry, badges, and other items that could get caught in or damage
equipment.
Wear safety glasses when you do any of the following tasks:
• Use a safety drill.

• Work on springs, retaining rings, and so forth.
• Solder or work on cables.
• Clean with chemical agents.
• Perform any other work that could endanger the eyes.
Wear safety shoes when handling heavy components.
Before you begin work and after you finish, be careful to remove or reinstall all safety provisions as
appropriate (covers, hazard alert messages, warning signs, grounding wires, and so forth).

Working on Live Components
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL PARTS CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL

WARNING SHOCK, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE SEVERE OR FATAL BURNS AND
INTERNAL INJURY. A PERSON WHO COMES INTO CONTACT WITH A
LIVE PART OFTEN CANNOT BREAK LOOSE FROM THE PART. A
SECOND PERSON MUST STAND NEAR THE MAIN CIRCUIT
BREAKER, READY TO IMMEDIATELY SWITCH IT OFF IF A
HAZARDOUS SITUATION OCCURS.
NEVER ASSUME THAT A CIRCUIT IS WITHOUT POWER. ALWAYS

CHECK THE CIRCUIT. WHEN WORKING ON AC POWER
COMPONENTS, ANOTHER PERSON MUST SUPERVISE YOUR WORK.
THIS SYSTEM HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CABLE. TO

REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT ALL
POWER SUPPLY CABLES WHEN PERFORMING SERVICE
PROCEDURES THAT REQUIRE POWER TO BE TURNED OFF.
When performing work on live parts, observe the following guidelines:
• Be thoroughly familiar with accident prevention rules.

• Use only suitable tools and measuring devices in good working condition.
• Verify that measuring devices are adjusted correctly and operating within specified measuring
ranges.
• Work with only one hand, which can prevent internal injuries if electrical shock occurs.
• Avoid contact with conducting floors (especially metal) or equipment parts, covering the working
area with suitable protective rubber mats if necessary.
Mercury Statement
Projectors, LCD displays, and some multifunction printers may use lamp(s) that
contain a small amount of mercury for energy-efficient lighting purposes. Mercury
lamps in these products are labeled accordingly. Please manage the lamp
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, contact the
Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org. For lamp-specific disposal
information check www.lamprecycle.org.

Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product should
not be disposed of with your other waste. Instead, it should be handed over to a
designated collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment.
The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of
disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a
manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information
about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please visit our
Web site at: http://qcare.quantum.com or contact your local government authority,
your household waste disposal service or the business from which you purchased
the product.

Product Model Number
The Scalar i6000 Regulatory Model Numbers are as follows:
SCi2000 Control Model
SCi2000 Expansion Model.
Explanation of Symbols and Notes

The following symbols appear throughout this document to highlight important information.
INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT

WARNING AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR BODILY INJURY.
Indicates a situation that may cause possible damage to equipment, loss of

CAUTION data, or interference with other equipment.
Indicates important information that helps you make better use of your system.
Note
Other Documents you Might Need

The following documents are also available for this product. These documents can be found on the product
CD or at www.quantum.com/support.
• Scalar i6000 Planning Guide (6-66882-xx)

• Scalar i6000 Release Notes i8 (6-66883-xx)
• Scalar i6000 User’s Guide (6-66879-xx)
• Scalar i6000 Unpacking Instructions (6-66934-xx)
• Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide (6-66880-xx)
• System, Safety, and Regulatory Information Guide (6-00618-xx)
Release Notes are also available for this product. The Release Notes describe changes
Note
to your system or firmware since the last release, provide compatibility information, and
discuss any known issues and workarounds. The Release Notes can be found in the
product box or at www.quantum.com/support

Getting More Information or Help
More information about this product is available on the Service and Support Web site at
www.quantum.com/support. The Service and Support Web site contains a collection of information,
including answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs). You can also access software, firmware, and
drivers through this site.
For further assistance, or if training is desired, contact Quantum:
Global Call Handling: 1-800-284-5101
For additional contact information: www.quantum.com/support
To open a Service Request: www.quantum.com/osr

For the most updated information on Quantum Global Services, please visit: www.quantum.com/support

Getting Started
This chapter describes how to get started with setting up the library. The information includes:
• Unpacking and Inspecting on page 9

• Checking the Accessories on page 10
• Initial Setup Procedure Road Map on page 11
• Required Tools on page 13
• Illustrations of Modules on page 14
Unpacking and Inspecting

Use the instructions supplied with the library to unpack. All boxes packed around the library on the pallet
contain parts needed to install the library. When you remove the packing material from the parts in the base
of the module, put the parts in a safe area so they will not get damaged or lost.
Make sure you have read the Scalar i6000 Planning Guide before you start the installation procedure.
Two sets of keys are shipped with each module. Two keys (FRU ID 401) open the front (access) door. Two
keys (FRU ID 402) open the rear (service) door. All modules are keyed the same, so there is no chance that
a customer who has two or more modules could end up with different keys. All keys are to be left with the
customer and should be stored in a safe location.
Access to the interior of the library is both a data integrity and a safety issue.
Note

Checking the Accessories
The library can be ordered in different configurations. Based on your configuration, check to make certain
that the following items are included with the library and that none of them are damaged.
Libraries with native SCSI drives:
• Ordered number of SCSI LVD drives

• One terminator
• One library power cord (two power cords if you ordered redundant power supplies)
Libraries with native Fiber Channel (FC) drives:
• Ordered number of native FC drives

• One library power cord
Libraries with I/O management unit with FC drives:
• Ordered number of FC drives

• FC I/O blades (1 per 4 drives)
• Optional 2m optical cable (one per drive, connects drive to FC I/O blade)
• 30m multi-mode optical cables LC-LC (two per FC I/O blade, connects FC I/O blade to SAN)
• One library power cord
Libraries with Ethernet Expansion blades with LTO-5or LTO-6 drives:
• Ordered number of LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives

• Ethernet Expansion blade (1 per 6 drives)
• One shielded Ethernet cable per drive
Library field service kit (delivered with each control module):
• Ethernet crossover cable (RJ45 to RJ45)

• Service kit
• Velcro cable clamps (3)
• Velcro hook and loop straps (2)
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap
Library documentation (delivered with each control module):
• CD-ROM that contains online versions of documentation

• Scalar i6000 Installation Guide (this manual)
• Scalar i6000 Unpacking Instructions
10 Getting Started
Initial Setup Procedure Road Map
This section provides a road map for initial installation of a library. A library includes one control module and
may include up to eleven expansion modules. The proper sequence for setting up a library is illustrated in
the following flowchart. Pointers to the instructions are provided to the right of the flowchart.
start
Getting Started on page 9, describes how to prepare and

prepare and inspect the library. You will use the instructions supplied
inspect library with the modules to perform the unpacking procedures.
type
of
installation?
Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module (Gen 1 and

install Gen 2) on page 19, provides instructions for installing
stand-alone the control module. Each configuration must contain
control module
Preparing to Install a New Multi-Module Library on

install new page 44 and Adding an Expansion Module to an
multi-module Existing System Unit or Library on page 52 contain
library the instructions for installing a control module and up
to a total of eleven expansion modules.
Adding an Expansion Module to an Existing System

Unit or Library on page 52 contains the instructions for
add expansion
module adding expansion modules to an existing library, up to
a total of eleven expansion modules.
install tape Installing Drives and Blades on page 601 provides

drives and instructions for installing and connecting the tape
blades drives in the drive modules.
Applying Power on page 593, contains instructions for

applying power to your library.
turn on power

A
Verifying the Hardware Installation on page 833 has

verify the the procedure you should use to verify the hardware
hardware configuration. Installation Verification Test Overview
configuration
on page 835 must also be performed.
Configuring the Library on page 655 tells you how to

set up the library.
configure library
Installing Cartridges on page 633 gives the

install instructions for installing the cartridges in the two
cartridges
supported methods.
Completing the Installation Verification Checklist on

complete the page 860, provides a checklist that helps you
installation
checklist determine if all necessary steps have been completed
during the installation of the library.
add
no optional Adding Optional Hardware on page 751 provides
hardware? instructions for the following optional hardware:
yes
install optional
hardware
done
12 Getting Started
Required Tools
Table 1 provides a list of the tools needed to install a library.
Table 1 Required Tools for Installing a Library
Tool Type Tool Sizes
Open end wrenches • 24 mm

• 16 mm
• 13 mm
• 8 mm
• 7 mm
Hex wrenches • 6 mm
• 4 mm
• 3 mm
• 2.5 mm
• 2 mm
Screw drivers • #1 Phillips

• #2 Phillips
• Flat head
Pliers and wire cutters • Needle nose pliers

• Standard pliers
• Wire cutters
Nut drivers • 8 mm
• 7 mm
Miscellaneous tools • Measuring tape

• Laptop computer
• Digital volt meter
• Digital level
• X-axis rail alignment tool (part number 3-00147-01)
• ESD wrist strap
• Metric ruler
• Small zip ties (quantity 100)
• Flashlight

Illustrations of Modules
An illustration of an 8-module configuration along with figures of the front and back of both the control
module and expansion modules are shown on the following pages.
Figure 1 Front View of an 8-Module Library
expansion modules
control module
14 Getting Started
Figure 2 Front View of a Two-Module Library
top cable entry fire suppressant access
service door
indicator panel
touch screen
access door
I/E station
expansion module
control module

Figure 3 Control Module, Front View Component Location
fire suppressant access
picker
I/E station
drive sled
access door
magazine
leveling foot
16 Getting Started
Figure 4 Control Module, Rear View Component Location
top cable entry
service door
I/O management
unit
drive clusters
library
management
module power distribution units
bottom cable entry
power supplies

Figure 5 shows the back of an expansion module. Only expansion modules that contain drives will be
delivered with power supplies, which enables them to support the tape drives. Expansion modules in
positions 9 -12 are LTO storage-only modules.
Figure 5 Expansion Module, Back View Component Location
the I/O management unit

is installed and blades are
installed only when
required to support drives
the library management

module is not installed
in expansion modules
drives are installed

in these clusters
power chassis are
installed only if there
are drives in the
expansion modules
18 Getting Started
Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module
(Gen 1 and Gen 2)
This chapter describes how to install a stand-alone control module. The procedures in this chapter apply to
both Gen 1 and Gen 2 configurations. Procedural differences for the two gens are noted.
To install a stand-alone control module, complete the following procedures:
• Positioning the Stand-Alone Control Module on page 20

• Lowering the Leveling Legs on page 20
• Raising the Control Module Off the Casters on page 21
• Verifying the System is Level on page 21
• Setting the Leg Lock Nuts on page 25
Required tools:
• 24 mm open end wrench

• 6 mm hex wrench
• Digital level

Positioning the Stand-Alone Control Module
The first steps in setting up a stand-alone control module involve locating and positioning the control
module. For more information on location specifications, see the Scalar i6000 Planning Guide.
1 Verify the placement of the control module.
2 Verify the following:
• There is an AC outlet within 10 feet (3.05 m) of the control module’s location.

• There is adequate clearance for the access and service doors.
• The selected location is level using the instructions in Verifying Level Condition on page 23.
• All raised floor tiles have been cut out accordingly to accommodate the power, SCSI, Fibre, and
Ethernet cables to the control module.
3 Position the control module in its intended location.
4 Verify that the control module is positioned correctly.
5 Ensure that the leveling legs are not resting on tiles that will need to be raised to accommodate cables
after the control module has been installed.
Lowering the Leveling Legs

Required tools: 24 mm open end wrench, 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench.
1 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to loosen the four locking nuts on the four corner legs.
If you do not loosen the locking nuts, you may strip the threads on the
CAUTION leveling legs during movement.
2 Lower the four corner legs by hand until they touch the floor.
You may have to use the 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench to turn the legs if the threads
do not turn freely.
To ensure even weight distribution on the legs, it is very important that all
Note
legs be brought into contact with the floor without lifting the module.
You can verify whether a leg is in contact with the floor by attempting to
slide a piece of paper underneath it.
20 Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module (Gen 1 and Gen 2)

Raising the Control Module Off the Casters
Required tools: 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench
1 Open the access and service doors of the control module.
2 Using the 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench, raise the control module at each of the four
corner legs seven (7) half turns after initial contact with the floor.
During this process one or two leveling legs may raise off of the floor. This is not a concern. Even if a
leg is lifted off the floor, only give that leveling leg seven (7) half turns. This should raise the whole
control module off of the casters seven (7) half turns.
Making a mark on the top of the leg will help you keep track of the half
Note
turns.
make mark here to keep

track of seven half turns
leveling leg
leveling foot
3 Check each corner leg to ensure that there is pressure on the foot and you cannot turn it by hand.
• If you have correctly given each corner leg seven (7) half turns you should not be able to turn the
feet by hand.
• If you can turn one of the feet by hand, lower the control module back onto the casters and restart
this procedure at Lowering the Leveling Legs on page 20. The goal is to have the control module
weight evenly distributed across all four leveling legs when it is properly raised. The module may or
may not be level at this time.
Verifying the System is Level

Verifying the system is level consists of the following steps:
1 Testing the Digital Level on page 22
2 Verifying Level Condition on page 23
3 Additional Leveling on page 24
4 Lowering All Other Leveling Legs and Checking Library Level on page 25

Testing the Digital Level
Required tools: digital level
Perform this test before each use of the digital level and any time the digital level has been dropped or is
being used in an environment that varies ±9°F from the environment in which it was last calibrated. If the
digital level fails the accuracy test, you must re-calibrate the level before use.
1 Turn on the level by pushing the ON/OFF button. Position the level with the display facing you and the
text on the face of the level right-side up. Ensure that the level is on a clean, flat, and horizontal surface.
This surface does not have to be exactly level. Wait 10 seconds for the level to completely settle and
take note of the angle on the display.
2 Rotate the level end-for-end so the display is facing away from you. The screw on the back of the level
should be on the left side. Be sure to set the level in the exact spot as in Step 1. Wait 10 seconds for
the level to completely settle and take note of the angle on the display.
3 Roll the level toward you so that the display is facing you, but the lettering on the face of the unit is
upside down. Be sure to set the level in the exact spot as in Step 1. Wait 10 seconds for the level to
completely settle and take note of the angle on the display.

should be on the right side. Be sure to set the level in the exact spot as in Step 1. Wait 10 seconds for
5 Compare the level display readings that you captured from Steps 1 through 4. If any of the four readings
vary from one another more than 0.1 degree, you must re-calibrate the level. For more information, see
Calibrating the Digital Level on page 867. If the variance between the readings are within the 0.1 degree
limit, the level is within compliance and is ready to be used.
Verifying Level Condition

1 In the control module only, verify the system unit is level front to back and left to right by placing the
digital level at the following locations:
a. Inside the access door
b. On the left side inside the access door
A reading on the digital level that is 0.00 +/- 0.30 is to be considered level.
Make sure the digital level is not resting on any frame welds or debris that
Note
would cause an inaccurate reading. To find the small circular frame welds,
run your finger tips over the spot where you are going to place the level
placements of level
If the module does not meet the 0.00 +/- 0.30 leveling requirement, go to Additional Leveling on page
24.
If the module is sufficiently level, go to Lowering All Other Leveling Legs and Checking Library Level on
page 25.

Additional Leveling
Customer floors may be such that further leveling is required. The goal in leveling the system unit is to adjust
the leveling legs to achieve a digital level reading that is 0.00 +/- 0.30.
1 Place the digital level inside the control module access door (positions 1). Use the following rules when
leveling from left to right:
• Rule 1: Always make your leveling adjustments to raise the system unit (turn the legs clockwise
looking from the top).
• Rule 2: Since the frames are very stiff, adjust the appropriate left or right leg pair the same amount
when leveling left to right.
• Rule 3: Use small adjustment increments; no more than one half (½) turn at a time.
• Rule 4: If the leveling adjustment has raised any of the other leveling legs off the floor, take out the
adjustment and work on the opposite end of the system unit (front to back).
• Rule 5: Wait at least 10 seconds for the digital level to settle between adjustments.
Note
run your finger tips over the spot where you are going to place the level.
service door
digital level position #2

front to back
digital level position #1 access door

left to right
2 Place the level on the left side inside the control module access door (position 2). Use the following rules
when leveling from front to back:
• Rule 2: Since the frames are very stiff, adjust the appropriate front or rear leg pair the same amount
when leveling front to back.
• Rule 4: If the leveling adjustment has raised any of the other leveling legs, take out the adjustment
and work on the other side.

Lowering All Other Leveling Legs and Checking Library Level
1 Lower all remaining frame leveling legs until the legs touch the floor.
2 To support the weight of the system, give each non-leveling leg 1/4 turn.
3 Check all leveling legs to verify that all the legs are on the floor.
4 Use the digital level to double-check the levelness of the library.
Setting the Leg Lock Nuts

Required tools: 24 mm open end wrench
1 Verify that all four leveling legs are carrying load and that the control module does not rock.
2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to raise the four leveling leg lock nuts to the top and tighten them
against the welded nut.
Ensure that you do not take the leveling legs out of adjustment during this
Note
process.

Installing the Robot (Gen 2 Only)
Follow the steps in this section to ensure the robot is correctly installed and positioned before you begin
operation.
1 Remove the robot from its box using the yellow handle and “lift area” (indicated in Figure 6 ). Place the
robot horizontally on a clean flat surface such as a table or the floor. The yellow handle must face UP.
Only use the handle and the “lift area” shown in Figure 6 when lifting
CAUTION and moving the robot. Lifting from other locations may damage the
robot.
Do not stand the robot vertically on its base unless you are holding it
CAUTION securely with two hands. Do not lean the robot against any other
object. Instead, lay the robot down horizontally with the yellow handle
facing UP.
Figure 6 Robot Handle and Lift Area
“Mushroom button”
for installing robot
(appears loose and
wobbly)
Robot lift area
Robot handle
Robot shipping
restraint
Collector door
Front view Rear view Collectors

2 Make sure the collector door is closed. If it is not, close the door and tighten two thumbscrews in the
collector door to keep it closed (see Figure 7 ).
Robot handle facing UP
Tighten these
thumbscrews
to close door.
Loosen
thumbscrews
to open door.

3 Set the power rail collectors to the correct position (“left-side robot”) by sliding the thumbscrews up or
down as described below.
The collectors may already be in the proper position. If this is the case, you
Note
do not need to move them, but you must verify they are in the proper
position.
There are four collectors. The bottom collector does not move. The other three slide up and down
vertically to engage the proper power rails. (See also Figure 18 on 39 and Figure 19 on 39.)
To slide the collectors up or down, loosen the two thumbscrews in the metal bracket on the collector
door. Use your fingers to lift the tabs of the bracket slightly to disengage the hole in the bracket from the
pin in the collector door. Slide the thumbscrews and bracket all the way up or all the way down until the
hole in the bracket fits over the other pin in the collector door. The thumbscrews and bracket all move
together:
• If this is the left-side robot, slide the thumbscrews and bracket all the way toward the bottom
of the robot.
• If this is the right-side robot, slide the thumbscrews and bracket all the way toward the top
of the robot.

Figure 8 Setting the Power Rail collectors
Brackets
Bracket position - left side robot Bracket position - right side robot
4 Loosen the two captive thumbscrews in the collector door so that the door opens (see Figure 7 ).
5 Set the X-preload tensioner by pushing the retaining pin up into a hole on the drive gear (see Figure 9
). Using two hands, use one thumb to rotate the gear that sits on top of the spring toward the back of
the robot while at the same time using the other hand to pull the drive shaft toward the front of the robot
until a hole becomes available in the bottom of the gear into which to push the pin. Push the pin upward
so that it slides into the hole. (You will pull the pin back down later to load the tension spring.)
VERY IMPORTANT! Loading the tension spring properly ensures

CAUTION proper robot position and operation. Make sure that the retaining pin
is in the hole before proceeding. If the pin becomes disengaged
before the robot is fully installed (i.e.,drops down and gears engage
with the gear racks), you must remove the robot from the library and
put the pin back in again. If you bump the robot or set it down too
hard, the pin may disengage.

Figure 9 X-Preload Tensioner – Inserting Pin Into Hole
Push gear in this direction
Hole (retaining pin is not in hole yet)
Pull drive shaft in this direction
Push retaining pin up to engage in hole

6 Engage the robot kickstand as follows:
a. Using the yellow picker handle (see Figure 10 ), pull the picker toward the top of the robot just
enough so that the yellow locking lever clears the bar halfway up the vertical length of the robot.
b. Push the yellow locking lever into the locked position, then lower the picker until it locks into
position (see Figure 11 ).
Figure 10 Lifting the Picker
Picker Lift
Handle

Figure 11 Engaging the Kickstand
7 Place the robot into its control module directly underneath the loader bracket as follows:
Be very careful not to hit the robot against anything as you lift it into
Be
CAUTION position. Do not let go of the robot until it is hanging from the loader
bracket.
a. Grasping the robot at the two “lift points,” lift the robot into a vertical position, with the collectors
facing toward the back of the library.
b. Insert the bottom of the robot into the library first, setting it down gently and carefully on the
floor of the library for just a moment.
c. Swing the top of the robot into the library.
d. Make sure the robot is vertical and directly underneath the loader bracket.

8 Lift the robot up and insert the “mushroom button” into the big hole of the loader bracket (see “insertion
point” in Figure 12 ). Slide the robot back slightly until it hangs freely (not all the way back).
The mushroom button appears “loose” and wobbles slightly. This is normal.
Note
Figure 12 Robot Loader Bracket Positions
Insertion Full back Load position -

point position robot drops down
9 If possible, check the pin position in the X preload tensioner to be sure the pin is still in the hole and has
not disengaged. If the pin has dropped out, carefully remove the robot from the library and return to Step
5 on page 29. (If a left side cover is installed, you may not be able to check this.)

10 VERY IMPORTANT: Make sure the rollers and wheels on the robot are lined up with the cutouts in both
the middle and bottom -axis gear racks. There are three sets of two small rubber rollers for the top,
middle and bottom gear racks. There are two sets of cutouts in the load position gear racks. There is
also a large wheel that goes on the middle rail which needs to fit into the curved cutout in the center of
the load position gear rack. These rollers and wheels need to fit through their respective cutouts when
you push the robot into place in the next few steps. If the rollers do not line up with and fit through the
cutouts, the robot could get installed crooked, requiring you to start over. If they do not line up, then
move the robot around slightly until they do.
Figure 13 Robot Rollers Lined Up With Cutouts in Gear Racks (Not Engaged Yet)
Top view
Rollers
Middle view
Rollers
Bottom view Rollers
11 Hold the robot at the “lift points” in the middle of the vertical rails and push it firmly toward the back of
the library until it hits the “full back position” shown in Figure 12 and the mushroom button bottoms out.
12 Hold the robot at the “lift points” in the middle of the vertical rails. While maintaining pressure toward the
back of the library, slide the robot to the right into the load position (see Figure 12 ). Be careful not to
grasp the vertical rail in your right hand -- you could injure your hand when sliding the robot to the right.
The mushroom button slips down through the hole in the install bracket and the robot drops down
slightly into position. The robot is now in the proper position.

13 Verify the gears are engaged: The top gear on the robot should engage the teeth of the top x-axis gear
rack. The two rubber rollers on each gear rack should straddle the non-notched rack that is closer to the
back of the library, while the larger gear wheel on the middle rail should be forward of the gear rack.
See Figure 14 .
If the gears are not engaged, remove the robot and start over at Step 2 on page 27. (To remove the
robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket.
Figure 14 Position of Robot Wheels on Middle and Bottom Racks
Rollers engaged on
middle X-axis gear rack
Rollers engaged on
bottom X-axis gear rack

14 Pull out the pin in the pre-load mechanism that you inserted earlier. Pull downward on the pin until it
disengages (see Figure 15 ). This may have already occurred when you slid the robot into place; if so,
it’s OK.
Figure 15 Gear Pre-load Mechanism - Load Position, Pin Disengaged (Not in Hole)
Pin disengaged (not in hole)
15 Verify the robot is vertical by making sure the robot’s vertical rails line up with the yellow “scribe lines”
on the top, middle, and bottom load position gear racks. You may need to move the robot left slightly so
the scribe lines are to the RIGHT side of the robot. See Figure 16 .
If the robot is not lined up vertically, remove the robot and start over at Step 2 on page 27. (To
remove the robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket.)

Figure 16 Verifying Robot is Vertical by Checking Scribe Lines
Scribe line locations in

control module

16 Slide the robot an inch or two to the left until the collectors are positioned in front of the power rail load
guides (see Figure 17 ).
Figure 17 Power Rail Load Guides
Power rail load

guides
17 Close the collector door and tighten the two captive thumbscrews (see Figure 7 on 27). This pushes the
collectors into the power rails.
Do not force the collector door closed, because doing so could cause
Note
damage.

18 Verify the collectors are in their correct position in the power rails as follows (see Figure 18 and Figure
19 ).
• The bottom collector is always in position 4.
• The three upper collectors are in the positions 1 – 3 on the power rail.
Figure 18 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
19 If you did not remove the robot shipping restraint during the unpacking procedure, do so now. (See
Figure 19 .)
a. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the front of the picker that secure the restraint.
b. Tilt the top of the restraint toward you slightly to disengage two pins in the bottom of the restraint
from two holes on the back side of the picker, then lift out the restraint. Sometimes the pins are
tight and it may be easier to push the restraint down and through to the back of the picker and
remove it from the back.
c. Place the shipping restraint in the discard pile.

Figure 19 Robot Shipping Restraint
Robot
shipping
restraint
thumbscrews
20 Verify robot motion: Push or pull on the robot handle to move the robot far enough so that it passes over
the junction in the power rails. If it slides smoothly without resistance, noise, or jerkiness, everything is
properly installed. Proceed to next step.
If the robot does NOT slide smoothly, check the connection between the collectors and the power
rails — this is the most common point of trouble. If you cannot determine the problem, remove the robot
from the library and start over at Step 2 on page 27. (To remove the robot, first move it so that it is not
directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door and lift the robot up so that its rollers
clear the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
21 Disengage the robot kickstand by lifting up on the yellow lever to release the locking tab. Using the
handle, raise the picker up a couple of inches so that the locking tab won’t re-engage, then let go of the

handle. (See Figure 10 on 31). The picker drifts to the bottom of the robot.
22 Move the robot’s yellow plastic locking lever into the “lock” position. Pull down on the knob to move the
lever. Move the handle to the right to lock it snaps into place. (When locked, the lever is under the middle
rack support, which prevents you from lifting the robot out.) See Figure 20 .
Figure 20 Robot Locking Lever in Locked Position
Robot locking
lever in locked
position
23 Make sure all the library power supplies are plugged in to a grounded AC power source.

Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 1
There are two types of library hardware: Gen 1 and Gen 2. Gen 2 hardware became available with the i10
release in November, 2011, and supports either a single or dual robot configuration. Gen 1 hardware will
continue to be sold until mid-2012.
This chapter describes how to install a new multi-module Gen 1 library and how to add expansion modules
to an existing control module or existing Gen 1 multi-module library.
To install a stand-alone control module, see Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module (Gen 1 and Gen 2) on
page 19.
If you are installing a new multi-module library, see Preparing to Install a New Multi-Module Library on page
44.
If you are adding an expansion module to an existing system unit, see Installing Expansion Modules after
Installing the System Unit on page 53.
If you are adding one or more expansion modules to an existing control module, first go to Preparing an
Existing Library to Receive an Expansion Module on page 93
Required tools:

• 8 mm nut driver or open end wrench
• 6 mm hex wrench
• 3 mm hex wrench
• 2.5 mm hex wrench
• X-axis alignment tool (part number 3-00147-01)
• digital level

Preparing to Install a New Multi-Module Library
To prepare to install a new multi-module library, complete the following procedures:
• Attaching Control and Expansion Modules as a System Unit (Four Frames Maximum) on page 44
• Testing the Digital Level on page 47
• Positioning the System Unit on page 46

• Verifying Level Condition on page 49
• Additional Leveling on page 50
Attaching Control and Expansion Modules as a System Unit (Four

Frames Maximum)
If you are installing four or fewer frames, you can bolt the frames together while the frames are on their
casters, and then raise and level the frames as one system unit.
Aligning and Bolting the Frames

1 Using the corner edges of the frames as a rough alignment, position the frames together so the
attachment bolt holes are aligned.
Verify that the attachment holes are aligned. If necessary, adjust the frame legs to better align the
attachment bolt holes.
2 Repeat the following steps for the front lower bolt, front upper bolt, back lower bolt, and back upper bolt,
in that order:
a. Insert the attachment bolt from right to left into the attachment hole
For older libraries, you may need to insert the back lower bolt from left to
Note
right. See Technical Bulletin 6-00925, “Change in Procedure for Joining
i2000 Frames”.
b. If the bolts do not slide smoothly into the holes, raise the appropriate leveling legs until they do.
c. Once the bolts are inserted, loosely thread the nuts onto the bolts.
44 Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 1

front upper bolt
front lower bolt
back upper bolt
back lower bolt
3 Tighten the bolts using the 6 mm hex wrench and the 13 mm open end wrench.
Do not overtighten the bolts. Overtightening can damage the vertical frame
Note
post structure.
4 Once the frames are aligned and bolted properly together, proceed to Positioning the System Unit on
page 46.

Positioning the System Unit
For more information on location specifications, see the Scalar i6000 Planning Guide.
1 Verify the placement of the system unit.
The control module is at the left end of a multi-module library.

Note

Ethernet cables to any of the modules.
3 Position the system unit in its intended location.
4 Verify that the system unit is positioned correctly.
after the system unit has been installed.
Lowering the System Unit Leveling Legs

1 On only the four outer edge corner legs of the system unit, use the 24 mm open end wrench to loosen
the four locking nuts.
2 Lower the four outer edge corner legs by hand until the legs touch the floor. You may need to use the
6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench to turn the legs if the threads do not turn freely.
To ensure even weight distribution on the legs, it is very important that the
Note
lowered legs be brought into contact with the floor without lifting the system
unit. You can verify whether a leg is in contact with the floor by attempting
to slide a piece of paper underneath it.

Raising the System Unit Off the Casters
1 Using the 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench, raise the entire system unit by only the four
outer edge corner legs seven (7) half turns during the system raising process. If a leg is lifted off the
floor, give only that leg seven (7) half turns. This should raise the entire system unit off of the casters
seven (7) half turns.
Note
turns. It is important to track the total number of turns, especially if you are
installing additional expansion modules.

leveling leg
leveling foot
• If you have correctly given each outer edge corner leg seven (7) half turns you should not be able
to turn the feet by hand.
• If you can turn one or more of the feet by hand, lower the system unit back onto the casters and
restart this procedure at Verifying Level Condition on page 49. The goal is to have the system unit
weight evenly distributed across all four outer edge leveling legs when it is properly raised. The
system unit may or may not be level at this time.



Note
placements of level
50.
If the module is sufficiently level, go to Lowering All Other Leveling Legs on page 51.

Additional Leveling
Note
service door

front to back

left to right

Lowering All Other Leveling Legs

1 Verify that all leveling legs are carrying load and that the system unit does not rock.
2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to raise the leveling leg lock nuts to the top and tighten them against
the welded nut.
Note
process.
If you are installing additional expansion modules to the system unit, proceed to Adding an Expansion
Module to an Existing System Unit or Library on page 52.
If you are not installing additional expansion modules to the system unit, proceed to Attaching the X-Axis
Rails on page 57.

Adding an Expansion Module to an Existing System Unit or
Library
If you are adding one or more expansion modules to an existing library, first go to Preparing an Existing
Library to Receive an Expansion Module on page 93, prior to completing the procedures below.
To add an expansion module to an existing system unit during a new installation process, complete the
following procedures:
• Installing Expansion Modules after Installing the System Unit on page 53

• Positioning the New Expansion Module on page 53
• Aligning the New Expansion Module with the System Unit on page 55
• Inserting the Attachment Bolts on page 55
• Tightening the Attachment Bolts on page 56
• Attaching the X-Axis Rails on page 57
• Attaching and Aligning the Upper and Lower X-Axis Rails on page 57
• Attaching the Middle X-Axis Rail on page 59
• Aligning the Middle X-Axis Channel on page 61
• Aligning the Middle X-Axis Rail on page 62
• Verifying the Middle X-Axis Rail Alignment on page 63
• Attaching the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop on page 69
• Installing the X-Axis Belt on page 72
• Installing the X-Axis Chain Assembly on page 77
• Installing the X-Axis Chain Trough on page 82
• Assembling the Last Expansion Module on page 89

Installing Expansion Modules after Installing the System Unit
Only use the following procedures if you are adding expansion modules to a newly installed system unit (a
system unit consists of four or less frames). For more information on system units, see Attaching Control
and Expansion Modules as a System Unit (Four Frames Maximum) on page 44.
Positioning the New Expansion Module

The first steps in adding a new expansion module to a system unit involve locating and positioning the
expansion module. For more information on location specifications, see the Scalar i6000 Planning Guide.
A label placed on the floor in the rear of the expansion module shows the order
Note
in which to place the module.
Required tools: none

1 Position the expansion module next to the last module in the system unit.

3 Verify that the expansion module is positioned correctly.
after the expansion module has been installed.

2 Lower the legs by hand until the pads touch the floor. You may need to use either a 6 mm hex wrench
or 16 mm open end wrench to turn the legs if the threads do not turn freely.
Note

Raising the Expansion Module Off the Casters
Use either the 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench to raise each of the four corner legs of the
module seven (7) half turns. If a leg is lifted off the floor, give only that leg seven (7) half turns. This
should raise the entire module off of the casters seven (7) half turns, unless the turn count was different
during the CM installation. If you know the CM installation turn count, use that count.
Note
turns.
leveling leg
leveling foot
3 Check each leg to ensure that there is pressure on the foot and you cannot turn it by hand.
• If you have correctly given each leg seven (7) half turns, you should not be able to turn any of the
feet by hand.
• If you can turn one or more of the feet by hand, lower the module back onto the casters and restart
this procedure at Lowering the Leveling Legs on page 53. The goal is to have the module weight
evenly distributed across all four leveling legs when it is properly raised. The module may or may
not be level at this time.

Aligning the New Expansion Module with the System Unit
Modules use a four-bolt attachment method with close-clearance 8 mm bolt holes. The tight clearances
allow the bolts to act as module-to-unit alignment pins.
1 Push the new expansion module toward the system unit until the frames touch.
2 Adjust the expansion module leveling legs until the frame corners and the attachment bolts are aligned.
Inserting the Attachment Bolts

1 Verify that the adjacent sides of the receiving unit and the new expansion module are parallel.
If not, adjust the leveling legs on the opposite side of the new module until the adjacent sides are
parallel. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the same number of turns.
2 Verify that the attachment holes are aligned. If not, adjust the leveling legs of the new module until the
attachment holes align. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the same number of turns.
a. Repeat these steps for the front lower bolt, front upper bolt, back lower bolt, and back upper
bolt, in that order:
Insert the attachment bolt from right to left into the attachment hole
.
For older libraries, you may need to insert the back lower bolt from left to
Note
right. See Technical Bulletin 6-00925, “Change in Procedure for Joining
i2000 Frames”.
b. If the bolt does not slide smoothly into the hole, raise or lower the leveling legs until it does.
c. Once the bolt is inserted, loosely thread the nut onto the bolt. Do not tighten the nut.
front upper bolt
front lower bolt

back upper bolt
back lower bolt
Tightening the Attachment Bolts

Once the bolts have been inserted, tighten the bolts using the 6 mm hex wrench and the 13 mm open end
wrench.
Note
post structure.
If this is the last new expansion module, go to Setting the Leg Lock Nuts on page 56.
If you are installing a seventh or eighth module, go to Installing the X-Axis Chain Trough on page 82.
To install additional expansion modules, repeat these procedures, Installing Expansion Modules after
Installing the System Unit on page 53, for each additional expansion module.

1 Verify that all legs are carrying load and that the library does not rock.
2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to raise all of the leveling leg lock nuts to the top and tighten them
Note
process.

Attaching the X-Axis Rails
The X-axis rails are shipped in a package secured in the back of the expansion
Note
module with the cable management ties. Remove the packages and unpack
them in a convenient location before beginning the following procedures.
Attaching and Aligning the Upper and Lower X-Axis Rails

Repeat the following procedure for each additional expansion module, starting with the first new expansion
module and working to the right.
For expansion modules in positions 9 through 12, the X-axis upper and lower
Note
rails contain longer slots. Check for the rail identification hole which signifies
the replacement X-axis upper or lower rail.
Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench

1 Attach the upper X-axis rail as follows:
a. Use the 2.5 mm hex screws to attach the upper X-axis rail loosely.
b. Push the rail to the left and align it front to back with the previous rail so that the joint is smooth.
c. Tighten each screw on the rail beginning at the left end. Do not tighten the screw that is on the
next rail at the junction between the current module and the module to the right.
2.5 mm hex screw

attached to module on left
2.5 mm hex screws

2 Attach the lower X-axis rail as follows:
a. Use the 2.5 mm hex screws to attach the lower X-axis rail loosely.
b. Push the rail to the left and align it front to back with the previous rail so that the joint is smooth.
c. Tighten each screw on the rail beginning at the left end. Do not tighten the screw that is on the
next rail at the junction between the current module and the module to the right.
2.5 mm hex
screws
2.5 mm hex screw
expansion modules 9 - 12
X-axis upper and lower rails contain
longer slots
elongated slot
rail identification mark (hole)

Attaching the Middle X-Axis Rail
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to attach the middle X-axis rail loosely to the X-axis channel with screws 1
through 10.
X-axis channel
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
middle X-axis rail 3
2
1
If you are adding expansion modules onto an eight module library, the new
Note
expansion modules ship with a special center X-axis rail that must be installed
in module eight of the existing library. This rail is 7mm shorter then standard X-
axis rails. The shorter X-rail is etched with a part number and description. You
must remove the previous middle X-axis rail to install the new rail. See Remov-
ing the Middle X-Axis Rail from Module Eight on page 100.
Etched part
number
identifying
special rail
for adding EM to eight or more library configuration

When attached, the middle X-axis rail must appear as shown below.
The holes will appear slightly shifted on the 7mm shorter rail.
Note
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
middle X-axis
X-axis rail channel

Aligning the Middle X-Axis Channel
If you are installing a new library, go to Aligning the Middle X-Axis Rail on page 62.
You only need to perform this procedure on expansion modules being added to
Note
the system unit. Complete systems ship from the factory with the middle X-axis
channel already aligned.
If you are adding one or more expansion modules to a system unit, do the following:
1 With the middle X-axis rail completely loose, do the following:
a. Place the centering tool over screw 3 and into the counterbore of the X-axis rail.
b. Holding the centering tool in place, tighten screw 3.
c. Repeat for screw 8.
counterbore
in middle X-axis rail
3 mm screw
junction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
middle X-axis rails x-axis channels

2 Loosen the eight 2.5 mm screws attaching the X-axis channel to the module.
alignment pins
2.5 mm screws 2.5 mm screws
3 Push the X-axis channel and middle X-axis rail to the left until the X-axis rail of the expansion module
contacts the X-axis rail of the module on the left.
4 Hold the X-axis channel so that the adjacent X-axis rails are touching each other and tighten the eight
2.5 mm screws.
5 Loosen the X-axis rail 3 mm screws that were tightened Step 1 on page 61.
Aligning the Middle X-Axis Rail

1 Loosen the five 8 mm nuts on the X-axis rail alignment tool (part number 3-00147-01). Once the nuts
are loose, separate the two metal bars of the tool and insert the back bar into the X-axis rail.
X-axis alignment tool
8 mm nuts
2 Position the middle of the X-axis rail alignment tool over the junction point in the rails.
If the X-axis rail tool is positioned correctly you should be able gain access to the 3 mm screws through
the holes in the tool.
junction 3 mm screws
middle X-axis rails x-axis channels

3 Push the loose middle X-axis rail in the expansion module towards the X-axis rail in the control module
or expansion module to verify that there is no gap in the junction between the two rails.
4 While holding the X-axis rail against the adjoining rail use an 8 mm nut driver or open end wrench to
tighten the five 8 mm nuts on the X-axis rail alignment tool. This will align the two separate rails.
5 Working from left to right, tighten the ten 3 mm screws on the middle X-axis rail.
6 Use an 8 mm nut driver or open end wrench to loosen the five 8 mm nuts on the X-axis rail alignment
tool. Remove the tool from the X-axis rail.
7 Manually move the accessor over the rail junction points to verify that you cannot feel the junction.
There may be a slight clunk sound as you pass over the junction, but you
Note
should not feel the transition between the rails in the accessor.
Verifying the Middle X-Axis Rail Alignment

1 Place the digital level on the lower side of the control module X-axis rail between screws 3 and 4 as
counted from the left. Record this value.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Control Module Rail
middle level X-axis

X-axis rail location channel
Do not place the level on the control module X-axis rail alignment pins.
Note
2 Place the level against the lower side of the expansion module X-axis rail between screws 5 and 6 as
counted from the left.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Expansion Module Rail
middle level X-axis

X-axis rail location channel
3 Verify that value for the expansion module middle X-axis rail is within +/- 0.05 degrees of the value
recorded for the control module. Make note of this value.
4 If the rail is not within this tolerance, align it as follows:

a. Loosen screws 3 through 10 on the middle X-axis rail that is out of alignment.
Do not loosen screws 1 and 2 or the rail-to-rail alignment will be lost.

Note
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
middle X-axis
X-axis rail channel
b. Adjust the X-axis rail until the level matches that of the control module, then tighten screw 10.
c. Verify that the rail is still within tolerance, then tighten the remaining screws.
d. Repeat Step 4 for each expansion module. The X-axis rails should now be level.
If you need to attach and align the middle X-axis rail in another expansion module, go to Attaching the
Middle X-Axis Rail on page 59.

Additional Procedure For Verifying Alignment
The following instructions apply to a new installation.
1 Position the robotic accessor in the first frame (EM1), lining up the right side edge of the accessor with
the top left-hand edge of the teach tab in EM1. Doing a visual check with your eye, the accessor should
be parallel with the top left-hand edge of teach tab.
2 Now look at the bottom left-hand edge teach tab. The distance should be the same, and the accessor
should be parallel with the bottom teach tab.
Teach Tabs

3 If the accessor is left of the bottom teach tab, adjust the X-rail up leaving the first 2 screws (left to right)
tight, and then loosen the remaining screws and push the X-rail up and tighten.
Teach Tab
and Alignment Check

4 If the accessor is right of the bottom teach tab, adjust the X-rail down leaving the first 2 screws (left to
right) tight, and then loosen the remaining screws and push the X-rail down and tighten.
Bottom Teach Tab

Referenced with Accessor
5 Repeat the visual teach tab verification check with each X-rail you add to the next frame. Checking each
X-rail within the frame before installing the next X-rail will ensure the X-rail stays true with each frame
you add.
For an existing installation, if the visual teach tab check shows that adjustments are required, remove all
EM X-rails before making corrective adjustments.

Verifying Accessor Assembly Alignment
1 Verify that the accessor assembly is aligned correctly as follows
a. Position the front edge of the Y-drive mount so that it is aligned with the scribe mark on the lower
left end of the control module’s upper and lower X-axis rail.
Y-axis rail
front edge of
Y-drive mount
scribe mark
on lower X-axis rail
b. Verify that the upper X-axis bearing is within one mm of the scribe mark on the upper X-axis rail.
Y-axis rail
scribe mark

2 If the accessor assembly is not aligned correctly, do the following:
a. Loosen the five screws that hold the accessor to the X carriage.
b. Position the front edge of the Y-drive mount so that it is aligned with the scribe mark on the lower
X-axis rail.
c. Align the upper X-axis bearing with the scribe mark on the upper X-axis rail.
d. Tighten the five screws.
e. Move the accessor assembly to the right about 100 mm away from the scribe marks.
f. Repeat Step 1 above to verify alignment.
Attaching the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop

Determine library configuration requirements:
• If the library configuration will be less than eight modules, use the tensioner bracket and hard stop
you removed previously. Proceed to Eight Modules or Less Configuration on page 69.
• To add expansion modules onto an existing eight module library configuration, you must use the
new tensioner bracket which is provided in the installation kit. The new tensioner bracket has a
vertical slot instead of a hole on the bottom left. Proceed to Nine Modules or More Configuration on
page 70.
For information on removing the tensioner bracket, see Removing the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop on
page 99.
Eight Modules or Less Configuration

1 On the expansion module that will be the last in the configuration, use a 3 mm hex wrench to attach the
X-axis tensioner bracket to the X-axis channel.
3 mm screws

2 On the expansion module that will be the last in the configuration, use a 3 mm hex wrench to attach the
hard stop.
3 mm screw
Nine Modules or More Configuration

To add expansion modules onto an existing eight module library configuration, you must use the new
tensioner bracket which is provided in the installation kit. The new tensioner bracket has a vertical slot
instead of a hole on the bottom left.
1 Confirm the tensioner assembly in the installation kit is anodized black and that it has the FRU ID 939.
2 On the X-axis tensioner that you removed earlier, use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the 4 screws that
attach the tensioner assembly to the tensioner assembly bracket.
3 mm screws
Removed tensioner mounting

bracket with hole instead of slot
black tensioner assembly

3 Using a 3 mm hex wrench install the 4 screws that attach the tensioner assembly to the replacement
tensioner bracket.
3 mm screws
Replacement tensioner mounting

bracket with slot
4 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to install the fours screws that attach the X-axis tensioner to the substrate of
the last expansion module in your library configuration.
substrate
tensioner mounting
bracket
3 mm screws

5 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to attach the hard stop to the substrate below the X-axis center rail.
3 mm screw
Installing the X-Axis Belt

Determine the library configuration requirements:
If the library configuration will be less than eight modules, follow the Eight Modules or Less Configuration
on page 72.
If the library configuration will be nine modules or more, follow the Nine Modules or More Configuration on
page 75.
Tools required: 2.5 mm hex wrench, 4 mm hex wrench, 3 mm hex wrench
Eight Modules or Less Configuration

1 Thread the belt around the back side of the X-axis pulley assembly.
thread belt through the

back of the pulley assembly
belt

2 Thread the end of the belt through the back opening in the tensioner.
tensioner
thread belt through opening

in the back of the tensioner
belt
3 Locate the X-axis belt clamp.

The X-axis belt clamp was removed as part of the disassembly procedure on an existing library. See
Step 5 on page 98. The clamp is connected to the X-axis carriage on a new library.
4 To attach the belt to the right side of the X-axis belt clamp, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to tighten the first
screw.
2.5 mm hex screw

5 Pull the belt tight and mark where it should be cut. You must leave three belt teeth extra on the belt so
it can be attached to the left side of the clamp.-
marking point
6 Cut off the excess length from the belt.

7 Insert three teeth of the X-axis belt into the left side of the clamp and tighten the 2.5 mm screw to secure
the belt in place.
2.5 mm hex screw
8 Secure the belt clamp to the X-axis carriage by installing the two 4 mm screws through the X-axis
carriage into the belt clamp. If your library configuration involves nine or more modules, see Nine
Modules or More Configuration on page 75. Otherwise, proceed to step Step 9 on page 75.
X-axis carriage
4 mm belt clamp
bracket screws
belt clamp

9 Use the 4 mm hex wrench to turn the spring-load screw counter clockwise to uncompress the tensioner.
Note that the gap cannot exceed 5 mm between the score mark and the tensioner base.
10 Continue to unscrew the compression screw (turning counterclockwise) until there is a 10 mm gap
between the screw head and tensioner base.
10 mm gap
5 mm mark
tensioner arm
tensioner base
4 mm spring-load screw
11 Move the accessor over the full length of the X-axis to verify that the belt is not twisted.
12 Return the accessor to the home position in the control module so you can install the X-axis chain
assembly.
Nine Modules or More Configuration

To add expansion modules onto an existing eight module library configuration you must follow steps 1-6 in
the Eight Modules or Less Configuration on page 72 and then complete the steps below. The longer belts
have an initial stretch on install. You must make certain the tensioner arm is to the left of the 5mm mark and
that the gap does not exceed 3.5mm.
1 Use the 4 mm hex wrench to turn the spring-load screw counter clockwise to uncompress the tensioner.
3.5 mm gap
10 mm gap
5 mm score mark
tensioner arm
4 mm spring-load screw
tensioner base
2 Verify the gap does not exceed 3.5mm.

If the gap does not exceed 3.5 mm, go to Step 12 on page 77.
If the gap exceeds 3.5 mm, go to Step 3 on page 75.
3 Use the 4mm hex wrench to turn the spring-load screw clockwise to re-compress the tensioner.
4 Remove the three screws from the tensioner bracket and loosen the screw in the vertical slot 1/4 turn.
This allows the X-axis tensioner to drop down and rotate clockwise generating additional slack in the

belt, making it possible to cut off excess. Remove only one tooth at a time as you adjust the belt for
length.
5 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the belt from the left side of the X-axis belt clamp.
6 Cut off one tooth and then reinstall the belt to the left side of the X-axis belt clamp using the 2.5 mm hex
wrench.
7 To reinstall the x-axis tensioner assembly, rotate it counter-clockwise and then push it upwards.
8 Use a 3mm hex wrench to install the remaining three screws and tighten the loosened screw in the
vertical slot.
9 Use the 4mm hex wrench to turn the spring-load screw counter clockwise to uncompress the tensioner.
10 Verify that the tensioner gap does not exceed 3.5mm

11 If necessary, repeat steps 3 -10 and remove one belt tooth.
12 Once the tensioner has been uncompressed and the 3.5mm gap has been achieved, secure the belt
clamp to the X-axis carriage by installing the two 4mm screws through the X-axis carriage into the belt
clamp.
X-axis carriage
4 mm belt clamp
bracket screws
belt clamp
13 Move the accessor over the full length of the X-axis to verify that the belt is not twisted.
14 Return the accessor to the home position in the control module so you can install the X-axis chain
assembly.
Installing the X-Axis Chain Assembly

The X-axis chain that has been removed will not be used in the new configuration. Follow the procedure
below to install the X-axis chain assembly that shipped in the installation kit.
Required tools: 3 mm hex wrench
1 Thread the X-axis chain assembly into the slot behind the lower X-axis rail.
It is easier to fold over a large chain and feed it through from the last expansion module in the library if
the side panel is not installed.

2 Using the 3 mm hex wrench, secure the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the bottom of the control module
using two 3 mm screws.
3 mm screws
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
3 Connect the X-axis chain (W8) connector from the control module bulkhead.
X-axis chain (W8) connection

4 Connect the X-axis chain connector (W8) to the control module bulkhead using Velcro straps.
Velcro straps
5 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to attach the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the Y-axis drive mount assembly
using two 3 mm screws.
3 mm screws Y-axis drive

mount assembly
X-axis chain
assembly

6 Connect the Y-axis motor/home sensor cable to the X-axis chain assembly (W8).
X-axis sensor cable
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
7 Connect the Y-axis chain (W9) to the X-axis chain assembly (W8).
Y-axis chain
assembly (W9)
connector
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)

8 On the top of the X-axis chain assembly, lock down the Y-axis home sensor cable by pressing down on
the hold-down.
hold down
Y-axis home
sensor cable
9 Test the Y-axis assembly by moving the accessor assembly to its home position and verifying the cables
do not have contact with the cables routed up the bulkhead. If they do, reposition the cables along the
bulkhead with the Velcro straps.

Installing the X-Axis Chain Trough
The X-axis chain trough is installed only in 7- 12 module configurations. Skip
Note
this procedure if the configuration you are installing has six or fewer modules.
Center the trough in modules 3, 4, 5, and 6 with a slight left offset.

Note
Library Configuration Trough Locations
CM + 6 EM module 3
CM + 7 EM module 3
CM + 8 EM module 3 and 4
CM + 9 EM module 3, 4 and 5
CM + 10 EM module 3, 4, and 5
CM + 11 EM module 3, 4, 5, and 6

1 Locate the X-axis cable trough (part number 3-01740-01).
2.5 mm hex screw
cable trough
2 Use the 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the clip from the end of the trough.

3 Place the trough between the top and bottom portions of the X-axis chain. Clip the end of the trough
over the bottom chain of the X-axis cable in the middle of the third module (second expansion module).
expansion module in
position 3
hook the clipped end of the trough

into a lower link of the X-axis cable
4 Lay the trough flat on the X-axis cable. Clip the end of the trough that was removed onto the cable and
attach it using the 3 mm hex wrench.
3 mm hex screw
clip that was removed

Routing and Connecting Module Cables
Required tools: Phillips screwdriver
The cables will be preinstalled on the LBX board in the expansion modules.
Note
You must route them through the hole in the bulkhead to either the control
module or previous expansion module.
1 On the back of the existing control module or last expansion module, do the following:
a. Loosen the thumbscrew on the LBX/IEX cover plate and remove the plate.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
b. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the four thumbscrews that retain the cover plate
between the top and bottom drive positions.
thumbscrews

2 On the new expansion module, loosen the thumbscrew on the LBX/IEX cover plate and remove the
plate.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
3 Locate the W1 and W2 cables on the new expansion module.
W2 cable
(Ethernet)
W1 cable (large ribbon cable)

4 Route the W1 and W2 cables from the new expansion module through the opening in the left bulkhead
of the control module or last expansion module in the existing configuration.
route the W1 and W2 cables

through opening in the left
bulkhead
5 Connect the W1 ribbon cable to the J2 connection on the LBX board on the control module or last
expansion module in the existing configuration.
This connects the J1 connection on the LBX board in the new expansion module to the J2 connection
on the LBX board in the control module or last expansion module in the existing configuration.
The LBX board has three versions and the terminator has two versions. For
Note
more information, see LBX Board on page 873 and LBX Terminator on
page 877. Make certain you have the correct version LBX based on the
library configuration you are installing.
LBX board on
LBX board on W1 cable control module or
expansion module (large ribbon cable) expansion module
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17

6 Connect the W2 Ethernet cable to the J3 connection on the LBX board on the control module or last
The LBX board has three versions and the LBX terminator has two
Note
versions. For more information, see LBX Board on page 873 and LBX
Terminator on page 877.
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17
J4 J3
W2 cable (Ethernet)
7 Determine the LBX terminator installation:

• Determine your library configuration and verify what style of terminator is needed. There are two
versions of the LBX terminator board (card). For more information, see LBX Terminator on page
877.
• Once you have determined what style of terminator you need, install it into the J17 connection on
the LBX board in the last expansion module.
J17 connection
LBX terminator

8 Use the cover plate thumbscrew to replace the LBX/IEX cover plates on the modules.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
9 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to replace the cover plate between the drive positions.
thumbscrews

Assembling the Last Expansion Module
Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench,
1 Remove the magazine storage on rack # 1 in sections 1 - 5 on Column 4 in the last expansion module.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
section 2
drive cluster
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

2 Install the L brackets. Each bracket is attached to the module frame by two 2.5 mm hex screws.
2.5 mm screws
that retain the
L-brackets
3 Locate the right side panel that was removed from the control module or previous expansion module.

4 Align the side cover with the screw holes in the expansion module.
screw holes
screw holes

5 From inside the expansion module, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install the nine (9) screws that attach
the side panel to the module.
2.5 mm screw 2.5 mm screws
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screws
6 Reinstall the removed magazines removed in Step 1 on page 89.

7 Reattach all of the service doors.
8 Repeat steps Step 1 on page 89 through Step 3 on page 90 on each expansion module.
9 Once the components are installed, if applicable, perform the procedures detailed in Installing Drives
and Blades on page 601.

Preparing an Existing Library to Receive an Expansion Module
To prepare an existing library to receive an expansion module, complete the following procedures:
• Positioning the Existing Library on page 93

• Removing the Right Side Panel from the Last Existing Module on page 94
• Removing the X-Axis Belt on page 98
• Removing the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop on page 99
• Removing the X-Axis Chain Assembly on page 100
• Removing the LBX Terminator Board on page 104
• Removing and Replacing the LBX Board on page 105
To ensure Ethernet communication for FC I/O blades and Ethernet Expansion

Note
blades, the following rules regarding control management blades (CMBs)
apply:
• Any module (including the control module) that contains FC I/O blades or EE
blades must also contain a CMB.
• A CMB must be installed in the control module and all modules between the
control module and the module containing the FC I/O blade or EE blade. The
CMB provides daisy-chained Ethernet communication between the
Management Control Blade (MCB) located in the control module and the
FC I/O blades and EEBs.
Positioning the Existing Library

If you must move the existing library prior to installing a new expansion module, follow these steps to locate
and position the modules. For more information on location specifications, see the Scalar i6000 Planning
Guide.
Required tools:
• 24 mm open-end wrench
• 3 mm hex wrench
• 4 mm hex wrench
1 Verify the quantity and placement of new expansion modules.

• The selected location the new modules is level. See Verifying Level Condition on page 49.
• All raised floor tiles have been cut out properly to accommodate the power, SCSI, Fibre, and
3 Verify that the existing library is level. See Verifying Level Condition on page 49.
4 Remove all of the service doors by opening them and then lifting them off the hinges. Set the doors
aside.

5 Open all access doors.
Removing the Right Side Panel from the Last Existing Module
1 On the control module or far right expansion module, remove the storage magazines in sections 1- 5 of
column 4 of rack 1.
This will enable you to access the 2.5 mm hex screws that attach the right side panel to the control
module or last expansion module.
Magazines must be removed in a top-down order. To remove the magazines:
a. Remove any cartridges from the magazine.
b. Starting at the top-most magazine, use both hands to push the magazine upwards until it
unsnaps.
c. Pull the magazine toward you to remove it.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
drive cluster section 2
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

2 Remove the nine (9) 2.5 mm screws that attach the right side panel to the module.
Three screws are located at the front corner post, three at the back corner post,
Note
and three at the storage wall.
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screws

3 Lift the right side panel off the module and set it aside until the expansion module install procedure calls
to reinstall it on the last expansion module.
screw holes
screw holes

4 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the three L-brackets that mount the side panel to the storage wall
and set them aside.
The L-brackets will be reused to attach the side panel to the last expansion module.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets
5 Reinstall the magazines that were removed in Step 1 on page 94.

Removing the X-Axis Belt
1 Use the 4 mm hex wrench to turn the spring-load screw clockwise until the two parts of the tensioner
assembly touch.
tensioner base 5 mm mark
spring-load screw tensioner arm
2 Use a 4 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws on the X-axis belt clamp bracket. The belt clamp
bracket will be removed from the X-axis carriage.
X-axis carriage
belt clamp assembly
4 mm screws
3 Turn the X-axis belt clamp assembly over.

4 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosen the two screws on the belt clamp assembly.
2.5 mm hex screws
5 Take the X-axis belt off the X-axis belt clamp assembly and pull the belt free from the pulleys.
Set the belt clamp assembly aside. The assembly will be reused in later steps.
Discard the belt. It will not be used in the new configuration.

Removing the Tensioner Bracket and Hard Stop
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the four (4) screws that attach the X-axis tensioner bracket to the
X-axis channel in the control module or last expansion module.
Do not use ball drivers to remove the hex screws because the screws
Note
could be stripped.
3 mm screws
2 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the X-axis hard stop.
3 mm screw

Removing the Middle X-Axis Rail from Module Eight
You only need to remove the middle X-axis rail from module eight if you are
Note
adding expansion modules to an existing eight module library. Later, you will
replace this rail with a special rail for the expanded configurations.
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove screws 1 through 10.
X-axis channel
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
middle X-axis rail 3
2
1
2 Lift the rail from the frame, and set aside.
Removing the X-Axis Chain Assembly

1 On the top of the X-axis chain assembly, release the Y-axis home sensor cable by flipping up the hold-
down.
hold down
Y-axis home sensor cable

2 Disconnect the Y-axis chain (W9) from the X-axis chain assembly (W8).
Y-axis chain
assembly (W9)
connector
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
3 Disconnect the Y-axis home/motor cable from the X-axis chain assembly (W8).
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
Y-axis
motor cable

4 Using the 3 mm hex wrench, remove two 3 mm screws attaching the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the
Y-axis drive mount assembly.
Y-axis drive
3 mm screws mount assembly
X-axis
chain assembly
5 Using the 3 mm hex wrench, remove the two screws securing the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the
bottom of the control module.
3 mm screws
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)

6 Remove Velcro straps (or zip ties) holding the X-axis chain (W8) to the control module bulkhead.
Velcro straps
7 Disconnect the X-axis chain (W8) connector from the control module bulkhead.
X-axis chain (W8) connector
8 Remove the X-axis chain from the module and discard it appropriately. It will not be used in the
configuration.

Removing the LBX Terminator Board
There are three versions of the LBX board (card) and two versions the LBX
Note
terminator board (card). For more information, see LBX Board on page 873
and LBX Terminator on page 877.
1 Unscrew the thumbscrew and remove the LBX/IEX cover plate from the control module or last
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
2 Remove the LBX terminator from the J17 and J2 connections on the LBX board.
3 Determine your library configuration and verify what version of LBX terminator is needed.
There are two versions of the LBX terminator board (card). For more information, see LBX Terminator
on page 877.
J17 connection
LBX terminator

Removing and Replacing the LBX Board
If you are adding one or more expansion modules to an existing eight-module library, you must remove the
LBX2 Gen 2 board from expansion module seven and replace it with the LBX2 GEN 3 version (red sticker
identifier). Only do this for expansion module seven.
Only use this procedure if you are preparing to install expansion modules
CAUTION to an existing eight-module library.
The LBX2 GEN 3 boards are identified by red stickers.

Note
Additional storage-only expansion modules in positions 9 -12 of a library
configuration ship with the latest LBX board versions. Check to make
certain the LBX2 GEN 3 boards with red stickers are installed.
Removing the LBX Board

Required Tools: None
FRU ID: 104
1 Shut down the library.
For more information, see Shutting Down the Library on page 752.
2 Attach the ESD strap to your wrist and to an unpainted surface inside the door.
3 Unscrew the thumbscrew and remove the LBX/IEX cover plate.
thumbscrew
4 Disconnect all cables from the LBX: the LBX cable (W1), internal Ethernet cable (W2), LBX-drive cluster
cable (W3), power supply status cable (W5), I/E station cable (W6), CAN cable (W7), Ethernet cluster

cable (W11), power distribution cable to library (W12), power distribution cable to drive cluster (W13)
door interlock cable (W15), power supply status cable (W16), and I/O management unit cable (W17).
connector: J14
plug: W3 to lower drive cluster
connector: J1
plug: W1 to BPI or
from previous LBX
connector: J15 connector: J4
plug: W3 to upper drive cluster plug: W2 to BPI or
connector: J7 from previous LBX
plug: W6 to I/E station
connector: J11
plug: W15 to door interlock connector: J16
plug: W16 to I/O management unit
connector: J10
plug: W11 to I/O management unit;
Ethernet connector: J8
connector: J13 plug: IEX board
CAN interface
plug: J19
connector: 1 x 2 aisle light
cable
connector: J3
connector: J9 plug: W2 to J4 of next LBX
plug: W5 to power enclosure
connector: J17
plug: LBX terminator
connector: J2
plug: W1 to LBX extended
5 Use your thumb to unsnap the IEX board from the standoffs, and then unplug it from the LBX board.
Then use your thumb to unsnap the LBX board from the standoffs.
To avoid damage to the backside of the LBX board, you should use care when removing the LBX board
from the space above the metallic standoffs.
6 Remove the IEX and LBX boards.

Replacing the LBX Board
Red stickers identify the LBX2 GEN 3 board required in the expansion
Note
modules added to a library configuration greater than eight.

FRU ID: 104
1 If the library is not shut down, shut down the library.
2 Remove the new LBX board from the anti-static bag.
3 Use your thumb to snap the LBX and IEX boards onto the standoffs.
To avoid damage to the backside of the LBX board, you should use care when inserting the LBX board
into the space above the metallic standoffs.
4 Plug the IEX board into the new LBX board.
Reconnect all cables to the LBX: the aisle light cable, the LBX cable (W1), internal Ethernet cable (W2),
LBX-drive cluster cable (W3), power supply status cable (W5), I/E station cable (W6), CAN cable (W7),
Ethernet cluster cable (W11), power distribution cable to library (W12), power distribution cable to drive
cluster (W13) door interlock cable (W15), power supply status cable (W16), and I/O management unit
cable (W17).

Removing and Replacing the IEX Card
If you are adding one or more expansion modules to an existing eight-module library, each expansion
module you are adding must contain an IEX2 card. The IEX2 card is identified by a red sticker. If an
expansion module you are adding contains an earlier version of the IEX card, you must remove the earlier
version and replace it with an IEX2 card.
New IEX2 cards are identified by red stickers. Earlier IEX card versions
Note
have no stickers.
Removing the IEX Board

FRU ID: 105 (IEX board)
2 Open the service door.
thumbscrew

5 Use your thumb to unsnap the IEX board from the two standoffs.
IEX board
standoffs
6 Unplug the IEX board from the LBX board.
connection between IEX

and LBX boards
7 Remove the IEX board.
Replacing the IEX Board

FRU ID: 105
3 Remove the new IEX board from the anti-static bag.

5 Use your thumb to snap the IEX board onto the two standoffs.
IEX board
standoffs
6 Replace the LBX/IEX cover plate and tighten the thumbscrew.
thumbscrew
7 Detach the ESD strap and close the door.

Installing a Multi-Module Library -
Gen 2 Single-Robot Configuration
This chapter describes how to install a new multi-module Gen 2 single-robot library, and how to add
expansion modules to an existing Gen 2 single-robot library.
This chapter includes:
Section Perform this section if...
Parts List on page 112 Always.
Required Tools on page 115 Always.
Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four You are installing a completely new library.
Frames) on page 115
Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Single- You are adding one or more modules onto an already
Robot Library to Receive a New Module on existing, operating library.
page 124
Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or • You are installing a completely new library that has
Existing Library on page 132 more than four frames; or
• You are adding one or more modules onto an
already existing, operating library.
Step 4: Installing the Gen 2 Hardware on page Always.

145

Parts List
The modules are shipped from the factory with everything pre-installed except for the few items that cross
over frame boundaries. These items come in separate parts kits as noted below.
Table 2 Parts List
Item/Description Part/FRU ID Quantity Where to Find
Bolts and nuts for bolting 4 In the kit corresponding to

control module to library, the frame
additional bolts for additional
expansion modules
Cable, Aisle, with Mounting FRU ID: 839 1 CM upgrade kit.

Plate (Short)
Cable, CAT5 Ethernet, black, FRU ID: 840 1 CM upgrade kit

2-feet
Cable, Power, W33 FRU ID: 838 1 CM upgrade kit
Catch tray N/A One per junction • One in each EM upgrade

between power kit
modules
Drive cover plates Only required if Boxed/shipped separately

DLT drives are
being removed
from library and
not being
replaced with
LTO drives.
Gen 2 Expansion Module with N/A As needed Pallet

no I/E stations (unless special
ordered with I/E)
Hard Stop (with required N/A 1 CM upgrade kit

screws)
Home/Parking Flag, CM N/A 1 CM upgrade kit.
Loader Bracket N/A 1 CM kit
LPC1 Blade FRU ID: 121 1 CM kit
Magazine calibration targets FRU ID: 1023 As needed • 2 in CM kit

(loose)
Magazine restraint clips FRU ID: 956 One for each • CM upgrade kit (enough for
magazine in the CM)
bottom row of • EM upgrade kit (enough for
each section on EM)
the rear wall of
the library.
Magazines with glued-on FRU ID: 957 3 for CM • 2 in CM upgrade kit

calibration targets 1 for each EM • 1 in each EM upgrade kit
112 Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 2 Single-Robot Configuration

Table 2 Parts List
Power Rail Bridge Clamp N/A 2 per junction • 2 in each EM upgrade kit
between power • 2 in CM upgrade kit
rails
Power Rail, 4-pack FRU ID: 951 1 per module • 1 installed in any new
frame that ships
Rack Supports, Bottom N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in each new EM

received
• 1 in each EM upgrade kit
• 1 in CM upgrade kit
Rack Supports, Middle N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in each new EM

received
Rack Supports, Top N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in each new EM

received
• 1 in each EM kit
Side cover, Gen 2 N/A 1 Contained in a wooden box

for a CM upgrade
Robot FRU ID: 204 2 Robot FRU boxes, on the EM

pallet
Screw A, M4X10 socket head Screw A • 2 per power In the same kits as their
cap screw, low profile rail bridge corresponding parts
clamp
Agile PN and description: • 3 per rack
1-01688-01 - SCREW, M4X10 support
SHCSLP BLACK, 10.9
Screw B, M4X6 socket head Screw B • 3 per half-rack In the same kits as their
cap screw, low profile, with x-axis gear corresponding parts
M4 T-nut attached rack (bottom
and middle)
Agile PNs and descriptions: • 4 per full-rack
3-05992-01 - T-NUT, M4, 5 x-axis gear
OD, 2.5 L rack (bottom
106363 - SCREW, M4X6 and middle)
SHCSLP • 2 per catch
tray
Screw C, M4X6 socket head Screw C • 3 per half-rack In the same kits as their
cap screw, low profile x-axis gear corresponding parts
rack (top) -
Agile PN and description: • 4 per full-rack
106363 - SCREW, M4X6 x-axis gear
SHCSLP rack (top)

Table 2 Parts List
Side panel return box 1 Large, flat, empty cardboard

box (large, flat)
SPA/SCC Mount Assembly • Mount 1 (these three CM kit

with SPA1 and SCC2 boards Assembly, parts are pre-
attached SPA/SCC assembled as
(FRU ID: 837) one unit)
• Board
Assembly,
SPA1 (FRU
ID: 123)
• Board, SCC2
(FRU ID: 122)
X-axis Gear Rack, Full Rack, FRU ID: 954 The quantity is 3 in each EM upgrade kit
Standard equal to:
3 x (# of modules
minus 2)
X-axis Gear Rack, Half Rack, FRU ID: 953 3 CM upgrade kit
End Position

Required Tools
• ESD wrist strap
• 6 mm hex wrench
• T10 Torx wrench
• digital level
• laptop with current library firmware loaded
Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four Frames)

Perform this section you are installing a completely new library.
casters, and then raise and level the frames as one system unit. If you are installing more than four frames,
you can bolt the first four together as a unit, and then, once leveled, you can attach the remaining modules
(covered in Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Single-Robot Library to Receive a New Module on page
124).
The system unit consists of the control module, and the next three modules.
• Aligning and Bolting the Frames on page 115

• Verifying the Frames are Aligned Using Alignment Marks on page 117
• Lowering the System Unit Leveling Legs on page 118
• Raising the System Unit Off the Casters on page 119

in that order:

front upper bolt
front lower bolt
back upper bolt
back lower bolt
Note
post structure.

Verifying the Frames are Aligned Using Alignment Marks
1 Verify the frames are aligned by checking the alignment marks in the middle rack supports. The
alignment marks are on the right and left sides of each middle rack support and are 2 mm in height.
These alignment marks must overlap, which indicates that the frames are aligned within 2 mm.
If the alignment marks cannot be properly aligned, then the frame-to-frame alignment is incorrect.
You will need to unbolt and realign the frames so the alignment marks meet the specification.
If the alignment marks are not aligned, do NOT attempt to solve the frame
Note
to frame misalignment issue by loosening the middle rack supports and
trying to bias them up or down to artificially make the notches line up.
Alignment
marks

Best Acceptable Unacceptable

The control module is at the left end of a multi-module library.

Note


Note

Note

leveling leg
leveling foot
restart this procedure at Verifying Level Condition on page 137. The goal is to have the system unit
weight evenly distributed across all four outer edge leveling legs when it is properly raised. The
system unit may or may not be level at this time.





Note
placements of level
122.
page 123.

Additional Leveling
Note
service door

front to back

left to right


Locking nuts are located on the top side of the frame. They are accessed from the inside of the library and
must be lowered down to the floor of the library.
2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to lower all of the leveling leg lock nuts down to the floor of the library
and tighten them against the welded nut.
Note
process.
If you are installing additional expansion modules to the system unit, proceed to Step 2: Preparing an
Existing Gen 2 Single-Robot Library to Receive a New Module on page 124.
If you are not installing additional expansion modules to the system unit, proceed to Step 4: Installing the
Gen 2 Hardware on page 145.

Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Single-Robot Library to
Receive a New Module
Perform this section if you are adding one or more modules onto an already existing, operating library.
To prepare an existing library to receive an expansion module, you will add the new module on to the right
of the system.
Complete the following procedures:

• Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right-most Module on page 125
• Removing and Installing the Right Hard Stop on page 129
• Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks from the Former Last Frame on page 129

Note
blades (EEBs), the following rules regarding control management blades
(CMBs) apply:
• Any module (including the control module) that contains FC I/O blades or
EEBs must also contain a CMB.
control module and the module containing the FC I/O blade or EEB. The CMB
provides daisy-chained Ethernet communication between the Management
Control Blade (MCB) located in the control module and the

Guide.
Required tools:

• The selected location the new modules is level.
3 Verify that the existing library is level. See Verifying the System is Level on page 119.
4 Remove the service door from the last expansion module by opening it and then lifting it off the hinges.
Set the doors aside.

Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right-most Module
1 On the right-most module, remove the storage magazines in sections 1- 5 of column 4 of rack 1.
unsnaps.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

2 Remove the eight (8) 2.5 mm screws that attach the right side panel to the module.
Note
and two at the storage wall.
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw

screw holes
screw holes

4 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the two L-brackets that mount the side panel to the storage wall
and set them aside.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets

Removing and Installing the Right Hard Stop
Remove the right hard stop from the existing last frame and reinstall it in the expansion module that is to
become the new last frame.
Required tools: T10 Torx wrench
Required equipment:
• One hard stop

• Two M3X4 socket head Torx screws
1 Remove the right hard stop from the existing last frame. Use a T10 Torx wrench to remove two screws.
Save the screws and hard stop.
2 Install the right hard stop in the two raised threaded screw holes on the right side of the middle rack
support in the new last frame. Use a T10 Torx wrench to install the two screws. The padded portion of
the hard stop faces to the left (toward the center of the library when installed).
Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks from the Former Last Frame
The robot moves back and forth along black plastic X-axis gear racks that are installed on the bottom,
middle, and top rack supports. There are several types of x-axis gear racks, each used in a different position
on the rack supports. You must remove the Half Rack, End Position that exists in the former last frame and
reinstall them in the new last frame. These two racks are:

Figure 21 Types of X-axis Gear Racks to Remove
Half Rack, End Position — Last position on the right. Has no cutouts.
Tools required: 2.5 mm hex wrench

1 Remove the bottom and middle X-axis gear racks. The bottom and middle racks are installed in the
same manner, as follows:
.
a. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the Screw B’s in the gear racks. The screws go through
the slots in the gear rack tabs and into the threaded screw holes in the rack supports (see
Figure 28 ). Note that the screws have nuts on them so be careful not to drop any loose parts
into the library. Remove three screws with T-nuts for half racks.
b. Remove the X-axis gear racks from the library.
Figure 22 Removing Bottom and Middle X-Axis Racks

2 Remove the top X-axis gear rack as follows.
.
a. Remove Screw C’s in the top X-axis gear racks. The screws go up through slots in the
underside of the top rack support into the threaded screw holes in the bottom of the gear racks.
Use three screws for half racks and four screws for full racks. See Figure 23 .
b. Remove the Half Rack, End Position racks from the library (see Figure 21 ).
Figure 23 Removing Top X-Axis Gear Racks
Remove screws through the slots in the top rack supports

and up through the underside of the top X-axis gear racks.

Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or Existing Library
Perform this section if:
• You are installing a completely new library that has more than four frames. Make sure to first
complete Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four Frames) on page 115.
OR
• You are adding one or more modules onto an already existing, operating library.Make sure to first
complete Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Single-Robot Library to Receive a New Module on
page 124, then return here and complete this section.
Complete these steps:

• Raising the Expansion Module Off the Casters on page 133

• Relocating the LBX Terminator Board on page 142

Note



Note


Note
turns.
leveling leg
leveling foot
feet by hand.


front upper bolt
front lower bolt
back upper bolt
back lower bolt

wrench.
Note
post structure.
If this is the last new module, go to Verifying the Frames are Aligned Using Alignment Marks on page 140.
To install additional modules, repeat these procedures, Positioning the New Expansion Module on page
132, for each additional expansion module.





Note
placements of level
122.
page 123.
Additional Leveling
Note

service door

front to back

left to right


Note
Alignment
marks

.

Note
process.

Relocating the LBX Terminator Board
1 Unscrew the thumbscrew and remove the LBX/IEX cover plate from the old last frame in the existing
configuration.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
3 Install the terminator in the new last frame.
J17 connection
LBX terminator


Note
In the future, if you add additional storage-only expansion modules in
positions 9 -12 of a library configuration, these modules ship with the latest
LBX board versions. You can verify these modules have the LBX2 GEN 3
boards by making sure red stickers are applied.

FRU ID: 104
thumbscrew

connector: J14
connector: J1
plug: W1 to BPI or
from previous LBX
connector: J11
connector: J10
CAN interface
plug: J19
cable
connector: J3
connector: J17
connector: J2
Note

FRU ID: 104

5 Reconnect all cables to the LBX: the aisle light cable, the LBX cable (W1), internal Ethernet cable (W2),
cable (W17).
Step 4: Installing the Gen 2 Hardware

Once all the frames are bolted together and level, there are a few pieces of hardware to install. These parts
are the items that cross frame boundaries, some partially pre-installed cables, and the robot.
• Connecting and Securing the Power Rails on page 146
• Installing the Catch Trays on page 147
• Installing the X-Axis Gear Racks on page 149

• Routing and Connecting Module Cables on page 154
• Installing the Side Cover on a New Last Frame on page 159
• Installing the Gen 2 Robot on page 163
• Verifying The Robot is Ready for IVT on page 180
• Running IVT and Troubleshooting on page 180
• Reinstalling the Cover Plates on page 181
• Notes for Configuring Partitions and Importing Cartridges on page 182

Connecting and Securing the Power Rails
The power rails are pre-installed. You need to secure adjacent power rails using bridge clamps and connect
adjacent rails via their connectors.
Required equipment:
• Two bridge clamps per pair of adjacent power rails

• Screw A, M4X10 socket head cap screws (low profile) — 2 per bridge clamp
1 Secure adjacent power rails together with two bridge clamps, one on the upper edge of the rails and
one on the lower edge of the rails. Use the screw holes available on the power rails. Use a 2.5 mm hex
wrench to install two screws in each bridge clamp. See Figure 24 on 146.
Figure 24 Power Rail Position in Module
Two bridge clamps connect adjacent rails

2 Connect the 4-pin power connectors on all adjacent power rails. See Figure 25 on 147.
Figure 25 Power Rail, Front
4-pin connectors
Installing the Catch Trays

Catch trays are installed on the floor of the library. Each tray straddles the junction between modules.
Equipment required:
• Catch tray
• Screw B, M4X6 socket head cap screws (low profile) with attached M4 T-nut — 2 per catch tray
Figure 26 Catch Tray
1 Place the catch tray on the floor of the library over the junction between modules, with the catch tray
screw holes over the holes in the bottom rack supports.

2 Screw B screws and T-nuts should be pre-assembled. If they are not, install a T-nut on each screw in
the Screw B bag. Make sure the wider end of the T-nut faces toward the screw head.
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
3 Install two T-nut screws through the catch tray into the bottom rack supports.
Install two T-nut

screws

Installing the X-Axis Gear Racks
on the rack supports.
.
The half-rack load position in the control module is pre-installed. If you are
Note
adding new modules onto the right of a pre-existing Gen 2 system, you should
have already removed the half-rack, as described in Removing the X-Axis Gear
Racks from the Former Last Frame on page 129.
Make sure to use the correct type of gear rack for each position. If you
CAUTION don’t, you will have problems installing the robot and the robot may
become damaged during use.

Equipment required:
• X-axis gear racks (see Figure 27 for descriptions)

• Screw B, M4X6 socket head cap screws (low profile), with M4 T-nut attached — For middle and
bottom racks, 3 per half rack, 4 per full rack
• Screw C, M4X6 socket head cap screws (low profile) — For top racks, 3 per half rack, 4 per full rack

Figure 27 Types of X-axis Gear Racks
Half Rack, Left Load Position — First position on the left. Contains cutouts for the left robot’s wheels
to fit through during robot installation. These racks are pre-installed in the control module.
cutouts
Full Rack, Standard — Covers all the space not taken by the other racks. Has no cutouts.
Half Rack, End Position — Last position on the right. Has no cutouts. These racks are pre-installed in
the last frame.
Slots vs. Holes

The racks come with both slots in tabs (for bottom and middle rack installation) and fitted, threaded holes
(for top rack installation).
Bottom and middle gear racks use slots

in tabs for installation.
Top gear racks use threaded

holes for installation

1 Install the bottom and middle racks. The bottom and middle racks are installed in the same manner,
as follows:
.
It is recommended that you position all the racks on the rack supports
Note
before screwing any of them down.
a. The Half Rack, Load Position gear racks are already installed in the control module.
b. Lay down the Standard Full Racks, from left to right. The ends of the racks snap together in a
tongue-and-groove configuration. Snap each one into the previous one as you go, making sure
all the gear racks lie flat.
c. The Half Rack, End Position gear racks are already installed in the last expansion module,
unless you are adding additional modules onto an existing system. In that case, you need to
loosen the End Position racks and then lay down the Half Rack, End Position gear rack now.
d. Make sure that all racks are snapped together and lie flat against the rack support.
e. Screw B screws and T-nuts should be pre-assembled. If they are not, install a T-nut on each
screw in the Screw B bag. Make sure the wider end of the T-nut faces toward the screw head.
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
f. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install the Screw B’s in all the gear racks, starting with the left-
most location. The screws go through the slots in the gear rack tabs and into the threaded screw
holes in the rack supports (see Figure 28 ). Use three screws with T-nuts for half racks and four
screws with T-nuts for full racks.

Figure 28 Installing Bottom and Middle Racks

2 Install the top X-axis gear racks as follows.
.
It is recommended that you position all the gear racks on the rack supports
Note
a. The Half Rack, Load Position is already installed in the control module.
b. The Half Rack, End Position is already installed in the last expansion module.
c. Lay down the standard full gear racks, from left to right, starting with the control module. The
ends of the racks snap together to form a tight connection. Snap each one into the previous one
as you go.
d. The Half Rack, End Position gear racks are already installed in the last expansion module,
unless you are adding additional modules onto an existing system. In that case, you need to
loosen the End Position racks and then lay down the Half Rack, End Position gear rack now.
e. Make sure that all top gear racks are snapped together and lie flat against the rack support.
f. Install the left-most Screw C in the control module first. The screw goes up through the left-most
hole in the underside of the rack support into the left-most threaded screw hole in the bottom of
the rack. See Figure 29 .
g. Insert (stage) the remaining Screw C’s in all the top gear racks, from left to right. The screws
go up through the slots in the underside of the top rack support into the threaded screw holes
in the bottom of the gear racks. Use three screws for half racks and four screws for full racks.
See Figure 29 .
h. Tighten all the screws from left to right.
Figure 29 Installing Top X-Axis Gear Racks
Install screws through the slots in the top rack supports and
up through the underside of the top X-axis gear racks.

Note
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
thumbscrews

plate.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
3 Locate the W1 and W2 cables on the new expansion module. Prior to shipping both of these cables are
secured on top of the bottom drive position. Unclamp them before feeding them through the side as
shown in the illustration.
W2 cable
(Ethernet)


bulkhead
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17

LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17
J4 J3
W2 cable (Ethernet)
7 Install the LBX terminator into the J17 connection on the LBX board in the last expansion module.
J17 connection
LBX terminator
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew

thumbscrews

Installing the Side Cover on a New Last Frame
Only perform this section if you have added a new expansion module onto a pre-existing Gen 2 system and
this new module will become the new right-most expansion module. Otherwise, skip this step.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
section 2
drive cluster
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets

screw holes
screw holes

5 From inside the expansion module, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install the eight (8) screws that attach
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw


Installing the Gen 2 Robot
After receiving your system you should perform the steps in this section to install the robot and position it
correctly before you begin operation.
1 As part of the unpacking procedure you should have already removed the robot from the module in
which it was shipped, and placed it in a safe location. When you handle the robot, be sure to use the
yellow handle and “lift area” (indicated in Figure 30 ).
Only use the handle and the “lift area” shown in Figure 30 when
CAUTION lifting and moving the robot. Lifting from other locations may damage
the robot.
facing UP.
(appears loose and
wobbly)
Robot lift area
Robot handle
Robot shipping
restraint
Collector door

Tighten these
thumbscrews
to close door.
Loosen
thumbscrews
to open door.

Note
position.
together:
of the robot.
of the robot.

Brackets



Picker Lift
Handle


7 Place the robot into its control module directly underneath the loader bracket as follows:
Be
bracket.

Note


Top view
Rollers
Middle view
Rollers
Bottom view Rollers

See Figure 38 .
robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket.
Rollers engaged on
Rollers engaged on

it’s OK.


control module

Power rail load

guides
17 Close the collector door and tighten the two captive thumbscrews (see Figure 31 on 164). This pushes
the collectors into the power rails.
Do not force the collector door closed, because doing so could cause
Note
damage.

19 ).
• The bottom collector is always in the bottom position (position 7).
• The three upper collectors are in the positions 4 – 6 on the power rail.
Figure 42 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Figure 43 .)

Robot
shipping
restraint
thumbscrews
20 Verify robot motion: Push or pull on the robot handle to move the robot far enough so that it passes over
the junction in the power rails. If it slides smoothly without resistance, noise, or jerkiness, everything is
properly installed. Proceed to next step.
directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door and lift the robot up so that its rollers
clear the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)

Robot locking
lever in locked
position
24 Close the doors and power on the library as follows:
a. Make sure all the library power supplies are plugged in to a grounded AC power source.
b. On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the up (I) position.
c. Press the Power button on the indicator panel.
d. Wait for the robot LEDs to illuminate. This takes about 1 to 2 minutes.

Verifying The Robot is Ready for IVT
Before you can test that everything is working properly after the upgrade, you must verify that the robot is
online.
1 Make sure the access doors are closed.
2 Press the Robotics Enabled button.
3 Allow 30 minutes for the library to boot. During the bootup, the following occurs:
Robotics start initializing. The robot first performs configuration (scans drive, magazine, and I/E station
fiducials). Then the robot performs a calibration and inventory, and then performs its robot self test
(RST). When complete, the library comes ready (solid green Robotics Enabled LED on front panel,
also indicated on the touch screen). To check that the robot has completed RST, do the following.
4 Log on to the LMC.
5 Wait for robotics to become enabled (the Robotics Enabled LED on the front panel is on steady). This
can take at least 30 minutes.
When the library comes ready and the Robotics Enabled and Power On
Note
indicators turn solid green, this means the robot is ready.
6 Check for tickets on the UI and troubleshoot. Resolve and close all tickets before proceeding.
7 Select Monitor > System from the LMC.
The System Status screen appears.
8 Click the Robot tab to display the robot system status table.
9 Verify the robot is ready by confirming the following:
• Name: The robot name is displayed.
• Status: The robot must be Active not Passive.
• If the status for the robot indicates Pending, wait until it changes to active. Pending
indicates the robot is still performing its self test. NOTE: The screen does not update
dynamically, so close the screen, wait a few minutes, and check again.
• If the status for the robot indicates Failed, troubleshoot and fix before continuing.
• State: The robot must be online, not offline.
• Generation: The robot must be Gen 2.
10 Click Close to close the screen and proceed to Running IVT and Troubleshooting on page 180.
Running IVT and Troubleshooting

Run just the Accessor FRU tests on the robot as follows:
1 Run IVT on the robot by following all of the instructions in the chapter Installation Testing and
Verification on page 833. If any problems or tickets occur, troubleshoot and retest until all tests pass.
Then return here.
2 Run the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the robot, as follows:
a. From the LMC, select Tools > Verification Tests.

The Verification Tests screen opens.
b. From the Select Test drop-down list, select FRU.

c. From the Subtest drop-down list, select Accessor Assembly.
d. Click Start.
e. In the dialog box that appears, click Yes to take the library offline.
The Accessor Test begins and the results display in the Test Results section. While the test is
running, “In progress” displays in the Result section. When the test is finished, “In progress”
disappears and all of the results display.
f. Wait for the test to complete (results appear on screen). Check the Result column. If any tests
failed, troubleshoot and retest. Click the Reports button for information that can help you
troubleshoot. Continue to troubleshoot and retest until the Accessor Assembly test passes.
3 Run the Picker Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the robot, following the same instructions
as for the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest above, except select Picker Assembly from the Select
Subtest drop-down list.
Reinstalling the Cover Plates

Replace all cover plates you removed earlier.
Required tools: #2 Phillips screwdriver
1 From the control module, reinstall the following (see Figure 45 ):
• LBX/IEX cover plate — Tighten two thumbscrews.

• Service port panel — Tighten two thumbscrews.

• Cover plate between the upper and lower drive clusters — Tighten the four thumbscrews that retain
the cover plate.
• Bottom drive cluster cover plate — Tighten two thumbscrews.
2 From any expansion modules from which you removed a cover plate, reinstall the following (see Figure
45 ):
• Large cover plates above the power chassis — Tighten two thumbscrews.
Figure 45 Replacing the Control Module and Expansion Module Cover Plates
Cover plate
Cover plate between
above the power upper and
chassis lower drive
bays
Service port
panel
LBX/IEX
cover plate
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plates
Expansion module Control module
Notes for Configuring Partitions and Importing Cartridges

You can use slots from the following areas, if you have sufficient COD:
• The control module contains 4 storage columns (Rack 1, columns 3 and 4 and Rack 2, columns 1
and 2).
The eight columns comprising the left and right spaces may contain
CAUTION magazines but these magazines are not visible on the UI and cannot be
used for storage. Do not load cartridges into these columns. See Figure 46

Figure 46 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Control Module
Rack 1 (back) Rack 2 (door)

Installing a Multi-Module Library -
Gen 2 Dual-Robot Configuration
This chapter describes how to install a new multi-module Gen 2 dual-robot library, and how to add
expansion modules to an existing Gen 2 dual-robot library.
This chapter includes:
Section Perform this section if...
Parts List on page 186 Always.
Required Tools on page 186 Always.
Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four You are installing a completely new library.
Frames) on page 187
Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Dual- You are adding one or more modules onto an already
Robot Library to Receive a New Module on existing, operating library.
page 196
Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or • You are installing a completely new library that has
Existing Library on page 212 more than four frames; or
• You are adding one or more modules onto an
already existing, operating library.
Step 4: Installing the Gen 2 Hardware on page Always.

224

Parts List
The modules are shipped from the factory with everything pre-installed except for the few items that cross
over frame boundaries. These items come in separate parts kits as noted below.
The factory does not ship a frame called the “right parking module.” The factory
Note
just calls it an “expansion module” or EM. You will know it is the right parking
module because it is the last numbered frame, and also because it has a right
side cover installed.
The left parking module is simply called the “parking module,” or PM, at the
Note
factory. The PM kit below is the parts kit for the left and right parking modules.
PM Kit
• Catch tray
• Power rail bridge clamps (1 set of 2 clamps)
• X-axis gear rack, full, right load position (3)
• Screws needed for the above parts
CM Kit
• X-axis gear rack, full, standard (3)
• Screws needed for above parts
EM Kit
• X-axis gear rack, full, standard (3)
• Catch tray
Required Tools
• ESD wrist strap
• 3 mm hex wrench
• 6 mm hex wrench
• T10 Torx wrench
• digital level
186 Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 2 Dual-Robot Configuration

Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four Frames)
Perform this section if you are installing a completely new library.
casters, and then raise and level the frames as one system unit. If you are installing more than four frames,
you can bolt the first four together as a unit, and then, once leveled, you can attach the remaining modules
(covered in Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or Existing Library on page 212).
The system unit consists of the left parking module, control module, and the next two modules.
• Aligning and Bolting the Frames on page 187

• Lowering the System Unit Leveling Legs on page 189

in that order:
front upper bolt
front lower bolt

back upper bolt
back lower bolt
Note
post structure.
4 Once the frames are aligned and bolted properly together, proceed to Positioning the System Unit on
page 188.

The left parking module is at the left end of a dual-robotics multi-module

Note
library.


Note

Note

leveling leg
leveling foot

restart this procedure at Raising the System Unit Off the Casters on page 189. The goal is to have
the system unit weight evenly distributed across all four outer edge leveling legs when it is properly
raised. The system unit may or may not be level at this time.





Note
placements of level
192.
page 193.
Additional Leveling
Note

service door

front to back

left to right



Alignment
marks

2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to raise the leveling leg lock nuts to the top and tighten them against
the welded nut.
Note
process.

If you are installing additional expansion modules to the system unit, proceed to Step 3: Adding Modules to
a System Unit or Existing Library on page 212.
If you are not installing additional expansion modules to the system unit, proceed to Step 4: Installing the
Gen 2 Hardware on page 224.

Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Dual-Robot Library to
Receive a New Module
Perform this section if you are adding one or more modules onto an already existing, operating library.
To prepare an existing library to receive an expansion module, you will add the new module on to the right
of the system, and this new module will become the right parking module. The former right parking module
will become a standard expansion module.
Complete the following procedures:

• Moving the Right Robot Out of the Way on page 197
• Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right Parking Module on page 198
• Removing and Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag on page 203
• Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks from the Former Right Parking Module on page 204
• Removing the Top Rack Support from the New Right Parking Module on page 207
• Relocating the Loader Bracket, Loader Bracket Locator, and Top Rack Support, from the Former
Right Parking Module to the New Right Parking Module on page 208
• Installing the Top Rack Support into the Former Right Parking Module on page 210

Note
(CMBs) apply:

Guide.
Required tools:
• 3 mm hex wrench
• 4 mm hex wrench

3 Verify that the existing library is level. See Verifying Level Condition on page 191.
aside.
Moving the Right Robot Out of the Way

Slide the right robot to the left so that it is out of the right parking module and out of the module to the
immediate left of the right parking module. This will enable you to remove the X-axis gear racks without the
interference from the robot.

Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right Parking Module
1 On the right parking module, remove the storage magazines in sections 1- 5 of column 4 of rack 1.
unsnaps.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

Note
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw

screw holes
screw holes

and set them aside.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets

Remove the right hard stop from the existing right parking module and reinstall it in the expansion module
that is to become the new right parking module.
Required equipment:
• One hard stop

1 Remove the right hard stop from the existing right parking module. Use a T10 Torx wrench to remove
two screws. Save the screws and hard stop.
support in the right parking module. Use a T10 Torx wrench to install the two screws. The padded
portion of the hard stop faces to the left (toward the center of the library when installed).

Removing and Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag
Remove the right home/parking flag from the current right parking module and reinstall it in the module that
is to become the new right parking module.
Required equipment:
• Right home/parking flag

• Screw D, M3 x 5 flat head Torx screw with Loctite patch (3)
1 Use a T10 Torx wrench to remove three screws that secure the right home/parking flag from the current
right parking module. Remove the home/parking flag.
2 Install the right home/parking flag onto the right side of the middle rack support in the new right parking
module. Use a T10 Torx wrench to install three screws in the three right-most raised screw holes.
There are five raised threaded screw holes across the top of the middle
Note
rack support. You will use the three right-most raised screw holes.
Three screws tab

Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks from the Former Right Parking
Module
on the rack supports. You need to remove the two racks that exist in the current right parking module. These
two racks are:
• Full Rack, Right Load Position

• Half Rack, End Position
Full Rack, Right Load Position (dual robotics only) — Second position from right. Installed just to the
left of the Half Rack, End Position. Contains cutouts for the right-side robot’s wheels to fit through during
robot installation.
cutouts

.
the slots in the gear rack tabs and into the raised, threaded screw holes in the rack supports
(see Figure 58 ). Note that the screws have nuts on them so be careful not to drop any loose
parts into the library. Remove three screws with T-nuts for half racks and four screws with T-
nuts for full racks.
b. Remove the X-axis gear racks from the library, starting with the right-most rack first.

2 Remove the top X-axis gear racks as follows.
.
a. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosen the two screws in the Loader Bracket Adapter (installed in
the former right parking module; see Figure 49 ).
b. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosen the four screws that secure the Right Robot Loader Bracket
(installed in the former right parking module; see Figure 49 ).
c. Remove Screw C’s in the top X-axis gear racks. The screws go up through slots in the
d. Remove the Full Rack, Right Load Position and Half Rack, End Position racks from the library,
starting with the right-most rack first (see Figure 47 ).
Figure 49 Robot Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Adapter Screws
The X-axis gear rack has been cut away in this illustration to show the screw
Note
locations.
Tighten these six screws once the

X-axis gear rack is screwed down


Removing the Top Rack Support from the New Right Parking
Module
You will be replacing the top rack support in the module that will become the new right parking module. Top
rack supports come pre-installed in the left parking module and any additional expansion modules ordered
as part of this installation.
Special instructions apply to installing the top rack support that has the loader
Note
bracket and locator installed. See the special instructions below in Step 7.
1 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosen the middle screw and remove the right and left screws.
2 Lift the “keyhole” of the upper rack support over the remaining middle screw remove the rack support
from the library.

Figure 51 Removing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules
Relocating the Loader Bracket, Loader Bracket Locator, and Top

Rack Support, from the Former Right Parking Module to the New
Right Parking Module
Removing the top rack support, with loader bracket and loader bracket locator attached, from the former
right parking module.
Installing the top rack support, with loader bracket and locator attached, into the new right parking module.
Required tools:

• T10 Torx wrench

1 In the current right parking module: Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosen the middle screw and
remove the right and left screws.
2 Lift the “keyhole” of the upper rack support over the remaining middle screw remove the rack support
from the library. Be careful not to hit any cables when removing the items.
3 In the new right parking module: Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosely install the middle screw into
the machined screw hole in the roof of the module.
4 Insert the “keyhole” of the upper rack support over this screw and slide the rack support back all the way
so that it “hangs” from this screw.
5 Install the other two screws through the rack support holes and through their machined screw holes in
the roof of the module.
6 Fully tighten all three screws.

7 Special instructions for installing in the right parking module: Place the rack support with loader
bracket attached into the library. Before hanging the rack support from the middle screw, first lift the front
of the loader bracket into position. The top lip must fit over the top front edge of the door opening (not
under it). Then lift the rack support and hang it from the screw as described above.
Figure 52 Installing the Top Rack Supports in Right Parking Module (Loader Bracket Attached)
Note: Top
lip of
loader
bracket
fits on top
of the front
edge of
the door
opening
8 Slightly loosen the four loader bracket screws and the two loader bracket locator screws. The loader
bracket and locator need to be able to slide back and forth when you install the X-axis gear rack later.

Two Screw F’s in loader
bracket (one not visible here)
Two
screw E’s
in locator
Two screw F’s in

“R” slots in loader
bracket
Installing the Top Rack Support into the Former Right Parking
Module
Install the top rack support that you removed from the new expansion module and install it in the former right
parking module. Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench
Required equipment: Screw A, M4X10 socket head cap screw (low profile) (3 per top rack support)
Make sure to install the rack support with the right loader bracket and locator in
Note
the right parking module.
1 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosely install the middle screw into the machined screw hole in the roof
of the module.

Figure 53 Removing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules

Step 3: Adding Modules to a System Unit or Existing Library
Perform this section if:
• You are installing a completely new library that has more than four frames. Make sure to first
complete Step 1: Installing the System Unit (First Four Frames) on page 187.
OR
• You are adding one or more modules onto an already existing, operating library.Make sure to first
complete Step 2: Preparing an Existing Gen 2 Dual-Robot Library to Receive a New Module on
page 196, then return here and complete this section.
Complete these steps:
• Positioning the New Expansion Module (or Right Parking Module) on page 212


Positioning the New Expansion Module (or Right Parking Module)

The first steps in adding a new expansion module or right parking module to a system unit involve locating
and positioning the expansion module. For more information on location specifications, see the Scalar i6000
Planning Guide.
Note



Note


Note
turns.
leveling leg
leveling foot
feet by hand.


front upper bolt
front lower bolt
back upper bolt
back lower bolt

wrench.
Note
post structure.
To install additional modules, repeat these procedures, Positioning the New Expansion Module (or Right
Parking Module) on page 212, for each additional expansion module.





Note
placements of level
192.
page 193.
Additional Leveling
Note

service door

front to back

left to right


Alignment
marks

2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to raise all of the leveling leg lock nuts to the top and tighten them
Note
process.

1 Unscrew the thumbscrew and remove the LBX/IEX cover plate from the former right parking module in
the existing configuration.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
3 Install the terminator in the new right parking module.
J17 connection
LBX terminator


Note
Additional storage-only expansion modules in positions 9 -12 of a library
configuration ship with the latest LBX board versions. Check to make
certain the LBX2 GEN 3 boards with red stickers are installed.

FRU ID: 104
thumbscrew

connector: J14
connector: J1
plug: W1 to BPI or
from previous LBX
connector: J11
connector: J10
CAN interface
plug: J19
cable
connector: J3
connector: J17
connector: J2
Note

FRU ID: 104

6 Reconnect all cables to the LBX: the aisle light cable, the LBX cable (W1), internal Ethernet cable (W2),
cable (W17).
Step 4: Installing the Gen 2 Hardware

Once all the frames are bolted together and level, there are a few pieces of hardware to install. These parts
are the items that cross frame boundaries, some partially pre-installed cables, and the robots.
• Connecting and Securing the Power Rails on page 225
• Removing the Control Module Cover Plates on page 235

• Removing the Left Parking Module Cover Plate on page 236
• Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable on page 238

• Connecting the Aisle Cable Assembly on page 241
• Checking the Display Cable Connector on page 243
• Routing and Connecting Module Cables on page 243
• Installing the Side Cover on a New Right Parking Module on page 249
• Installing the Gen 2 Robot on page 253
• Verifying Both Robots are Ready for IVT on page 269
• Running IVT and Troubleshooting on page 270
• Reinstalling the Cover Plates on page 271
• Notes for Configuring Partitions and Importing Cartridges on page 272

Connecting and Securing the Power Rails
The power rails are pre-installed. You need to secure adjacent power rails using bridge clamps and connect
adjacent rails via their connectors.
Required equipment:

1 Secure adjacent power rails together with two bridge clamps, one on the upper edge of the rails and
one on the lower edge of the rails. Use the screw holes available on the power rails. Use a 2.5 mm hex
wrench to install two screws in each bridge clamp. See Figure 54 on 226.
2 Connect the power connectors on all adjacent power rails. There are two power connectors on each
side of each rail — a 4-pin connector and a 3-pin connector. The right-most connectors in the right
parking module will not have anything plugged into them. See Figure 55 on 227.


4-pin and 3-pin

connectors

Equipment required:
• Catch tray

Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
Install two T-nut

screws

.
The half-rack load position in the left parking module, and the half-rack end
Note
position in the right parking module are pre-installed. If you are adding new
modules onto the right an pre-existing Gen 2 system, you should have already
removed the half-rack, end position, full rack, right load position, as well as the
loader bracket and locator, as described in Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks
from the Former Right Parking Module on page 204.

Equipment required:


to fit through during robot installation. These racks are pre-installed in the left parking module.
cutouts
robot installation.
cutouts
Half Rack, End Position — Last position on the right. Has no cutouts. These racks are pre-installed in

Slots vs. Holes
(for top rack installation). The top gear racks use the threaded holes for installation, while the bottom and
middle gear racks use the slots in the tabs.


1 Before you begin, gather the appropriate gear racks and separate them into three piles, for installation
on the bottom, middle and top rack supports. Each pile should contain:
• Full rack, standard (no cutouts), enough to complete the row
• One full rack, load position (with cutouts)
as follows:
.
Note
a. The Half Rack, Load Position gear racks are already installed in the left parking module.
c. Lay down the Full Rack, Load Position between the right parking module and the module to its
left.

d. The Half Rack, End Position gear racks are already installed in the right parking module, unless
you are adding additional modules onto an existing system. In that case, you need to install the
lay down the Half Rack, End Position gear rack now.
e. Make sure that all racks are snapped together and lie flat against the rack support.
f. Screw B screws and T-nuts should be pre-assembled. If they are not, install a T-nut on each
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
g. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install the Screw B’s in all the gear racks, starting with the left-
most location. The screws go through the slots in the gear rack tabs and into the raised,
threaded screw holes in the rack supports (see Figure 58 ). Use three screws with T-nuts for
half racks and four screws with T-nuts for full racks.
Figure 58 Installing Bottom and Middle Racks

.
Note
a. The Half Rack, Load Position is already installed in the left parking module.
b. The Half Rack, End Position is already installed in the right parking module.
c. Lay down the standard full gear racks, from left to right, starting with the left parking module/
control module. The ends of the racks snap together to form a tight connection. Snap each one
into the previous one as you go.
d. Lay down the Full Gear Rack, Load Position, between the right parking module and the module
to its left. NOTE: The robot loader bracket locator has two cutouts into which two tabs in the
gear rack must fit. The robot loader bracket and bracket locator should not be screwed down
tightly, so that you can slide them left and right. Adjust the position of the loader bracket and
locator until the rack tabs fit into the cutouts. You may need to loosen some or all of the six
screws that secure the loader bracket and locator (see Figure 60 on 235 for screw locations).
e. The Half Rack, End Position gear racks are already installed in the right parking module, unless
you are adding additional modules onto an existing system. In that case, you need to install the
lay down the Half Rack, End Position gear rack now.
f. Make sure that all top gear racks are snapped together and lie flat against the rack support.
g. In the right parking module, make sure standard rack, load position engages the notch in the
loader bracket.
h. Install the left-most Screw C in the control module first. The screw goes up through the left-most
i. Insert (stage) the remaining Screw C’s in all the top gear racks, from left to right. The screws
go up through the slots in the underside of the top rack support into the threaded screw holes
in the bottom of the gear racks. Use three screws for half racks and four screws for full racks.
See Figure 59 .
j. Tighten all the screws from left to right.

Install screws through the slots in the top rack supports and
up through the underside of the top X-axis gear racks.
k. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to fully tighten the four screws that secure the Right Robot Loader
Bracket (you partially installed these earlier; see Figure 60 ).
l. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to fully tighten the two screws in the Loader Bracket Adapter (partially
installed earlier; see Figure 60 ).

Note
locations.

Removing the Control Module Cover Plates

From the control module, remove the following (see Figure 61 ). Save the cover plates to reinstall later.
• LBX/IEX cover plate — Loosen two thumbscrews.

• Service port panel — Loosen two thumbscrews. You can leave the panel dangling or remove it.
• Cover plate between the upper and lower drive clusters. Loosen the four thumbscrews that retain
the cover plate.
• Bottom drive cluster cover plate. Loosen two thumbscrews.

Figure 61 Removing Cover Plates from the Control Module
Cover plate
between upper
and lower drive
bays
Service
port
panel
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plate
LBX/
IEX
cover
plate
Remove These Cover Cover Plates Removed

Plates
Removing the Left Parking Module Cover Plate

From the left parking module, remove the following cover plate (see Figure 62 ). Save the cover plate to
reinstall later.
• Large cover plate above the power chassis. Loosen two thumbscrews.

Figure 62 Removing a Cover Plate from the Left Parking Module
Cover
plate
above
power
chassis
Remove This Cover Cover Plate Removed

Plate

Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable
In all modules except for the left parking module, the door interlock switch is connected via a cable to that
module’s LBX board. Since the left parking module does not have an LBX board, its door interlock switch
shares the connection with the control module’s door interlock switch. The Gen 2 door switch loop cable
facilitates this sharing. The single end plugs into the LBX board in the control module, and the two
connectors on the “Y” end connect to the door interlock switch connectors in the control module and in the
left parking module. The two ends that connects to the CM LBX board and the CM door interlock cable are
pre-installed. The only thing you need to do is connect the one end of the “Y” that connects to the left parking
module.
Figure 63 Door Switch Loop Cable - Picture for reference only. The cable will NOT be loose; it will be
partially pre-installed in the left parking module
Preinstalled: Preinstalled: Connected

Connected to LBX to control module door
board in control module interlock cable
Connect to
door switch
interlock
cable in left
parking
module
Required tools: None

Required equipment: Door switch loop cable (FRU ID number: 841) (partially installed in control module)
1 Find the door switch loop cable in the control module. One connector on the 2-connector end is already
attached to the CM door interlock cable and the long end is already pre-connected to the LBX board in
the control module. The door switch loop cable should be visible in the open area above the power
chassis. See Figure 64 .

Figure 64 Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable in the Left Parking Module
Door interlock
switch
CM door interlock switch

LPM door switch loop cable
2 Route the two connected cables (CM door interlock cable and LPM door switch loop cable) over the
control module’s lower drive bay and into the left parking module in the space above the power chassis.
3 Connect the free end of the door switch loop cable into the left parking module’s door interlock switch.
4 Secure both cables with the two clips on top of the lower drive bay in the control module.

Figure 65 Securing the Door Switch Loop Cable
Cable
clips
CM door
interlock
cable
LPM door
switch
loop
cable

Connecting the Aisle Cable Assembly
The aisle cable assembly connects the power rails to the SPA/SCC mount assembly. It comes installed in
the left parking module so all you need to do is connect it to the SPA/SCC mount assembly. The aisle cable
assembly is mounted on the left parking module firewall and its two connectors connect into the two power
rail connectors in the left parking module (see Figure 66 ).
Required equipment: Two M4X10 socket head cap screw low profile screws
Figure 66 Cable Aisle Assembly Installed in Left Parking Module
Two screws in
mounting plate
Connect aisle cable

assembly connectors
to power rail
connectors
Power rail
(7-pack)
1 Go to the back of the left parking module. The end of the aisle cable assembly should be visible in the
open area above the power chassis.
2 Route the cable into the control module through the rectangular cutout in the left parking module wall,
then up and over the lower drive bay in the control module.
3 Plug the cable into the lower right connector on the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly (see Figure 67 ).

Figure 67 Aisle Cable Assembly Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly
Connect the
aisle cable
assembly
here

Checking the Display Cable Connector
Make sure the display cable connector (W22 to touch screen) did not get dislodged from the LMM backplane
during the cable replacement/install procedures above. The display cable connector is J16 and is shown in
Figure 68 .
Figure 68 Display Cable Connector on LMM Backplane - J16
connector: J16
plug: W22
to touch screen

Note

LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
thumbscrews

plate.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
3 Locate the W1 and W2 cables on the new expansion module.
W2 cable
(Ethernet)


bulkhead
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17

LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17
J4 J3
W2 cable (Ethernet)
7 Install the LBX terminator into the J17 connection on the LBX board in the last expansion module.
J17 connection
LBX terminator
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew

thumbscrews

Installing the Side Cover on a New Right Parking Module
Only perform this section if you have added a new expansion onto a pre-existing Gen 2 system and this new
module will become the new right parking module. Otherwise, skip this step.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
section 2
drive cluster
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets

screw holes
screw holes

back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw


correctly before you begin operation. Perform these steps for each robot you need to install.
the robot.
facing UP.
(appears loose and
wobbly)
Robot lift area
Robot handle
Robot shipping
restraint
Collector door

Tighten these
thumbscrews
to close door.
Loosen
thumbscrews
to open door.

3 Set the power rail collectors to the correct position (“right-side robot” or “left-side robot”) by sliding the
thumbscrews up or down as described below.
Note
position.
together:
of the robot.
of the robot.

Brackets


Figure 73 .)

Robot
shipping
restraint
thumbscrews

Picker Lift
Handle

8 Place the robot into its correct parking module directly underneath the loader bracket as follows:
Be
bracket.
a. Make sure you install the left robot in the left parking module and the right robot in the right
parking module.
b. Grasping the robot at the two “lift points,” lift the robot into a vertical position, with the collectors
c. Insert the bottom of the robot into the library first, setting it down gently and carefully on the
d. Swing the top of the robot into the library.
e. Make sure the robot is vertical and directly underneath the loader bracket.

Note
The x-axis gear rack has been cut away in this illustration to show the screw
Note
locations.


Top view
Rollers
Middle view
Rollers
Bottom view Rollers

See Figure 78 .
robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door,
unlatch the yellow plastic locking lever, lift the robot up so that its rollers clear the racks, and pull it out
of the library, top end first.)
Rollers engaged on
Rollers engaged on

it’s OK.

Scribe line locations in Scribe line locations in

left parking module right parking module

Power rail load

guides

83 ).
• On both left- and right-side robots, the bottom collector is always in the bottom position
(position 7).
• In left-side robots, the three upper collectors are in the positions 4 – 6 on the power rail.
• In right-side robots, the three upper collectors are in the top three positions (positions 1 – 3) on
the power rail.
Figure 82 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Left Side Robot
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7
Figure 83 Robot Collectors Engaged in Power Rails – Right Side Robot
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7

20 Verify robot motion: Push or pull on the robot handle to move the robot toward the center of the library
just far enough so that it passes over the first junction in the gear racks. If it slides smoothly without
resistance, noise, or jerkiness, everything is properly installed. Proceed to next step.
directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door, unlatch the yellow plastic locking lever,
lift the robot up so that its rollers clear the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
Robot locking
lever in locked
position

Verifying Both Robots are Ready for IVT
Before you can test that everything is working properly after the upgrade, you must verify that both robots
are online.
Robotics start initializing. The active (left) robot performs configuration (scans drive, magazine, and I/E
station fiducials). Then the active robot (left robot) performs a calibration and inventory, and then
performs its robot self test (RST). When complete, the library comes ready (solid green Ready LED on
front panel, also indicated on the touch screen). The passive robot also performs calibration and its
robot self test (RST) but it might take longer to finish than the active robot. Wait till both are done before
proceeding. To check that both robots completed RST, do the following.
Note
indicators turn solid green, this means that the primary robot is ready. It
does NOT mean that the secondary robot is ready (it may still e performing
RST).
9 Verify the robots are ready by confirming the following:

• Name: Both the left and right robots must be displayed.
• Status: One robot must be Active; the other robot must be Passive.

• If the status for either robot indicates Pending, wait until it changes to active or passive.
Pending indicates it is still performing its self test. NOTE: The screen does not update
• If the status for either robot indicates Failed, troubleshoot and fix before continuing.
• State: Both robots must be online.
• Generation: Both robots must be Gen 2.

The IVT uses the active robot for all its tests. The passive robot is inactive during IVT. In order to test both
robots, you must run the full IVT on the active robot, then fail over and run just the Accessor FRU tests on
the newly active robot, as follows:
1 Run IVT on the currently active robot by following all of the instructions in the chapter Installation Testing
and Verification on page 833. If any problems or tickets occur, troubleshoot and retest until all tests
pass. Then return here.
2 Perform a robot failover so that the currently passive robot becomes the active robot.
a. On the LMC, make sure you are viewing the physical library (select View and click the name of
the physical library).
b. Select Tools > Library > Robot Failover.
The Robot Failover dialog box appears. The currently active robot is highlighted.
c. Click Failover.
d. Click Yes to confirm you want to fail over.
The library fails over and the previously passive robot becomes the active robot. A Success
dialog appears.
e. Click OK to close the success dialog.
f. Click Cancel to close the Robot Failover dialog box.
3 Run the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the newly active robot, as follows:


d. Click Start.
4 Run the Picker Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the newly active robot, following the
same instructions as for the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest above, except select Picker Assembly
from the Select Subtest drop-down list.
5 Make the LEFT robot the active robot.
a. Click Tools > Library > Robot Failover.
b. If the left robot is not the active robot, click Failover to make it the active robot. (If the left robot
is already the active robot, click Cancel.)

Replace all cover plates you removed earlier.


the cover plate.
2 From the left parking module and any expansion modules from which you removed a cover plate,
reinstall the following (see Figure 85 ):
Figure 85 Replacing the Control Module and Left Parking Module Cover Plates
Cover plate
between
upper and
lower drive
bays
Service port
panel
Cover plate
above the power
chassis
LBX/IEX
cover plate
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plates
Left parking module Control module
Notes for Configuring Partitions and Importing Cartridges

• The newly installed Left Parking Module contains 4 storage columns (Rack 1, columns 3 and 4 and
Rack 2, columns 1 and 2).

• The newly installed Right Parking Module contains 4 storage columns (Rack 1, columns 1 and 2,
and Rack 2, columns 3 and 4).
The eight columns comprising the left and right parking spaces may
CAUTION contain magazines but these magazines are not visible on the UI and
cannot be used for storage. Do not load cartridges into these columns. See
Figure 86 and Figure 87 .
Figure 86 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Left Parking Module

Figure 87 Do not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Right Parking Module
Rack 1 (back) Rack 2 (door) Rack 2 (door)

No I/E station 24-slot I/E station

Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to a
Gen 2 Single-Robot Library
There are two types of library hardware: Gen1 and Gen2. Gen2 hardware became available with the i10
release in November, 2011, and supports either a single- or dual-robot configuration.
This chapter describes how to upgrade a Gen 1 single-robot library to a Gen 2 single-robot library.
Upgrade Process Overview

The upgrade process consists of the following steps, which must be performed in order:
1 Preparing the Library on page 281
2 Removing Left and Right Side Covers on page 283
3 Removing the Control Module Cover Plates on page 293
4 Removing Gen 1 Hardware and Accessor on page 295
5 Moving the Library to a New Location on page 311
6 Bolting the Modules Together on page 312
7 Verifying the System is Level on page 315
8 Removing the Control Module Cover Plate on page 319
9 Installing the Remaining Gen 2 Hardware on page 320
• Installing the Power Rails on page 320
• Installing the Bottom Rack Supports on page 323
• Installing the Middle Rack Supports on page 327
• Installing the Right Hard Stop on page 329
• Attaching the Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Locator to the Top Rack Support on page
329
• Installing the Top Rack Supports on page 331
10 Installing, Replacing, and Restraining Magazines, and Positioning Calibration Targets on page 338

11 Installing Gen 2 Boards and Cables on page 351
• Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access on page 351
• Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module on page 352
• Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door on page 355
• Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1) on page 355
• Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power Cable on page 357
12 Connecting Modules Together on page 364
13 Reinstalling Service Doors on page 367
14 Installing the Gen 2 Robot on page 368
15 Reinstalling the Cover Plates on page 381
16 Verifying The Robots is Ready for IVT on page 382
17 Running IVT and Troubleshooting on page 383
18 Reconfiguring Partitions and Importing Cartridges on page 384
19 Closing the Service and Access Doors on page 385
20 Dispositioning the Removed Components on page 385
276 Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to a Gen 2 Single-Robot Library

Required Tools and Equipment
Required tools and equipment:
• ESD wrist strap

• 3 mm hex wrench
• 5.5 mm nut driver
• 6 mm hex wrench
• 7 mm nut driver
• T10 Torx wrench
• digital level

Parts List
Table 3 Parts List
Bolts and nuts for bolting 4 In the kit corresponding to

control module to library, the frame
expansion modules
Cable, Aisle, with Mounting FRU ID: 839 1 CM upgrade kit.

Plate (Short)

2-feet
Catch tray N/A One per junction • One in each EM upgrade

between power kit
modules

DLT drives are
being removed
from library and
not being
replaced with
LTO drives.

ordered with I/E)
Hard Stop, Right (with required N/A 1 CM upgrade kit

screws)
Home/Parking Flag, CM N/A 1 CM upgrade kit.
Loader Bracket N/A 1 CM kit

(loose)
Magazine restraint clips FRU ID: 956 One for each • CM upgrade kit (enough for
magazine in the CM)
bottom row of • EM upgrade kit (enough for
each section on EM)
the rear wall of
the library.
Magazines with glued-on FRU ID: 957 3 for CM • 2 in CM upgrade kit

calibration targets 1 for each EM • 1 in each EM upgrade kit

Table 3 Parts List
Power Rail Bridge Clamp N/A 2 per junction • 2 in each EM upgrade kit
between power
rails
Power Rail, 4-pack FRU ID: 951 1 per module • 1 installed in any new
frame that ships
Rack Supports, Bottom N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in each new EM

received
Rack Supports, Middle N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in each new EM

received
Rack Supports, Top N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in each new EM

received
Right side cover, Gen 2 N/A 1 Installed in right-most frame
Robot FRU ID: 204 2 Robot FRU boxes, on the EM

pallet
clamp
SHCSLP BLACK, 10.9
and middle)
3-05992-01 - T-NUT, M4, 5 x-axis gear
tray
rack (top) -
SHCSLP rack (top)
Screw F, M4X6 Socket, Button Screw F • 4 per right CM kit

Head loader bracket
Agile PN and description:

YS42069 -SCR.SKT.HD.M4X6
HTST 400

Table 3 Parts List

box (large, flat), on the PM
pallet

• Board
Assembly,
SPA1 (FRU
ID: 123)
• Board, SCC2
(FRU ID: 122)
Standard equal to:
3 x (# of modules
minus 2)
End Position
Upgrade Kits - Included Parts
CM Kit
• Power rail
• Power rail bridge clamps (1 sets of 2clamps each) - not needed for upgrade - discard
• Rack support, bottom
• Rack support, middle
• Rack support, top
• X-axis gear rack, half rack, end position (goes in right-most expansion module)
• X-axis gear rack, half rack, load position (goes in right-most expansion module)
• LPC1 blade
• Mount assembly, SPA/SCC with SPA1 and SCC2 boards attached

• C-clamp with set screw
• Power cable (W33)
• CAT5 Ethernet cable
• Magazine restraint clips (enough for CM)

• Magazines with glued-on calibration targets (2)
• Calibration target (1, loose)

• Home/parking flag (for CM, single robotics)
• Aisle cable with mounting plate (short, for CM, single robotics)
EM Kit
• Power rail
• X-axis gear rack, full rack, standard (3 per kit)
• Magazine with glued-on calibration target (one per EM kit)
• Magazine restraint clips (enough for EM)
• Catch tray
Important Points
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE PERFORM THIS

WARNING PROCEDURE.
When removing and installing components in the library, remember to

CAUTION attach the ESD strap to your wrist and to an unpainted surface inside the
door.
Upgrade library software to the latest version BEFORE beginning any

CAUTION hardware upgrades. Make sure the library is an i6000 BEFORE upgrading
firmware.
When removing and installing screws, washers, and other small items, if
CAUTION you drop one, FIND IT before proceeding. If a screw were to fall into a drive
or other sensitive component, it could cause damage to equipment and
data, lost time troubleshooting, and require another service call.
Preparing the Library

Perform the following steps before beginning any hardware upgrades:
• Before You Go to the Customer’s Site
• At the Customer’s Site

Before You Go to the Customer’s Site
1 Download the latest library firmware from CSWeb onto your laptop and bring it with you.
2 If the customer’s current library is an i2000, you will also need to upgrade the library to a Scalar i6000.
Make sure that the i6000 upgrade kit has been received by the customer before you go to the
customer’s site.
3 The customer must unload all of their drives before you arrive.
4 If the customer’s library contains DLT media, the customer needs to export it all from the library before
you arrive. The Gen 2 library does not support DLT drives or media. You will remove/replace DLT drives
and magazines later.
At the Customer’s Site

1 Verify the upgrade kit contains all of the parts listed in the Parts List on page 278.
There is one extra part in the CM kit that should be placed in the discard
Note
pile:
- Power rail bridge clamps (one extra set)
Save all the upgrade kit boxes, the robot FRU boxes, and the side panel
Note
return kit (empty box) for use in boxing up all the removed components
later.
2 If you are installing additional expansion modules to the right of the library, make sure there is enough
room for these as well. If there is not sufficient space, you will need to move the library (not now, but
later in the process). Verify the following:
• There is adequate clearance for all access and service doors.

• The selected location for the new modules is level.
3 Designate an area to use as a temporary “discard pile.” You will be removing a number of Gen 1
components from the library that will not be reused again. Quantum has arranged a specific disposition
strategy for each region. Find out from Quantum’s Install Coordinator how to dispose of all of these extra
parts. As you go through the procedures below, any time an item needs to be placed in the discard pile
it will be noted. When you are finished upgrading the library, you will place all of these non-reusable
parts into the boxes that came with the upgrade (Robot FRU boxes, side panel kit, and CM/PM/EM kit
boxes) and disposition them as directed by the Install Coordinator.
4 Connect your laptop to the service port and log on to the Library Management Console (LMC).
5 Take a standard library snapshot and save it to your laptop (Tools > Capture Snapshot).
6 Save the library configuration to your laptop (Tools > Save/Restore).
7 Verify there are no open tickets on the library. If there are, resolve and close all of them.
8 Recommended: Run IVT without the get/put test (no scratch tape) to verify the quality of the existing
installation (frame-to-frame alignment) before upgrading (see Running the Installation Verification Test
on page 853). NOTE: If you are moving the library to a new location, you do not need to run IVT.
9 Unload all tape drives.
10 If the customer’s library contains DLT tape drives and magazines:

a. The customer should have previously removed all DLT media. Make sure this is done.
b. Go to the Library Explorer by clicking Tools > Library Explorer and pull up the screens for all
modules that have DLT partitions. Save the maps to your laptop or print them. You will use the
maps to help you reconfigure partitions later.
c. Delete all DLT partitions.
d. Remove all DLT tape drives from the library.
e. Run a Teach Config and Calibrate.
You will replace DLT drives and magazines with LTO drives and magazines
Note
later in the process. The customer will import any new LTO cartridges and
re-configure partitions later.
11 IMPORTANT! Upgrade library software to the latest version. You must upgrade software before
beginning any hardware upgrades. The minimum version required for Gen 2 hardware is code version
630Q.GS20601 (i10). See the Quantum Support site for current releases at www.quantum.com/
support. Refer to the latest firmware installation procedure posted on CSWeb.
If the current library is a Scalar i2000, you must first upgrade them to a
Note
Scalar i6000 using the Scalar i6000 upgrade kit before upgrading library
firmware to the latest version.
12 If the customer ordered replacement LTO drives, install them in the spaces vacated by the DLT drives.
13 IMPORTANT! Save the library configuration.
14 Shut down the library as follows:
a. Make sure there is no I/O activity occurring in the library.
b. Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu, select the name of
the physical library.
c. Select Operations > System Shutdown.
d. Wait until the LMC display turns dark.
15 Turn off power to the library by pressing the Power button on the indicator panel.
16 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the down (O) position.
18 Remove the bottom row of magazines (section 10) from Rack 1 (rear wall) of every module. HINT: If
you “bump” the bottom magazine up slightly, it will displace the two magazines above it slightly, giving
you enough room to remove the bottom magazine without removing all of the magazines above it. Set
the removed magazines aside, keeping them in order so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations later. Leave the bumped magazines bumped up for now.
Removing Left and Right Side Covers

Equipment needed: 2.5 mm hex wrench
You need to remove the left and right side covers on the existing library and replace them with new side
covers with approved EMI glass.
• Left side cover of control module— See Removing the Left Side Cover of Existing Control
Module on page 285.

• Right side cover of right-most expansion module — See Removing the Right Side Cover from
the Right-most Expansion Module on page 288.

Removing the Left Side Cover of Existing Control Module
1 From inside the library, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the eight (8) screws that attach the left side
cover to the control module.
Note
2.5 mm screws 2.5 mm screw
Front of module
Back of module
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
This screw is located behind the

X-axis chain assembly and is
difficult to remove

2 Lift the left side cover off the module.
3 Place the side cover in the discard pile.
4 Remove the bottom L-bracket to provide clearance for the power rails. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to
remove the screws in the L-bracket.
5 Place the screws and L-bracket in the discard pile.

2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-bracket

Removing the Right Side Cover from the Right-most Expansion
Module
1 From the last expansion module on the right (or the control module if this is a single-frame system),
remove the storage magazines in sections 1- 5 of column 4 of rack 1 (see Figure 88 ). This will enable
you to access the 2.5 mm hex screws that attach the right side cover to the module.
unsnaps.
Figure 88 Removing Magazines from Right-Most Module
rack 1 (back)
column 4
section 1
section 3
section 4
section 5
section 7
drive cluster
section 8
section 9
section 10

2 From inside the library, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the eight (8) screws that attach the right
side cover to the module.
Note
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
3 Lift the right side cover off the module.


screw holes
screw holes
5 Remove right-side L-brackets as follows:

• Remove the bottom L-bracket.
• If you are planning to add one or more modules on to the right side of the system, also remove
the other L-brackets that mounts the right side cover to the storage wall.

Two screws secure each L-bracket. You already removed one of the screws in each L-bracket in order
to remove the side cover. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the remaining screws in each L-bracket.
6 If you received an expansion module with a right side cover already attached, then put the screws and
L-brackets in the discard pile.
2.5 mm screws
secure the
L-brackets
What to do if You Cannot Remove Both Side Covers

• If this is a CM-only configuration and there is a wall or other equipment or racks preventing you from
removing the side covers, move the CM out so that you can remove the side covers.
• If this is a multi-module library wedged in between other equipment or walls and you cannot remove
the side covers, there a few extra steps you will need to perform as you go through the upgrade
process.
• If the left side cover cannot be removed, you need to remove the X-axis drive plate assembly
before removing the middle rails. See If Left Side Cover Remains Installed: Removing the X-
Axis Drive Plate Assembly (Including Motor) on page 291.
• If the right side cover cannot be removed, you must remove some rails before you can remove
the accessor assembly. See If Right Side Cover Remains Installed: Removing the Gen 1
Accessor Assembly on page 293.
If Left Side Cover Remains Installed: Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly

(Including Motor)
You need to do this if you were unable to remove the left side cover. If you
Note
removed the left side cover, skip this step.
Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench, 3 mm hex wrench, 4 mm hex wrench

FRU ID: 908 (X-axis drive plate assembly (motor, shaft assembly, motor belt, and home sensor))
1 Perform this procedure after performing Removing the X-Axis Belt on page 414.
2 Disconnect the X-axis motor cable from the aisle accessor cable assembly (W10).
aisle accessor
cable assembly (W10)

3 Use the 3 mm hex wrench to remove the three screws that attach the X-axis drive plate assembly to the
X-axis substrate.
3 mm screw
3 mm screws
4 Remove the X-axis drive plate.
If Right Side Cover Remains Installed: Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly
You cannot do this in a CM-only configuration. Instead you would need to take
Note
apart the accessor assembly in order to remove it. It may be easier to move the
library into a convenient location and remove the right side cover, rather than
take apart the accessor assembly.
1 Slide the robot into a module other than the right-most expansion module.
2 Remove the right most top, middle, and bottom rails from the right-most expansion module.
3 Detach the accessor from the x moving cable.
4 Using both hands, slide the accessor assembly to the right so that it slides off of the rails and into the
right-most expansion module.
5 Continuing to hold the accessor assembly with both hands, lift it out of the library.

From the control module, remove the following (see Figure 89 ). Save the cover plates to reinstall later.

the cover plate.

Cover plate
between upper
and lower drive
clusters
Service
port
panel
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plate
LBX/
IEX
cover
plate

Plates

Removing Gen 1 Hardware and Accessor
Remove the following components, in this order.
Place all of the removed components in the “Discard” bin and disposition as follows. Do not leave them at
the customer’s site.
1 Removing the X-Axis Hard Stop on page 295
2 Removing the X-Axis Belt on page 295
3 Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly on page 297
4 Removing the X-Axis Belt Tensioner and Bracket on page 298
5 Removing the X-Axis Chain Assembly on page 299
6 Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly on page 302
7 Removing the X-Axis Chain Restraint Shelf on page 303
8 Removing the Gen 1 Aisle Accessor Cable Assembly (W10) on page 304
9 Removing the Upper X-Axis Rails on page 306
10 Removing the Lower X-Axis Rails on page 307
11 Removing the Middle X-Axis Rails and Substrate on page 308
12 Removing the LMD from the Control Module on page 309
Removing the X-Axis Hard Stop

If the Gen 1 library is a single control module, the hard stop is in the control module. If the Gen 1 library is
a multi-module library, the hard stop is located in the right-most expansion module.
Tools required: 3 mm hex wrench
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the hard stop from the substrate below the X-axis middle rail in the
right-most module in the library.
2 Place the hard stop in the discard pile.
3 mm screw

The X-axis belt is on the middle rail of the library. Use the following procedures to remove the X-axis belt
from the library, regardless of the number of modules it includes. The only difference is the length of the X-
axis belt.

Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench, 4 mm hex wrench
FRU ID: 701 (X-axis belt)
assembly touch.
spring-load
screw tensioner arm
2 Use a 4 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws that attach the X-axis belt clamp to the X-axis
carriage. The X-axis belt clamp bracket will be removed from the X-axis carriage.
X-axis carriage
belt clamp assembly
4 mm screws

2.5 mm hex screws

6 Place the X-axis belt and clamp assembly in the discard pile.
Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly

The X-axis drive plate assembly contains the motor, shaft assembly, motor belt, and home sensor.
aisle accessor
X-axis substrate. HINT: For easier access, you can “back out” the top two drives out about 6 inches.
3 mm screw
3 mm screws

4 Place the X-axis drive plate in the discard pile.
5 If you backed out one or more drives, push them back into position and tighten their thumbscrews.
Removing the X-Axis Belt Tensioner and Bracket

The X-axis belt tensioner and bracket are on the middle rail of the right-most module in the library.
FRU ID: 904 (X-axis belt tensioner)
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the four screws that connect the X-axis tensioner and bracket to the
X-axis channel. Remove the assembly from the module.
2 Place the X-axis belt tensioner and bracket in the discard pile.
3 mm screws

substrate
tensioner mounting
bracket
3 mm screws
tensioner assembly

FRU ID: 828 (X-axis chain assembly (W8))
Library configurations of 7 - 12 modules also contain an X-axis cable trough.

Note
This trough will come off along with the X-axis chain assembly (see picture
below).
Cable trough

1 On the top of the X-axis chain assembly, release the Y-axis home sensor cable by flipping up the cable
clamp.
cable clamp
Y-axis chain
assembly (W9)
connector
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
3 Disconnect the Y-axis motor cable from the X-axis chain assembly (W8).
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
Y-axis
motor cable

4 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws that attach the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the
Y-axis drive
mount assembly
3 mm screws
X-axis
chain assembly
5 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws that secure the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the
3 mm screws
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)

6 Undo the Velcro straps that attach the X-axis chain (W8) to the bulkhead.
Velcro straps
unplug W8 connector
8 Remove the X-axis chain from the module.

9 Place the X-axis chain in the discard pile.
Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly

1 Holding the accessor assembly with two hands, slide it to the left and out of the library.
2 Place the accessor assembly in the discard pile.

Removing the X-Axis Chain Restraint Shelf
This shelf is installed in all modules except for the control module. It is located below the bottom row of
magazines.
1 The bottom row of magazines should already be removed (you should have done this earlier) but if not,
remove the bottom row now. HINT: If you “bump” the bottom magazine up, it will displace the two
magazines above it slightly, giving you enough room to remove the bottom magazine without removing
all of the magazines above it. Set the removed magazines aside, keeping them in order so that you can
reinstall them in the same locations later. Leave the bumped magazines bumped up for now.
2 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove one screw that holds the drive cluster into the rear wall. Save this
screw.
3 Lift the shelf out.
It is somewhat difficult to remove the shelf. You may need to rotate the front
Note
of the shelf up, or shift the shelf to the right, before it will come out.
4 Reinstall the screw you removed earlier.

5 Place the X-axis chain restraint shelves in the discard pile.

Removing the Gen 1 Aisle Accessor Cable Assembly (W10)
This cable connects the X-axis chain assembly to the LMM backplane.
Tools required: 2.5 mm hex wrench; small flat-blade screwdriver (for opening the ferrite clamp)
1 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to unscrew two screws securing the aisle accessor cable assembly (W10) to
the front of the control module bulkhead.
unscrew
two screws
2 Go to the back of the library.

3 In the control module, above the lower drive bay, open the two cable clamps that secure the three W10
cables.

4 Reach through the vertical opening to the left of the lower drive bays in the control module and unplug
the three cable connectors from the LMM backplane.
Remove these
three
connectors
Reach
Remove through here
to access the
connectors
Flattened view identifying the

connectors to remove

5 There is a ferrite clamp that is attached around the cables at the back of the control module just behind
the firewall on top of the lower drive bay. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to unclip the ferrite clamp
from the cables.
Ferrite clamp
attached to
cables
Aisle accessor
cable assembly Ferrite clamp
cables unclipped
6 Thread the cable aisle assembly cables through the hole on the front of the control module and pull the
cables out through the front.
7 Place the aisle accessor cable assembly and ferrite clamp in the discard pile.
Removing the Upper X-Axis Rails

Remove the upper X-axis rails from all modules. The rails fit together in a tongue-and-groove fashion.
Expansion modules have four screws that secure the rail. The screw on the
Note
left end secures the rail to the module on the left.
The control module has three screws that secure the rail.

FRU ID: 902 (control module X-axis upper and lower rail), 903 (expansion module X-axis upper and lower
rail), 946 (i6000)
1 Remove the rails from right to left, starting in the right-most expansion module and moving toward the
control module.
2 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench remove the rails.
The upper and lower rails for longer library configurations (9 - 12 modules)
Note
contain elongated slots and identification holes.

3 Place the upper X-axis rails in the discard pile.
2.5 mm hex screw

2.5 mm hex screws

elongated slot
Removing the Lower X-Axis Rails

Remove all the lower X-axis rails in all modules. The rails fit together in a tongue-and-groove fashion.
Expansion modules have four screws that secure the rail. The screw on the left
Note
end secures the rail to the module on the left.

rail), 946 (i6000)
control module.
2 Use the 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the lower X-axis rail.

3 Place the lower X-axis rails in the discard pile.
2.5 mm hex
screws
2.5 mm hex screw
longer slots and ID mark (hole)
elongated slot
Removing the Middle X-Axis Rails and Substrate

Remove the middle rails with the substrate from all modules. Remove the rails and substrate from right to
left, starting in the right-most expansion module.
Tools required: 2.5 mm hex wrench; 3 mm hex wrench
For each module, remove the substrate and middle rail as a unit as follows:
1 The middle rails overlap the junction between modules. Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the two
screws that secure the middle rail in the module you are working in to the substrate in the next module
to the left.
junction remove two screws
middle X-axis rails substrate
2 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove eight (8) screws securing the substrate to the rear wall of the
module. There are four screws at the top side of the substrate and four screws on the bottom side of
the substrate.
3 Remove the substrate and middle rail as one unit.
4 Place the substrate/middle rails in the discard pile.

Remove four screws
securing top of substrate
Remove four screws

securing bottom of
substrate (not visible in this
picture)
Removing the LMD from the Control Module

Gen 1 libraries use the library motor drive (LMD). Gen 2 libraries use a blade that looks identical, but it is
functionally different, called the library power control (LPC1). The LPC1 blade has a label on its spine that
says “LPC.”
Be sure you remove the LMD and replace it with the LPC1 later. If the
CAUTION LPC1 is not installed, the Gen 2 library will not work.

Removing the Gen 1 Library Motor Drive (LMD)
The LMD is part of the Library Management Module (LMM). The LMD will be replaced by the LPC which is
part of the Gen 2 hardware.
LMD blade
management control
blade (MCB)
robotics control
unit (RCU) board
library motor
drive (LMD) board

FRU ID: 102 (library motor drive blade)
2 Use your thumbs to unlock the latch hooks by pushing them to the right. Pull the latch hooks out to
unplug the LMD from the LMM’s backplane.
latch hooks
3 Carefully slide the LMD straight out of the LMM.

4 Place the LMD in the discard pile.
Moving the Library to a New Location

If you need to move the library to a new location, do so now following the steps in this section. If you do not
need to move the library, skip this section.
If the current library consists of 4 or fewer modules, you can move them
Note
If the together as a unit. If the library contains more than 4 modules, you can move
the first four modules together, but the rest of the modules must be unhooked
and moved separately.
1 Close the access doors.

2 Remove power cables from all power supplies on the backs of all modules.
3 If more than four modules, detach all the cables mentioned in Connecting Modules Together on page
364.
4 If more than four modules, you will need to remove all the attachment bolts that connect the frames
together (after the four modules) so you can move the frames individually.

Bolting the Modules Together
You will need to bolt the control module to the left of the expansion module. You will also need to bolt any
additional modules you added, moved, or swapped.
The steps are the same for all modules. Steps include:
1 Positioning the New Module(s) on page 312
2 Lowering the Leveling Legs on page 312
3 Raising the New Module(s) Off the Casters on page 312
4 Aligning the New Module(s) with the Library on page 313
5 Inserting the Attachment Bolts on page 314
6 Tightening the Attachment Bolts on page 315
7 Setting the Leg Lock Nuts on page 315
Positioning the New Module(s)

1 Position additional expansion modules to the right of the existing library.

3 Verify that the control module and other additional modules are positioned correctly.

Note
Raising the New Module(s) Off the Casters


1 Use either the 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench to raise each of the four corner legs of the
Note
turns.
leveling leg
leveling foot
feet by hand.
Aligning the New Module(s) with the Library

1 Push the expansion module toward the control module until the frames touch.
2 Push any new modules toward their adjacent modules until the frames touch.

3 Adjust the control module leveling legs until the frame corners and the attachment bolts are aligned.
Repeat for any additional modules.

Required equipment: Frame-to-frame bolts
1 Verify that the adjacent sides of the control module and expansion module are parallel.
If not, adjust the leveling legs on the opposite side of the control module until the adjacent sides are
parallel. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the same number of turns. Repeat for any additional
modules.
2 Verify that the attachment holes are aligned. If not, adjust the leveling legs of the control module and/or
additional modules until the attachment holes align. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the same
number of turns.
Insert the attachment bolt from right to left into the attachment hole.
The pictures below shows two standard expansion modules.

Note
front upper bolt
front lower bolt

back upper bolt
back lower bolt

wrench.
Note
post structure.

2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to tighten all of the leveling leg lock nuts.
Note
process.
3 When you have finished bolting all the modules together, go Verifying the System is Level on page 315.

4 Lowering All Other Leveling Legs on page 319



Note
placements of level
318.

Additional Leveling
Note
service door

front to back

left to right

Removing the Control Module Cover Plate

From the control module, remove the following cover plate (see Figure 90 ). Save the cover plate to reinstall
later.
Figure 90 Removing a Cover Plate from the Control Module
Cover
plate
above
power
chassis
Remove This Cover Plate Removed

Cover Plate

Installing the Remaining Gen 2 Hardware
Some of the Gen 2 hardware came pre-installed in the control module and any expansion modules you
installed. Installing the remaining Gen 2 hardware and robot consists of the following steps. Perform the
following steps in order:
1 Installing the Power Rails on page 320
2 Installing the Bottom Rack Supports on page 323
3 Installing the Catch Trays on page 325
4 Installing the Middle Rack Supports on page 327
5 Installing the Right Hard Stop on page 329
6 Attaching the Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Locator to the Top Rack Support on page 329
7 Installing the Top Rack Supports on page 331
8 Installing the X-Axis Gear Racks on page 333
Installing the Power Rails

Install one power rail per module. Install the power rails from left to right. Start with the control module and
end with the right-most expansion module.
There are two yellow locking levers at the bottom of the power rail. These are
Note
connected to two latches on the back of the power rail which, when locked,
engage with the vent holes in the module wall and secure the power rail in
place. See Figure 92 and Figure 1 .

Required equipment:
• One power rail per module (FRU ID: 950).

You will have an extra set of bridge clamps and screws when you are finished.
Note
Place the extra hardware in the discard pile.


4-pin connectors
1 Make sure the two yellow locking levers on the bottom of the power rail are in the unlocked position (as
you look at the rail from the front, move them left until they stop as shown in Figure 92 ). You may need
to pull the tab toward you slightly to get them to move.
2 Hold the power rail with the front of the rail (with the yellow and green colored rails) facing down. Insert
the three insertion tabs into the lowest row of vent holes on the rear wall of the library.
3 Lift the top end of the power rail up into the vertical position. Press the power rail firmly against the rear
wall of the library.
4 Slide the two yellow locking levers on the bottom of the power rail into the locked position (vertical) by
sliding them to the right until they stop.

5 Install the remaining power rails in the same manner.
6 When all of the power rails are installed in all of the modules, secure adjacent power rails together with
two bridge clamps, one on the upper edge of the rails and one on the lower edge of the rails. Use the
screw holes available on the power rails. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install two screws in each bridge
clamp.
7 Connect the power connectors on all adjacent power rails. There is one power connector on each side
of each rail — a 4-pin connector. The right-most connectors in the right-most expansion module will not
have anything plugged into them.
Installing the Bottom Rack Supports

Each frame requires a bottom rack support onto which the bottom robotic rack is attached. Install one
bottom rack support in each frame.
The sheet metal on the underside of the rack support is sheared off for about 1/
Note
2 inch all along the back edge. This allows the rack support to clear the existing
rubber mat installed along the floor of the back of Gen 1 libraries. If the rubber
mat is worn off, it will not affect installation.

Equipment needed:
• One bottom rack support per module (pre-installed in any additional expansion modules ordered as
part of this installation).
• Screw A, M4X10 socket head cap screws (low profile) — 3 per rack support
1 Make sure the rack support is in the proper installation position: the edge with the three notched holes
faces up and toward the front of the library (see Figure 93 ).
2 Place the rack support in the module. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install three screws in the locations
shown in Figure 94 .
Figure 93 Bottom Rack Support
Three notched holes

face up and toward
front of library

Figure 94 Bottom Rack Support Installed

Equipment required:
• Catch tray
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut

Install two T-nut

screws

Installing the Middle Rack Supports
Install one middle rack support in each module. Any additional expansion modules ordered with this
configuration come with the middle rack support pre-installed.
Required equipment:
• Middle rack supports

There are two rows of screw holes in the middle of the rear wall of the
Note
module frames. The middle rack supports attach to the lower set of holes
on the rear wall, not the upper set of holes.
1 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to partially install the second screw into the firewall.
2 Hang the middle rack support over this screw using the notch in the rack support.
3 Loosely install the other three screws, then fully tighten all four screws from right to left.
Loosely install this screw first, then hang rack

support from this screw. Then install and tighten
all screws.

Alignment
marks

Installing the Right Hard Stop
The middle rack supports in the control module need to have a black rubber hard stop installed.
Required equipment:
• One hard stop

1 Remove the right hard stop from the control module kit. Use a T10 Torx wrench to remove two screws.
support in the right-most expansion module. Use a T10 Torx wrench to install the two screws. The
padded portion of the hard stop faces to the left (toward the center of the library when installed). The
UP arrow points upward.
Attaching the Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Locator to the

Top Rack Support
The robot requires a loader bracket in its control module. Attach the robot loader bracket to top rack support
OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY before installing the top rack supports in the library.
Required tools:

• T10 Torx wrench
Required equipment:
• Top rack support (1)

• Loader bracket (1)
• Screw F, M4X6 Socket, Button Head (4, for loader bracket)
Top rack support

Loader bracket
1 Install the loader bracket OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY.

a. Use a T10 Torx wrench to loosely install two Screw E’s through the slots in the loader bracket
locator and into the top rack support. Do not tighten the screws all the way. The locator must
be able to slide back and forth easily along the length of the slot. See Figure 96 . You will tighten
fully after you install the gear racks.
b. Place the loader bracket against the top rack support. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to loosely
install four Screw F’s through the slots in the loader bracket into the top rack support. Use the
slots marked “R”, not the holes marked “L”. Do not tighten the screws all the way. The bracket
must fit over the locator and both should be able to slide back and forth easily along the length
of the slots. You will tighten fully after you install the gear racks. See Figure 96 .

Figure 96 Loader Bracket Attached to Top Rack Support

Installing the Top Rack Supports

One top rack support is installed in each module. Top rack supports come pre-installed in any additional
expansion modules ordered as part of this installation.
Note
of the module.
5 Special instructions for installing in the control module: Place the rack support with loader bracket
attached into the library. Before hanging the rack support from the middle screw, first lift the front of the
loader bracket into position. The top lip must fit over the top front edge of the door opening (not under
it). Then lift the rack support and hang it from the screw as described above.

Figure 97 Installing the Top Rack Supports in the Control Module
Figure 98 Installing the Top Rack Supports in the Control Module (Loader Bracket Attached)
Note: Top
lip of loader
bracket fits
on top of
the front
edge of the
door
opening


Equipment required:


Half Rack, Load Position — Contains cutouts for the left robot’s wheels to fit through during robot
installation. These racks are pre-installed in the control module.
cutouts
Slots vs. Holes




• One half rack, load position (with cutouts)
• One half rack, end position (no cutouts)
as follows:
.
Note
a. The Half Rack, Load Position gear racks should be installed in the control module.
c. Lay down the Half Rack, Load Position.
d. Lay down the Half Rack, End Position.
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
most location. The screws go through the slots in the gear rack tabs and into the threaded screw
holes in the rack supports (see Figure 100 ). Use three screws with T-nuts for half racks and
four screws with T-nuts for full racks.

Figure 100 Installing Bottom and Middle X-Axis Racks

.
Note
a. The Half Rack, Load Position should be installed in the control module.
b. Lay down the standard full gear racks, from left to right, starting with the control module/control
module. The ends of the racks snap together to form a tight connection. Snap each one into the
previous one as you go.
c. Lay down the Half Rack, End Position.
d. Make sure that all top gear racks are snapped together and lie flat against the rack support.

e. Install the left-most Screw C in the control module first. The screw goes up through the left-most
f. Insert (stage) the remaining Screw C’s in all the top gear racks, from left to right. The screws
go up through the slots in the underside of the top rack support (use the slots closest to the rear
wall) and into the threaded screw holes in the bottom of the gear racks. Use three screws for
half racks and four screws for full racks. See Figure 101 .
g. Tighten all the screws from left to right.
Note: Gear racks are shown lifted up to indicate which holes are used.
Screw holes, full rack, standard
Screw holes, half rack, end position

Installing, Replacing, and Restraining Magazines, and
Positioning Calibration Targets
This section includes installing new magazines, reinstalling removed magazines, restraining magazines
with restraint clips, installing magazines with glued-on calibration targets, and installing loose calibration
targets.
For remove/replace instructions, see Magazine Installation Instructions on page 348, Removing Calibration
Targets on page 350, and Replacing Calibration Targets on page 350.
Some magazines require glued-on calibration targets so they do not

CAUTION get knocked off when removing/installing a robot.
1 There are 14 standard magazines (do not have glued-on calibration targets) in the control module in
Rack 1, Column 1 and Rack 2, Column 4, shown with red X’s in the figure below.
a. Remove these fourteen magazines from the control module.
b. Install as many of the magazines as you need in the expansion module (Rack 1, Column 1; and
Rack 2, Column 4, Sections 6 – 10), shown in green stripes in the figure below.
c. Place any unused magazines in the discard pile.
Move magazines from these locations To these locations in the expansion

in the control module module
Control module Expansion module Expansion module

Control module
Rack 2 (door) Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 2 (door)
Rack 1 (rear wall)

2 Remove 3 extra magazines with glued-on calibration targets in the control module. These magazines
are located in Rack 1, Column 1 and Rack 2, Column 4, shown with red X’s in the figure below.
a. Remove these three magazines from the control module.
b. Set them aside for use later. You will install them in the expansion module in the locations
shown for magazines with glued-on calibration targets in Figure 105 on 344.
Remove magazines from these

locations in the control module
Control module Control module

Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 2 (door)

3 Reinstall the five magazines into the expansion module that you removed earlier in preparation for
removing the right side cover (Rack 1, Column 4, Sections 1 – 5). See Removing the Right Side Cover
from the Right-most Expansion Module on page 288.
Add back in these five

magazines
Expansion Module
Rack 1 (Rear Wall)
4 If there are DLT magazines installed in the library, replace them with LTO magazines.

5 Reinstall the bottom section of magazines on the rear wall of all modules (Rack 1, Section 10), add
glued-on calibration targets and restraint clips, as follows (refer to Figure 103 on 342):
All magazines in the bottom section of the rear wall (Rack 1, Section
CAUTION 10) require a magazine restraint clip to be installed.
If the calibration target belongs on a magazine in the bottom section

CAUTION of the rear wall (Rack 1, Section 10) you must replace the magazine
with a magazine that has glued-on calibration targets. Do not use a
magazine with a standalone calibration target, as the targets can get
knocked off when removing/installing a robot.
a. Make sure you put the magazines containing media back the same place they were before.
b. If a magazine in section requires a calibration target, switch out the standard magazine with a
magazine that has glued-on calibration targets before reinstalling. Make sure to keep any tapes
within the magazine in the same order. (For target locations, refer to Figure 103 on 342. If your
configuration is different from that shown below, see Calibration Target Positions on page 345
for pictures of all possible configurations).
c. Reinstall each magazine in Section 10 by putting all four magazine tabs into their slots in the
library rear wall. Push the magazine firmly against the rear wall and push downward until it
clicks into place.
d. Install a magazine restraint clip on top of each magazine in Section 10 (for instructions, see
Magazine Installation Instructions on page 348 below).
e. Reseat the two magazines above each magazine in this section. Make sure these two
magazines are firmly seated.
Figure 102 Magazine Restraint Clips and Glued Calibration Targets in Section 10 on Rear Wall
G = Requires a
magazine with
glued-on
calibration
target
All magazines in
section 10 on the
rear wall require
restraint clips. All
magazines with
calibration targets in
section 10 require
glued-on calibration
G G G G targets.
Control Module Expansion Module Right-Most Expansion

Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall) Module Rack1 (rear wall)
Section 10
f.

6 Install magazine restraint clips and glued calibration targets in Rack 1, Section 5, as follows (refer to
Figure 103 on 342):
All magazines in the section just above the middle rail on the rear wall
CAUTION (Rack 1, Section 5), require a magazine restraint clip to be installed.
If the calibration target belongs on a magazine in the section just

CAUTION above the middle rail on the rear wall (Rack 1, Section 5), you must
replace the magazine with a magazine that has glued-on calibration
targets. Do not use a magazine with a standalone calibration target,
as the targets can get knocked off when removing/installing a robot.
a. Use your fist to “bump” up each magazine in Rack 1, Section 5. This will dislodge the bottom
magazine and slightly displace the two magazines above it, giving you enough room to work
without removing all of the magazines above it.
b. If a magazine in Section 5 requires a calibration target, switch out the standard magazine with
a magazine that has glued-on calibration targets. Make sure to keep any tapes within the
magazine in the same order. (For target locations, refer to Figure 103 on 342. If your
c. Reinstall/reseat each magazine in Section 5 by putting all four magazine tabs into their slots in
the library rear wall. Push the magazine firmly against the rear wall and push downward until it
clicks into place.
Section 5
All magazines in
section 5 on the rear
G G wall require restraint
clips. All magazines
with calibration
targets in section 5
require glued-on
calibration targets.
G G G G G = Requires a
magazine with
Control Module Expansion Module Right-Most Expansion glued-on cal
Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall) Module Rack1 (rear wall)
target
f.

7 Install a new loose calibration target on a magazine in the control module door (Rack 2, Column 5,
Section 5) (see Figure 104 ). For instructions, see Replacing Calibration Targets on page 350.
Only the magazine indicated with an “N” needs a new target. The other
Note
calibration targets should already be installed.
The target to install in Figure 104 has a red box drawn around it in addition
Note
to the “N”. If you printed this document in black-and-white it is harder to
distinguish.
Figure 104 Calibration Targets in Control Module Door
Install a
standalone
calibration
target on this
magazine
Rack 2 (door)
8 Install 3 or 4 new loose calibration targets in the right-most expansion module as shown in Figure 105
and Figure 106 . Depending on the module’s configuration, the number of targets and the locations of
these targets will differ. The back wall may not need an additional loose calibration target.
Only the magazines indicated with an “N” need the new targets. The other
Note
The targets to install in Figure 105 and Figure 106 have red boxes drawn
Note
around them in addition to the “N’s”. If you printed this document in black-
and-white they is harder to distinguish.

Figure 105 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall)
N N
Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 1 (rear wall)
No drives installed Drives installed in lower Drives installed in upper Drives installed in upper
drive cluster drive cluster and lower drive clusters
Figure 106 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 2 (Door)
N N
N N
Rack 2 (door) Rack 2 (door)

No I/E stations installed 24-slot I/E station
installed

9 Confirm all the calibration targets are installed in their proper locations as shown in Calibration Target
Positions on page 345.
The calibration targets in different types of modules are in different

Note
positions. Some are different from Gen 1 target locations, so check each
module carefully.
Calibration Target Positions

• Control Module — See Figure 107 .
• Standard Expansion Modules — See Figure 108 .
• Right-most Expansion Module — See Figure 109 and Figure 110 .
Figure 107 Calibration Targets in Control Module
N= Requires
new loose target
G = Requires
magazine with
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
NG N Gen 1 target
remains as is

Figure 108 Calibration Targets in Standard Expansion Modules
N= Requires
new loose target
With or
G = Requires without
I/E
magazine with station
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
Gen 1 target
remains as is
Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 2 (door) Rack 2 (door)

No I/E station or 24-slot 72-slot I/E station
I/E station installed installed

Figure 109 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall)
N N
NG NG NG NG NG NG NG
NG G G NG G G
Figure 110 Calibration Targets in Right-Most Expansion Module - Rack 2 (Door)
N= Requires
N new loose target
G = Requires
magazine with
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
Gen 1 target
N N
remains as is
N
N N

installed

Magazine Installation Instructions
Magazines should be installed in a bottom-to-top order, except where noted otherwise.
Required equipment:
• FRU ID: 1017 — LTO magazine with barcode label

• FRU ID: 957 — LTO magazine with barcode label and glued-on calibration targets (for magazines
with calibration targets in Rack 1, Sections 5 and 10 only)
• FRU ID: 956 — Magazine restraint clips (for magazines in Rack 1, Sections 5 and 10 only)
Figure 111 Magazine Restraint Clip
Tabs
1 Insert the magazine in the appropriate space, making sure the hooking tabs align with the anchor slots
and the barcode label is at the top.
2 Make sure that the barcode label is clean, and clean it if necessary.
3 Using both hands, gently push the magazine downwards, until it snaps in place.
Make sure that all four tabs are fully engaged and that the back of the
Note
magazine is flush with the wall of the module.
4 If the magazine is located in the section 5 or section 10 on the rear wall (Rack 1), install a yellow plastic
magazine restraint clip on top of the magazine before installing the magazine above it.
a. Hold the magazine restraint clip with the tabs facing up.
b. Press the two ends together slightly, so that you can insert the two ends of the magazine
restraint clip into the two holes above the magazine in the rear wall of the library.
c. Lower the magazine restraint clip until it sits on top of the magazine, and then let go. The
restraint clip should lock in place.
d. Make sure you cannot remove the magazine.

Figure 112 Installing the Magazine Restraint Clip
Tabs
face
up

Removing Calibration Targets
Only remove LOOSE calibration targets. Do not remove glued-on

CAUTION calibration targets.

FRU ID: 1023 (calibration target)
1 Pull the bottom of the calibration target towards you until it unsnaps from the magazine.
magazine
calibration target
pull on calibration
target from here
Replacing Calibration Targets

1 Slide the top of the calibration target onto the top of the correct magazine.
2 Push in the bottom of the calibration target until it snaps.
3 Make sure the calibration target is seated all the way around the magazine.

Installing Gen 2 Boards and Cables
Do the following in this order:
1 Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access on page 351
2 Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module on page 352
3 Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door on page 355
4 Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1) on page 355
5 Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power Cable on page 357
6 Connecting the Aisle Cable Assembly on page 361
7 Checking the Display Cable Connector on page 363
Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access

Remove the robotics control unit (RCU) and the “trap door” behind (at the back of the chassis) it from the
control module so you have better access to the LMM backplane. Set these items aside for reinstallation
later.
management control
blade (MCB)
robotics control
unit (RCU) board
library motor
drive (LMD) board (already removed)

Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module
The SPA/SCC mount assembly holds the SPA1 and SCC2 boards, which are pre-installed onto the mount
assembly in the upgrade kit. The mount assembly also provides connectors for the power cable and the
aisle cable assembly connector. It is located in the control module between the upper and lower drive bays.
Required tools:

• 7 mm nut driver
Required equipment:
• Mount assembly
• Mount assembly C-clamp with set screw
• Replacement 7 mm hex screw
C-clamp with set

screw
SPA/SCC Mount
Assembly with SPA1 and
SCC2 boards attached
Three connectors that

connect to the LMM
backplane

1 Remove one bolt from the library in the location shown in Figure 113 . This is the location where the
upper left screw hole on the SPA/SCC mounting assembly will go. The bolt is either 5.5 mm or 7 mm,
depending on your library. Use the appropriate nut driver to remove the bolt.
Figure 113 Removing the Bolt
Remove this screw
Control Module
2 Slide the SPA/SCC mount assembly into the control module. There are two rails on top of the drive
cluster that the mount assembly sits on.
3 Pull the cables out the front and route to the left in the cable trough.
4 Replace the 5.5 mm bolt with the 7 mm screw from the upgrade kit to secure the left side of the SPA/
SCC mount assembly to the control module. See Figure 114 .
5 Install the C-clamp with set screw to secure the right side of the SPA/SCC mount assembly as follows:
Place the C-clamp on the right rail on top of the drive cluster and push back against the SPA/SCC mount
assembly as far as you can. Then tighten the 2.5 mm hex set screw. See Figure 114 .
6 There is an existing Ethernet cable that goes from the LBX to the LMM backplane connector J20. Move
J20 connector to J22.
7 Connect the three plugs that dangle from the SPA/SCC mount assembly to the J1, J5, and J6
connectors on the LMM backplane (the same connectors that the Gen 1 aisle cable assembly was
connected before). See Figure 114 and Figure 115 .
8 Plug one end of the included CAT5 Ethernet cable into Port 1 (left-most Ethernet port) of the SCC2
board.

9 Thread the other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable down through the rectangular opening to the left of
the SPA/SCC mount assembly and connect the other end of the cable to the J20 port on the LMM
backplane (see Figure 114 and Figure 115 ).
Figure 114 Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly
Install C-clamp with

Install 7 mm screw
set screw
SPA/SCC
cables
SPA/SCC
Ethernet cables
cable
J20 Ethernet
cable SPA/
SCC mount
assy
J22 Move the

existing Ethernet
cable that goes to
LBX from J20 to
Flattened view of LMM backplane J22
identifying the connectors to install

Figure 115 Gen 2 Connectors on LMM Backplane
connector: J1 plug:
SPA/SCC mount assy
connector: J6 plug:
SPA/SCC mount assy
connector: J5 plug:
SPA/SCC mount assy
connector: J20 plug:

SCC2
connector: J21
plug: W2 to connector: J22
service port plug: W2 to LBX
Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door

Reinstall the trap door and RCU blade you removed earlier.
Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1)

says “LPC.”
The LPC1 goes in the slot vacated by the LMD.

The LPC1 looks exactly like the LMD except that it has a label on its
The
CAUTION spine that says “LPC.” Make sure that you actually replace it.
Otherwise the Gen 2 library will not work.

FRU ID: 121 (library power control)
1 Remove the LPC1 from its anti-static bag.
2 Press up and out to open the latch hooks on each side of the LPC1.
3 Carefully align the LPC1 with the guide slots in bay 3 of the LMM. The LEDs will be on the bottom.
Forcing the blade into the bay can cause the pins to bend.
CAUTION
4 Use your thumbs on each end of the blade to evenly apply pressure and slide the LPC1 into the LMM.
When you feel the pins of the LPC1 blade lock into the backplane, push the latch hooks towards the
middle of the blade and into the lock position.
LPC
latch hooks

Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power
Cable
The Gen 2 power cable is a Y-cable with 3 connectors that replaces the Gen 1 short power cable. The Gen 2
power cable connects to the power supply, the LMM backplane, and the SPA/SCC mount assembly. While
the Gen 1 power cable had a loop, the Gen 2 power cable does not.
Figure 116 Power Cables
Gen 1 power cable (short) – remove Gen 2 power cable (tee’d) –- install
Connect to SPA/
SCC Mount
Assembly
Connect to LMM
backplane
Connect to top of
power chassis
1 Remove the Gen 1 short power cable that goes from the top of the power supply connector on the
chassis (J48L) to the LMM backplane. See Figure 117 for location.
2 Place the Gen 1 power cable in the discard pile.
3 Connect the Gen 2 power cable main connector into the J48L connector on the power chassis (same
connector from which you removed the Gen 1 cable — see Figure 117 and Figure 118 ).
4 Connect the teed connector into the backplane (same connector from which you removed the Gen 1
cable — see Figure 117 and Figure 118 )).

LMM Backplane
Gen 1 power cable

connector on LMM
backplane
Gen 1 power cable

connector on power
chassis

Figure 118 Power Cable Connectors on LMM Backplane and Power Chassis
LMM backplane power cable connector location. Note the

“roof” and blades over the LBX have been removed for clarity.
Main Gen 2 power cable connector

goes here
Top of power chassis power cable connection:
Teed Gen 2 power cable

connector goes here
connector: J48L
plug: W12 to BPI
5 Thread the 4-pin connector up into the area that contains the SPA/SCC mount assembly. Connect the
4-pin connector on the tee power cable to the connector on the left side of the SPA/SCC mount
assembly. See Figure 119 .

Figure 119 Power Cable Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly
Power
cable
connector
on SPA/
SCC
Mount
Assembly

The aisle cable assembly connects the power rails to the SPA/SCC mount assembly. The aisle cable
assembly is mounted on the control module firewall and its connector connects into the power rail connector
in the control module (see Figure 120 ).
Figure 120 Securing the Power Rail Power Cable Mounting Plate to the Control Module
Two screws in
mounting plate
Connector
connected
1 Push the single end of the aisle cable assembly through the hole in the lower section of the left rear wall
of the CM frame.
2 Secure the mounting plate to the wall with two screws.
3 Plug the connector into the connector on the power rail.
4 Secure the cable with the velcro strap.
5 Go to the back of the control module. The end of the aisle cable assembly should be visible in the open
area above the lower drive cluster.

Connect the
aisle cable
assembly
here

Figure 122 .
connector: J16
plug: W22
to touch screen

Connecting Modules Together
If you moved the library to another location, or added expansion modules, then connect all the modules
together as described below.
The cables will be preinstalled on the LBX board in any new expansion
Note
modules you installed. You must route them through the hole in the
bulkhead to either the control module or previous expansion module.
1 Locate the W1 and W2 cables on the new or moved expansion module.
W2 cable
(Ethernet)

bulkhead

Note
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17

Note
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17
J4 J3
W2 cable (Ethernet)

877.
J17 connection
LBX terminator

6 Use the cover plate thumbscrew to replace the LBX/IEX cover plates on the expansion modules.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
7 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to replace the cover plate between the drive positions in expansion
modules.
thumbscrews
Reinstalling Service Doors

1 If you removed any service doors, reinstall them by lifting them onto their hinges.
2 Close all service doors.

correctly before you begin operation.
the robot.
facing UP.
(appears loose and
wobbly)
Robot lift area
Robot handle
Robot shipping
restraint
Collector door

Tighten these
thumbscrews
to close door.
Loosen
thumbscrews
to open door.

Note
position.
vertically to engage the proper power rails.
together:
of the robot.
Brackets

5 Set the X-preload tensioner by pushing the retaining pin up into a hole on the drive gear. Using two
hands, use one thumb to rotate the gear that sits on top of the spring toward the back of the robot while
at the same time using the other hand to pull the drive shaft toward the front of the robot until a hole
becomes available in the bottom of the gear into which to push the pin. Push the pin upward so that it
slides into the hole. (You will pull the pin back down later to load the tension spring.)


a. Using the yellow picker lift handle (see Figure 127 ), pull the picker toward the top of the robot
just enough so that the yellow locking lever clears the bar halfway up the vertical length of the
robot.
Picker Lift
Handle

Kickstand locking lever
7 Place the robot into the control module directly underneath the loader bracket as follows:
Be
bracket.
a. Make sure you install the robot in the control module.


Note
Note
locations.


Top view
Rollers
Middle view
Rollers
Bottom view Rollers

See Figure 131 .
robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket. Lift the robot up so that its
rollers clear the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
Rollers engaged on
Rollers engaged on

it’s OK.


control module
16 Verify robot motion: Push or pull on the robot handle to move the robot back and forth over a junction
in the power rails. If it slides smoothly without resistance, noise, or jerkiness, everything is properly
installed. Proceed to next step.
directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door, lift the robot up so that its rollers clear
the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)

Figure 134 .)
Robot
shipping
restraint
thumbscrews
handle. (see Figure 127 on 372). The picker drifts to the bottom of the robot.

Robot locking
lever in locked
position
20 Place the robot FRU boxes and packaging in the discard pile.

Replace the cover plates you removed earlier.

the cover plate.
2 From any expansion modules from which you removed a cover plate, reinstall the following (see Figure
136 ):
Figure 136 Replacing the Control Module and Expansion Module Cover Plates
Cover plate
Cover plate between
above the power upper and
chassis lower drive
bays
Service port
panel
LBX/IEX
cover plate
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plates
Expansion module Control module

Verifying The Robots is Ready for IVT
Before you can test that everything is working properly after the upgrade, you must verify that the robot is
online.
1 Verify the service and access doors are closed.
3 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the up (I) position.
4 Press the Power button on the indicator panel.
Robotics start initializing. The robot performs configuration (scans drive, magazine, and I/E station
fiducials). Then the robot performs a calibration and inventory, and then performs its robot self test
(RST). When complete, the library comes ready (solid green Ready LED on front panel, also indicated
on the touch screen). To check that the robot completed RST, do the following.
A “Software Mismatch” dialog box pops up stating that the MCB and RCU are at different versions.
7 Click Next.
The Library Firmware Download screen appears.
8 Select the Reinstall Current package radio button and then click Finish.
You need to reinstall the current version of library firmware now, even
CAUTION though you already upgraded firmware earlier, in order to synchronize the
robotics firmware version with the library firmware version. This causes the
MCB to download the Gen 2 robotics firmware to the RCU which replaces
the Gen 1 robotics firmware.
9 Complete a series of screens to finish the install.

10 Wait for the firmware to finish downloading (Robotics Enabled button flashes during the download). Wait
for robotics to become enabled. (the Robotics Enabled LED on the front panel is on steady). This can
take at least 30 minutes.
11 Check for tickets on the UI and troubleshoot. Resolve and close all tickets before proceeding. The
library may have issued one or more of the following three tickets which should have been solved by
reinstalling the current firmware above. You can ignore and close these three tickets:
• Door is open.
• LMD card is missing.
• Can’t read library serial number in CM.
If this ticket recurs, or the robotics do not become enabled and this ticket is
Note
present, you may have a problem related to the new robot scanning the S/
N label in older libraries. Contact Sustaining Engineering for information
and further instruction.


14 Verify the robot is ready by confirming the following:
• Name: The robot must be displayed.
• Status: The robot must be Active.
• If the status for the robot indicates Pending, wait until it changes to active. Pending
indicates it is still performing its self test. NOTE: The screen does not update dynamically,
so close the screen, wait a few minutes, and check again.
• If the status for the robot indicates Failed, troubleshoot and fix before continuing.
• State: The robot must be online.
• Generation: The robots must be Gen 2.

In order to test the robot, you must run the full IVT on the robot as follows:
1 Run IVT on the robot by following all of the instructions in the chapter Installation Testing and
Verification on page 833. If any problems or tickets occur, troubleshoot and retest until all tests pass.
Then return here.
2 Run the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the robot, as follows:

d. Click Start.
3 Run the Picker Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the robot, following the same instructions
as for the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest above, except select Picker Assembly from the Select
Subtest drop-down list.
Reconfiguring Partitions and Importing Cartridges

The new library has a number of new storage slots that you can take advantage of, if you have sufficient
COD. In addition, if you deleted or reconfigured partitions previously, you may want to add the partitions or
deleted storage back in now.
Use the notes you took at the beginning of this process to remind you how many magazines each partition
and I/E station needs to contain. To add or modify partitions, from the LMC, click Setup > Partitions >
Configure.
• The control module contains 14 additional magazines of storage — (Rack 1, column 1 and Rack 2,
column 4).
• The newly installed right-most expansion module contains 4 storage columns (Rack 1, columns 1
and 2, and Rack 2, columns 3 and 4).
• Newly added expansion modules.

1 If desired, add or modify partitions to take advantage of new storage.
2 If you swapped a module, reconfigure partitions to use the storage slots, drives, and I/E station slots in
their new locations.
3 Add back any storage or I/E station magazines you removed earlier. Modify partitions as the customer
directs.
The option exists to defragment partitions to make the slots in each partition
Note
contiguous. However, this can take many hours and all partitions are taken
offline, so the customer may not want to do this. Discuss with the customer if
they would like to defragment partitions and only do it if they want you to. (To
defragment, click Tools > Partitions Defragmentation). For more details on
defragmentation, see the Scalar i6000 Maintenance Guide.
4 If you deleted DLT partitions, the customer may want you to configure new partitions using the slots from
those partitions and possibly new LTO drives.
5 Import or bulk load all of the cartridges you exported earlier. Remember to put them into the correct
partitions.

• You may want to view a Library Explorer map showing the current partition configuration to help
as you bulk load (to see the map, click Tools > Library Explorer).
• To import cartridges, from the LMC, click Operations > Import.
The eight columns comprising the control module and right-most

CAUTION expansion module may contain magazines but these magazines are not
visible on the UI and cannot be used for storage. Do not load cartridges
into these columns. See Figure 137 and Figure .
Figure 137 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Control Module
6 Save the library configuration (click Tools > Save/Restore).

7 Configure the host to see any new partitions or storage that you added.
Closing the Service and Access Doors

1 Close the service and access doors.
2 Show the customer the location of the keys.
Dispositioning the Removed Components

Quantum’s Install Coordinator will let you know how all of the removed parts will be dispositioned.
Depending on your location, the parts may be picked up by a vendor or disposed of on-site. In either case,
you must pack up all the removed components in preparation for final disposition as follows:
1 Place the two side covers that you removed from the Gen 1 library into the side panel return box.

2 Place the Gen 1 accessor and cable chain into a Robot FRU box. You do not need to use any internal
packing.
3 Place the remaining Gen 1 removed components from the “discard pile” into any of the upgrade kit
boxes and/or the other robot FRU box. You do not need to use any internal packaging.
4 Close all the boxes and seal with tape.
5 Using a permanent marker, write “Gen 1 - Scrap” clearly and visibly on each box.
6 Disposition the boxes of parts and side panels per instructions from Quantum’s Install Coordinator.
7 Discard/recycle any remaining packing material and boxes at the customer’s site.
Reinstalling the Left and Right Side Covers

Reinstall the left and right side covers. The instructions below are for the right side cover. The instructions
for the left side cover are the same, but reversed.
1 Get two of the three L-brackets you removed from the control module (Removing Left and Right Side
Covers on page 404) and install them in the top and middle positions. The lower position is now
unavailable because the power rail is in the way. Discard the third L-bracket.

2 If you added expansion modules on to the right of the existing library, get two of the three L-brackets
you removed from the existing right-most module and install them in the top and middle positions. The
lower position is now unavailable because the power rail is in the way. Discard the third L-bracket.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets
Do not reinstall the

lower L-bracket
3 Get the proper right side cover (NOT the one that was installed on the old system; the new EMI side
cover).

4 Lift the right side cover straight up and set it on the end of the module.
screw holes
screw holes

5 Line up the screw holes from the frame to the right side cover and attach eight (8) 2.5 mm screws that
secure the panel.
Three screws are located at the front corner post, three at the back corner
Note
post, and two at the storage wall. The lower screw in the middle wall is no
longer available.
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
front of module
(access door)
back of module
(service door)
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
This screw is no longer available

Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to
a Gen 2 Dual-Robot Library
There are two types of library hardware: Gen 1 and Gen 2. Gen 2 hardware became available with the i10
release in December, 2011 (library software code version 630Q.GS20601), and supports either a single- or
dual-robot configuration.
This chapter describes how to upgrade a Gen 1 single-robot library to a Gen 2 dual-robot library.
The upgrade process consists of the following steps, which must be performed in order:
1 Required Tools and Equipment on page 393
2 Parts List on page 394
3 Upgrade Kits - Included Parts on page 397
4 Important Points on page 399
5 Preparing the Library on page 399
6 Removing Left and Right Side Covers on page 404
7 Removing the Control Module Cover Plates on page 411
8 Removing Gen 1 Hardware and Accessor on page 413
9 Moving the Library to a New Location on page 430
10 Swapping Modules on page 431
11 Bolting the Modules Together on page 431
12 Verifying the System is Level on page 435
13 Removing the Left Parking Module Cover Plate on page 439
14 Installing the Remaining Gen 2 Hardware on page 440
• Installing the Power Rails on page 440
• Installing the Bottom Rack Supports on page 443
• Installing the Middle Rack Supports on page 448
• Installing the Right Hard Stop on page 450
• Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag on page 451

• Attaching the Loader Bracket and Loader Bracket Locator to the Top Rack Support on page
452
• Installing the Top Rack Supports on page 453
15 Installing, Replacing, and Restraining Magazines, and Positioning Calibration Targets on page 463
16 Installing Gen 2 Boards and Cables on page 476
• Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access on page 476
• Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module on page 477
• Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door on page 480
• Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1) on page 480
• Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable on page 482
• Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power Cable on page 486
17 Connecting Modules Together on page 493
18 Reinstalling Service Doors on page 496
19 Installing the Gen 2 Robot on page 497
20 Reinstalling the Cover Plates on page 515
21 Installing the Right Side Cover on page 516
22 Verifying Both Robots are Ready for IVT on page 519
23 Running IVT and Troubleshooting on page 521
24 Reconfiguring Partitions and Importing Cartridges on page 523
25 Closing the Service and Access Doors on page 525
26 Dispositioning the Removed Components on page 525
392 Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to a Gen 2 Dual-Robot Library

Required Tools and Equipment
Required tools and equipment:
• ESD wrist strap

• 3 mm hex wrench
• 6 mm hex wrench
• 7 mm nut driver
• T10 Torx wrench
• digital level

Parts List
Table 4 Parts List
Bolts and nuts for bolting left 4 In the kit corresponding to

parking module to library, the frame
expansion modules
Cable, Aisle, with Mounting FRU ID: 839 1 CM upgrade kit. Not used.
Plate (Short) Place in discard pile.

2-feet
Catch tray N/A One per junction • One in PM upgrade kit

between power • One in each EM upgrade
modules kit

DLT drives are
being removed
from library and
not being
replaced with
LTO drives.

ordered with I/E)
Hard Stop, Right (with required N/A 1 Installed in left parking

screws) module (needs to be moved
to right parking module)
Home/Parking Flag, CM N/A 1 CM upgrade kit. Not used.

Place in discard pile.
Home/Parking Flag, Right (with N/A 1 PM upgrade kit

required screws)
Left Parking Module with Gen N/A 1 Pallet

2 left side cover installed
Loader Bracket Locator N/A 1 PM kit
Loader Bracket, Right N/A 1 CM kit

(loose) • 4 in PM kit

Table 4 Parts List
Magazine restraint clips FRU ID: 956 One for each • Installed in left parking
magazine in the module (only in bottom row
bottom row of on rear wall)
each section on • CM upgrade kit (enough for
the rear wall of CM)
the library. • EM upgrade kit (enough for
EM)
• PM kit - enough for right
parking module
Magazines with glued-on FRU ID: 957 12 for left parking • 3 in PM upgrade kit
calibration targets module • 2 in CM upgrade kit
3 for CM • 1 in each EM upgrade kit
1 for each EM
3 or 4 for right
parking module
Magazines, standard FRU ID:1017 8 Installed in left parking

module (move as many as
needed to CM, discard the
rest)
Power Rail Bridge Clamp N/A 2 per junction • 2 in PM upgrade kit

between power • 2 in each EM upgrade kit
rails • 2 in CM upgrade kit
Power Rail, 7-pack FRU ID: 950 1 per module • 1 installed in left parking
module
• 1 installed in any new
frame that ships
Rack Supports, Bottom N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in left parking

module
• 1 installed in each new EM
received
Rack Supports, Middle N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in left parking

module
received
Rack Supports, Top N/A 1 per module • 1 installed in left parking

module
received
• 1 in CM kit

Table 4 Parts List
Right side cover, Gen 2 N/A 1 Installed in left parking

module (needs to be moved
to right parking module)
Robot FRU ID: 204 2 Robot FRU boxes, on the PM

pallet
clamp
SHCSLP BLACK, 10.9
and middle)
3-05992-01 - T-NUT, M4, 5 x-axis gear
tray
rack (top) -
SHCSLP rack (top)
Screw D, M3 x 5 flat head Torx Screw D • 3 for right PM kit

screw with Loctite patch home/parking
flag
3-03907-01 - SCREW, FL HD
TORX, M3 X 5, STL, ZINC, W/
PATCH
Screw E, M3X3 MM button Screw E • 2 per loader PM kit

head Torx screw bracket locator

1-01314-27 - SCREW, M3 X
3MM,BTN HD,ZINC,TORX, W/
DRI-LOC
Screw F, M4X6 Socket, Button Screw F • 4 per right PM kit

Head loader bracket

YS42069 -SCR.SKT.HD.M4X6
HTST 400

Table 4 Parts List

box (large, flat), on the PM
pallet

• Board
Assembly,
SPA1 (FRU
ID: 123)
• Board, SCC2
(FRU ID: 122)
X-axis Gear Rack, Full Rack, FRU ID: 955 3 PM upgrade kit
Right Load Position
Standard equal to:
3 x (# of modules
minus 2)
End Position
Upgrade Kits - Included Parts
Installed in PM and need to be moved to right parking module

• Right side cover
• Right hard stop
• Magazines, standard (14 installed in PM, move as many as needed to CM, the remainder, you can
leave in or discard, will never be used)
• Magazines with glued-on calibration targets (18 installed; leave 12 installed; move 2 to control
module and 3 or 4 to right parking module, if only using 3, discard out the 4th one)
PM Kit (items needed to convert a standard expansion module into a right parking
module)
• Loader bracket locator
• Home/parking flag (right)
• X-axis gear rack, full rack, right load position
• Magazine restraint clips (enough for right parking module)

• Calibration targets (4, loose)
• Catch tray

CM Kit
• Loader bracket, right (gets installed in right parking module)
• Power rail
• Power rail bridge clamps (1 sets of 2clamps each) - not needed for upgrade - discard
• X-axis gear rack, half rack, end position (goes in right parking module)
• LPC1 blade
• Mount assembly, SPA/SCC with SPA1 and SCC2 boards attached

• C-clamp with set screw
• Power cable (W33)
• CAT5 Ethernet cable
• Magazine restraint clips (enough for CM)

• Magazines with glued-on calibration targets (2)
• Calibration target (1, loose)
• Home/parking flag (for CM, single robotics) —not needed for upgrade – discard
• Aisle cable with mounting plate (short, for CM, single robotics) —not needed for upgrade –
discard
EM Kit
• Power rail
• X-axis gear rack, full rack, standard (3 per kit)
• Magazine with glued-on calibration target (one per EM kit)
• Magazine restraint clips (enough for EM)
• Catch tray

Important Points
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE PERFORM THIS

WARNING PROCEDURE.
When removing and installing components in the library, remember to

CAUTION attach the ESD strap to your wrist and to an unpainted surface inside the
door.
Upgrade library software to the latest version BEFORE beginning any

CAUTION hardware upgrades. Make sure the library is an i6000 BEFORE upgrading
firmware.
When removing and installing screws, washers, and other small items, if
CAUTION you drop one, FIND IT before proceeding. If a screw were to fall into a drive
or other sensitive component, it could cause damage to equipment and
data, lost time troubleshooting, and require another service call.
For most upgrades, Quantum will ship a right parking module to install on the
Note
far-right of the system. Occasionally, this might not happen; for example, if the
library already contains 12 modules, or if there is not space to accommodate
the extra module. In those cases, you will need to convert the right-most
expansion module into a right parking module. This procedure covers all cases;
follow the specific instructions for your case.
Preparing the Library

Perform the following steps before beginning any hardware upgrades:
• Before You Go to the Customer’s Site
• At the Customer’s Site
Before You Go to the Customer’s Site

1 Download the latest library firmware from CSWeb onto your laptop and bring it with you.
2 If the customer’s current library is an i2000, you will also need to upgrade the library to a Scalar i6000.
Make sure that the i6000 upgrade kit has been received by the customer before you go to the
customer’s site.
3 The customer must unload all of their drives before you arrive.
4 If the customer’s library contains DLT media, the customer needs to export it all from the library before
you arrive. The Gen 2 library does not support DLT drives or media. You will remove/replace DLT drives
and magazines later.

At the Customer’s Site
1 Verify the upgrade kit contains all of the parts listed in the Parts List on page 394.
There are three extra parts in the CM kit that should be placed in the
Note
discard pile:
- Aisle cable with mounting plate (short, for CM, single robotics)
- Home/parking flag (for CM, single robotics)
- Power rail bridge clamps (one extra set)
Save all the upgrade kit boxes, the robot FRU boxes, and the side panel
Note
return kit (empty box) for use in boxing up all the removed components
later.
2 Make sure you have enough room to install the new Left Parking Module to the left of the existing control
module. If you are installing additional expansion modules to the right of the library, make sure there is
enough room for these as well. If there is not sufficient space, you will need to move the library (not now,
but later in the process). Verify the following:
• There is adequate clearance for all access and service doors.

• The selected location for the new modules is level.
3 Designate an area to use as a temporary “discard pile.” You will be removing a number of Gen 1
components from the library that will not be reused again. Quantum has arranged a specific disposition
strategy for each region. Find out from Quantum’s Install Coordinator how to dispose of all of these extra
parts. As you go through the procedures below, any time an item needs to be placed in the discard pile
it will be noted. When you are finished upgrading the library, you will place all of these non-reusable
parts into the boxes that came with the upgrade (Robot FRU boxes, side panel kit, and CM/PM/EM kit
boxes) and disposition them as directed by the Install Coordinator.
4 Connect your laptop to the service port and log on to the Library Management Console (LMC).
5 Take a standard library snapshot and save it to your laptop (Tools > Capture Snapshot).
6 Save the library configuration to your laptop (Tools > Save/Restore).
7 Verify there are no open tickets on the library. If there are, resolve and close all of them.
8 Recommended: Run IVT without the get/put test (no scratch tape) to verify the quality of the existing
installation (frame-to-frame alignment) before upgrading (see Running the Installation Verification Test
on page 853). NOTE: If you are moving the library to a new location, you do not need to run IVT.
9 Unload all tape drives.
10 If the customer’s library contains DLT tape drives and magazines:
a. The customer should have previously removed all DLT media. Make sure this is done.
b. Go to the Library Explorer by clicking Tools > Library Explorer and pull up the screens for all
modules that have DLT partitions. Save the maps to your laptop or print them. You will use the
maps to help you reconfigure partitions later.
c. Delete all DLT partitions.
d. Remove all DLT tape drives from the library.
e. Run a Teach Config and Calibrate.

You will replace DLT drives and magazines with LTO drives and magazines
Note
later in the process. The customer will import any new LTO cartridges and
re-configure partitions later.
11 IMPORTANT! Upgrade library software to the latest version. You must upgrade software before
beginning any hardware upgrades. The minimum version required for Gen 2 hardware is code version
630Q.GS20601 (i10). See the Quantum Support site for current releases at www.quantum.com/
support. Refer to the latest firmware installation procedure posted on CSWeb.
If the current library is a Scalar i2000, you must first upgrade them to a
Note
Scalar i6000 using the Scalar i6000 upgrade kit before upgrading library
firmware to the latest version.
12 If the customer ordered replacement LTO drives, install them in the spaces vacated by the DLT drives.
13 If you are converting the existing right-most expansion module into a right parking module, and the
existing right-most expansion module contains a 72-slot I/E station, follow this step. If the right-most
expansion module does not contain a 72-slot I/E station, skip this step.
There are two scenarios:
• Scenario 1: In most cases, Quantum will ship a new expansion module to be added to the right of
the system. This enlarges the system by one module. If this has occurred, skip this step.
• Scenario 2: If an additional module was not shipped, then you will need to swap the last expansion
module with an existing module in the system that does not contain a 72-slot I/E station, so that the
resulting right parking module does not contain a 72-slot I/E station.
Prepare for the swap as follows (do not swap the modules yet; you will do that later, in Swapping
Modules on page 431):
a. Decide with the customer which module to swap with the last module.
b. Go to the Library Explorer map by clicking Tools > Library Explorer and pull up the screens
for the two modules you are swapping. Save the maps to your laptop or print them.
c. If the two modules you are swapping have all of their drives and storage elements assigned to
the same partition, skip the remaining substeps of this step (Step 13) and proceed to Step 14
on page 402.
d. Using the Library Explorer map, note how many magazines belong to each partition so that you
can add the same number back in later. Note which partition(s) the I/E station is assigned to so
you can reassign it later.
e. If possible, use Sift Sort to move cartridges out of these two modules and into other modules in
the library.
• If you were able to move all cartridges out of the two modules using Sift Sort, go to Step h.
• If you were unable to move all cartridges out of the two modules using Sift Sort, go to Step
f.
f. Disable the robot by pressing the Robotics Enabled button. Wait for the Robotics Enabled
LED to go off.
g. Open the doors of the two modules you are swapping and remove all the cartridges. Use the
Library Explorer map to track which cartridges go in what partitions. As you remove media, keep
the cartridges segregated by partition so that you can put the media back into their correct

partitions later. Make sure you have enough space on a table to keep the media safe and
separated, and mark the areas as to which partition they belong to.
h. Modify all partitions that contain storage and I/E elements in the two modules you are swapping
so that they no longer contain elements in those two modules. (In other words, delete the drives
and slots from the partitions. You will add back the drives and slots to the partitions later.)
• In the online Library Explorer map, you can move your mouse over a magazine segment
to see its location coordinates. Take note of the coordinates so that when you modify
partitions, you can select the correct magazines to remove from partitions and I/E stations.
• To modify partitions: Make sure that you are viewing the physical library (from the View
menu, select the name of the physical library). Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The
Partitions dialog box is displayed. Select the partition that includes the affected magazines
and click Modify. Return the affected magazines to the physical pool. Repeat for each
partition associated with the two doors.
14 This step explains how to reconfigure the module that will become the right parking module. Decide if
you need to follow this step by following these bullets:
• If you are converting the existing right-most expansion module into a right parking module,
follow this step.
• If you are swapping modules as described in the previous step, and you did not remove all
media from the module that will become the right parking module, follow this step.
• If you are adding a new expansion module to your library to serve as the right parking module,
skip this step.
You need to remove media and partition elements from the four columns that will become the right robot
parking space. The affected columns are columns 3 and 4 of Rack 1 (back), and columns 1 and 2 of
Rack 2 (door) of the right parking module (see Figure 138).
These four columns are not available for storage or partitions in dual-robot
Note
systems; however, the magazines must remain installed. The magazine
slots are used for robot testing and may be used for storage in future if the
library is expanded.
a. Go to the Library Explorer map by clicking Tools > Library Explorer and pull up the screens
for the right-most expansion module. Save the map to your laptop or print it.
b. Using the Library Explorer map, note how many magazines in these four columns belong to
each partition so that you can add the same number back in later.
c. If possible, use Sift Sort to move cartridges out of these two modules and into other modules in
the library.
• If you were able to move all cartridges out of the four columns using Sift Sort, go to Step f.
• If you were unable to move all cartridges out of the four columns using Sift Sort, go to Step
d.
d. Disable the robot by pressing the Robotics Enabled button. Wait for the Robotics Enabled
LED to go off.
e. Open the door of the right-most module and remove all the cartridges from the four columns
noted above. Use the Library Explorer map to track which cartridges go in what partitions. As
you remove media, keep the cartridges segregated by partition so that you can put the media
back into their correct partitions later. Make sure you have enough space on a table to keep the
media safe and separated, and mark the areas as to which partition they belong to.
f. Using the Library Explorer map as a guide, modify all partitions that contain elements in the four
columns so that they no longer contain elements in those columns, or simply delete the
partitions if that is easier. (You must add back the slots to partitions later.)

• In the online Library Explorer map, you can move your mouse over a magazine segment
to see its location coordinates. Take note of the coordinates so that when you modify
partitions, you can select the correct magazines to remove from partitions.
• To modify partitions: Make sure that you are viewing the physical library (from the View
menu, select the name of the physical library). Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The
Partitions dialog box is displayed. Select the partition that includes the affected magazines
and click Modify. Return the affected magazines to the physical pool. Repeat for each
partition associated with the four columns.
All partition elements associated with this upgrade procedure must

CAUTION be modified before proceeding with this procedure.
Prior to modifying any partitions, you must understand your

configuration changes and the potentially disruptive effects those
changes can have on the host application(s).
Care must be taken whenever you add or delete partition elements,

which includes drives, storage magazines, and I/E station magazines.
Figure 138 Removing Cartridges and Partition Elements from Right-Most Expansion Module
Column 3 Column 4 Column 1 Column 2

15 IMPORTANT! Save the library configuration.
16 Shut down the library as follows:
a. Make sure there is no I/O activity occurring in the library.
b. Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu, select the name of
the physical library.
c. Select Operations > System Shutdown.
d. Wait until the LMC display turns dark.
18 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the down (O) position.
20 Remove the bottom row of magazines (section 10) from Rack 1 (rear wall) of every module. HINT: If
you “bump” the bottom magazine up slightly, it will displace the two magazines above it slightly, giving
you enough room to remove the bottom magazine without removing all of the magazines above it. Set
the removed magazines aside, keeping them in order so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations later. Leave the bumped magazines bumped up for now.
21 Remove the service door from the control module by opening it and then lifting it off its hinges. Set the
door aside. This is optional but it makes installing the left parking module easier.
Removing Left and Right Side Covers

Equipment needed: 2.5 mm hex wrench
You need to remove the left and right side covers on the existing library. You will replace them with new side
covers.
• Left side cover of control module— You must always remove the left side cover from the existing
control module so you can add the left parking module. See Removing the Left Side Cover of
Existing Control Module on page 405.
• Right side cover of right-most expansion module — You must always remove the right side
cover from the right-most expansion module so you can install the right parking module. If you are
converting the right-most expansion module to a right parking module, you need a new right side
cover with approved EMI glass, so you will need to swap out that cover with the one that came
installed on the left parking module. See Removing the Right Side Cover from the Right-most
Expansion Module on page 408.

Removing the Left Side Cover of Existing Control Module
1 From inside the library, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the eight (8) screws that attach the left side
cover to the control module.
Note
2.5 mmscrews 2.5 mm screw
Front of module
Back of module
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
This screw is located behind the

X-axis chain assembly and is
difficult to remove

2 Lift the left side cover off the module.
screw holes
screw holes
4 Remove all three L-brackets that mount the left side cover to the control module’s storage wall. Three
screws secure each L-bracket. You already removed one screw from each L-bracket in order to remove
the side cover. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the remaining two screws in each L-bracket.
5 Place the screws and L-brackets in the discard pile.

Three screws
secure each
L-bracket

Removing the Right Side Cover from the Right-most Expansion
Module
1 From the last expansion module on the right (or the control module if this is a single-frame system),
remove the storage magazines in sections 1- 5 of column 4 of rack 1 (see Figure 139). This will enable
you to access the 2.5 mm hex screws that attach the right side cover to the module.
unsnaps.
Figure 139 Removing Magazines from Right-Most Module
rack 1 (back)
column 4
section 1
section 3
section 4
section 5
section 7
drive cluster
section 8
section 9
section 10

2 From inside the library, use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the eight (8) screws that attach the right
side cover to the module.
Note
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
3 Lift the right side cover off the module.


screw holes
screw holes

5 Remove right-side L-brackets as follows:
• If you are planning to add one or more modules on to the right side of the system, remove all
two L-brackets that mount the right side cover to the storage wall.
Three screws secure each L-bracket. You already removed one of the screws in each L-bracket in order
to remove the side cover. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the remaining two screws in each
L-bracket.
6 If you received an expansion module with a right side cover already attached, then put the screws and
L-brackets in the discard pile. If you are converting the existing right-most expansion module into a right
parking module, then SAVE the screws and L-brackets for installing the new right side cover later.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets

From the control module, remove the following (see Figure 140). Save the cover plates to reinstall later.


the cover plate.
Cover plate
between upper
and lower drive
bays
Service
port
panel
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plate
LBX/
IEX
cover
plate

Plates

Removing Gen 1 Hardware and Accessor
Remove the following components, in this order.
Place all of the removed components in the “Discard” bin and disposition as follows. Do not leave them at
the customer’s site.
1 Removing the X-Axis Hard Stop on page 413
2 Removing the X-Axis Belt on page 414
3 Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly on page 415
4 Removing the X-Axis Belt Tensioner and Bracket on page 417
5 Removing the X-Axis Chain Assembly on page 418
6 Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly on page 421
7 Removing the X-Axis Chain Restraint Shelf on page 422
8 Removing the Gen 1 Aisle Accessor Cable Assembly (W10) on page 423
9 Removing the Upper X-Axis Rails on page 425
10 Removing the Lower X-Axis Rails on page 426
11 Removing the Middle X-Axis Rails and Substrate on page 427
12 Removing the Velcro Strap(s) from the Control Module on page 428
13 Removing the LMD from the Control Module on page 428
Removing the X-Axis Hard Stop

If the Gen 1 library is a single control module, the hard stop is in the control module. If the Gen 1 library is
a multi-module library, the hard stop is located in the right-most expansion module.
Tools required: 3 mm hex wrench
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the hard stop from the substrate below the X-axis middle rail in the
right-most module in the library.
2 Place the hard stop in the discard pile.
3 mm screw

The X-axis belt is on the middle rail of the library. Use the following procedures to remove the X-axis belt
from the library, regardless of the number of modules it includes. The only difference is the length of the X-
axis belt.
Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench, 4 mm hex wrench
FRU ID: 701 (X-axis belt)
assembly touch.
spring-load
screw tensioner arm
2 Use a 4 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws that attach the X-axis belt clamp to the X-axis
carriage. The X-axis belt clamp bracket will be removed from the X-axis carriage.
X-axis carriage
belt clamp assembly
4 mm screws

2.5 mm hex screws
6 Place the X-axis belt in the discard pile.
Removing the X-Axis Drive Plate Assembly

The X-axis drive plate assembly contains the motor, shaft assembly, motor belt, and home sensor.
aisle accessor

X-axis substrate. HINT: For easier access, you can “back out” the top two drives out about 6 inches.
3 mm screw
3 mm screws

4 Place the X-axis drive plate in the discard pile.
5 If you backed out one or more drives, push them back into position and tighten their thumbscrews.

Removing the X-Axis Belt Tensioner and Bracket
The X-axis belt tensioner and bracket are on the middle rail of the right-most module in the library.
FRU ID: 904 (X-axis belt tensioner)
1 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the four screws that connect the X-axis tensioner and bracket to the
X-axis channel. Remove the assembly from the module.
2 Place the X-axis belt tensioner and bracket in the discard pile.
3 mm screws
substrate
tensioner mounting
bracket
3 mm screws

FRU ID: 828 (X-axis chain assembly (W8))
Library configurations of 7 - 12 modules also contain an X-axis cable trough.

Note
This trough will come off along with the X-axis chain assembly (see picture
below).
Cable trough
1 On the top of the X-axis chain assembly, release the Y-axis home sensor cable by flipping up the cable
clamp.
cable clamp

Y-axis chain
assembly (W9)
connector
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
3 Disconnect the Y-axis motor cable from the X-axis chain assembly (W8).
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)
Y-axis
motor cable

4 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws that attach the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the
Y-axis drive
mount assembly
3 mm screws
X-axis
chain assembly
5 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the two screws that secure the X-axis chain assembly (W8) to the
3 mm screws
X-axis chain
assembly (W8)

6 Undo the Velcro straps that attach the X-axis chain (W8) to the bulkhead.
Velcro straps
unplug W8 connector
8 Remove the X-axis chain from the module.

9 Place the X-axis chain in the discard pile.
Removing the Gen 1 Accessor Assembly

1 Holding the accessor assembly with two hands, slide it to the left and out of the library.
2 Place the accessor assembly in the discard pile.

Removing the X-Axis Chain Restraint Shelf
This shelf is installed in all modules except for the control module. It is located below the bottom row of
magazines.
1 The bottom row of magazines should already be removed (you should have done this earlier) but if not,
remove the bottom row now. HINT: If you “bump” the bottom magazine up, it will displace the two
magazines above it slightly, giving you enough room to remove the bottom magazine without removing
all of the magazines above it. Set the removed magazines aside, keeping them in order so that you can
reinstall them in the same locations later. Leave the bumped magazines bumped up for now.
2 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove one screw that holds the drive cluster into the rear wall. Save this
screw.
3 Lift the shelf out.
It is somewhat difficult to remove the shelf. You may need to rotate the front
Note
of the shelf up, or shift the shelf to the right, before it will come out.
4 Reinstall the screw you removed earlier.

5 Place the X-axis chain restraint shelves in the discard pile.

Removing the Gen 1 Aisle Accessor Cable Assembly (W10)
This cable connects the X-axis chain assembly to the LMM backplane.
Tools required: 2.5 mm hex wrench; small flat-blade screwdriver (for opening the ferrite clamp)
1 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to unscrew two screws securing the aisle accessor cable assembly (W10) to
the front of the control module bulkhead.
unscrew
two screws
2 Go to the back of the library.

3 In the control module, above the lower drive bay, open the two cable clamps that secure the three W10
cables.

4 Reach through the vertical opening to the left of the lower drive bays in the control module and unplug
the three cable connectors from the LMM backplane.
Remove these
three
connectors
Reach
Remove through here
to access the
connectors
Flattened view identifying the

connectors to remove

5 There is a ferrite clamp that is attached around the cables at the back of the control module just behind
the firewall on top of the lower drive bay. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to unclip the ferrite clamp
from the cables.
Ferrite clamp
attached to
cables
Aisle accessor
cable assembly Ferrite clamp
cables unclipped
6 Thread the cable aisle assembly cables through the hole on the front of the control module and pull the
cables out through the front.
7 Place the aisle accessor cable assembly and ferrite clamp in the discard pile.
Removing the Upper X-Axis Rails

Remove the upper X-axis rails from all modules. The rails fit together in a tongue-and-groove fashion.
Expansion modules have four screws that secure the rail. The screw on the
Note
left end secures the rail to the module on the left.

rail), 946 (i6000)
control module.
2 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench remove the rails.
The upper and lower rails for longer library configurations (9 - 12 modules)
Note
contain elongated slots and identification holes.

3 Place the upper X-axis rails in the discard pile.
2.5 mm hex screw

2.5 mm hex screws

elongated slot
Removing the Lower X-Axis Rails

Remove all the lower X-axis rails in all modules. The rails fit together in a tongue-and-groove fashion.
Expansion modules have four screws that secure the rail. The screw on the left
Note
end secures the rail to the module on the left.

rail), 946 (i6000)
control module.
2 Use the 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the lower X-axis rail.

3 Place the lower X-axis rails in the discard pile.
2.5 mm hex
screws
2.5 mm hex screw
longer slots and ID mark (hole)
elongated slot
Removing the Middle X-Axis Rails and Substrate

Remove the middle rails with the substrate from all modules. Remove the rails and substrate from right to
left, starting in the right-most expansion module.
Tools required: 2.5 mm hex wrench; 3 mm hex wrench
For each module, remove the substrate and middle rail as a unit as follows:
1 The middle rails overlap the junction between modules. Use a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the two
screws that secure the middle rail in the module you are working in to the substrate in the next module
to the left.
junction remove two screws
middle X-axis rails substrate
2 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove eight (8) screws securing the substrate to the rear wall of the
module. There are four screws at the top side of the substrate and four screws on the bottom side of
the substrate.
3 Remove the substrate and middle rail as one unit.
4 Place the substrate/middle rails in the discard pile.

Remove four screws
securing top of substrate
Remove four screws

securing bottom of
substrate (not visible in this
picture)
Removing the Velcro Strap(s) from the Control Module

There are one or more small velcro straps located on the lower left rear wall of the control module. The
purpose of the straps was to restrain the Gen 1 X-axis chain assembly power cables. The strap serves no
purpose in Gen 2 dual robotics libraries.
1 To remove the strap, pull the strap toward you until the plastic plug that secures it to the rear wall pops
out of its hole.
2 Place the velcro strap(s) in the discard pile.
Removing the LMD from the Control Module

says “LPC.”
Be sure you remove the LMD and replace it with the LPC1 later. If the
CAUTION LPC1 is not installed, the Gen 2 library will not work.

Removing the Gen 1 Library Motor Drive (LMD)
The LMD is part of the Library Management Module (LMM). The LMD will be replaced by the LPC which is
part of the Gen 2 hardware.
LMD blade
management control
blade (MCB)
robotics control
unit (RCU) board
library motor
drive (LMD) board

FRU ID: 102 (library motor drive blade)
2 Use your thumbs to unlock the latch hooks by pushing them to the right. Pull the latch hooks out to
unplug the LMD from the LMM’s backplane.
latchhooks
3 Carefully slide the LMD straight out of the LMM.

4 Place the LMD in the discard pile.
Moving the Library to a New Location

If you need to move the library to a new location, do so now following the steps in this section. If you do not
need to move the library, skip this section.
If the current library consists of 4 or fewer modules, you can move them
Note
If the together as a unit. If the library contains more than 4 modules, you can move
the first four modules together, but the rest of the modules must be unhooked
and moved separately.

2 Remove power cables from all power supplies on the backs of all modules.
3 If more than four modules, detach all the cables mentioned in Connecting Modules Together on page
493.
4 If more than four modules, you will need to remove all the attachment bolts that connect the frames
together (after the four modules) so you can move the frames individually.

Swapping Modules
Only perform this section if the last expansion module had a 72-slot I/E station and you need to swap it with
another module in your system.
2 Remove power cables from all power supplies on the backs of the two modules.
3 Detach all the cables mentioned in Connecting Modules Together on page 493.
4 Remove all the attachment bolts that connect the frames together so you can move the frames
individually.
5 If the existing system has 7 or fewer frames, skip this step. If the existing system has 8 or more frames,
depending on the position of the swapped modules, and the types of LBX and IEX cards that are in the
existing modules, you may need a new LBX or IEX in the module that is moving to the end position. See
the following sections for rules regarding which board needs to go in which location, and instructions:
• LBX Board on page 873
• Removing and Replacing the IEX Card on page 108 — For frame positions 9 - 12, you must
have an IEX 2 card.
6 Move the modules to their new locations.
7 Move the LBX terminator board from the module that was on the end to the module that is now on the
end.
• For instructions, see Relocating the LBX Terminator Board on page 221.
• Make sure you have the right terminator board on the new end module. See LBX Terminator on
page 877 for what type of terminator card you need. If you have the wrong type, you will need to
get the correct type.
Bolting the Modules Together

You will need to bolt the left parking module to the left of the control module. You will also need to bolt any
modules you added, moved, or swapped.
The steps are the same for all modules. Steps include:
1 Positioning the New Module(s) on page 431
2 Lowering the Leveling Legs on page 432
3 Raising the New Module(s) Off the Casters on page 432
4 Aligning the New Module(s) with the Library on page 433
5 Inserting the Attachment Bolts on page 434
6 Tightening the Attachment Bolts on page 435
7 Setting the Leg Lock Nuts on page 435
Positioning the New Module(s)

The first steps in adding a left parking module or new modules to a library involve locating and positioning
the left parking module. For more information on location specifications, see the Scalar i6000 Planning
Guide.

1 Position the left parking module to the left of the control module.
2 Position additional expansion modules to the right of the existing library.

4 Verify that the left parking module and other additional modules are positioned correctly.

Note
Raising the New Module(s) Off the Casters

1 Use either the 6 mm hex wrench or 16 mm open end wrench to raise each of the four corner legs of the

Note
turns.
leveling leg
leveling foot
feet by hand.
Aligning the New Module(s) with the Library

1 Push the left parking module toward the control module until the frames touch.
2 Push any new modules toward their adjacent modules until the frames touch.
3 Adjust the left parking module leveling legs until the frame corners and the attachment bolts are aligned.
Repeat for any additional modules.

Required equipment: Frame-to-frame bolts
1 Verify that the adjacent sides of the control module and the left parking module are parallel.
If not, adjust the leveling legs on the opposite side of the left parking module until the adjacent sides are
parallel. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the same number of turns. Repeat for any additional
modules.
2 Verify that the attachment holes are aligned. If not, adjust the leveling legs of the left parking module
and/or additional modules until the attachment holes align. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the
same number of turns.
Insert the attachment bolt from right to left into the attachment hole.
The pictures below shows two standard expansion modules, not the control
Note
module and left parking module; however, the bolts and locations are the same.
front upper bolt
front lower bolt

back upper bolt
back lower bolt

wrench.
Note
post structure.

2 Use the 24 mm open end wrench to tighten all of the leveling leg lock nuts.
Note
process.
3 When you have finished bolting all the modules together, go Verifying the System is Level on page 435.

4 Lowering All Other Leveling Legs on page 439



Note
placements of level
438.

Additional Leveling
Note
service door

front to back

left to right

Removing the Left Parking Module Cover Plate

From the left parking module, remove the following cover plate (see Figure 141). Save the cover plate to
reinstall later.
Figure 141 Removing a Cover Plate from the Left Parking Module
Cover
plate
above
power
chassis
Remove This Cover Cover Plate Removed

Plate

Installing the Remaining Gen 2 Hardware
Some of the Gen 2 hardware came pre-installed in the left parking module and any expansion modules you
1 Installing the Power Rails on page 440
2 Installing the Bottom Rack Supports on page 443
4 Installing the Middle Rack Supports on page 448
6 Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag on page 451
Installing the Power Rails

Install one power rail per module. Install the power rails from left to right. The power rail in the left parking
module is pre-installed, so you will start with the control module and end with the right parking module.
Note
place. See Figure 142 and Figure 143.

Required equipment:
• One power rail per module (FRU ID: 950). This is pre-installed in the left parking module and right
parking module.
Note

4-pin and 3-pin

connectors
Locking Locking
lever, lever,
unlocked unlocked
Insertion tabs
Figure 143 Power Rail, Rear
Latches
Locking levers,
unlocked
you look at the rail from the front, move them left until they stop as shown in Figure 142). You may need

clamp. See Figure 144.
parking module will not have anything plugged into them. See Figure 144.

Installing the Bottom Rack Supports

Each frame requires a bottom rack support onto which the bottom robotic rack is attached. Install one
bottom rack support in each frame.

The sheet metal on the underside of the rack support is sheared off for about 1/
Note
2 inch all along the back edge. This allows the rack support to clear the existing
rubber mat installed along the floor of the back of Gen 1 libraries. If the rubber
mat is worn off, it will not affect installation.

Equipment needed:
• One bottom rack support per module (pre-installed in the left parking module, right parking module,
and any additional expansion modules ordered as part of this installation).
1 Make sure the rack support is in the proper installation position: the edge with the three notched holes
faces up and toward the front of the library (see Figure 145).
2 Place the rack support in the module. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install three screws in the locations
shown in Figure 146.
Figure 145 Bottom Rack Support
Three notched holes

face up and toward
front of library

Figure 146 Bottom Rack Support Installed

Equipment required:
• Catch tray
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut

Install two T-nut

screws

Installing the Middle Rack Supports
Install one middle rack support in each module. The left parking module and any additional expansion
modules ordered with this configuration come with the middle rack support pre-installed.
Required equipment:
• Middle rack supports

There are two rows of screw holes in the middle of the rear wall of the
Note
module frames. The middle rack supports attach to the lower set of holes
on the rear wall, not the upper set of holes.
1 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to partially install the second screw into the firewall.
2 Hang the middle rack support over this screw using the notch in the rack support.
3 Loosely install the other three screws, then fully tighten all four screws from right to left.
Loosely install this screw first, then hang rack

support from this screw. Then install and tighten
all screws.

Alignment
marks

The middle rack supports in the left parking module and right parking module each need to have a black
rubber hard stop installed. The left hard stop is pre-installed in the left parking module, so you just need to
install the right hard stop in the right parking module.
Required equipment:
• One hard stop

1 Remove the right hard stop from its temporary location in the left parking module. Use a T10 Torx
wrench to remove two screws. Save the screws and hard stop.
portion of the hard stop faces to the left (toward the center of the library when installed). The UP arrow
points upward.

Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag
The middle rack supports in both the left and right parking modules must contain a robot home/parking flag.
The left home/parking flag is pre-installed in the left parking module, so you only need to install the right flag.
Required equipment:

1 Get the right home/parking flag from the PM kit. (Do not use the flag from the CM kit — that one is
different and needs to be discarded.) You can recognize the correct flag by the small tab located about
an inch from the right end that fits into the rack support.
2 Install the right home/parking flag onto the right side of the middle rack support in the right parking
Note
Install three screws tab

Top Rack Support
Each robot requires a loader bracket in its respective parking module. The left loader bracket is pre-installed
in the left parking module, so you only need to install the loader bracket and its locator in the right parking
module. Attach the right robot loader bracket to top rack support OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY before installing
the top rack supports in the library.
Required tools:

• T10 Torx wrench
Required equipment:

• Loader bracket locator (1)
• Screw E, M3X3 MM button head Torx screw (2, for loader bracket locator)
Top rack support

Right loader bracket
Loader bracket locator
1 If you received an expansion module from the factory that you are using as the right parking
module, the top rack support will already be installed in the module. Remove the top rack support and
install the loader bracket and locator OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY as described below. Use a 2.5 mm hex
wrench to remove three screws securing the top rack support in the right parking module. Remove the
top rack support and save the screws.
2 Install the loader bracket and loader bracket locator OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY.
a. Use a T10 Torx wrench to loosely install two Screw E’s through the slots in the loader bracket
locator and into the top rack support. Do not tighten the screws all the way. The locator must

be able to slide back and forth easily along the length of the slot. See Figure 148. You will
tighten fully after you install the gear racks.
of the slots. You will tighten fully after you install the gear racks. See Figure 148.
Figure 148 Right Loader Bracket and Locator Attached to Top Rack Support

Two
screw E’s
in locator
Two screw F’s in

bracket

One top rack support is installed in each module. Top rack supports come pre-installed in the left parking
module and any additional expansion modules ordered as part of this installation.
Note
bracket and locator installed. See the special instructions below in Step 5.


Note
of the module.
Figure 149 Installing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules

Note: Top
lip of
loader
bracket
fits on top
of the front
edge of
the door
opening


Equipment required:


cutouts
robot installation.
cutouts

Slots vs. Holes



as follows:
.
Note
c. Lay down the Full Rack, Load Position.
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
threaded screw holes in the rack supports (see Figure 152). Use three screws with T-nuts for


.
Note
b. Lay down the standard full gear racks, from left to right, starting with the left parking module/
The left loader bracket does not have a locator so the instructions that
Note
follow relating to the right loader bracket locator do not apply to the left
loader bracket.
c. Lay down the Full Gear Rack, Load Position.
The right loader bracket locator that you installed earlier has two cutouts
Note
into which two tabs in the gear rack must fit. The robot loader bracket and
bracket locator should not be screwed down tightly, so that you can slide
them left and right. Adjust the position of the loader bracket and locator
until the rack tabs fit into the cutouts.

f. In the right parking module, make sure standard rack, load position engages the notch in the
loader bracket.

g. Install the left-most Screw C in the control module first. The screw goes up through the left-most
the rack. See Figure 153.
h. Insert (stage) the remaining Screw C’s in all the top gear racks, from left to right. The screws
half racks and four screws for full racks. See Figure 153.
i. Tighten all the screws from left to right.

j. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to fully tighten the four screws that secure the Right Robot Loader
Bracket (you partially installed these earlier; see Figure 154).
k. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to fully tighten the two screws in the Loader Bracket Adapter (partially
installed earlier; see Figure 154).
Note
locations.


Installing, Replacing, and Restraining Magazines, and
Positioning Calibration Targets
This section includes installing new magazines, reinstalling removed magazines, restraining magazines
with restraint clips, installing magazines with glued-on calibration targets, and installing loose calibration
targets.
For remove/replace instructions, see Magazine Installation Instructions on page 473, Removing Calibration
Targets on page 475, and Replacing Calibration Targets on page 475.
Some magazines require glued-on calibration targets so they do not

CAUTION get knocked off when removing/installing a robot.
1 Remove 14 extra standard magazines shipped in the left parking module, and put them into the control
module as needed. There are 14 extra standard magazines (do not have glued-on calibration targets)
shipped in the left parking module in Rack 1, Column 1 and Rack 2, Column 4, shown with red X’s in
the figure below.
a. Remove these fourteen magazines from the left parking module.
b. Install as many of the magazines as you need in the control module (Rack 1, Column 1; and
Rack 2, Column 4, Sections 6 – 10), shown in green stripes in the figure below.
c. Place any unused magazines in the discard pile.
Move magazines from these locations To these locations in the control

in the left parking module module
Left parking module Control module Control module

Left parking module
Rack 2 (door) Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 2 (door)
Rack 1 (rear wall)

2 Remove 3 extra magazines with glued-on calibration targets shipped in the left parking module. These
magazines are located in Rack 1, Column 1 and Rack 2, Column 4, shown with red X’s in the figure
below.
a. Remove these three magazines from the left parking module.
b. Set them aside for use later. You will install them in the right parking module in the locations
shown for magazines with glued-on calibration targets in Figure 158 on page 469.
Remove magazines from these

locations in the left parking module
Left parking module Left parking module


3 Reinstall the five magazines into the right parking module that you removed earlier in preparation for
removing the right side cover (Rack 1, Column 4, Sections 1 – 5). See Removing the Right Side Cover
from the Right-most Expansion Module on page 408.
Add back in these five

magazines
Right Parking Module

Rack 1 (Rear Wall)
4 If there are DLT magazines installed in the library, replace them with LTO magazines.

5 Reinstall the bottom section of magazines on the rear wall of all modules (Rack 1, Section 10), add
glued-on calibration targets and restraint clips, as follows (refer to Figure 156 on page 467):
All magazines in the bottom section of the rear wall (Rack 1, Section
CAUTION 10) require a magazine restraint clip to be installed.
If the calibration target belongs on a magazine in the bottom section

CAUTION of the rear wall (Rack 1, Section 10) you must replace the magazine
with a magazine that has glued-on calibration targets. Do not use a
magazine with a standalone calibration target, as the targets can get
knocked off when removing/installing a robot.
a. Make sure you put the magazines containing media back the same place they were before.
b. If a magazine in section requires a calibration target, switch out the standard magazine with a
magazine that has glued-on calibration targets before reinstalling. Make sure to keep any tapes
within the magazine in the same order. (For target locations, refer to Figure 156 on page 467.
If your configuration is different from that shown below, see Calibration Target Positions on
page 470 for pictures of all possible configurations).
The left parking module comes pre-installed with glued-on calibration targets.
Note
You should not need to install or move anything in the left parking module.
c. Reinstall each magazine in Section 10 by putting all four magazine tabs into their slots in the
library rear wall. Push the magazine firmly against the rear wall and push downward until it
clicks into place.
Figure 155 Magazine Restraint Clips and Glued Calibration Targets in Section 10 on Rear Wall
G = Requires a
magazine with
glued-on
calibration
target
All magazines in
section 10 on the
rear wall require
restraint clips. All
magazines with
calibration targets in
section 10 require
glued-on calibration
G G G G G G targets.
Left Parking Module Control Module Expansion Module Right Parking Module
Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall)
Section 10
f.

6 Install magazine restraint clips and glued calibration targets in Rack 1, Section 5, as follows (refer to
Figure 156 on page 467):
All magazines in the section just above the middle rail on the rear wall
CAUTION (Rack 1, Section 5), require a magazine restraint clip to be installed.
If the calibration target belongs on a magazine in the section just

CAUTION above the middle rail on the rear wall (Rack 1, Section 5), you must
replace the magazine with a magazine that has glued-on calibration
targets. Do not use a magazine with a standalone calibration target,
as the targets can get knocked off when removing/installing a robot.
a. Use your fist to “bump” up each magazine in Rack 1, Section 5. This will dislodge the bottom
magazine and slightly displace the two magazines above it, giving you enough room to work
without removing all of the magazines above it.
b. If a magazine in Section 5 requires a calibration target, switch out the standard magazine with
a magazine that has glued-on calibration targets. Make sure to keep any tapes within the
magazine in the same order. (For target locations, refer to Figure 156 on page 467. If your
The left parking module comes pre-installed with glued-on calibration targets. You
Note
should not need to install or move anything in the left parking module.
c. Reinstall/reseat each magazine in Section 5 by putting all four magazine tabs into their slots in
the library rear wall. Push the magazine firmly against the rear wall and push downward until it
clicks into place.
Section 5
All magazines in
section 5 on the rear
G G G G wall require restraint
clips. All magazines
with calibration
targets in section 5
require glued-on
calibration targets.
G = Requires a
magazine with
Left Parking Module Control Module Expansion Module Right Parking Module glued-on cal
Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall) Rack1 (rear wall)
target
f.

7 Install a new loose calibration target on a magazine in the control module door (Rack 2, Column 5,
Section 5) (see Figure 157). For instructions, see Replacing Calibration Targets on page 475.
Only the magazine indicated with an “N” needs a new target. The other
Note
The target to install in Figure 157 has a red box drawn around it in addition
Note
to the “N”. If you printed this document in black-and-white it is harder to
distinguish.
Figure 157 Calibration Targets in Control Module Door
Install a
standalone
calibration
target on this
magazine
Rack 2 (door)
8 Install 3 or 4 new loose calibration targets in the right parking module as shown in Figure 158 and Figure
159. Depending on the module’s configuration, the number of targets and the locations of these targets
will differ. The back wall may not need an additional loose calibration target.
Only the magazines indicated with an “N” need the new targets. The other
Note
The targets to install in Figure 158 and Figure 159 have red boxes drawn
Note
around them in addition to the “N’s”. If you printed this document in black-
and-white they is harder to distinguish.

Figure 158 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall)
N N
Figure 159 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 2 (Door)
N N
N N

installed

9 Confirm all the calibration targets are installed in their proper locations as shown in Calibration Target
Positions on page 470.
The calibration targets in different types of modules are in different

Note
positions. Some are different from Gen 1 target locations, so check each
module carefully.
Calibration Target Positions

• Left Parking Module — See Figure 160. These all come pre-installed, so you should not need to
change anything.
• Control Module — See Figure 161.
• Standard Expansion Modules — See Figure 162.
• Right Parking Module — See Figure 163 and Figure 164.
Figure 160 Calibration Targets in Left Parking Module (all calibration tabs are glued on and pre-installed)
N= Requires
G G G G new loose target
G = Requires
magazine with
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
G Gen 1 target
G G G remains as is
G G G G

Figure 161 Calibration Targets in Control Module
N= Requires
new loose target
G = Requires
magazine with
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
NG N Gen 1 target
remains as is
Figure 162 Calibration Targets in Standard Expansion Modules
N= Requires
new loose target
With or
G = Requires without
I/E
magazine with station
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
Gen 1 target
remains as is
Rack 1 (rear wall) Rack 2 (door) Rack 2 (door)

No I/E station or 24-slot 72-slot I/E station
I/E station installed installed

Figure 163 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 1 (Rear Wall)
N N
NG NG NG NG NG NG NG
NG G G NG G G
Figure 164 Calibration Targets in Right Parking Module - Rack 2 (Door)
N= Requires
N new loose target
G = Requires
magazine with
glued-on cal
target
x = Pre-existing
Gen 1 target
N N
remains as is
N
N N

installed

Magazine Installation Instructions
Magazines should be installed in a bottom-to-top order, except where noted otherwise.
Required equipment:
• FRU ID: 1017 — LTO magazine with barcode label

• FRU ID: 957 — LTO magazine with barcode label and glued-on calibration targets (for magazines
with calibration targets in Rack 1, Sections 5 and 10 only)
• FRU ID: 956 — Magazine restraint clips (for magazines in Rack 1, Sections 5 and 10 only)
Figure 165 Magazine Restraint Clip
Tabs
1 Insert the magazine in the appropriate space, making sure the hooking tabs align with the anchor slots
and the barcode label is at the top.
2 Make sure that the barcode label is clean, and clean it if necessary.
3 Using both hands, gently push the magazine downwards, until it snaps in place.
Make sure that all four tabs are fully engaged and that the back of the
Note
magazine is flush with the wall of the module.
4 If the magazine is located in the section 5 or section 10 on the rear wall (Rack 1), install a yellow plastic
magazine restraint clip on top of the magazine before installing the magazine above it.
a. Hold the magazine restraint clip with the tabs facing up.
b. Press the two ends together slightly, so that you can insert the two ends of the magazine
restraint clip into the two holes above the magazine in the rear wall of the library.
c. Lower the magazine restraint clip until it sits on top of the magazine, and then let go. The
restraint clip should lock in place.
d. Make sure you cannot remove the magazine.

Figure 166 Installing the Magazine Restraint Clip
Tabs
face
up

Removing Calibration Targets
Only remove LOOSE calibration targets. Do not remove glued-on

CAUTION calibration targets.

1 Pull the bottom of the calibration target towards you until it unsnaps from the magazine.
magazine
calibration target
pull on calibration
target from here
Replacing Calibration Targets

1 Slide the top of the calibration target onto the top of the correct magazine.
2 Push in the bottom of the calibration target until it snaps.
3 Make sure the calibration target is seated all the way around the magazine.

Installing Gen 2 Boards and Cables
Do the following in this order:
1 Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access on page 476
2 Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module on page 477
3 Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door on page 480
4 Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1) on page 480
5 Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable on page 482
6 Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power Cable on page 486
7 Connecting the Aisle Cable Assembly on page 490
8 Checking the Display Cable Connector on page 492
Removing the RCU and Trap Door Temporarily for Access

Remove the robotics control unit (RCU) and the “trap door” behind (at the back of the chassis) it from the
control module so you have better access to the LMM backplane. Set these items aside for reinstallation
later.
management control
blade (MCB)
robotics control
unit (RCU) board
library motor
drive (LMD) board (already removed)

Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly in the Control Module
The SPA/SCC mount assembly holds the SPA1 and SCC2 boards, which are pre-installed onto the mount
assembly in the upgrade kit. The mount assembly also provides connectors for the power cable and the
aisle cable assembly connector. It is located in the control module between the upper and lower drive bays.
Required tools:

• 7 mm nut driver
Required equipment:
• Mount assembly
• Mount assembly C-clamp with set screw
• Replacement 7 mm hex screw
C-clamp with set

screw
SPA/SCC Mount
Assembly with SPA1 and
SCC2 boards attached
Three connectors that

connect to the LMM
backplane

1 Remove one bolt from the library in the location shown in Figure 167. This is the location where the
upper left screw hole on the SPA/SCC mounting assembly will go. The bolt is either 5.5 mm or 7 mm,
depending on your library. Use the appropriate nut driver to remove the bolt.
Figure 167 Removing the Bolt
Remove this screw
Control Module
2 Slide the SPA/SCC mount assembly into the control module. There are two rails on top of the drive
cluster that the mount assembly sits on.
3 Pull the cables out the front and route to the left in the cable trough.
4 Replace the 5.5 mm bolt with the 7 mm screw from the upgrade kit to secure the left side of the SPA/
SCC mount assembly to the control module. See Figure 168.
5 Install the C-clamp with set screw to secure the right side of the SPA/SCC mount assembly as follows:
Place the C-clamp on the right rail on top of the drive cluster and push back against the SPA/SCC mount
assembly as far as you can. Then tighten the 2.5 mm hex set screw. See Figure 168.
6 There is an existing Ethernet cable that goes from the LBX to the LMM backplane connector J20. Move
J20 connector to J22.
7 Connect the three plugs that dangle from the SPA/SCC mount assembly to the J1, J5, and J6
connectors on the LMM backplane (the same connectors that the Gen 1 aisle cable assembly was
connected before). See Figure 168 and Figure 169.
8 Plug one end of the included CAT5 Ethernet cable into Port 1 (left-most Ethernet port) of the SCC2
board.

9 Thread the other end of the CAT5 Ethernet cable down through the rectangular opening to the left of
the SPA/SCC mount assembly and connect the other end of the cable to the J20 port on the LMM
backplane (see Figure 168 and Figure 169).
Figure 168 Installing the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly
Install C-clamp with

Install 7 mm screw
set screw
SPA/SCC
cables
SPA/SCC
Ethernet cables
cable
J20 Ethernet
cable SPA/
SCC mount
assy
J22 Move the

existing Ethernet
cable that goes to
LBX from J20 to
Flattened view of LMM backplane J22
identifying the connectors to install

Figure 169 Gen 2 Connectors on LMM Backplane
connector: J1 plug:
SPA/SCC mount assy
connector: J6 plug:
SPA/SCC mount assy
connector: J5 plug:
SPA/SCC mount assy
connector: J20 plug:

SCC2
connector: J21
plug: W2 to connector: J22
service port plug: W2 to LBX
Reinstalling the RCU and Trap Door

Reinstall the trap door and RCU blade you removed earlier.
Installing the Gen 2 Library Power Control (LPC1)

says “LPC.”
The LPC1 goes in the slot vacated by the LMD.

The LPC1 looks exactly like the LMD except that it has a label on its
The
CAUTION spine that says “LPC.” Make sure that you actually replace it.
Otherwise the Gen 2 library will not work.

FRU ID: 121 (library power control)
1 Remove the LPC1 from its anti-static bag.
2 Press up and out to open the latch hooks on each side of the LPC1.
3 Carefully align the LPC1 with the guide slots in bay 3 of the LMM. The LEDs will be on the bottom.
CAUTION
4 Use your thumbs on each end of the blade to evenly apply pressure and slide the LPC1 into the LMM.
When you feel the pins of the LPC1 blade lock into the backplane, push the latch hooks towards the
middle of the blade and into the lock position.
LPC
latchhooks

Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable
In all modules except for the left parking module, the door interlock switch is connected via a cable to that
module’s LBX board. Since the left parking module does not have an LBX board, its door interlock switch
shares the connection with the control module’s door interlock switch. The Gen 2 door switch loop cable
facilitates this sharing. The single end plugs into the LBX board in the control module, and the two
connectors on the “Y” end connect to the door interlock switch connectors in the control module and in the
left parking module. The end that connects to the left parking module is already pre-installed. The other two
ends of the cable are hanging loose in the left parking module.
There are three generations of LBX boards; all work with Gen 2 hardware. You
Note
T do not need to switch out LBX boards.
Figure 170 Door Switch Loop Cable - Picture for reference only. The cable will NOT be loose -- it will be
partially pre-installed in the left parking module
Connect to LBX board Connect to control

in control module module door interlock
cable
Pre-
installed in
LPM,
connected
to door
interlock
cable

Required equipment: Door switch loop cable (FRU ID number: 841) (partially installed in left parking
module)
1 Find the door switch loop cable in the left parking module. One connector on the 2-connector end is
already attached to the door interlock cable in the left parking module. The door switch loop cable
should be visible in the open area above the power chassis. See Figure 171.

Figure 171 Connecting the Door Switch Loop Cable in the Left Parking Module
J11
connector
CM door interlock cable

Door switch loop cable
2 Disconnect the control module’s door interlock cable from the J11 connector on the LBX board.
3 Pull the control module’s door interlock cable up into the space above the drive bay in the control
module to free it from any cables with which it may be entangled. Then route the cable over the control
module’s lower drive bay and into the left parking module in the space above the power chassis.
4 Connect the control module door interlock cable into the free connector on the “Y” end of the left parking
module’s door switch loop cable.

5 Route the single end of the new door switch interlock cable through the opening in the left of the left
parking module and into the control module. Run it up over the first drive bay and down to the LBX
board. Plug the connector into the J11 connector on the LBX board.
6 Secure both cables with the two clips on top of the lower drive bay in the control module.
Figure 172 Installed View - LBX Board Showing LPM Door Switch Loop Cable Connection
J11 connector -
Door switch loop
cable
Figure 173 Flat View - LBX Board Showing LPM Door Switch Loop Cable Connection
connector: J11
plug: W43 to door switch loop

Figure 174 Securing the Door Switch Loop Cable
Cable
clips
CM door
interlock
cable
LPM door
switch
loop
cable

Removing the Gen 1 Power Cable and Installing the Gen 2 Power
Cable
The Gen 2 power cable is a Y-cable with 3 connectors that replaces the Gen 1 short power cable. The Gen 2
power cable connects to the power supply, the LMM backplane, and the SPA/SCC mount assembly. While
the Gen 1 power cable had a loop, the Gen 2 power cable does not.
Figure 175 Power Cables
Gen 1 power cable (short) – remove Gen 2 power cable (tee’d) –- install
Connect to SPA/
SCC Mount
Assembly
Connect to LMM
backplane
Connect to top of
power chassis
1 Remove the Gen 1 short power cable that goes from the top of the power supply connector on the
chassis (J48L) to the LMM backplane. See Figure 176 for location.
2 Place the Gen 1 power cable in the discard pile.
3 Connect the Gen 2 power cable main connector into the J48L connector on the power chassis (same
connector from which you removed the Gen 1 cable — see Figure 176 and Figure 177).
4 Connect the teed connector into the backplane (same connector from which you removed the Gen 1
cable — see Figure 176 and Figure 177)).

LMM Backplane
Gen 1 power cable

connector on LMM
backplane
Gen 1 power cable

connector on power
chassis

Figure 177 Power Cable Connectors on LMM Backplane and Power Chassis
LMM backplane power cable connector location. Note the

“roof” and blades over the LBX have been removed for clarity.
Main Gen 2 power cable connector

goes here
Top of power chassis power cable connection:
Teed Gen 2 power cable

connector goes here
connector: J48L
plug: W12 to BPI
5 Thread the 4-pin connector up into the area that contains the SPA/SCC mount assembly. Connect the
4-pin connector on the tee power cable to the connector on the left side of the SPA/SCC mount
assembly. See Figure 178.

Figure 178 Power Cable Connected to SPA/SCC Mount Assembly
Power
cable
connector
on SPA/
SCC
Mount
Assembly

rail connectors in the left parking module (see Figure 179).
Figure 179 Cable Aisle Assembly Installed in Left Parking Module
Two screws in
mounting plate
Connect aisle cable

assembly connectors
to power rail
connectors
Power rail
(7-pack)
8 Plug the cable into the lower right connector on the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly (see Figure 180).

Connect the
aisle cable
assembly
here

Figure 181.
connector: J16
plug: W22
to touch screen

Connecting Modules Together
If you moved the library to another location, or added expansion modules, then connect all the modules
together as described below.
This section does NOT apply to the left parking module. The left parking
Note
module does not have an LBX board and is connected to the control module in
a different manner.
The cables will be preinstalled on the LBX board in any new expansion
Note
modules you installed. You must route them through the hole in the
bulkhead to either the control module or previous expansion module.
1 Locate the W1 and W2 cables on the new or moved expansion module.
W2 cable
(Ethernet)


bulkhead
Note
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17

Note
LBX board on
J2 J1 J2 J1
J17
J4 J3
W2 cable (Ethernet)

877.
J17 connection
LBX terminator

6 Use the cover plate thumbscrew to replace the LBX/IEX cover plates on the expansion modules.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
7 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to replace the cover plate between the drive positions in expansion
modules.
thumbscrews
Reinstalling Service Doors

1 If you removed any service doors, reinstall them by lifting them onto their hinges.
2 Close all service doors.

correctly before you begin operation. Perform these steps for each robot you need to install.
yellow handle and “lift area” (indicated in Figure 182).
the robot.
facing UP.
(appears loose and
wobbly)
Robot lift area
Robot handle
Robot shipping
restraint
Collector door

collector door to keep it closed (see Figure 183).
Tighten these
thumbscrews
to close door.
Loosen
thumbscrews
to open door.

Note
position.
vertically to engage the proper power rails. (See also Figure 198 on page 513 and Figure 199 on page
513.)
together:
of the robot.
of the robot.

Brackets
4 Loosen the two captive thumbscrews in the collector door so that the door opens (see Figure 183).
5 Set the X-preload tensioner by pushing the retaining pin up into a hole on the drive gear. Using two
hands, use one thumb to rotate the gear that sits on top of the spring toward the back of the robot while
at the same time using the other hand to pull the drive shaft toward the front of the robot until a hole
becomes available in the bottom of the gear into which to push the pin. Push the pin upward so that it
slides into the hole. (You will pull the pin back down later to load the tension spring.)



Figure 186.)
Robot
shipping
restraint
thumbscrews

a. Using the yellow picker lift handle (see Figure 187), pull the picker toward the top of the robot
just enough so that the yellow locking lever clears the bar halfway up the vertical length of the
robot.
position (see Figure 188).
Picker Lift
Handle

Kickstand locking lever
Be
bracket.
a. Make sure you install the left robot in the left parking module and the right robot in the right
parking module.

point” in Figure 189). Slide the robot back slightly until it hangs freely (not all the way back).
Note
Note
locations.


Top view
Rollers
Middle view
Rollers
Bottom view Rollers
back of the library, slide the robot to the right into the load position (see Figure 189). Be careful not to

See Figure 191.
robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket. Lift the robot up so that its
rollers clear the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
Rollers engaged on
Rollers engaged on

disengages (see Figure 192). This may have already occurred when you slid the robot into place; if so,
it’s OK.
the scribe lines are to the RIGHT side of the robot. See Figure 193.



17 If the robot is the LEFT robot: Slide the robot an inch or two to the left until the collectors are
positioned in front of the power rail load guides (see Figure 194). Close the collector door to push the
collectors into the power rails, then tighten the two captive thumbscrews (see Figure 183 on page 498).
Power rail load

guides

18 If the robot is the RIGHT robot: The top collector pair on the right robot “sags” a little (see Figure 195)
and needs assistance to get it into the proper position in the power rail. Quantum Engineering is working
on a fix for this, but, in the meantime, follow the workaround steps below.
Figure 195 Right Robot Collector Sagging Problem
Workaround Steps:
a. Verify that the collector mount is in the full UP position by loosening the two thumbscrews in the
metal bracket on the collector door and pulling the bracket up as much as possible. Use your
fingers to lift the tabs of the bracket slightly to disengage the hole in the bracket from the pin in
the collector door. Slide the thumbscrews and bracket all the way up toward the top of the robot.
Then retighten the bracket screws. See Figure 196.
Figure 196 Bracket Position - Right Side Robot
Bracket

b. Remove the bottom magazine from column 3 in the right parking module. You will need to
remove the magazines above it first. You will also need to remove the magazine restraint that
secures the bottom magazine.
c. Slide the robot so that the collectors are underneath column 3. This will allow you to access the
top of the collectors in the next step.
d. Place your finger on the top right collector in the pair. The collectors will straighten out and be
in the proper position. See Figure 197.
e. Keeping your finger in place, close the collector door. This pushes the collectors into the power
rails.
f. Tighten the two captive thumbscrews on the collector door (see Figure 183 on page 498).
g. Verify collector position (Step 19 on page 513) and verify that the robot slides smoothly (Step
20 on page 514), before replacing the magazines and magazine restraint in column 3.
Figure 197 Fixing the Collector Sagging Problem

199).
• On both left- and right-side robots, the bottom collector is always in the bottom position
(position 7).
the power rail.
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7

20 Verify robot motion: Push or pull on the robot handle to move the robot back and forth over a junction
in the gear racks. If it slides smoothly without resistance, noise, or jerkiness, everything is properly
installed. Proceed to next step.
directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door, lift the robot up so that its rollers clear
the racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
handle. (see Figure 187 on page 503). The picker drifts to the bottom of the robot.
rack support, which prevents you from lifting the robot out.) See Figure 200.
Robot locking
lever in locked
position
23 Place the robot FRU boxes and packaging in the discard pile.

Replace the cover plates you removed earlier.
1 From the control module, reinstall the following (see Figure 201):

the cover plate.
2 From the left parking module, reinstall the following (see Figure 201):
Figure 201 Replacing the Control Module and Left Parking Module Cover Plates
Cover plate
between
upper and
lower drive
bays
Service port Cover plate

panel above the power
chassis
LBX/IEX
cover plate
Bottom drive
cluster cover
plates
Control module
Left parking module

Installing the Right Side Cover
You only need to do this if you are converting an existing expansion module into a right parking module.
Otherwise, skip this section.
You should not have removed the left side cover, but if you did, you can use the
Note
instructions below to help you reinstall it.

Required equipment: Right side cover; screws and L-brackets you removed earlier in Removing Left and
Right Side Covers on page 404
1 Get two of the L-brackets you removed from the control module (Removing Left and Right Side Covers
on page 404) and install them on the left parking module in the top and middle positions. The lower
position is now unavailable because the power rail is in the way. Discard the third L-bracket and its
screws.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets
Do not reinstall the

lower L-bracket

2 Get the new right side cover.
3 Lift the right side cover straight up and set it on the end of the module.
screw holes
screw holes

4 Line up the screw holes from the frame to the right side cover and attach eight (8) 2.5 mm screws that
secure the panel.
Three screws are located at the front corner post, three at the back corner
Note
post, and two at the storage wall. The lower screw in the middle wall is no
longer available.
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
front of module
(access door)
back of module
(service door)
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
This screw is no longer available
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the left parking module. The pictures shown are for the right cover but they
are the same for the left side cover, just reversed.

are online.
3 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the up (I) position.
4 Press the Power button on the indicator panel.
A “Software Mismatch” dialog box pops up stating that the MCB and RCU are at different versions.
7 Click Next.
The Library Firmware Download screen appears.
8 Select the Reinstall Current package radio button and then click Finish.
You need to reinstall the current version of library firmware now, even
CAUTION though you already upgraded firmware earlier, in order to synchronize the
robotics firmware version with the library firmware version. This causes the
MCB to download the Gen 2 robotics firmware to the RCU which replaces
the Gen 1 robotics firmware.
9 Complete a series of screens to finish the install.

10 Wait for the firmware to finish downloading (Robotics Enabled button flashes during the download). Wait
for robotics to become enabled. (the Robotics Enabled LED on the front panel is on steady). This can
take at least 30 minutes.
Note
RST).

11 Check for tickets on the UI and troubleshoot. Resolve and close all tickets before proceeding. The
library may have issued one or more of the following three tickets which should have been solved by
reinstalling the current firmware above. You can ignore and close these three tickets:
• Door is open.
• LMD card is missing.
• Can’t read library serial number in CM.
If this ticket recurs, or the robotics do not become enabled and this ticket is
Note
present, you may have a problem related to the new robot scanning the S/
N label in older libraries. Contact Sustaining Engineering for information
and further instruction.



The IVT uses the active robot for all its tests. The passive robot is inactive during IVT. In order to test both
robots, you must run the full IVT on the active robot, then fail over and run just the Accessor FRU tests on
the newly active robot, as follows:
1 Run IVT on the currently active robot by following all of the instructions in the chapter Installation Testing
and Verification on page 833. If any problems or tickets occur, troubleshoot and retest until all tests
pass. Then return here.
2 Perform a robot failover so that the currently passive robot becomes the active robot.
a. On the LMC, make sure you are viewing the physical library (select View and click the name of
the physical library).
b. Select Tools > Library > Robot Failover.
The Robot Failover dialog box appears. The currently active robot is highlighted.
c. Click Failover.
d. Click Yes to confirm you want to fail over.
The library fails over and the previously passive robot becomes the active robot. A Success
dialog appears.
e. Click OK to close the success dialog.
f. Click Cancel to close the Robot Failover dialog box.
3 Run the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the newly active robot, as follows:


d. Click Start.
4 Run the Picker Assembly FRU subtest (NOT the full IVT) on the newly active robot, following the
same instructions as for the Accessor Assembly FRU subtest above, except select Picker Assembly
from the Select Subtest drop-down list.
5 Make the LEFT robot the active robot.
a. Click Tools > Library > Robot Failover.
b. If the left robot is not the active robot, click Failover to make it the active robot. (If the left robot
is already the active robot, click Cancel.)

Reconfiguring Partitions and Importing Cartridges
The new library has a number of new storage slots that you can take advantage of, if you have sufficient
COD. In addition, if you deleted or reconfigured partitions previously, you may want to add the partitions or
deleted storage back in now.
Use the notes you took at the beginning of this process to remind you how many magazines each partition
and I/E station needs to contain. To add or modify partitions, from the LMC, click Setup > Partitions >
Configure.
• The newly installed Left Parking Module contains 4 storage columns (Rack 1, columns 3 and 4 and
Rack 2, columns 1 and 2).
• The newly installed Right Parking Module contains 4 storage columns (Rack 1, columns 1 and 2,
and Rack 2, columns 3 and 4).
• The control module contains 14 additional magazines of storage — (Rack 1, column 1 and Rack 2,
column 4).
• Newly added expansion modules.

1 If desired, add or modify partitions to take advantage of new storage.
2 If you swapped a module, reconfigure partitions to use the storage slots, drives, and I/E station slots in
their new locations.
3 Add back any storage or I/E station magazines you removed earlier. Modify partitions as the customer
directs.
The option exists to defragment partitions to make the slots in each partition
Note
contiguous. However, this can take many hours and all partitions are taken
offline, so the customer may not want to do this. Discuss with the customer if
they would like to defragment partitions and only do it if they want you to. (To
defragment, click Tools > Partitions Defragmentation). For more details on
defragmentation, see the Scalar i6000 Maintenance Guide.
4 If you deleted DLT partitions, the customer may want you to configure new partitions using the slots from
those partitions and possibly new LTO drives.
5 Import or bulk load all of the cartridges you exported earlier. Remember to put them into the correct
partitions.
• You may want to view a Library Explorer map showing the current partition configuration to help
as you bulk load (to see the map, click Tools > Library Explorer).
• To import cartridges, from the LMC, click Operations > Import.
The eight columns comprising the left and right parking spaces may
CAUTION contain magazines but these magazines are not visible on the UI and
cannot be used for storage. Do not load cartridges into these columns. See
Figure 202 and Figure 203.

Figure 202 Do Not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Left Parking Module
Figure 203 Do not Load Cartridges in These Columns in Right Parking Module
Rack 1 (back) Rack 2 (door) Rack 2 (door)

No I/E station 24-slot I/E station
6 Save the library configuration (click Tools > Save/Restore).

7 Configure the host to see any new partitions or storage that you added.

Closing the Service and Access Doors
2 Show the customer the location of the keys.
Dispositioning the Removed Components

Quantum’s Install Coordinator will let you know how all of the removed parts will be dispositioned.
Depending on your location, the parts may be picked up by a vendor or disposed of on-site. In either case,
you must pack up all the removed components in preparation for final disposition as follows:
1 Place the two side covers that you removed from the Gen 1 library into the side panel return box.
2 Place the Gen 1 accessor and cable chain into a Robot FRU box. You do not need to use any internal
packing.
3 Place the remaining Gen 1 removed components from the “discard pile” into any of the upgrade kit
boxes and/or the other robot FRU box. You do not need to use any internal packaging.
4 Close all the boxes and seal with tape.
5 Using a permanent marker, write “Gen 1 - Scrap” clearly and visibly on each box.
6 Disposition the boxes of parts and side panels per instructions from Quantum’s Install Coordinator.
7 Discard/recycle any remaining packing material and boxes at the customer’s site.

Upgrading a Gen2 Single-Robot Library to a
Gen2 Dual-Robot Library
This chapter describes how to upgrade a Gen2 single-robot library to a Gen2 dual-robot library.
The upgrade process includes the following steps:
• Step 1: Installing the Left Parking Module and Expansion Modules on page 527
• Step 2: Removing the Single Robot on page 548
• Step 3: Removing the Single-Robot Aisle Cable Assembly from the CM on page 548
• Step 4: Removing and Replacing the 4-pack Power Rails on page 550
• Step 5: Installing the Dual-Robot Aisle Cable Assembly in the LPM on page 555
• Step 6: Installing Additional Hardware on page 556
• Step 7: Changing out the Left Home Sensor/Parking Stop on page 571
• Step 8: Converting an EM to be the Right Parking Module on page 572
Step 1: Installing the Left Parking Module and Expansion

Modules
After preparing the existing single-robot library to receive an expansion module, you will add the new
module. New modules must be installed to the right of the control module. Only the left parking module can
be to the left of the control module. If you want to add additional expansion modules, repeat the process.

• Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right-most Module on page 529
• Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks on page 533
• Bolting Modules Together on page 538


Guide.
Required tools:

Note
(CMBs) apply:


3 Verify that the existing library is level.
aside.
528 Upgrading a Gen2 Single-Robot Library to a Gen2 Dual-Robot Library

Removing the Right Side Panel from the Right-most Module
1 On the right-most module, remove the storage magazines in sections 1- 5 of column 4 of rack 1.
unsnaps.
rack 1 (back)
top view of module
column 4
rack 1 (back)
section 1
rack 2 (front)
section 3
section 4
section 5
drive cluster

Note
back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screws
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw

screw holes
screw holes

and set them aside.
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets

Remove the right hard stop from the existing last frame and reinstall it in the expansion module that is to
become the new last frame.
Required equipment:
• One hard stop

1 Remove the right hard stop from the existing last frame. Use a T10 Torx wrench to remove two screws.
support in the new last frame. Use a T10 Torx wrench to install the two screws. The padded portion of
the hard stop faces to the left (toward the center of the library when installed).
Removing the X-Axis Gear Racks

on the rack supports. You must remove all the racks that exists in the former last frame and reinstall them
in the new last frame.

cutouts
robot installation.
cutouts

.
the slots in the gear rack tabs and into the threaded screw holes in the rack supports (see
Figure 220 ). Note that the screws have nuts on them so be careful not to drop any loose parts
into the library. Remove three screws with T-nuts for half racks, and four screws for full racks.
b. Remove the X-axis gear racks from the library.

2 Remove the top X-axis gear rack as follows.

.
a. Remove Screw C’s in the top X-axis gear racks. The screws go up through slots in the
b. Remove the Half Rack, End Position racks from the library (see Figure 204 ).






Note

Note
turns.
leveling leg
leveling foot

feet by hand.
Bolting Modules Together

You will need to bolt the left parking module to the left of the control module. You will also need to bolt any
modules you added, moved, or swapped.

attachment bolt holes are aligned. Verify that the adjacent sides of the receiving unit and the new
expansion module are parallel. If not, adjust the leveling legs on the opposite side of the new module
until the adjacent sides are parallel. Be sure to turn the front and back legs the same number of turns.
front upper bolt
front lower bolt

back upper bolt
back lower bolt

wrench.
Note
post structure.
To install additional modules, repeat this step for each additional expansion module.

Note

Alignment
marks


Note
process.





Note
placements of level
543.
page 544.
Additional Leveling
Note

service door

front to back

left to right


Perform this step only if you are adding expansion modules. (If you are only upgrading from a Gen 2 single-
robot to a Gen 2 dual-robot configuration, adding a left parking module does not require moving the LBX
terminator board.)
1 Unscrew the thumbscrew and remove the LBX/IEX cover plate from the old last frame in the existing
configuration.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
3 Install the terminator in the new last frame.
J17 connection
LBX terminator


Note
In the future, if you add additional storage-only expansion modules in
positions 9 -12 of a library configuration, these modules ship with the latest
LBX board versions. You can verify these modules have the LBX2 GEN 3
boards by making sure red stickers are applied.

FRU ID: 104
thumbscrew

connector: J14
connector: J1
plug: W1 to BPI or
from previous LBX
connector: J11
connector: J10
CAN interface
plug: J19
cable
connector: J3
connector: J17
connector: J2
Note

FRU ID: 104

Reconnect all cables to the LBX: the aisle light cable, the LBX cable (W1), internal Ethernet cable (W2),
cluster (W13) door interlock cable (W15), power supply status cable (W16), and I/O management unit cable
(W17).
Step 2: Removing the Single Robot

Follow this procedure to remove the Gen 1 single robot from the library.
1 Move the robot’s yellow plastic locking lever into the “unlock” position. Pull up on the knob to move the
lever. Moving the handle to the left to unlock it snaps into place.
back of the library, slide the robot away from the load position (see Figure 229 ). Be careful not to grasp
the vertical rail in your right hand -- you could injure your hand when sliding the robot.
3 Hold the robot at the “lift points” in the middle of the vertical rails and pull it firmly toward the front of the
library
4 After removing the robot, place it in the discard pile.
Step 3: Removing the Single-Robot Aisle Cable Assembly from

the CM
Removing the Aisle Cable Assembly

the control module so you must disconnect it from the SPA/SCC mount assembly. The aisle cable assembly
is mounted on the control module firewall and its connector connected into the two power rail connectors in
the control module (see Figure 207 ).

Figure 207 Cable Aisle Assembly Installed in Control Module
Disconnect aisle
cable assembly
connector from power
rail connectors
Power rail
(4-pack)
1 Unplug the cable from the power rail connectors (see Figure 207 ).
2 Unplug the cable from the lower right connector on the SPA/SCC Mount Assembly (see Figure 208 ).
3 Remove the 2 screws and pull the entire cable out. After removing the cable, add it to the discard pile.

Disconnect
the aisle
cable
assembly
from here
Step 4: Removing and Replacing the 4-pack Power Rails

The Gen2 single uses 4-pack power rails, so these must be removed and replaced with Gen2 dual 7-pack
power rails.
Removing the 4-Pack Power Rails

Required equipment:

1 Adjacent power rails are secured together with two bridge clamps: one on the upper edge of the rails
and one on the lower edge of the rails. Using a 2.5 mm hex wrench, unscrew the two screws in each
bridge clamp. See Figure 209 on 551.
2 Disconnect the power connectors on all adjacent power rails. There is one 4-pin power connector on
each rail. The right-most connectors in the right parking module will not have anything plugged into
them. See Figure 210 on 552.


4-pin connectors
3 Remove the 4-pack rail from the library.
Installing 7-Pack Power Rails

To install the 7-pack power rails after removing the 4-pack power rails, you must secure adjacent power rails
using bridge clamps and connect adjacent rails via their connectors.
Required equipment:
• One power rail per module (FRU ID: 950). This is pre-installed in the left parking module and right
parking module.
Note
Install one power rail per module. Install the power rails from left to right. The power rail in the left parking
module is pre-installed, so you will start with the control module and end with the right parking module.
Note
place. See Figure 212 and Figure 213 .


4-pin and 3-pin

connectors
Locking Locking
lever, lever,
unlocked unlocked
Insertion tabs
Figure 213 Power Rail, Rear
Latches
Locking levers,
unlocked
you look at the rail from the front, move them left until they stop as shown in Figure 212 ). You may need

clamp. See Figure 209 .
parking module will not have anything plugged into them. See Figure 209 .
Step 5: Installing the Dual-Robot Aisle Cable Assembly in the

LPM
This is a longer version of cable you removed, since it is in the LPM. Also, it has two connectors for the
power rails instead of just one.

rail connectors in the left parking module (see Figure 207 ).
Connect the
aisle cable
assembly
here
Step 6: Installing Additional Hardware

Some of the Gen 2 hardware came pre-installed in the left parking module and any expansion modules you
3 Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag on page 559


Perform this step only if you are adding expansion modules. Catch trays are installed on the floor of the
library. Each tray straddles the junction between modules.
Equipment required:
• Catch tray
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut

Install two T-nut

screws

The middle rack supports in the left parking module and right parking module each need to have a black
rubber hard stop installed. The left hard stop is pre-installed in the left parking module, so you just need to
install the right hard stop in the right parking module.
Required equipment:
• One hard stop

1 Remove the right hard stop from its temporary location in the left parking module. Use a T10 Torx
wrench to remove two screws. Save the screws and hard stop.
portion of the hard stop faces to the left (toward the center of the library when installed). The UP arrow
points upward.

Installing the Right Home/Parking Flag
The middle rack supports in both the left and right parking modules must contain a robot home/parking flag.
The left home/parking flag is pre-installed in the left parking module, so you only need to install the right flag.
Required equipment:

1 Get the right home/parking flag from the PM kit. (Do not use the flag from the CM kit — that one is
different and needs to be discarded.) You can recognize the correct flag by the small tab located about
an inch from the right end that fits into the rack support.
2 Install the right home/parking flag onto the right side of the middle rack support in the right parking
Note

Install three screws tab

Top Rack Support
Each robot requires a loader bracket in its respective parking module. The left loader bracket is pre-installed
in the left parking module, so you only need to install the loader bracket and its locator in the right parking
module. Attach the right robot loader bracket to top rack support OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY before installing
the top rack supports in the library.
Required tools:

• T10 Torx wrench
Required equipment:

• Loader bracket locator (1)
• Screw E, M3X3 MM button head Torx screw (2, for loader bracket locator)

Top rack support
Right loader bracket
Loader bracket locator
1 Remove the top rack support and install the loader bracket and locator OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY as
described below. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove three screws securing the top rack support in
the right parking module. Remove the top rack support and save the screws.
2 Install the loader bracket and loader bracket locator OUTSIDE THE LIBRARY.
a. Use a T10 Torx wrench to install and fully tighten two Screw E’s through the slots in the loader
bracket locator and into the top rack support. Do not tighten the screws all the way. The locator
must be able to slide back and forth easily along the length of the slot. See Figure 216 .
of the slots. You will tighten fully after you install the gear racks. See Figure 216 .

Figure 216 Right Loader Bracket and Locator Attached to Top Rack Support

Two
screw E’s
in locator
Two screw F’s in

bracket

One top rack support is installed in each module. Top rack supports come pre-installed in the left parking
module and any additional expansion modules ordered as part of this installation, so this procedure applies
only to the new right parking module.
Note
bracket and locator installed. (You already removed the top rack support from
module.) See the special instructions below in Step 5.

Note
of the module.

Figure 217 Installing the Top Rack Supports in Standard Expansion Modules

Note: Top
lip of
loader
bracket
fits on top
of the front
edge of
the door
opening


Equipment required:


cutouts
robot installation.
cutouts

Slots vs. Holes



as follows:
.
Note
c. Lay down the Full Rack, Load Position.
Screw B
M4X6
screw
M4 T-nut
threaded screw holes in the rack supports (see Figure 220 ). Use three screws with T-nuts for


.
Note
b. Lay down the standard full gear racks, from left to right, starting with the left parking module/
The left loader bracket does not have a locator so the instructions that
Note
follow relating to the right loader bracket locator do not apply to the left
loader bracket.
c. Lay down the Full Gear Rack, Load Position.
The right loader bracket locator that you installed earlier has one cutout
Note
on the locator bracket into which a tab in the gear rack must fit. The robot
loader bracket and bracket locator should not be screwed down tightly, so
that you can slide them left and right. Adjust the position of the loader
bracket and locator until the rack tab fits into the cutout.

f. In the right parking module, make sure standard rack, load position engages the notch in the
loader bracket.

g. Install the left-most Screw C in the control module first. The screw goes up through the left-most
h. Insert (stage) the remaining Screw C’s in all the top gear racks, from left to right. The screws
half racks and four screws for full racks. See Figure 221 .
i. Tighten all the screws from left to right.

j. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to fully tighten the four screws that secure the Right Robot Loader
Bracket (you partially installed these earlier; see Figure 222 ).
k. Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to fully tighten the two screws in the Loader Bracket Adapter (partially
installed earlier; see Figure 222 ).
Note
locations.

Step 7: Changing out the Left Home Sensor/Parking Stop

The CM-only configurations use a shorter left home/parking flag. You must remove it from the CM and install
the standard one in the left parking module.

.
Step 8: Converting an EM to be the Right Parking Module

This section describes how to convert the right-most expansion module so that it becomes the right parking
module.

Installing the Side Cover on the New Right Parking Module
2.5 mm screws
retaining
L-brackets
2 Locate the right side panel that was removed from the previous expansion module.

screw holes
screw holes

back of module
front of module
2.5 mm screw
2.5 mm screw


Installing the Gen 2 Robots
Perform these steps to replace the left robot which was removed earlier, and to install the robot in the right
parking module.
the robot.
facing UP.
(appears loose and
wobbly)
Robot lift area
Robot handle
Robot shipping
restraint
Collector door

Tighten these
thumbscrews to
close door. Loosen
thumbscrews to
open door.

Note
position.
together:
of the robot.
of the robot.

Brackets
5 Set the X-preload tensioner by pushing the retaining pin up into a hole on the drive gear (see Figure
226 ). Using two hands, use one thumb to rotate the gear that sits on top of the spring toward the back
of the robot while at the same time using the other hand to pull the drive shaft toward the front of the
robot until a hole becomes available in the bottom of the gear into which to push the pin. Push the pin
upward so that it slides into the hole. (You will pull the pin back down later to load the tension spring.)


Figure 227 .)
a. Tilt the top of the restraint toward you slightly to disengage two pins in the bottom of the restraint
b. Place the shipping restraint in the discard pile.

Robot
shipping
restraint
thumbscrews

Be
bracket.

Note
Note
locations.


Top view
Rollers
Middle view
Rollers
Bottom view Rollers

See Figure 231 .
robot, first move it so that it is not directly underneath the loader bracket. Open the collector door,
unlatch the yellow plastic locking lever, lift the robot up so that its rollers clear the racks, and pull it out
of the library, top end first.)
Rollers engaged on
Rollers engaged on

it’s OK.



Power rail load

guides

236 ).
• On both left- and right-side robots, the bottom collector is always in the bottom position,
(position 7).
the power rail.
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7

19 Verify robot motion: Push or pull on the robot handle to move the robot toward the center of the library
just far enough so that it passes over the first junction of the power rails. If it slides smoothly without
resistance, noise, or jerkiness, everything is properly installed. Proceed to next step.
directly underneath the loader bracket.
20 For the right robot, unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the front of the picker that secure the restraint,
and remove the shipping bracket.
handle. The picker drifts to the bottom of the robot.
Robot locking
lever in locked
position


are online.
Note
RST).



Applying Power
The instructions in this chapter tell you how to apply power to a library. Before applying power, you should
perform a voltage check. The information in this chapter includes:
• Supported Power Cables on page 593

• Powering on the Library - AC Power Supply on page 594
• Powering on the Library - DC Power Supply on page 596
Supported Power Cables

Each system can be configured with either a single AC or DC power source as well as a redundant power
option. If redundant power is chosen, the control module and all expansion modules that contain tape
drives require two independent AC or DC power sources.
You must install your library with two independent power sources to
CAUTION have redundant power. You will NOT have redundant power if you use
only one AC power source.
The power cable length for each of these inputs is 14 feet (4.26 m). See Table 5 on page 593.
Table 5 Electrical Specifications for Control and Expansion Modules

Voltage (Single Required Protective Delivered Power
Location AMPs
Phase, 50 - 60 Hz) Service Connector
North America 110 30 NEMA L5 - 30 30
North America 208 15 NEMA L6 - 15 15
International 240 16 IEC60309 2P+E 20a or 16b

a. 20 amps in North America
b. 16 amps international

Cables for DC power must be supplied by the customer and installed
CAUTION by a licensed electrician. The minimum earthing conductor must be
#12 AWG (3mm2).
Powering on the Library - AC Power Supply

1 Verify that the circuit breaker on the power distribution units is down in the off (O) position.
2 Plug an AC power cable into each of the power distribution units.
3 Plug the other end of all AC power cables into power sources.
Independent power sources for the power distribution units in each module are needed if you want
redundant power.
4 On each of the power distribution units, set the circuit breaker switch to the up (I) position. Fan power
supplies will start but library power is not fully on.
redundant
power supply
(optional) circuit breaker
redundant power
distribution unit (optional)
power supply
circuit breaker
power distribution unit
AC power cable
connection
status LEDs
5 Verify that the power supply status LEDs are on.
• AC OK - Green
• DC OK - Green
• Fault - Blue
6 Close and latch the service door and access door.
594 Applying Power

7 On the indicator panel, press Power button to turn on power.
Make sure the service and access doors are closed and latched.
Note
The library will power on.
Status indicator
Robotics Enabled
indicator/button
Power indicator/button
touch screen
Depending on the size of the configuration it can take more than 90 minutes for
Note
the library to fully power on and the Library Management Console to be
displayed on the touch screen. During this time, Working... will be displayed on
the screen.
During the power-on sequence, the Robotics Enabled indicator will flash.
Anytime the library is powered Off (I), you must wait 10 seconds before power
On (O).

Once the library powers on, the Library Management Console (LMC) will be displayed on the touch screen
on the operator panel. The following illustration shows the boot screen on the operator panel. Wait until the
system is fully powered up and running, and then continue with the instructions in Configuring the Library
on page 655.
Figure 238 Library Management Console Touch Screen
You are now ready to connect the drives and the library using the instructions in Cabling on page 615.
Make sure you review the information in Cabling on page 615 before
Note
connecting the drives and blades.
Powering on the Library - DC Power Supply

Prior to powering on the DC power supply, the power cables must be

Note
attached by a licensed electrician..
1 Verify that the circuit breaker on the power distribution units is down in the off (O) position.
596 Applying Power

2 Plug the other end of all DC power cables into power sources.
Independent power sources for the power distribution units in each module are needed if you want
redundant power.
3 On each of the power distribution units, set the circuit breaker switch to the up (I) position. Fan power
supplies will start but library power is not fully on.
redundant circuit breaker

power supply
(optional)
redundant power
distribution unit (optional)
circuit breaker
status LEDs

power supply
DC power cable
connection
4 Verify that the power supply status LEDs are on.
• AC OK - Green
• DC OK - Green
• Fault - Blue
5 Close and latch the service door and access door.

6 On the indicator panel, press Power button to turn on power.
Make sure the service and access doors are closed and latched.
Note
The library will power on.
Status indicator
Robotics Enabled
indicator/button
touch screen
Depending on the size of the configuration it can take more than 90 minutes for
Note
the library to fully power on and the Library Management Console to be
displayed on the touch screen. During this time, Working... will be displayed on
the screen.
During the power-on sequence, the Robotics Enabled indicator will flash.
Anytime the library is powered Off (I), you must wait 10 seconds before power
On (O).
598 Applying Power

Once the library powers on, the Library Management Console (LMC) will be displayed on the touch screen
on the operator panel. The following illustration shows the boot screen on the operator panel. Wait until the
system is fully powered up and running, and then continue with the instructions in Configuring the Library
on page 655.
Figure 239 Library Management Console Touch Screen
You are now ready to connect the drives and the library using the instructions in Cabling on page 615.
Make sure you review the information in Cabling on page 615 before
Note
connecting the drives and blades.

600 Applying Power
Installing Drives and Blades
This chapter provides the step-by-step instructions for installing and connecting the drives in the library. The
information in this chapter includes:
• Numbering Sequences on page 604

• Installing Drives on page 608
• Installing Blades in the I/O Management Unit on page 612
The installation instructions in this chapter assume that you are installing drives
Note
and blades in a new library.
• If you are installing drives in a new library, the library is shipped with the
frames preconfigured to accept the drive quantity that has been
ordered. For example, if a customer orders 10 drives, 10 drive positions
will be ready to accept the drives. See Installing Drives on page 608.
• If you are adding drives to an existing library, see Adding Drives to an
Existing Installation on page 753.
• If you are removing and replacing failed drives in an existing library, see
the Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide.

Note
blades, the following rules regarding control management blades (CMBs)
apply:
• Any module (including the control module) that contains FC I/O blades or EE
blades must also contain a CMB.
control module and the module containing the FC I/O blade or EE blade. The
CMB provides daisy-chained Ethernet communication between the
Management Control Blade (MCB) located in the control module and the

Referencing Tape Drive Compatibility
Tape drives are enclosed in a universal drive sled. You can hot swap and hot add all supported drives,
regardless of type. The library supports the following types of tape drives:
• IBM LTO-1 or LTO-2 LVD–SCSI
• IBM LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6
• HP LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5,LTO-6 FC Multi-mode

LTO drives can be connected directly to hosts, to the storage area network (SAN), or to FC I/O blades in
the I/O management unit. SCSI drives must be connected directly to hosts or the SAN.
For detailed information on tape drive compatibility, WORM support, and mixed media rules, see the Scalar
i6000 User’s Guide.
602 Installing Drives and Blades

LTO Drives
Five generations of LTO drives are supported, but they are not fully compatible as shown in Table 6.
Table 6 LTO Drive and Cartridge Compatibility (N/C = Not Compatible)
LTO-3 LTO-4 LTO-5 LTO-6

LTO-1 LTO-2 LTO-3 LTO-4 LTO-5 LTO-6
WORM WORM WORM WORM
LTO-1 Reads/ N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Drives Writes
LTO-2 Reads/ Reads/ N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Drives Writes Writes
LTO-3 Reads Reads/ Reads/ Write N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Drives Writes Writes Once,
Read
Many
LTO-4 N/C Reads Reads/ Write Reads/ Write N/C N/C N/C N/C
Drives Writes Once, Writes Once,
Read Read
Many Many
LTO-5 N/C N/C Read Read Reads/ Write Reads/ Write N/C N/C
Drives Many Writes Once, Writes Once,
Read Read
Many Many
LTO-6 N/C N/C Read Read Reads/ Write Reads/ Write Reads/ Write
Drives Many Writes Once, Writes Once, Writes Once,
Read Read Read
Many Many Many
LTO tape drives read/write backward compatibility is as follows:

• Read - two versions backward compatible
• Write - one version backward compatible
All LTO cartridges are the same size, which means they use the same magazines in the library.
LTO drives can be directly attached to hosts, attached to the SAN, or connected to FC I/O blades in the
I/O management unit. SCSI drives must be directly attached to hosts or to the SAN.
LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives are configured with 8 Gb/s data transfers and support auto-negotiation to 8 Gb/s,
4 Gb/s and 2 Gb/s. They do not support fibre channel connectivity at or below 2 Gb/s. If an I/O blade is
attached, it is recommended that the LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives be configured at less than 8 Gb/s.

Numbering Sequences
This section describes the numbering sequences used in the library for the following:
• Drives—corresponds with the drive sections in rack 1, column 1 of a module.

• FC I/O blade ports—the order of the ports on the I/O blade.
• Ethernet expansion blade ports—the order of the ports on the Ethernet expansion blade.
• I/O management unit—the bays within the unit.
These sequences are used to determine where to locate blades in the I/O management unit and how to
connect drives to blades. See Table 7 on page 617 for more information.
Drive Numbering Sequence

An example of the numbering sequence for all drives is shown in Figure 240 below.
For information on the library’s coordinate system, see Storage Addressing System Overview on page 634.
Gaps between drive locations are not supported. Drives must be installed in
Note
each module in the order shown in Figure 240 . The control module must be
fully populated with 12 drives before installing any drives in the first expansion
module. Each expansion module must be fully populated before installing any
drives in subsequent expansion modules.
Figure 240 Drive Numbering Sequence in the Control Module and Expansion Modules
1,1,1,12,1,1
1,1,1,11,1,1
1,1,1,10,1,1
1,1,1,9,1,1
1,1,1,8,1,1
1,1,1,7,1,1
1,1,1,6,1,1
1,1,1,5,1,1
1,1,1,4,1,1
1,1,1,3,1,1
1,1,1,2,1,1
1,1,1,1,1,1

FC I/O Blade Numbering Sequence
Quantum has requirements for connecting FC I/O blades to drives. Figure 241 shows the numbering
(bottom to top) on the FC I/O blades. There can be a maximum of four drives connected to each FC I/O
blade installed in the I/O management unit. FC-1 and FC-2 are reserved for connections to the SAN or
hosts.
Figure 241 Fibre Channel I/O Blade Connection Numbering Sequence
LEDs
FC-6
FC-5
reserved for connections

FC-4
to Fibre Channel drives

FC-3
FC-2
reserved for connections to the

FC-1
storage area network (SAN) or

directly to hosts

Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB) Numbering Sequence
Quantum has requirements for connecting the Ethernet Expansion blades to drives. Figure 242 shows the
numbering (bottom to top) on the Ethernet Expansion blade. There can be a maximum of six drives
connected to each EEB installed in the I/O management unit.
Figure 242 Ethernet Expansion Blade Connection Numbering Sequence
LED status lights
EEB connection ports to LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives

I/O Management Unit Bay Numbering Sequence
Figure 243 shows the numbering sequence and the bay positions in the I/O management unit.
Bay 2 is reserved for the control management blade (CMB). Bay 1 is not used.
Note
Figure 243 I/O Management Unit Bay Layout
cooling assembly
bay 4 (second FC I/O blade)
bay 8 (second Ethernet

Expansion blade)
bay 6 (not used)
bay 2 (CMB)
bay 5 (third FC I/O blade)

bay 3 (first FC I/O blade)
bay 7 (first Ethernet

Expansion blade)
bay 1 (not used)

Installing Drives
Use the procedure in this section to install LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6, and LTO EDLM
scanning drives in either the control module or an expansion module in a new library. See Adding Drives to
an Existing Installation on page 753 to add drives to an existing library.
These instructions assume that you have not yet turned on power to the library.
The library supports mixing the FC and SCSI drives in any order in the drive
Note
sled positions. However, gaps between drive locations are not supported.
Drives must be installed in each module in the order shown in Figure 240 on
604. The control module must be fully populated with 12 drives before installing
any drives in the first expansion module. The first expansion module must be
fully populated before installing any drives in additional expansion modules.
Each additional expansion module must be fully populated before installing any
drives in subsequent expansion modules.
If you are installing a SCSI drive, you must attach the SCSI terminator to the
Note
drive before you insert it into drive slot when the library power is on.

LTO-5 and LTO-6 Drives
Note
The LTO-5 and LTO-6 FC drive can be connected either natively or through a
7404 FC I/O blade.
Native Storage Networking Drive (nSNW)

• HP LTO-5 and LTO-6 FC only
• Uses EEB
• Maximum 8 Gbps data speed
• Supports hosting of control path for library partition
• Supports library control path and drive data path failover
• Support drive firmware autoleveling and drive log retrieval
• Supports host access control
Native Fibre Channel Drive (nFC)
• IBM and HP LTO FC
• HP drives use EEB to provide drive firmware autoleveling and drive
log retrieval
• HP drives provide support for library control path but without path
failover
Storage Networking Drive (SNW)
• HP and IBM LTO FC
• I/O Blade provides:
• Path Failover
• Control path for library
• Port aggregation by connecting multiple drives via FC I/O Blade
• Drive firmware autoleveling and drive log retrieval
• Data path for drives
• LUN mapping, channel zoning and host access control
EDLM Drives
Note
• Must be separate from other blades in the library
• Only operable in the library managed partition
• Differentiated from regular drives by a label on the back indicating it is an
EDLM drive
For instructions on how to install drives in an existing library, see the Adding Drives to an Existing Installation
on page 753.
Required tools: #2 Phillips screwdriver, ESD strap
1 Open the service door of the control module or expansion module.

3 Use the #2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the necessary number of cover plates from the drive sled
positions. Remove the cover plates starting at the bottom and working towards the top of the library.
Either discard the cover plates or leave them with the customer for future use.
cover plates
thumbscrew
4 Remove the drives from the anti-static bag and place them in a location where they cannot be damaged.
Figure 244 LTO drive examples
thumbscrew
LTO-3 drive sled

LTO-5 drive sled
guide rail
5 Using the notches and markings on the drive sled position, slide the drive in slowly so the guide rails
engage.You might need to tilt the drive up or down in order to engage the rails. Once inserted, the drive
should be flush with no gaps above, below, or on either side. The screws must line up with the screw
holes.

6 Use the #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two thumbscrews on the drive.
7 Follow the numbering scheme shown in Figure 240 on 604 when installing any additional drives.
8 Detach the ESD strap.
9 If you are installing FC I/O blades in the I/O management unit, proceed to Installing Blades in the I/O
Management Unit on page 612.
If you are not installing FC I/O blades, proceed to Applying Power on page 593, and then follow one of
these paths:
• If you are going to directly attach either the FC or SCSI drives to a host, proceed to Attaching FC
and SCSI Drives Directly to Hosts on page 627.
• If you are connecting the FC drives to I/O blades, you will first follow the instructions in Installing
Blades in the I/O Management Unit on page 612 and then complete the procedure in Attaching
Drives to FC I/O Blades on page 616.
Make sure you review the information in Cable Connection Requirements

Note
for FC Drives on page 617 before connecting the cables.

Installing Blades in the I/O Management Unit
This subsection provides step-by-step instructions for installing a control management blade (CMB), Fibre
Channel (FC) I/O blades, and Ethernet Expansion blades into the I/O management unit.
• Each FC I/O blade supports 4 tape drives.

• There are two different FC I/O blade types: 6404 that auto-negotiates up to 2 Gbps and 7404 that
auto-negotiates up to 4 Gbps. Each FC I/O blade has an embedded controller that provides
connectivity and features that enhance the performance and reliability of tape operations. Each
blade provides two host communication ports and four connection ports to drives.
• Each Ethernet expansion blade supports 6 HP LTO-5or LTO-6 tape drives.
• Using EDLM with 7404 will not use or connect to host ports.
• EDLM blades require their own dedicated 7404 that is not host connected.
If there are FC I/O blades or Ethernet Expansion blades in the I/O management unit of an expansion
module, a CMB must also be present.
Required tool: ESD strap
3 Determine the designation for the blade based on the locations shown below.
cooling assembly

Expansion blade)
bay 6 (not used)
bay 2 (CMB)


Expansion blade)
bay 1 (not used)

4 Remove the necessary number of cover plates from the I/O management unit by pressing to the left and
pulling out on the latchhooks.
Either discard the unused cover plate or leave it with the customer for future use.
cover plates
5 Remove the blade from the anti-static bag.

6 Press up and out to open the latchhooks on each side of the blade.
7 Evenly apply pressure to both sides of the blade and slide it into the I/O management unit until the
latchhooks begin to move towards the middle of the blade. Push the latchhooks towards the middle of
the blade and into the lock position. You will feel the blade pins connect with the I/O management unit’s
backplane as the blade locks into place.
CAUTION
latchhooks

8 Attach the appropriate cables to the FC and Ethernet ports.
9 Make sure cover plates are installed over any unused bays in all of the I/O management units. If any
are missing, insert the cover plate with the latchhooks on the right side and evenly apply pressure to
both side of the plate until the latchhooks begin to move towards the middle of the blade. Push the
latchhooks towards the middle. You will feel the latchhooks lock into place.
Slots that are not populated with blades must contain a cover plate. If
CAUTION the cover plate is not installed, blade temperature errors will occur.
cover plates

If you are not adding any optional hardware, you are now ready to power up the library. Applying Power on
page 593 provides step-by-step instructions for powering up the library. If you are adding optional hardware,
see Adding Optional Hardware on page 751.

Cabling
This chapter contains instructions for connecting the library to the SAN or hosts. The library can be
connected in the following ways:
• FC and SCSI drives can be directly attached to host systems or to the SAN. In these configurations,
the MCB has one library control port (FC or SCSI) connecting to the controlling host computer.
• Attachment of the FC drives to the FC I/O blade in the I/O management unit. There are two ports
on each FC I/O blade that can be connected directly to the host or to the SAN.
• A partition can be LUN mapped through a direct-attached LTO-5 or LTO-6 drive.
This chapter contains the following step-by-step procedures:
• Attaching Drives to FC I/O Blades on page 616
• Attaching FC LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives to Ethernet Expansion Blades on page 622

• Attaching FC and SCSI Drives Directly to Hosts on page 627
The instructions in this chapter assume you have installed the tape drives and FC I/O blades using the
instructions in Installing Drives and Blades on page 601.

Attaching Drives to FC I/O Blades
The FC I/O blades support connections to LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4,LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives.
In order to achieve maximum performance from LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives, you
Note
should connect the drives directly to the SAN to allow operation at 8 Gbps
speeds.
The additional functionality that is provided through FC blades such as Drive
Firmware Download, Drive Data Collection and Drive Configuration
Management can be provided through connection of the LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives
to an Ethernet Expansion blade.
Libraries that have control management blade (CMB) in the I/O management unit support connection to the
drives and library controller through FC I/O blades and Ethernet Expansion blades (EEBs). The hosts
communicate with the drives via the FC I/O blades. The drives are represented by their own unique FC_LUN
ID assigned by its respective I/O blade (data path).
Although direct host connection to the MCB is possible, communication through the library partition to I/O
blade fibre ports is the recommended standard practice unless special requirements exist. Each library
partition will have a respective LUN ID mapped to a user selectable FC I/O blade port.The library partition
LUN is mapped to a host port on the same FC I/O blade to which the partition's drives are connected. Host
connectivity. Direct attached LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives can be configured using control path and SNW
functionality. See Working with Library Control Paths on page 681.
• The maximum hosts mapped to a single FC I/O blade is 64 per Fibre port.
Note
• Cabling may be affected by partitioning or zoning changes done as part of
configuration.
• When cabling to drives, ensure that they are cabled to the correct hosts for
the defined partitions.
• If the FC I/O blades have active channel zoning, ensure that the drives are
attached to ports that are accessible to defined zone.
• Blades for connecting the SCSI drives into the I/O management unit are not
supported.
• LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives can be configured with either an EEB (recommended)
connection or a FC I/O blade connection, depending on which type of drive
was purchased. An LTO-5 or LTO-6 tape drive cannot be connected to both
an EEB and a FC I/O blade. If you choose to connect to the FC I/O blade you
must use FC Port 1 on the dual ported LTO-5 or LTO-6 drive. The maximum
speed for an LTO-5 or LTO-6 to FC I/O connection is 4 Gbps. See Installing
Drives on page 608.
616 Cabling
Table 7 shows which FC I/O blades must be connected to the FC drive in each of the 12 drive coordinates
in either a control module or expansion module. For information on the library’s coordinate system, see
Storage Addressing System Overview on page 634.
Table 7 Cable Connection Requirements for FC Drives
FC I/O Blade Positions in the

FC Connection on I/O Blade Drive Coordinates
I/O Management Unit
Bay 3 FC-3 1,1,1,1,1,1
Bay 3 FC-4 1,1,1,2,1,1
Bay 3 FC-5 1,1,1,3,1,1
Bay 3 FC-6 1,1,1,4,1,1
Bay 4 FC-3 1,1,1,5,1,1
Bay 4 FC-4 1,1,1,6,1,1
Bay 4 FC-5 1,1,1,7,1,1
Bay 4 FC-6 1,1,1,8,1,1
Bay 5 FC-3 1,1,1,9,1,1
Bay 5 FC-4 1,1,1,10,1,1
Bay 5 FC-5 1,1,1,11,1,1
Bay 5 FC-6 1,1,1,12,1,1

Figure 245 shows an example of drives connected to the FC I/O blades.
Figure 245 Example of Drives Connected to FC I/O Blades
connection to host or SAN
cable from FC-6 to drive coordinate 1,1,1,4,1,1
Drives can only be connected to ports FC-3 through FC-6. Host connections are made through ports FC-1
and FC-2.
618 Cabling
Connecting FC Drives to FC I/O Blades
Use these instructions to install the Fibre optical cables that connect the FC drives to the FC I/O blades.
• See Table 7 on page 617 to see the correct location where the Fibre optic
Note
cables will be connected.
• The goal when installing the FC cables is to keep the cables out of the way of
the other components in the control module or expansion module. Use the
cable keepers and Velcro straps to accomplish this.
• A maximum of four FC drives can be connected to one FC I/O blade.
Required tools: ESD strap

3 Remove and discard the white plastic LC covers from the FC connectors on the tape drives.
4 Remove and discard the necessary number of the black rubber protective covers from the ports on the
FC I/O blades.
5 Carefully unwrap the six-foot Fibre optical cables and remove the two white plastic protective caps from
each end of the cable.
Fibre optical cables will be damaged if they are bent at more than a
CAUTION four inch arc.
6 Connect the Fibre optical cable to port FC-3 on the FC I/O blade that is installed in bay 3 of the I/O
management unit. See Table 7 on page 617 for information about the cable connection requirements.
port FC-3 on the

FC I/O blade in
in bay 3

7 Route the cable through the cable keepers and down the right side of the control module or expansion
module.
Fibre optic cable routed

through cable keepers
cable connected to FC 3 on
FC I/O blade in bay 3 of the
I/O management unit
8 Insert the Fibre optical cable into the Fibre Channel connection on the drive.
Fibre optic cable connected

to drive in coordinate 1,1,1,1,1,1
9 Repeat Step 5 on page 619 through Step 8 on page 620 for each drive that will be installed.
The FC port and drive numbers will change according to Table 7 on page
Note
617.
620 Cabling
10 Gather the fibre optical cables and put them inside the Velcro straps that are attached to the right side
of the module.
use Velcro straps

to secure cables
11 Connect the designated host to the FC-1 or FC-2 port on the FC I/O blade.

Attaching FC LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives to Ethernet Expansion Blades
The Ethernet Expansion blade (EEB) provides the option for Ethernet connectivity to each LTO-5 or LTO-6
drive for library-to-drive communication purposes only. The EEB is not in the data path as the FC I/O blade,
but provides a control path to the LTO-5 or LTO-6 drive for partition move medium commands as well as
functionality. Each EEB has six Ethernet ports to allow attachment to six LTO-5 drives or 6 LTO-6 drives.
The EEB provides Ethernet connectivity to the library's internal Ethernet and should not be connected to an
external Ethernet source. External Ethernet cables should not be connected to your LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives.
An LTO-5 or LTO-6 tape drive cannot be connected to both an EEB and an

Note
FC I/O blade. See Installing Drives on page 608.
Table 8 Cable Connection Recommendations for Ethernet Expansion Blades
EEB Positions in the LTO-5 or LTO-6 Connection

Drive Coordinates
I/O Management Unit on EEB
Bay 7 ETH-1 1,1,1,1,1,1
Bay 7 ETH-2 1,1,1,2,1,1
Bay 7 ETH-3 1,1,1,3,1,1
Bay 7 ETH-4 1,1,1,4,1,1
Bay 7 ETH-5 1,1,1,5,1,1
Bay 7 ETH-6 1,1,1,6,1,1
Bay 8 ETH-1 1,1,1,7,1,1
Bay 8 ETH-2 1,1,1,8,1,1
Bay 8 ETH-3 1,1,1,9,1,1
Bay 8 ETH-4 1,1,1,10,1,1
Bay 8 ETH-5 1,1,1,11,1,1
Bay 8 ETH-6 1,1,1,12,1,1
622 Cabling
Figure 246 Example of LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives Connected to Ethernet Expansion Blades
1,1,1,12,1,1
1,1,1,11,1,1
1,1,1,10,1,1
1,1,1,9,1,1
1,1,1,8,1,1
1,1,1,7,1,1
1,1,1,6,1,1
1,1,1,5,1,1
LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drive 1,1,1,4,1,1

1,1,1,3,1,1
1,1,1,2,1,1
1,1,1,1,1,1
EEB port connection

Connecting LTO-5 or LTO-6 Drives to Ethernet Expansion Blades
Use these instructions to install the Ethernet Expansion blade cables that connect the LTO-5 and LTO-6
drives to the Ethernet Expansion blades.
• See Table 8 on page 622 to see the correct location where the EEB cables
Note
will be connected.
• The goal when installing the EEB cables is to keep the cables out of the way
of the other components in the control module or expansion module. Use the
• A maximum of six LTO-5 drives or six LTO-6 drives can be connected to one
Ethernet expansion blade.

Use Quantum provided cables: FRU ID 834
3 Remove and discard the protective covers from the Ethernet connector on the tape drives.
4 Remove and discard the protective covers from the ports on the Ethernet Expansion blades.
5 Carefully unwrap the EEB cables.
6 Connect the EEB cable to ETH 1 on the EEB that is installed in bay 7 of the I/O management unit. See
Table 8 on page 622 for information about the cable connection requirements.
port 1 on the
EEB in
in bay 7
624 Cabling
module.
EEB cable routed

through cable
keepers
8 Insert the EEB cable into the EEB port connection on the drive.
EEB cable connected

to drive coordinate 1,1,1,1,1,1
9 Repeat Step 5 on page 624 through Step 8 on page 625 for each drive that will be installed and
connected to an EEB.
The EEB port and drive numbers will change according to Table 8 on page
Note
622.

10 Gather the EEB cables and put them inside the Velcro straps that are attached to the right side of the
module.
use Velcro straps

to secure cables
626 Cabling
Attaching Hosts to FC Ports
Each FC I/O blade installed in the library has two ports reserved for connection to hosts or the SAN. These
ports are FC-1 and FC-2. By default, ports FC-1 and FC-2 are in target mode. The other four ports (FC-3,
FC-4, FC-5, and FC-6) are in initiator mode by default.
A library that has multiple FC I/O blades may have many connections to several hosts.
One way to manage these connections is through the use of FC persistent binding, which enables the
administrator to control the devices that are to be presented to the hosts.
Persistent binding permanently maps a device to the following:
• Binding type (world wide port name (WWPN), world wide node name (WWNN), or a destination
identifier (D_ID)
• SCSI bus
• SCSI ID
The driver on the host detects all devices attached to the host bus adapters (HBA). By default global
automapping assigns a binding type, target ID, SCSI bus, and SCSI ID to the device. The binding type, SCSI
bus, and SCSI ID may change when the library is rebooted. When persistent binding is applied to one of
these targets, the binding type, SCSI bus, and SCSI ID remain the same whether the library is rebooted or
whether Global Automap All Targets is subsequently disabled. The automap is enabled by default.
The binding information is permanent because it is stored in the host registry or configuration file on a UNIX
host. The driver refers to the binding information when the library boots.
Persistent binding must be redone if the fibre optical cables connected to the
Note
FC I/O blades are changed.
You are now ready to configure the library using the instructions in Configuring the Library on page 655.
Attaching FC and SCSI Drives Directly to Hosts

In direct attached library configurations, the controlling host system connects directly to either the SCSI or
Fibre Channel (FC) drives in the library.
In the direct attached configurations, the management control blade (MCB) has one library control port
(SCSI or FC) connecting to the controlling host computer. The MCB SCSI control port provides its own
termination.
Tape drives attach directly to host computers and are represented by their own unique SCSI ID or world
wide node name/world wide port name (WWNN/WWPN) and FC_LUN ID.
There are limitations on the number of hosts that can access a single drive. Limitations are summarized
below:
• SCSI-attached drives support a maximum of two initiators on the same bus

• Fibre Channel-attached drives support a minimum of one initiator
•
The Fibre Channel LTO-1 tape drive is an arbitrated-loop-only device (also known as an NL ports). The drive
supports Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) protocol, and uses Class 3 Service frames. The drive also
supports both public (switch-attached) and private loops. This is not true for the LTO-2 and LTO-3 drives.

The library uses a LUN ID which is configured by using the Library Management Console (LMC) FC host.
Library partitions as well as drives are presented as devices to be mapped. SCSI IDs or cabling may affect
which SCSI device map LUN is associated with which FC host or SCSI host LUN ID; therefore, caution is
required to ensure that the device order is not altered when swapping drives, cables, or locations. The
partition should map to a higher priority LUN than the drives.
• Cabling may be affected by partitioning or zoning changes done as part of

Note
configuration.
• When cabling to drives, ensure that they are cabled to the correct hosts for
the defined partitions.
Examples of the direct attach cabling for SCSI and Fibre Channel drives are shown in Figure 247 on page
628 and Figure 248 on page 629.
Figure 247 Example of Direct Attached Library With SCSI Drives
install terminators
Ethernet
library controller secure cables with

to host Velcro straps
cables routed to
the SAN or hosts
install
terminators
In the example shown in Figure 247 , the SCSI drives 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12
Note
must be terminated by installing an appropriate terminator on the ports shown.
628 Cabling
Do not cable a drive to the MCB. The library does not support using the
CAUTION MCB as a terminating device on a chain of drives.
The MCB has one library control Fibre Channel port, which connects directly to the controlling host
computer. This Fibre Channel port is located on the MCB that is installed into the control module.
Figure 248 Example of Direct Attached Library with FC Drives
Ethernet
secure the cables

to the sides of the
library controller
modules using the
to host cable
Velcro straps
cables routed
directly from the
drives to hosts
or the SAN

Connecting FC Drives to Hosts
The procedure in this subsection tells how to directly attach compatible tape drives to the host computers.
The goal when installing the FC cables is to keep the cables out of the way of
Note
the other components in the control module or expansion module. Use the

3 Remove and discard the white plastic covers from the FC connectors on the tape drives.
4 Carefully unwrap the Fibre optical cables and remove the two white plastic protective caps from each
end of the cable.
CAUTION four-inch arc.
5 Label each end of the cables with the drive number and the destination host name. You should label
the end that connects to the tape drive with the name of the host and the end that connects to the host
with the name and location of the tape drive. This will help you find the correct cable if there is a cable
problem in the future.
6 Connect the fibre optical cable to the Fibre port on the drives.
7 Connect a fibre optic cable to the port of the MCB in the control module.
8 If e-mail notification is going to be used to monitor the library, connect the Ethernet cable that is provided
with the library to the Ethernet port on the MCB in the control module.
9 Route all cable to the right side of the module and either up through one of the three holes in the top or
down through the opening at bottom of the control module. Secure the cable to the right side using the
Velcro straps.
Make sure the cables are out of the way of other equipment and not in a
Note
position where they can be damaged
10 Connect the fibre optical cable from the MCB to the server that has been designated to interface with
the library.
11 Connect the fibre optical cables from the drives to the designated hosts.
12 Connect the Ethernet cable to the customer network.
630 Cabling
Connecting SCSI Drives to Hosts
The procedure in this subsection tells how to directly attach SCSI tape drives directly to the host computers.
The goal when installing the SCSI cables is to keep the cables out of the way of
Note
the other components in the control module or expansion module. You will use
the cable keepers and Velcro straps to accomplish this.

3 Unwrap the SCSI cables.
4 Label each end of the cables with the drive number and the destination host name. You should label
the end that connects to the tape drive with the name of the host and the end that connects to the host
with the name and location of the tape drive. This will help you find the correct cable if there is a cable
problem in the future.
5 Connect the SCSI cable to the port on the drives.
6 Install the SCSI terminators.
Ethernet
install terminators if you

are “daisy-chaining” the
library controller SCSI drives
to host cable
secure cables using

the Velcro straps

7 Connect a SCSI cable to the port of the MCB in the control module.
8 If e-mail notification is going to be used to monitor the library, connect the Ethernet cable that is provided
with the library to the Ethernet port on the MCB in the control module.
9 Route all cable to the right side of the module and either up through one of the three holes in the top or
down through the opening at bottom of the control module. Secure the cable to the right side using the
Velcro straps.
10 Connect the SCSI cables from the drives to the designated hosts.
11 Connect the SCSI cable from the MCB to the server that has been designated to interface with the
library.
12 Connect the Ethernet cable to the internal network.
632 Cabling
Installing Cartridges
This chapter gives instructions for loading cartridges into the library. The information provided includes:
• Loading Cartridges on page 633

• Installing Barcode Labels on page 639
• Importing Cartridges Using the I/E Station on page 641
• Manually Bulk Loading Cartridges on page 644
Loading Cartridges
Loading cartridges into a large library configuration can be time consuming.
Cartridges can be loaded two ways:
• Import: If the library will have more than one partition, insert cartridges in the I/E station and use
the Library Management Console (LMC) to import the cartridges. For more information, see
Importing Cartridges Using the I/E Station on page 641.
• Bulk Load: If the library will only have one partition, open the access door and manually insert
cartridges in the magazines that are licensed for access by the customer. If you cannot locate the
license keys shipped with the library, you can obtain them by contacting Quantum Technical
Assistance Center. For more information, see Manually Bulk Loading Cartridges on page 644.

Storage Addressing System Overview
The library uses a coordinate addressing system that defines the location of cartridges using six
coordinates. The coordinates are represented by the library in a comma separated list. For example:
1,1,1,1,2,1 = aisle 1, module 1, rack 1, section 1, column 2, row 1
Each of the variables are explained in the following bulleted list:
• Aisle - There is only one aisle in the library. This value will always be 1.
• Module - There are from one to sixteen modules, the control module and up to fifteen expansion
modules. The value will be between 1 and 16.
• Rack - There are two rack designations inside each module. These will always be either 1 or 2, with
2 being the inside of the access door.
Figure 249 Aisle, Module, and Rack Numbering Locations
back of modules modules 1 through 4

(from left to right)
aisle value
racks 1 and 2 is always 1
front of modules
• Section - There are 10 sections in a rack, numbered from top to bottom as you face the rack.
• Column - There are four columns in a rack, numbered from left to right as you face the rack. These
are numbered between 1 and 4.
• Row - This is equal to one cartridge slot. The number of rows per section can vary depending on
the size of the cartridge. The rows are numbered between 1 and 6 for LTO cartridges.
634 Installing Cartridges

Figure 250 shows the section, column and row numbering for rack 1 of a module with LTO cartridges. See
Figure 249 on 634 to review the rack numbering.
Figure 250 Section, Column, and Row Numbering Locations for Rack 1 Using LTO Cartridges
column
1 2 3 4
row (individual slot)

1
2
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
4
section
5
section
7 X-axis rail counts as Section 6
10
When tape drives are installed on rack 1 of a control module or expansion

Note
module, they replace the storage in columns 1 and 2. Because drives are
installed from the bottom to the top you will lose the storage starting in section
10 first. You do not lose the magazine in column 2 of section 5.
Column 1 does not contain storage in the control module.

Figure 251 shows the section, column and row numbering for rack 2 of a module using LTO cartridges. See
Figure 249 on 634 to review the rack numbering.
The cartridges in the 24-slot LTO I/E station are addressed as part of column 3
Note
and are in sections 1 through 4 (top to bottom). When you have an I/E station
installed on rack 2, there are no cartridges in columns 3 and 4 of sections 1-5.
See Figure 251 for an illustration.
Figure 251 Section, Column, and Row Numbering Location for Rack 2 Using LTO Cartridges
column
1 2 3 4 I/E station
1
column 3, section 1
2
column 3, section 2
3
column 3, section 3
4
column 3, section 4
5
section
this column of magazines are

not present in a control module
9
10
In Figure 251 on 636, the five magazines shown in column 4, sections 6-10 do
Note
not exist in a control module. The magazines do exist in expansion modules.

Figure 252 on 637 shows example location coordinates. The examples assume that the linear storage are
located in aisle 1, module 1, and rack 1. That is why the first three numbers in the comma separated list are
1,1,1. The last three numbers represent the address on the linear storage assembly.
Figure 252 Example Location Coordinates
1 2 3 4
1,1,1,3,2,1
2
column 1 is
not available 5
in a control
module
8
1,1,1,7,3,2
10

The Library Management Console (LMC) uses dialog boxes like the one in Figure 253 that enable you to
specify cartridge locations. These coordinates are reported in parenthetical format, each element separated
by commas. In parenthetical format, the location for the device listed in the Load Drives dialog box below
would be written (1,1,2,2,2,2).
Figure 253 Location Coordinates Used in the Load Drives Dialog Box

Installing Barcode Labels
Each cartridge in the library must have an external label that is operator and machine readable to identify
the barcode number. Most manufacturers offer cartridges with the labels already applied or with the labels
included that can be attached at the customer site.
Duplicate barcodes are not supported even if you have mixed media or multiple
Note
partitions in the library. If the library has cartridges with identical barcode labels,
the library will issue a ticket notifying you of the problem. Areas in the LMC
where media IDs are listed will show information for the first cartridge, but the
cartridge with the duplicate barcode label will not be listed.
All barcode labels are applied to the front of a cartridge. Figure 254 on 639 shows an example of a barcode
label being applied to a LTO cartridge.
To ensure the proper operation of tape cartridges, pickers, and drives, make
Note
sure your hands are dirt- and grease-free before handling tape cartridges.
Clean the sides of all tape cartridges with a clean, dry paper towel or cloth
before installing them in the library.
Do not place a barcode label on top of a cartridge. Placing a barcode

CAUTION label on top of a cartridge can cause an inventory to fail or damage
the drive.
Figure 254 Applying Barcode Labels to LTO Cartridges
top of cartridge
barcode label
write protect lock

Barcode Requirements
Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine-readable to identify the volume serial
number. A barcode must use only uppercase letters A to Z and/or numeric values 0 to 9. The library supports
Code 39 (3 of 9) type barcode labels.
For LTO media barcodes, the library dynamically supports 1 to 14 characters for volume serial number plus
a two-character media type identifier. See the image below for an example of a supported LTO barcode
label.
two character media

identifier (L1, L2, L3, LT, L4, LU, L5, L6, LV)
Quantum-supplied barcode labels will provide the best results. Barcode labels from other sources can be
used, but they must meet the following requirements:
• ANSI MH10.8M-1983 Standard
• Number of digits: 6+2 (LTO)
• Background reflection: greater than 25 percent
• Print contrast: greater than 75 percent
• Ratio: greater than 2.2
• Module: >= 254 mm
• Print tolerance: ±57 mm

Additional Requirements:
• Height of the visible portion of the barcode: 10 mm ±2 mm

• Length of the rest zones: 5.25 mm ±0.25 mm
• No black marks should be present in the intermediate spaces or rest zones
• No white areas should be present on the bars
Importing Cartridges Using the I/E Station

These instructions assume that you have already entered your license key, set up your partitions, and
attached the barcode labels to the cartridges. You will use the I/E station to load cartridges.
Note
1 Make sure that you are viewing the partition into which you want to import a cartridge.
2 From the View menu, select a partition.
3 Click Operations > Import to add cartridges into the partition.
The Import Media dialog box appears.
4 Click Yes if you are prompted to take the partition offline.

5 Insert cartridges into appropriate I/E station magazines.
You can insert multiple cartridges up to the maximum number of slots in your I/E station. You must insert
cartridges in the correct I/E stations magazines based on how you created the partitions. As the
cartridges are inserted into the I/E station, the scanner automatically reads the barcodes.
To see which I/E stations are associated with a particular partition, click Monitor > I/E Station.
Element Description
IE Station # The number of the I/E station, which is the same as the control
module or expansion module that contains it.
All 24-slot single door I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at
the control module. All 72-slot double door I/E stations are
numbered with a number and a letter. “A” indicates the first 36 slots
on the left side of the I/E station. “B” indicates the right side.
Magazine # The number of the I/E station magazine (numbered from top to
bottom in the I/E station).
Media ID The cartridge barcode or the word EMPTY.
Slot Type Media type, for example LTO.
Partition Name The name of the partition to which the I/E station is assigned.
6 Select Operations > Import or use the Import toolbar button.

The Import Media dialog box appears with a list of cartridges in the I/E station displayed. The following
table describes the elements on the Import Media dialog box.

Designation Description
Media ID The volume serial number of the cartridge
Slot The row where the cartridge located.
I/E station The number of the I/E station, which is the same as the control
module or expansion module that contains it.
All 24-slot single door I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at
the control module. All 72-slot double door I/E stations are
numbered with a the module and a letter . “A” indicates the first 36
slots on the left side of the I/E station. “B” indicates the right side.
Magazine The number of the magazine (section) where the slot is located,
numbered from the top down
Results “Imported” or “Failed”
7 Click Import.
The accessor moves the cartridge automatically from the I/E station to the first available empty slot in
that partition. You cannot manually specify the destination slot.

Manually Bulk Loading Cartridges
This section provides instructions for bulk loading cartridges into the library.
Note
Do not bulk load cartridges into a library that will have more than one
CAUTION partition because there is a risk the cartridges will not be accessible
by a specific partition.
Also, it is possible to insert cartridges into unlicensed slots when

they are installed manually.
Figure 255 Cartridge Insertion Into Magazine
top of cartridge
magazine
front of cartridge
Bulk loading of cartridges must be done with caution. When bulk loading cartridges make certain:
• All cartridges have a valid barcode label.

• The barcode side is facing out of the slot.
• The cartridge is completely seated in the slot. The accessor assembly motion can be impeded if the
cartridge is not completely seated within the slot.
• The media is not inserted in the slot upside down (see Figure 255 ).
• The media is not dropped while loading it into the library.

Follow these instructions to bulk load the magazines.
1 From the LMC, select a partition using the View menu.
You are prompted to take the partition offline.
2 When prompted to take the partition offline, click Yes.
4 Open the access door of the control module or expansion module.
5 When you have completed your bulk load, make sure all cartridges are inserted completely.
6 Close the access door of the control module or expansion module.
8 Run the Inventory command by clicking Operations > Inventory from the LMC.
Click OK to start the inventory. You are prompted when the inventory is complete.
You are now ready to continue installation with the instructions in Setting up Your Library for Access on page
647.

Setting up Your Library for Access
This chapter contains the compatibility requirements and instructions for setting up a computer for remote
library access. The instructions include:
• Launching the Remote Client on page 647

• Configuring Library Security on page 648
The same Library Management Console (LMC) available from the local library touchscreen is also available
as a Java applet using a Web browser.
Launching the Remote Client

In order to manage your library remotely, point your client to the IP address of the library. Only one
administration user should be logged on and performing library configuration at any one time.
Use one of the following procedures to start the LMC, depending on the operating system being used.
• Only one LMC session should be running on a single host at the same time.
Note
• Only one LMC session should be run against a single library at one time.

Configuring Library Security
You can change the internal IP address of the library and other library security settings, including enabling
or disabling network services, enabling or disabling remote access to the library, setting up firewall access
for server callbacks to remote clients, and enabling or disabling SNMP or SMI-S access.
Changing Internal IP Network Addressing

The default internal network subnet setting for the Scalar i6000 is 10.10.X.X. Attaching the library to a
10.10.X.X external network can cause library and network problems. The Change Internal IP dialog box
enables you to change the library’s internal IP addressing so that conflicts do not occur. This dialog box is
accessible only from the library’s touch screen. You must be logged in as a Service user to access this
feature.
Keep in mind the following considerations:
• You only need to change the default internal IP setting if your external network is 10.10.X.X.
• Do not set up internal IP addressing to conflict with existing external IP addressing. If you set up the
same IP subnet for both the internal and external IP networks (for example, 10.10.X.X), the library
will become unusable.
• If you change the internal IP addressing, and then later a user opens the Network Configuration
dialog box (Setup > Network Configuration > IPv4 Configuration or Setup > Network
Configuration > IPv6 Configuration) to assign a static IP address to the library that conflicts with
the internal network, the assignment request will fail and the library will issue a ticket.
• If you change the internal IP addressing, and if Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is
enabled and DHCP assigns to the library an IP address that conflicts with the internal network,
address conflicts could occur between internal library devices and external customer devices and
the library will issue a ticket.
1 Log on as the service user.
2 Click Setup > Network Configuration > Internal IP.
The Change Internal IP dialog box appears.
By default, the internal IP subnet address that is automatically selected on this dialog box is not the one
to which your internal network is currently set. In the example shown, the current internal network IP
setting is 10.10.X.X, and the automatic selection by default is 10.20.X.X. If this selection is accepted,
the internal IP setting will change to 10.20.X.X.
648 Setting up Your Library for Access

3 To accept the automatic internal IP setting, click OK.
The following message appears.
Setting the internal IP network to be on the same subnet that the

CAUTION external IP network is on causes library failure and results in the
management interface (the management control blade (MCB))
becoming unusable. For example, if you set 10.10.X.X as the internal
IP network and your external IP network is also 10.10.X.X, a conflict
occurs. If you are unsure about whether the change is appropriate,
click No.
4 If you are sure that you want to make the change, click Yes.
5 After the library processes the request successfully, a message appears that asks you whether you
want to shut down the library. You must shut down and restart the library.

Changing the Library Security Configuration
The Security Configuration dialog box enables you to restrict external users and various remote services
from accessing the library through the Ethernet port on the MCB. It also enables you to configure the
session timeout.
Changing security configuration settings using the remote client might cause a
Note
loss of connectivity. If this happens, use the local touch panel to reset the
security configuration settings and restore remote connectivity.
Accessing the Security Configuration

2 Click Setup > Security.
The Security Configuration dialog box appears with the Services tab displayed.
Configuring Access for Network Services

The Services tab on the Security Configuration dialog box enables you to entirely prevent all external
access to the library or allow access according to other security settings on this dialog box. It also enables
you to allow or prevent access by SSH, SSHv1, and to allow or prevent external attempts to discover the
library by pinging it.
1 Click the Services tab on the Security Configuration dialog box.

2 You can change the security settings for any of the following items:
• Network Interface — To entirely prevent all external access to the library through the MCB
Ethernet port, regardless of other settings on the Security Configuration dialog box, select
Disable. To allow external access to the library in accordance with other security settings on
the Security Configuration dialog box, select Enable. (The Network Interface option is
unavailable when accessing the LMC remotely.)
• ICMP — To prevent external attempts to discover the library by pinging it (by means of Internet
Control Message Protocol [ICMP] Echo packets), select Disable. Using this setting can prevent
denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, which can flood the library with pings and cause loss of network
connectivity and services.
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled for your library on the Network
Configuration dialog box (Setup > Network Configuration > IPv4 Configuration or Setup >
Network Configuration > IPv6 Configuration), you also should enable ICMP. This ensures
that the DHCP server can determine whether the IP address that is assigned to the MCB is still
valid. (ICMP is enabled by default.)
• SSH—To prevent Secure Shell access to the library, select Disable. To allow SSH to run on
the library, select Enable.
• SSHv1—To prevent Secure Shell version 1 protocol from running on the library, select Disable.
To allow SSH v1 to run on the library, select Enable. SSHv1 is enabled by default. If you choose
to disable SSHv1, only SSHv2 will connect to the library.
• CLI — To access the library using a command line interface, select Enable. For more
information, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
Access is gained via SSH. Therefore, to use the CLI to access the library,
Note
you must also enable SSH (see above).
• HTTP—To prevent access to library using the remote Java browser, select Disable. If you
choose disable HTTP, access to the library is limited to the library’s operator panel. To permit
access to the library GUI using a remote Java browser, select Enable. (The Network Interface
option is unavailable when accessing the LMC remotely.)
3 If you want to apply the changes, but you do not want to close the dialog box, click Apply. Otherwise,
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Configuring Access for Remote LMC Clients

You can use the LMC tab on the Security Configuration dialog box to configure the following options:
• To allow or prevent remote LMC client access to the library.

• To set up firewall access for server callbacks to remote clients.
• To enable or disable service login.
• To set up the length of time before a session timeout.

1 Click the LMC tab on the Security Configuration dialog box.
2 Change the security settings for any of the following items:

• Remote Access — To prevent all remote LMC clients from accessing the library, select
Disable. To allow them to access the library, select Enable. (The Network Interface option is
unavailable when accessing the LMC remotely.).
Select Use SSL to enable secure communication between the LMC client and the library.
Enabling SSL can impact the network performance of remote operations

Note
(for example, downloading new library software).
• Callback Port Range — To configure firewall access for server callbacks to remote clients,
type the first port number of a range of ports that you want to be used for callbacks in the
Starting text box, and then type the last port number in the Ending text box. Valid port ranges
must fit within the range 1024 to 65535. Remote client service ports must be within the range
of ports specified here. Otherwise, callbacks fail because the library’s firewall blocks outbound
packets designated for out-of-range ports.
• Service Login — To allow service login, select Enable. To prevent service login, select
Disable. The Admin user can enable or disable the service user login on both the front panel
access and the remote client access.
The default service login through the service port is still available for use.
Note
For security purposes, the service port can be physically locked down by
locking the back door of the i6000.
• Session — To configure the length of the session’s timeout, type or use the arrow buttons to
specify the length of a session before it times out. Valid session timeouts are 1-1440 minutes
(1 minute - 24 hours), where the default is 30 minutes.

Configuring Access for SNMP and SMI-S
The SNMP/SMI-S tab on the Security Configuration dialog box enables you to allow or prevent SNMP or
SMI-S traffic across the MCB Ethernet port.
1 Select the SNMP/SMI-S tab on the Security Configuration dialog box.
2 Change the security settings for any of the following items:

• SMI-S — To enable SMI-S traffic (port 5988), select the Enable SMI-S check box. To allow
encryption of SMI-S traffic (SSL, port 5989), select the Enable Secure SMI-S check box.
Port 427 is used for Service Location Protocol (SLP), which is used along
Note
with the Common Information Model (CIM) server.
• SNMP — To prevent all SNMP traffic across the MCB Ethernet port, select Disable. To allow
SNMP GET operations, select Enable.
If SNMP traffic is allowed, then SNMP v3 is always available. If you want to permit less secure
SNMP access, select Enable SNMP v1 and v2. If you decide you do not want to use SNMP v1
and v2, clear the Enable SNMP v1 and v2 check box.
The library ignores all remotely issued SNMP SET operations under any circumstance, which
means that external applications cannot register themselves to receive SNMP traps from the
library. However, the Trap Registration dialog box (Setup > Notifications > Trap
Registration) enables you to perform this registration yourself by entering the necessary IP
and port information. For more information about the Trap Registration dialog box, see the
Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.

Configuring the Library
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for configuring the library using the Library Management
Console (LMC). The information in this chapter includes:
• Addressing Configuration Prerequisites on page 655

• Logging on to the Library on page 656
• Performing Basic Configuration on page 658
• Performing Advanced Configuration on page 665
• Working with Library Control Paths on page 681
• Creating Partitions on page 684
• Putting Physical Library and Partitions Online on page 742
• Configuring Drive Cleaning on page 744
• Configuring Screen Saver Preferences on page 747
• Saving the Library Configuration on page 749
• Logging Off on page 750
Before the library can be used, there is some basic configuration that must be done. Configuration varies
depending on the type of library and the features that will be used. Before configuring the library, you should
review all Technical Bulletins and Release Notes and Errata for the product.
Only one administrator can be logged on and performing library configuration

Note
at any one time. If another administrator attempts to log on, a message
appears, warning that only one administrator at a time is permitted on the
library. If a service user logs on while an administrator or regular users are
logged on, the library automatically logs off those users.
Addressing Configuration Prerequisites

You must obtain the following information from the customer, before configuring the library.
• Proposed IP address of library

• Subnet Mask for local network
• IP address for the gateway on the local subnet
• IP address of the SMTP server

• Access account of SMTP server
• Customer e-mail addresses (if they want e-mail notification)
Logging on to the Library

After the library has finished booting, you will see the Logon dialog box. Use the keyboard displayed on the
touch screen to log on.
Select the Shift key to access uppercase and special characters.

Note
1 Position the cursor in the Name text box by tapping it.
2 Use the keyboard to type the word admin in the Name text box.
3 Position the cursor in the text box below the Name text box by tapping it.
4 Use the keyboard to type the word password in the text box.
If you are logging on to the library for the first time using the default
Note
administrator account (admin), type password. After you log on, the library
prompts you to change the default admin password. You must enter and
confirm a new password. Passwords that are most secure include a
combination of letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters.
Passwords must be eight or more characters in length. The word
“password” is not available for use..
5 Select OK.
You can change the default password at anytime. This helps ensure
Note
security standards for the site.
You must now decide which method you want to use to configure the library:
656 Configuring the Library

• If you want to perform a minimal configuration using the Setup Wizard, proceed to the instructions
in Performing Basic Configuration on page 155.
• If you want to perform the configuration manually using Expert Mode, proceed to the instructions
in Performing Advanced Configuration on page 162.
You cannot create partitions that include mixed media using the Setup Wizard.
Note
You must perform the configuration manually using Expert Mode.

Performing Basic Configuration
The minimal configuration can be performed using the Setup Wizard and then enabling notifications. The
configuration items in the Setup Wizard are typically sufficient for customers running libraries without FC I/
O blades.
You cannot create partitions that include mixed media using the Setup Wizard.
Note
You must perform the configuration manually using Expert Mode.
Before you can run the Setup Wizard, you must first delete a default partition that is created by the library
during initial startup.
Setting up a library using the basic configuration includes the following procedures:
• Deleting the Default Partition on page 659

• Running the Setup Wizard on page 660
• Enabling Licenses on page 666
• Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 667
• Setting Date and Time on page 670
• Set up e-mail (optional see Setting up E-mail on page 671)
• Set up e-mail notification (optional see Setting up Notification on page 6721)
For libraries that contain FC I/O blades and Ethernet Expansion blades, it is recommended that you bypass
the Setup Wizard and use the instructions in Performing Advanced Configuration on page 665.
You cannot manage the library from a remote system until you have logged on
Note
locally and setup the library’s network connection. Once connected, you can
perform all management tasks from a remote location. To install a remote
client, see Setting up Your Library for Access on page 145.
The interaction between drive types and partitions include the following:
• If the library discovers two different domains of storage, it will allow you to create two partitions even
if the license if for only one partition. This enables users to turn on a small number of minority slots.
• The discovery of two drive types should not trigger the same multi-partition behavior. For example,
LTO-2 SCSI and LTO-2 Fibre Channel in the same library should not allow two partitions unless a
multi-partition license is sold.
Proceed to Deleting the Default Partition on page 156.

Deleting the Default Partition
The library creates an initial partition on the initial start-up. If you need more than one partition in the library,
this partition must be deleted before you can use the Setup Wizard to automatically create one or more
new partitions.
1 Click Setup > Partitions > Configure.
The Partitions dialog box appears.
2 Select partition1, the default partition.

3 Click Delete.
a. If the partition is online, you will be asked whether or not it can be taken offline.You must answer
Yes to continue the deletion process. If you answer Yes, the partition is taken offline.
b. Click Delete.
The selected partition has been deleted.
4 Click Close.
Proceed to Running the Setup Wizard on page 157.

Running the Setup Wizard
You must first run the Setup Wizard or manually configure the library network
Note
configuration in order to manage your library remotely.
Use the Setup Wizard to enable or modify:
• Licenses (See Enabling Licenses on page 163 for more information.)

• Library partitions (See Creating Partitions on page 180 for more information.)
• Device mapping and zoning (See Configuring Host Access on page 201 for more information.)
• Network configuration (See Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 164 for more
information.)
• Date and time (See Setting Date and Time on page 168 for more information.)
For additional information on any of the steps, see the information in the Performing Advanced
Configuration on page 162.
Follow this procedure to run the Setup Wizard:
1 Click Setup > Setup Wizard.
The Setup Wizard dialog box appears.
2 In the Setup Wizard dialog box, click Next to continue.

3 In the Enter License Key box, type the appropriate license key.
License keys are not case sensitive and all inclusive. For example, J2BGL-22622-52C22. Click Next to
continue.
4 If you deleted the default partition, you are given the choice of creating a partition automatically. (See
Deleting the Default Partition on page 156 for instructions for deleting the default partition.)

5 Type the number of partitions for each drive type.
6 Click Finish.
The Partition Setup dialog box appears.
7 Select the partition.
8 Click Create to create the partition.

The LUN Mapping dialog box appears

9 To configure the LUN mapping for the drives, select the type of drives you have.
Depending on the drive type you selected, see the following for detailed instructions:
• FC Host LUN Mapping on page 201
10 Click Next.
In the Network Configuration dialog box, you can set the following configuration:
• If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled on your network, select Enable. DHCP
automatically configures the library network settings.
• If you do not have DHCP enabled on your network, select Disable and type the library name, IP
address, subnet mast, and the IP address of the default gateway for your network.
• Under Port Settings, select Enable or Disable for Auto Negotiation and then select a Port
Speed.

11 Click Next.
The Date and Time dialog box appears. To set the date and time, either enter the iPv4 or iPv6
addresses of one to threeNTP servers on your network or set the date and time manually.
12 When you reach the end of the Setup Wizard, click Finish to exit.
13 To log off, click Operation > Log Off.
14 Continue with the setup and configuration of the library:
• Optionally set up e-mail, using the instructions in Setting up E-mail on page 671.
• Optionally set up e-mail notification using the instructions in Setting up Notification on page 672.
• Optionally install a remote client using the procedure in Using LDAP on page 677.
Once you have completed the configuration, proceed to Installing Cartridges on page 633.
For more advanced configuration, proceed to Performing Advanced Configuration on page 665.

Performing Advanced Configuration
For libraries that will consist of more than one partition, configure the library in the following order:
• Enabling Licenses on page 666

• Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 667
• Setting Date and Time on page 670
• Setting up E-mail on page 671
• Setting up Notification on page 672
• Enabling Logical Serial Number Addressing for Drives on page 676
• Using LDAP on page 677
• Working with Library Control Paths on page 681
• Creating Partitions on page 684
• Configuring FC I/O Blade Ports on page 699
• Configuring FC Host Port Failover on page 701
• Configuring Datapath Conditioning on page 704
• Configuring Switch Zoning on page 706
• Configuring Host Access - FC I/O Blade Connected on page 706
• Configuring Control Path and Control Path Failover on page 717
• Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions on page 719

Enabling Licenses
At installation, the library is initially licensed for a default Capacity on Demand (COD) configuration of 102
LTO cartridge storage slots. You must enable the library’s license keys before you can use more storage
slots and configure those parts of the library that are governed by additional licensing.
The characteristics of licensed functionality include:
• COD quantities are displayed as the number of slots licensed.

• Partition quantities are displayed as the maximum number of partitions possible.
• Other features not licensed by quantity are displayed as “1” in the Quantity column.
If you cannot locate the license keys shipped with the library, you can obtain them by contacting Quantum
Technical Assistance Center at www.quantum.com/support
Follow this procedure to enable your licensed features:
1 If you are not already working from the physical library, select it from the View menu.
2 Click Setup > Licenses.
The Licenses dialog box appears.
3 In the Enter License Key box, type the appropriate license key. License keys are not case sensitive
and all inclusive. For example, J2BGL-22622-52C22 can be entered as j2bgl-22622-52c22.
4 Click OK.
Licensed features are shown with the status and expiration date for each feature.
Proceed to Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 667.

Setting Up the Network Configuration
Make sure that your library is attached to the network before you use the Network Configuration
command.
You must fully understand all network issues before you change the
CAUTION network configuration for an already configured library. It is
recommended that you consult with your network administrator
before changing your network configuration.
If you want to set up an network connection, make sure that the IPv6 option
Note
is enabled on the Physical Library dialog.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu, select the name of the
physical library.
3 Do one of the following:
• IPv4 configuration — Proceed to Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration on page 667.
• IPv6 configuration — Proceed to Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration on page 668.
Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration

1 After completing Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 667, select Setup > Network
Configuration > IPv4 Configuration.
the IPv4 Network Configuration dialog box appears.
The following table describes the elements on the Network Configuration dialog box.

Element Description
In the Host Settings area:
DHCP If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled on your network,

select Enable to have DHCP automatically configure the library network
settings. Enable makes the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway
text boxes unavailable. Select Disable to make the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
and Default Gateway text boxes available for you to manually set the library
network settings.
Library Name The network name that you want to assign to the library.
IP Address The IP address of the library. This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask. This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled.
Default The IP address of the default gateway for your portion of the Ethernet network.
Gateway This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled.
In the Port Settings area:
Auto Negotiate Select Enable to have the library automatically negotiate port speeds. Enable
makes the Speed options unavailable.
Select Disable to make the Speed options available for you to manually set the
port speed. Selecting Disable means the port is set to Full Duplex.
Caution: The library port setting must match the network switch port setting. If
one is set to auto negotiate, and the other to full duplex, the port configured for
auto negotiate will stay at half duplex.
Speed The port speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps). Speed options are available only if
Auto Negotiate is disabled.
The current port settings are listed in the Current Port Settings section. The Cycle button enables you
to cycle the external Ethernet interface without rebooting the library.
2 Make the appropriate network configuration changes, and then click OK.
3 A prompt appears that informs you that network connectivity will be temporarily lost and asks whether
you want to proceed. click Yes.
Proceed to Setting Date and Time on page 168.
Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration

1 After completing Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 667, select Setup > Network
Configuration > IPv6 Configuration.
The IPv6 Network Configuration dialog box appears.

2 Use the Static IP tab to disable or to enable and specify a static IP address. Valid static IP addresses
include link local, site local, and global unicast.
3 To display the DHCP tab, click DHCP.
4 As prompted, use the DHCP tab to enable or disable the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
autoconfiguration function.
5 To display the Hostname tab, click Hostname.
6 Use the Hostname tab to specify a library name that can be used for remote connections to the library.
7 To display the Settings tab, click Settings.

8 Use the Settings tab to view the current IPv6 configuration settings.
9 After you make the appropriate network configuration changes, click OK.
10 A prompt appears informing you that network connectivity will be temporarily lost and asks whether you
want to proceed. Click OK.
Proceed to Setting Date and Time on page 168.
Setting Date and Time

1 Click Setup > Date and Time.
The Date and Time dialog box appears.
2 In the NTP section:

• If you choose to enable NTP, click Enable.
The Date and Time sections of the dialog box are grayed out.
• Type valid IP addresses for the Primary Server and optionally the Secondary Server and
Tertiary Server.
• If the DNS Server has not been configured in the LMC, type valid numeric IP addresses
that are accessible from the library (example 111.11.11.111). Go to step 5.
• If the DNS Server has been configured through the LMC (Setup > Network Configuration
> DNS Configuration), type the valid alpha/numeric IP Addresses that are accessible from
the library. Go to step 5.
• If NTP is enabled and you no longer want to use this setting, click Disable.

If you choose to disable NTP, you must manually set the date and time. Go to the next step.
3 Use the Date drop-down lists to select the month, date, and year.
4 Use the Time drop-down lists to select the hour, minute, and whether the time is A.M. or P.M.
5 Use the Time Zone drop-down list to select the appropriate time zone.
The default time zone is GMT. The time zone that you select appears only
Note
on your library information panel. Regardless of your selection for the
library information panel, the system operates on the GMT zone.
6 Click OK.
Proceed to Setting up E-mail on page 170.
Setting up E-mail
The library uses the e-mail settings on the Email Configuration dialog box whenever library e-mail services
are used, such as when you use the Send command to e-mail snapshots or logs and when the library
automatically sends e-mail notifications of library problems.
1 Click Setup > Email Configuration.
The Email Configuration dialog box appears.
2 Enter the following information into the Email Configuration Settings dialog box:
• SMTP Server—for example, 192.16.68.2 You can use either iPv4 or iPv6 addresses.
You must identify the SMTP server by its server address.

Note
• Authentication—select either Password or None. If you select None, you will not be prompted for
an Account or Password.
• Account—for example, Jay.User

The account specified must be a valid account at the named SMTP server.
Note
• Password—for example, password
The password specified must be valid for the specified account at the
Note
named SMTP server.
• Sender Address—for example, MyLibrary@MyCompany.com

The library uses this address in the “From” field of e-mail messages that it sends out, indicating the
originator of the message. If you type, for example, “scalari6000”, the library appends the domain
information (for example, “@mycompany.com”). If you type, for example,
“scalari6000@mycompany.com”, the library does not append any additional information.
3 To test the e-mail configuration, type an e-mail address in the Recipient box of the Test Current
Configuration area and click Test email.
4 Confirm that the library displays a message indicating that the test completed successfully and sends
a test message to the specified e-mail address.
5 The subject of the test message should be “Test email from Scalar i6000” and the message text should
include the library name, version, and serial number, along with the date and time that the message was
sent.
6 Click OK.
Proceed to Setting up Notification on page 672.
Setting up Notification
The Notification command allows you to send e-mail to specific individuals whenever certain conditions
occur. The information in the e-mail notification provides details about the issue and the library conditions
at the time of the error.
1 Complete the steps in Setting up E-mail on page 671, unless you have already done so.
2 Click Setup > Notifications > System Setup.
The System Setup Notification dialog box appears with the Contact Information tab displayed.
Enter the contact information you want included in an e-mail notification if an error occurs in the library.

If you have previously saved a configuration, and you enter a configuration
Note
change, the system asks you to perform a Save Configuration operation.
3 Click Close.
4 Set up the rules.
a. Click Setup > Notification > System Setup.
The System Setup Notification dialog box appears with the Contact Information tab
displayed.
The Notification dialog box displays the Rules tab.

This dialog box shows all notification recipients that are set up currently in the LMC. By default,
the only e-mail address to which the library sends e-mail notifications (severity level 1 [Failed]
issues only) is techsup@quantum.com (Quantum technical support), as shown in this
Notification dialog box example.
• Even though you can remove the Quantum technical support e-mail
Note
address so that Quantum does not receive severity level 1 notifications,
Quantum recommends that you do not remove it. Also, do not include the
Quantum technical support e-mail address for severity level 2 or 3
notifications.
• The remaining steps in this procedure guide you through setting up new
e-mail notification recipients. To delete an existing e-mail address, click
the e-mail address in the Send Email To column, and then click Delete.
5 To set up a new e-mail notification recipient, click Create.

The New Email Notification dialog box appears.
6 In the Email Address text box, type the e-mail address that you want to receive notifications.
Do not enter multiple addresses into this box. To associate more than one e-mail address with events
of a particular severity, repeat the Create process.

7 Select the severity level that will be reported.
Select level 1, “Failed,” to receive only emergency-related notifications. The severity levels are
numbered from 1 to 3, with 3 being the least severe.
Level Meaning Type of Information Reported
1 Failed • Library system has failed

• At least one partition (also referred to as a logical library), drive,
or cartridge needs attention
• Service ticket has been posted to the LMC
2 Degraded • Library system is degraded

• Host operations should be possible, but admin should investigate
3 Warning • Library system is warning about an issue

• Host operations should be possible, but admin should investigate
If working from the remote client, select multiple severity levels by holding down CTRL and clicking each
choice.
8 Repeat Step 5 on page 674 through Step 7 on page 675 as often as necessary.
9 In the New Email Notification dialog box, click OK.
10 You are finished entering your specifications, click OK on the System Setup Notification dialog box.
Proceed to Enabling Logical Serial Number Addressing for Drives on page 676.

Enabling Logical Serial Number Addressing for Drives
The Physical Library dialog box enables you to set up the library to automatically assign logical serial
numbers to drives in the library. Specifically, the library assigns a logical serial number to a drive in a specific
location. This is not the serial number of the particular drive. If a drive is replaced by another drive in the
same library location, the logical serial number remains the same. From the host’s perspective, the
replacement drive is the same as the original one.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu, click the name of the physical
library.
3 Click Setup > System Settings > Physical Library.
The Physical Library dialog box appears.
The Logical SN Addressing area is available to service users only.

4 In the Logical SN Addressing area, select Enable to cause the library to automatically assign logical
serial numbers to drives. Disable is the default setting.
5 Click OK.
Proceed to Using LDAP on page 677.

Using LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is the industry standard Internet protocol that provides
centralized user account management. This library supports the Microsoft® Active Directory® LDAP server
and user account information in the schema defined by RFC 2307. User password schemes must be
encrypted using UNIX® crypt.
The Scalar i6.5 release provided enhancements to the Lightweight Directory

Note
Access Protocol (LDAP) features. For maximum ease of use of this feature,
Quantum strongly recommends that you are running version i6.5 or greater.
You can configure the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) settings any time after the initial library
configuration. Once you enable and configure LDAP, you can view your current LDAP settings using the
LDAP menu.
Active Directory no longer requires Windows Services for Unix 2.5.

Note
Any LDAP configurations from i6.3.1 and earlier will not import into
CAUTION the i6.5 LDAP configuration. You must reconfigure LDAP for the i6.5
update.
LDAP Server Guidelines

LDAP is the industry standard Internet protocol that provides centralized user account management
subsystem. User account information is centralized and shared by different applications, simplifying user
account management tasks. Administrative users can add, delete, and modify only local user account
information. For more information concerning setting up user accounts, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
User and Group Access

For LDAP accounts with user privileges, access to library partitions is determined by group assignment on
the LDAP server. Groups must be created on the LDAP server with names that correspond to the library
partition names. Users without administrator privileges must be assigned to these groups on the LDAP
server to have access to the corresponding partitions on the library. LDAP accounts with administrative
privileges have access to all partitions and administrative functions and do not need to be assigned to
partition-related groups on the LDAP server.
Usernames and group objects must be in LDAP Distinguished Names formats.

Note
OpenLDAP 2.4
You must install and run OpenLDAP 2.4 or later. The supported Objects in OpenLDAP 2.4 and above are
of type “Person” or derived objects, and the group Objects must be of type “GroupOfNames”.
OpenLDAP must be compiled with Overlay Support and requires the installation of “memberOf” overlay.
More information can be found in the man pages of OpenLDAP with the “man slapo-memberof” command.

Configuring LDAP
1 From the LMC, select Setup > User Configuration > LDAP.
The LDAP Configuration dialog box displays with the General tab displayed.
2 In the General tab, you can enable or disable LDAP functionality:

• To enable LDAP, select Enable LDAP.
• To disable LDAP, clear the Enable LDAP check box.
If you disable LDAP, single sign-on functionality will not be available on the
Note
library.
3 To configure or modify LDAP, use the appropriate tabs and set the following configurations:
General tab
• Server Configuration section
• Primary: You must provide an IP address or DNS name for the primary LDAP server.
• Alternate: You may optionally provide an IP address or DNS name for an alternate LDAP
server. Both the primary and alternate LDAP servers must have the same view of the same
LDAP tree.
Examples: Depending on the LDAP directory in use the following information can be
entered:
Windows:

Primary: PDC (Primary Domain Controller)
Alternate: BDC (Backup Domain Controller)
Novel eDirectory®:
Primary: Primary LDAP server (holding a replica)
Alternate: Secondary LDAP Server (holding a replica)
• Secure: Use this check box to enable the setup options to access a secure LDAP server,
which can be done using any port except 389. The default secure port is 636. If you enable
this option, you must retrieve the Trusted Root Certificate from the server by clicking
Retrieve TR.
• Port: Enter the appropriate port in this field. The default port for non secure connection is
389 – and 636 for secure (SSL) based LDAP connections. The port setting can be changed.
• Retrieve TR: Use this function to retrieve the Trusted Root Certificate from the LDAP
server. A dialog box displays basic Trust Root certificate information, for example, subject
name, MD5, and SHA 1 hashes. It is recommended that you verify this information
independently on the LDAP server.
The first time you use Retrieve TR, the process can take 5
CAUTION to 10 minutes. To connect to a secure LDAP server, you
must complete the retrieval process.
• Search Information section
The Search Information section allows you to enter on the LDAP server a user name and
password for a user who has sufficient privileges to search for user names. The user name
is specified in distinguished name format. To use this feature administrative user rights are
not required, but you must have the right to search user names in the LDAP directory.
4 Click the Access tab.
Use this tab to configure LDAP authentication.

• Context Information section
• User Context: This is a path in distinguished name format to the location used to search
for the login users. You can search for a user in the context specified and all contexts below
it.
• Group Context: This is a path in distinguished name format to the location used to search
for the groups to which a user belongs. Only groups which are in the Group context or below
are considered for library access.
• Library Access Groups section
• User: This field contains a fully distinguished name of the groups to which all the library
non-admin users belong.
• Admin: This field contains a fully distinguished name of the group to which all admin users
belong.
Non-admin library users also need to be members of the groups that match the
Note
partition names for which they are granted access. These group names needn’t
be specifically listed anywhere in the LDAP setup on the library. When user
logins are validated during login, their group memberships for partition access
are validated automatically.
5 To validate your configuration, click OK or Test.

6 Click the Test tab.
You can use the Test functionality to simulate an LDAP login for a specific user and quickly discover
what access rights the user has and to what partitions the user has access.
Test User section

• User: Type the appropriate User name.
• Password: Type the user password.

7 To initiate the library authentication process to the LDAP server, click Test after providing the user name
and password.
A dialog box appears displaying what level of access the user is assigned, and to which library
partition(s) the user has access.
8 After you have entered the LDAP configurations, click Test to verify the LDAP connection.
A connection with the LDAP server(s) is established and the library determines whether the LDAP
Distinguished Names specified in the Access tab are valid.
A message box appears indicating that the success or failure of the LDAP connection.
• If the connection failed, the error message contains information that you can use to resolve the
issue.
Click OK to return to the LDAP Configuration dialog box.
• If the connection was successful, in the message box, click OK and continue.
9 To accept and save the library configuration, in the LDAP Configuration dialog box, click OK.
10 To validate your configuration, click OK or Test.
Proceed to Working with Library Control Paths on page 681.
Working with Library Control Paths

You must define a control path for each library partition. The control path is used to connect a partition to a
host application. The Scalar i2000/i6000 does not automatically assign a control path when you create a
partition. Each partition control path can occur through one of several different physical connection points
depending on the hardware configuration of your library. The procedure for setting up and defining the
control path for a partition depends on which physical connection point you choose to use.
In regards to the Control Path configuration, only HP LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives
Note
can be configured for control path bridging. Only HP LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives
with SNW licenses can be configured for control path failover. Currently, IBM
LT0-5 and LTO-6 drives cannot be configured for control path.
A partition can be LUN mapped through any FC I/O blade, but you must
Note
manually configure LUN mapping to present the partition to specific hosts.
When configuring a control path using an FC I/O blade connection,

CAUTION the partition LUN can be presented multiple times through any FC I/O
blade and even the MCB at the same time. In a direct attached control
path configuration, you can choose the drive to present the partition
and it remains dedicated to the drive until you change it to another
drive.

Control Path Failover
The Scalar i6000 provides support for configuring the HP LTO-5 and LTO-6 SNW licensed drive for control
path failover. When control path failover is used, one drive is assigned as the primary control path and
another drive as the control path failover (secondary) drive. The control path failover drive is used whenever
the primary control path drive fails, becomes inoperable, or loses connectivity. To configure a control path
failover drive, you must have a Storage Networking License (SNW). For configuration information, see
Configuring Control Path and Control Path Failover on page 717.

Determining a Control Path
The following table defines which procedures to use to configure a control path for each of the possible
physical connection points.
Table 9 Control Path Matrix
HP LTO-5and HP LTO-5 and

GUI Menu MCB Direct FC I/O Blade LTO-6 EEB LTO-6 EEB
Procedure References
Path Connection Connection Direct Connection w/
Connectiona SNW License
Setup > Creating Partitions on page Step 1 Step 1 Step 1 Step 1b

Partitions > 684
Configure
Setup > Configure FC IO Blade Step 2

Blades > • Configuring FC I/O Blade
Connectivity Ports on page 699
• Configuring FC Host Port
Failover on page 701
• Enabling a Disabled
Target Port on page 703
• Configuring Datapath
Conditioning on page
704
• Configuring Switch
Zoning on page 706
Setup > Configuring FC I/O Blade Step 2

Blades > Ports on page 699
Connectivity
Setup > Configuring Host Access Step 3 Step 3

Blades > • FC Host LUN Mapping
Access on page 706
• Channel Zoning on page
711
• LUN Mapping Wizard on
page 712
Setup > Licensing a Storage Step 2 Step 3

Drives > Networking Drive on page
Access > 716 (s)
SNW Drives
Setup > Configuring Control path in: Step 2 Step 2

Partitions > Configuring Control Path
Control Path and Control Path Failover
on page 717
Setup > Configuring Control Path Step 4

Drives > Failover in: Configuring
Access > Control Path and Control
SNW Host Path Failover on page 717

a. Only HP LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives support control path bridging.
b. Only HP LTO-5 and LTO-6 Storage Networking licensed drives can be configured for control path failover. See Licensing a Storage Networking
Drive on page 716
Proceed to the appropriate steps.
Creating Partitions
The ability to create multiple partitions is controlled by licenses. See Enabling Licenses on page 666 if you
have not already configured your library’s licenses.
You can create partitions automatically or manually. If you choose to configure a partition manually, you can
allocate library resources to it using either Simple or Expert mode. In simple mode, you can specify the
quantity of each element you want assigned to the partition. The library assigns the next available elements
to the partition. In expert mode, you indicate specifically by location which drives, storage magazines, I/E
station magazines, or (if enabled) extended I/E station magazines to assign to the partition.
This section covers:
• Creating Partitions Automatically on page 684

• Creating Partitions Manually – Simple Mode on page 686
• Creating Partitions Manually - Expert Mode on page 693
• Monitoring Partition Status on page 697
Creating Partitions Automatically

You can use the library’s automatic mode to create partitions within limits based on licensing restrictions
and available resources. Because automatic mode is available only if no partitions currently exist, you must
first delete the default partition that was initially configured on the initial boot-up.

2 Click Create.
The Partitions – Step 1: Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.
3 Select Automatic, and then click Next.

The Partitions – Automatic Creation dialog box appears.
4 In the Partitions column, type the number of partitions you want to create for each media/drive type.
The maximum number of partitions that you can specify is determined by the number of partitions you
are licensed to create and the number of drives available. The library is licensed either for one partition
or for the maximum of 16 partitions.
5 Click Finish.

Creating Partitions Manually – Simple Mode
Use manual mode to allocate specific drives, storage slots and I/E station magazines when creating a new
partition. In simple mode, you can specify the quantity of each element you want assigned to the partition.
The library assigns the next available elements to the partition.
To create a partition with mixed media, you must use expert mode (see Creating Partitions Manually -
Expert Mode on page 693).
2 Click Create.
If no partitions currently exist, the Partitions – Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.

3 Select Simple and then click Next.
If at least one partition is already configured, this dialog will not appear.
4 In the Choose Partition Properties dialog box, configure the following settings:
• In the Name box, type a name that describes the new partition.
• In the Drive Domain drop-down list, select the appropriate drive domain.
• From the Vendor ID, select the vendor.
The Vendor ID information is used in the SCSI Inquiry command. The choices are QUANTUM and
ADIC. The default is QUANTUM. Some backup applications may only support or be configured for
ADIC libraries, so if you configure a logical library using the vendor ID of QUANTUM, the backup
application would not work with the library.
• In the Product ID drop-down box, select the appropriate product type.
The Product ID setting controls the product ID string that is returned in a standard SCSI INQUIRY
response. The library can report that it is a Scalar 24, Scalar 100, Scalar i500, Scalar 1000, Scalar
i2000, Scalar i6000, or Scalar 10K. This feature can enable the library to be used with host
applications that do not yet include the Scalar i6000 in a list of recognized devices.

In addition, the various Microsoft® Windows® operating systems maintain a list of recognized
devices. If the Scalar i6000 is not in an operating system’s list of recognized devices, the library will
appear as an “unknown” device in device lists. You might prevent the library from being listed as
“unknown” by setting Product ID to a library other than Scalar i6000. This setting does not cause
any library operational changes other than the SCSI INQUIRY response.
5 Click Next to proceed.

6 In the Choose Policy Settings dialog box:
• Select whether or not to enable Media Type Checking. With a valid media type identifier present
and the Media Type Checking setting enabled, which it is by default, a host is prevented from
executing invalid media moves across differing media types. For example, a host can be prevented
from moving LTO-3 media to an LTO-2 drive. If an invalid move is attempted, an error is returned
to the host.
Regardless of whether or not partition media policies are enabled or disabled, the library always
prevents host move-media commands that cross different media domains. For example, the library
will never execute a host command to move an LTO cartridge from an LTO drive to a DLT storage
slot, and vise versa.
• For Media Checking Policy, choose either Required or Not Required.
In Required mode, if the library does not find a valid media ID on a cartridge, the library does not
allow it to be moved into or within the library. If the library finds a valid media ID, the library allows
it to be moved from an I/E station into a partition that contains magazines matching the media
domain of the cartridge (for example, LTO), but the library does not allow the cartridge to be moved
from storage to a drive that does not have a matching type (for example, an LTO-2 cartridge will
not be allowed to move to an LTO-1 drive).
In Not Required mode, if the library does not find a valid media ID on a cartridge, the library allows
it to be moved into or within the library as long as the I/E station magazine, storage magazine, or
drive matches the media domain of the cartridge. If the library finds a valid media ID, the library
does not allow the cartridge to be moved from storage to a drive that does not have a matching type
(for example, an LTO-2 cartridge will not be allowed to move to an LTO-1 drive).
• Configure the Return Media Identifier. With the Return Media Identifier setting, you can control if
and where a media type identifier appears in the volume serial number that is returned to the host.

Table 10 shows an example of how the return media identifier behavior works depending on which
setting you choose: Disabled, Prefix, Suffix, and Pass Through. The bold, underlined portion
represents the media identifier.
Table 10 Return Media Identifier Behavior Example
Actual LTO-1 Barcode Label ABC123L1
Behavior Volume serial number returned to Host
Disabled ABC123
Prefix L1ABC123
Suffix ABC123L1
Pass Through ABC123L1
Once a media volume serial number has been reported to a host, changing
Note
the Return Media Identifier setting may cause the host to not recognize
media within the library.
For more information on how media policies in the library work, see the library Scalar i6000 User’s
Guide.
• For Automatic Drive Cleaning, click either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
Enabling automatic drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive cleaning each time a drive
requests a cleaning operation. For automatic drive cleaning to function, you must first configure
drive cleaning for the library. For more information about configuring drive cleaning, see
Configuring Drive Cleaning on page 214.
Automatic drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the host
Note
application does not support the coordination of drive cleaning. If drive
cleaning functionality is enabled on the host application, do not enable
automatic drive cleaning for any partitions in the library.
7 Select Next to proceed.

8 In the Choose Resource Quantities dialog box, enter the number of elements to include in the partition
by specifying:
• Number of drives
• Number of storage slots
• Number of I/E station slots

The quantity available for each type of resource element indicates resources not already assigned to
existing partitions. Storage slot quantity is limited by the total slots authorized in the capacity on demand
license.
9 Click Next to proceed.

10 In the Partitions – Summary Information dialog box, verify that the parameters you set are correct.
11 To create the partition, click Create.

12 In the Partitions – Completed dialog box, review the information to make certain it is correct.
13 Click Finish.
The Partitions window appears, showing the new partition.
14 Optionally, click Next to identify and view the details of the drive or drives assigned to the partition.
15 Click Close to exit the Partitions window.

Creating Partitions Manually - Expert Mode
In expert mode, you indicate specifically by location which drives, storage magazines, I/E station
magazines, or (if enabled) extended I/E station magazines to assign to the partition.
library.
The Partitions dialog box displays a list of partitions currently configured within the library.
Note: If you want to cancel the partition creation process, click Close. The Close button becomes
unavailable after you click Create later in this procedure.
4 Click Create.
The Partitions - Step 1: Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.
5 Select Expert, and then click Next.
The Partitions - Step 2: Choose Partition Properties dialog box appears.
6 In the Name text box, type a name to describe the new partition.
7 From the Partition Type drop-down list, select the type of partition you want to create.
• The default is Standard. If you are creating a standard partition, accept the default and go to Step 8.
• The other choices are for creating library managed partitions (LMPs). You can only select a
library managed partition if it is already licensed. The choices are:
• Library Managed (EDLM) — For more information, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
• Library Managed (AMP) — For more information, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
• Library Managed (VAULT) — For more information, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
When you select a library managed partition, the Drive Domain, Vendor ID, and Product ID fields
become disabled. If you are creating a library managed partition, make your selection and continue to
Step 9.

8 If you are not creating a library managed partition, do the following:
a. From the Drive Domain drop-down list, click the appropriate drive type.
b. From the Vendor ID drop down list, select the vendor.
The Vendor ID information is used in the SCSI Inquiry command. The choices are QUANTUM
and ADIC. The default is QUANTUM. Some backup applications may only support or be
configured for ADIC libraries, so if you configure a logical library using the vendor ID of
QUANTUM, the backup application would not work with the library.
c. From the Product ID drop-down list, click the appropriate product type.
The Product ID setting controls the product ID string that is returned in a standard SCSI
INQUIRY response. The library can report that it is a Scalar 24, Scalar 100, Scalar i500, Scalar
1000, Scalar i2000, Scalar i6000, or Scalar 10K. This feature can enable the library to be used
with host applications that do not yet include the Scalar i6000 in a list of recognized devices.
In addition, the various Microsoft Windows operating systems maintain a list of recognized
devices. If the Scalar i6000 is not in an operating system’s list of recognized devices, the library
will appear as an “unknown” device in device lists. You might prevent the library from being
listed as “unknown” by setting Product ID to a library other than Scalar i6000. This setting does
not cause any library operational changes other than the SCSI INQUIRY response.
9 To continue, click Next.
The Partitions - Step 3: Choose Policy Settings dialog box appears.
If you are configuring an library managed partition (LMP), all choices on

Note
this screen are pre-selected and you cannot change them. To continue, go
to Step 12
10 Configure the following settings:
• For Media Type Checking, select either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
• From the Media Checking Policy drop-down list, click either Required or Not Required.
• From the Return Media Identifier drop-down list, click either Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix, or
Disabled. Depending on which setting you choose, you can control the use of the media type
identifier in the volume serial number that is returned to the host.
After a media volume serial number has been reported to a host,

CAUTION changing the Return Media Identifier setting could cause the host to
not recognize media within the library.
For more information about how media policies work, see Creating Partitions Manually – Simple Mode
on page 686
11 For Automatic Drive Cleaning, click either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
Enabling automatic drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive cleaning each time a drive requests
a cleaning operation. For automatic drive cleaning to function, you must first configure drive cleaning
for the library. For more information about configuring drive cleaning, refer Configuring Drive Cleaning
on page 744.
Note
application does not support the coordination of drive cleaning. If drive
cleaning functionality is enabled on the host application, do not enable
automatic drive cleaning for any partitions in the library.

The Partitions - Step 4: Select Drives dialog box appears.
If you are creating a library managed Automated Media Pool (AMP) or

Note
Active Vault partition, this screen is skipped because drives are not allowed
in these partitions. Go to Step 16.
If you are creating an EDLM partition, only EDLM-capable drives are

Note
shown.
13 In the left column, select the location of one or more drives.

Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the library can have drives in the control
module and any of the eleven expansion modules.
14 To assign a drive to the partition, select the appropriate check box. You can identify a drive by its serial
number and location coordinates. For more information, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
The Partitions - Step 5: Select Storage Slots dialog box appears.
16 Storage slots are assigned by magazine. In the left column, select the location of one or more storage
magazines.
17 To assign a storage magazine, select the appropriate check box. You can identify a magazine by its
location coordinates. The number of slots available is determined by the drive media type.
18 If this is a standard partition and you are using Automated Media Pool (AMP), you can add logical
element extensions to the partition for possible later use. Type the number of magazines by which you
would like to extend the standard partition in the Magazine Extensions field. For more information, see
the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.

The Partitions - Step 6: Select I/E Slots dialog box appears.

20 Select the location of one or more I/E station magazines.
a. To assign an I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check box. You can identify an I/E
station magazine by its location coordinates.
b. Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the library can have I/E stations in
the control module and expansion modules.
The maximum number of I/E element addresses in any partition is 240.

Note
This includes both physical slots and Extended I/E virtual slots.
Depending on whether Extended I/E is enabled, Step 6: Select Extended

Note
I/E Slots may appear. If Extended I/E is enabled, go to Step 22. If
Extended I/E is not enabled, go to Step 24.
To enable Extended I/E, go to Setup > System Settings > Physical

Note
Library, and select the feature. For more information about Extended I/E,
see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
22 In the Partitions - Step 6: Select Extended I/E Slots dialog box, do the following:
a. In the left column, select the location of one or more Extended
I/E station magazines.
b. To assign an Extended I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check box. You can identify
an I/E station magazine by its location coordinates.
The maximum number of I/E element addresses in any partition is 240.

Note
This includes both physical slots and Extended IE virtual slots.

The Partitions - Summary Information dialog box appears.
24 In the Partitions - Summary Information dialog box, verify that the parameters you set are correct.
25 To create the partition, click Create.
After you click Create, the Cancel button becomes unavailable.
Note
The Partitions - Completed dialog box appears.

26 Review the information to make sure it is correct.
27 If you want to view the drive information after creating the partition, click Next.
28 Click Finish.
The Partitions dialog box appears again with the partition you just created listed.
29 Click Close.

Monitoring Partition Status
If you want to see settings and information for a partition but do not need to make changes, view partition
status and details. Unlike modifying a partition, viewing status and details does not require you to take a
partition offline.
library.
2 On the menu bar, click Monitor > Partitions > Status.
The Partitions Status dialog box appears with a list of all logical partitions in the library and information
about each partition.
The following table describes the elements on the Partitions Status dialog box.
Element Description
Name The name of the partition.
Status The status of the partition (Online or Offline).
Vendor Displays Vendor ID.
Product ID Displays the what type of library the system is reporting as.
Serial Number The serial number of the library.
Media Type The type of media used in the partition (LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4,
LTO-5 or LTO-6).
Interface The type of interface used to connect to the host (FC or SCSI).
#Drives The number of tapes drives in the partition.
#Storage Slots The number of storage slots in the partition.
#I/E Slots The number of I/E station slots in the partition.
Media Type Checking The current setting for media type checking (Required, Not Required,
or Disabled).

Element Description
Media Identifier The current setting for return media identifier (Suffix, Pass Through,
Prefix, or Disabled).
Drive Autolevel The current setting for drive firmware autoleveling (Enabled or
Disabled).
Auto Drive Clean The current setting for automatic drive cleaning (Enabled or Disabled).
Encryption Reports whether the media is encrypted. The values are Application
Managed or Library Managed.
LCP WWPN The Library Control Path (LCP) World Wide Port Name (WWPN) for a
virtual partition.
Library Type Logical library/partition type - either Standard or Library Managed. If

library managed, the type of library managed partition is listed in
parentheses (for example, AMP, EDLM, or VAULT).
3 To see additional details for a partition, click the partition in the list, and then click Details.
The Partition Details dialog box appears. This windows shows additional information about the
partition, such as vendor, product ID, and serial number.
4 Click Close to close the Partition Details dialog box.

5 Click Close to close the Partitions Status dialog box.
Proceed to Configuring FC I/O Blade Ports on page 699.

Configuring FC I/O Blade Ports
Each FC I/O blade installed in the library has two ports reserved for connection to hosts or the SAN. These
ports are FC-1 and FC-2. By default, ports FC-1 and FC-2 are in target mode. The other four ports (FC-3,
FC-4, FC-5, and FC-6) are in initiator mode by default.
The default FC I/O blade ports are given in Table 11 on page 699.
Table 11 FC I/O Blade Default Port Settings
Connection
Port Loop ID Speed Frame Size Port Mode Private/Public
Option
FC-1 Soft Auto 2048 Target Loop preferred Public
FC-3 Soft Auto 2048 Initiator Loop preferred Public
1 Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > Port Configuration.

The Connectivity dialog box appears. All components that provide FC and SCSI ports show in the
dialog box if they are detected.
2 Select a component to expand its list of detected connectivity boards and the ports on each.

3 Click a port to highlight it, and then click Configure.
For an FC port on either the MCB or an I/O blade, the Fibre Channel Parameters dialog box appears.
You can configure two settings for an MCB connection and all settings for an I/O blade connection. The
figure above shows an FC port configured for target mode and a loop preferred connection.
a. In the Loop ID area of the Fibre Channel Parameters dialog box, selecting Soft acts as a
toggle, checking and clearing the box. If the box is not checked, you can click a hard loop ID
(within the range from 0 to 125) from the drop-down list. Some operating systems require hard
ID settings. Consult your service representative before making changes to this setting.
b. Select Auto to automatically set the interface speed. To configure the speed manually, clear
the Auto check box and use a setting from the drop-down list. Because this setting is not
configurable on the MCB, the Speed area does not appear on the Fibre Channel Parameters
dialog box when configuring the MCB FC port. The MCB FC port speed is always 1 Gb/sec.
c. FC Frame Size is specified by each receiving node and need not match any other node. The
frame size is typically set to 2048. (You can use another frame size if it is required by a particular
software application.)
d. FC ports support Private and Public Fibre Channel attachments. The default port mode setting
for FC ports 1 and 2 is Target Public, and the default port mode setting for FC ports 3 through
6 is Initiator Public. With Public, the loop is scanned for Fabric devices and allows the Fabric
to have access to all available target devices that are attached to it. With Private, the local loop
is scanned for devices except for Fabric devices. In Target mode, the port is set to receive
connections from another FC initiator, such as a host or FC switch. In Initiator mode, the port
scans for storage devices. In Target and Initiator mode, the port operates in both modes
simultaneously.

e. The default connection mode for both target and initiator ports is Loop Preferred. For target
ports, other options include Loop and Point to Point. For initiator ports, other options include
Loop and Loop Preferred. Therefore, if you want to change a target port that is set to Point-
to-Point to initiator mode, you cannot do it until you first change the port connection type to
Loop or Loop Preferred. Consult your service representative before making changes to this
setting.
4 After you finish selecting the port configuration settings, click OK.
5 A message appears that asks whether you want to make the change. Click Yes.
Proceed to Configuring FC Host Port Failover on page 701.
Configuring FC Host Port Failover

Configure the optional FC Host Port Failover (HPF) feature so that an alternate “standby” target port on an
I/O blade can assume the identity and LUN mapping configuration of the primary “active” target port if the
primary port fails. HPF enables the library to continue operations without requiring you to reconfigure the
host or the SAN.
To enable HPF, you must make sure that two ports on the I/O blade are in target mode and point-to-point
connection. Use ports 1 and 2, which are ports that are traditionally configured to be host targets. I/O blade
ports are numbered from bottom to top as the blade sits in the I/O management unit.
Both ports must be attached to the same SAN fabric to provide host access. The active primary port is used
for host communications, while the passive standby port is kept idle. The way that you configure the
recovery settings determines how the failed port behaves after it is restored from a failed state.
The library generates a ticket when port failover occurs. Examine the ticket and the repair page associated
with the ticket to determine the reason for the failover.
To configure HPF, perform the following steps:
library.
3 Confirm that there are two ports on the I/O blade in target mode and point-to-point connection. For more
information, see "FC Host" in the Scalar® i6000 User’s Guide.
4 Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > FC Host Port Failover.
The FC Host Port Failover dialog box appears, showing all the I/O blades found in the library. Each
blade is identified by name and by location.

5 Click a blade to highlight it, and then click Configure.
The FC Port Failover dialog box appears.
6 In the Feature Enable area, select Enable FC Host Port Failover, and then click Set to make the
Configuration tab available.
On the Configuration tab, settings are unavailable if the current state of

Note
the tab is set to Disabled.
Be aware that there might be incompatibilities with channel zoning

configuration on the I/O blade if you enable host port failover. Both target
ports must have the same ports mapped.
7 Accept the recovery setting default values unless an authorized representative advises you otherwise.

Before you set recovery settings, understand the following elements in the
Note
Recovery Setting area:
• Error count recovery mode sets the recovery scenario for all ports when
port failure is caused by excessive errors on the port. The only setting
option is Require Intervention.
• Link down error recovery mode sets the recovery scenario for all ports
when port failure is caused by the port going offline for more time than the
threshold specified in the Link down delay time text box. The only setting
option is Require Intervention.
• Link down delay time sets the timeout threshold before link down status
applies. The default value is zero (0) seconds. There is no maximum
value.
Require Intervention means that a user must manually use the Physical
Ports tab to bring a failed port that has recovered back online.
8 Configure the Primary Port by using the Select Primary drop-down list to select from the target ports
that are online and available.
Only ports that are in target mode and point-to-point connection can
Note
participate in host port failover. The primary port becomes active by default
and the alternate port will go on passive standby until a failover occurs.
You must select a primary port. Current Active indicates the currently
active port.
9 Click Set. If your configuration has errors, a warning message appears.
Enabling a Disabled Target Port

Use the Physical Ports tab to manually enable an online target port that was disabled because of a
previous connection error. If the Intervention column displays "true," you must manually bring the
recovered port back online using Enable. If the port state is "disabled," the port's connection is repaired and
it is ready to be re-enabled. If the Configuration tab itself is disabled, the table on the Physical Ports tab
will be empty.
If the target port state is offline, the port's connection has not been repaired.
Note
The error condition that caused the port to fail still exists.
To enable a disabled target port:

1 On the FC Host Port Failover dialog box, click the Physical Ports tab.
The tab lists each target port on the FC I/O blade, its state and the type of failure, if applicable.
2 Click the port you want to enable and click Enable.
Enable is available only if the port is disabled.

Note
3 To return to the main FC Host Port Failover dialog box, click Close.
4 Proceed to Configuring Datapath Conditioning on page 704.
Configuring Datapath Conditioning

For the library, target-side data path monitoring is performed automatically and proactively. The Datapath
Conditioning dialog box enables you to set the level at which the data path is monitored between an I/O
blade and the drive(s) connected to it. You also can set the time interval between monitoring checks (up to
48 hours).
I/O blades must be present to access the Datapath Conditioning dialog box.
Note
library.

3 Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > Datapath Conditioning.
The Datapath Conditioning dialog box appears, showing all the I/O blades found in the library. Each
blade is identified by name and by geographic location.
4 Click a blade to highlight it and then click Configure.

The Datapath Conditioning Setting dialog box appears.
5 In the Level area, choose the appropriate level. The default level is Interface Test. To enable data path
monitoring tickets, set the level to Device Datapath Test.
The following table describes the functionality for each data path monitoring level.
Level Name Functionality Description
Interface Test Performs tests to verify that Fibre Channel controllers on I/O blade are
responsive to commands.
Device Everything from Interface Test level, in addition to performing a device inquiry on
Datapath Test each target device.
6 In the Enter new Interval text box, type the amount of time that should elapse between automatic
monitoring checks. The interval can range from 1 to 2,880 minutes (48 hours). The default interval is 60
minutes.

• The data path from I/O blade to the drive must experience problems for two
Note
period intervals before a problem is detected and a ticket is generated.
• The default time interval for Windows is five minutes. You must disconnect
the drive for at least five minutes to know you have triggered the Ticket.
7 To save your configuration and return to the Datapath Conditioning dialog box, click OK.
Proceed to Configuring Switch Zoning on page 706 if applicable. Otherwise, proceed to Configuring Host
Access - FC I/O Blade Connected on page 706.
Configuring Switch Zoning

If one or more FC switches is attached to the library, verify that proper switch zoning is configured.
Proceed to Configuring Host Access - FC I/O Blade Connected on page 706.
Configuring Host Access - FC I/O Blade Connected

If your host(s) are connected through the management control blade or an FC I/O blade, run FC Host to
allow the library to manage your media properly. See FC Host LUN Mapping on page 706.
If you are configuring your LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives attached to Ethernet Expansion blades, go to Configuring
Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions on page 719.
If your host(s) are directly connected to drives, configure your third-party tape handling software.
FC Host LUN Mapping

During device discovery, a particular partition or drive may map to a higher LUN space than is optimal for a
particular application. The FC Host feature allows you to create a virtual private remapping of available
LUNs for a specific Fibre Channel-attached host. LUN mapping is required to give hosts access to partitions
and devices. You can also make devices appear to the host as if they were at lower LUNs in order to
optimize library performance.
Depending upon host operating system constraints, it may be necessary to reboot or reconfigure the host
as a result of device map changes resulting from the use of FC Host.
Proceed to Configuring Host Access - FC I/O Blade Connected on page 706.
Once connected, a host will persist in the FC I/O blade memory until it is manually deleted.

Configuring FC Host LUN Mapping
1 Click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host.
The FC Host dialog box appears.
2 Select an FC host to configure.

3 Click LUN Mapping.
The LUN Mapping dialog box for the selected host appears. The LUN Mapping dialog box displays all
partitions and drives connected to the blade that are attached to the host.
The partitions that have not yet been manually reassigned to a new map position appear in bold in the
Device column. The library treats partitions as devices. You must drag a partition to the LUN/Device
column for the LMC to manage it and its media.

Compare the default view with the Show Details view shown in the following figure.
In this figure, the Internal LUN column has been scrolled down. The Show Details view for partitions
shows the partition name, product ID, vendor ID, and the serial number of the partition. For drives, LMC
displays the device LUN, connection type, port connection, vendor ID, serial number, and the
associated partition.
The following table describes the descriptors that appear in the Show Details view for partitions.
Descriptor Description
Partition Name Name assigned during partition creation process.
Product ID The Product ID setting controls the product ID string that is returned in a
standard SCSI INQUIRY response. The library can report that it is a Scalar 24,
Scalar i500, Scalar 100, Scalar 1000, Scalar i2000, Scalar i6000, or Scalar 10K.
This feature can enable the library to be used with host applications that do not
yet include the Scalar i6000 in a list of recognized devices. In addition, the
various Microsoft Windows operating systems maintain a list of recognized
devices. If the Scalar i6000 is not in an operating system list of recognized
devices, the library will appear as an unknown device in device lists. You might
prevent the library from being listed as unknown by setting Product ID to a
library other than Scalar i6000. This setting does not cause any library
operational changes other than the SCSI INQUIRY response.
Vendor ID ADIC or Quantum
Serial Number Partition ID as shown by System→ Monitor.
The following table describes the descriptors that appear in the Show Details view for drives.

Descriptor Description
[Number] [LUN] [Fibre or SCSI] [Port Number].

[Connection Type]
[Port Connection]
Vendor ID Drive manufacturer.
Serial Number Drive Serial Number.
Partition Name of the partition with which the drive is associated.
In the default view, only the names of available partitions and the names of the devices (drives) are
shown. LUN spaces from 0-255 are available. In the Show Details view, a partition that has not yet
been manually reassigned to a new map position appears in heavy black type in the Internal LUN
column. Partitions are treated by the library as devices. You must assign a partition to the LUN/External
LUN column for the LMC to manage it and its media. In this example, the control LUN has already been
remapped as shown in heavy black type in the LUN/External LUN column.
4 If you are working from the local touch screen, you must select an internal device LUN, select the left
arrow, and then select the desired external LUN. If you are working from the remote client, you can use
the select method or you can drag and drop the devices from the Internal LUN column to the
appropriate LUN assignment in the LUN/External LUN column. Always use LUN 0 for command and
control.
In the following figure, all devices have been mapped manually.
The new map locations appear in heavy black type in the LUN/External LUN column. The previous
(default) device map position of a remapped device is shown in gray type in the Internal LUN column.
5 Click OK.

The FC Host map is automatically saved as part of the configuration. For more information about device
numbering in a SAN context, see related sections in the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide or use the Online
Help.

Channel Zoning
You can use channel zoning to restrict host access to specific ports on the FC I/O blade. In most cases,
however, channel zoning should be left at default settings. Use the procedure below if you need to configure
channel zoning as part of your initial library setup.
Configuring FC Channel Zoning

1 Click Setup > Blades > Access > Channel Zoning.
The Channel Zoning configuration box appears.
2 Select a blade and then click Configure.

3 To restrict access, clear the check mark in the cell where the target port and the initiator channel meet.
All combinations are possible with one exception. If a FC port is set to target & initiator mode, it will
appear in both the horizontal row and vertical column. The FC port will not be allowed access to itself,
however, in order to prevent “ghosting.” Ghosting is a condition where hosts can see storage in two
places.
Be aware that an entire channel is zoned when the cell is checked. This effects any host that may be
accessing the FC I/O blade.
4 Click OK to save your settings.

LUN Mapping Wizard
LUN mapping is required to give hosts access to partitions and devices. You can also make devices appear
to the host as if they were at lower LUNs in order to optimize library performance.
The LUN Mapping Wizard guides you through the setup of LUN mapping for your Fibre Channel hosts.
If you want to manually assign a target LUN, or want to add/modify/delete the

Note
host, select Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host on the menu bar. For more
information, see FC Host LUN Mapping on page 706.
The LUN Mapping Wizard automatically assigns sequential numbers for the external LUN of each mapped
device, without any gaps between them per blade. When using the LUN Mapping Wizard, the LUN for
some devices may change even if you did not specify the changes. If a control LUN is mapped, it is always
assigned LUN 0.
Depending upon host operating system constraints, it may be necessary to reboot or reconfigure the host
as a result of device map changes resulting from the use of the LUN Mapping Wizard.
1 Click Setup > Blades > Access > LUN Mapping Wizard.
The LUN Mapping Wizard – Overview dialog box appears.
2 Review the LUN Mapping Wizard Overview, then click Next to continue.
The LUN Mapping Wizard – Select Host dialog box appears. All available hosts are listed on this
dialog box.

3 Select a host to configure and then click Next to continue.
The LUN Mapping Wizard – Select Partition dialog box appears. All available partitions on the
selected host are listed on this dialog box.
4 Select a partition to configure and then click Next to continue. All available blades on the selected
partition are listed on this dialog box.
The LUN Mapping Wizard – Select Blade dialog box appears.
5 Select a blade to configure and then click Next to continue.

The LUN Mapping Wizard – Map/Unmap Devices dialog box appears.

6 Select the check box to map a device or clear the check box to unmap a device, then click Next to
continue.
The LUN Mapping Wizard – What Next? dialog box appears.
7 Select one of the following and click Next to continue:

• Map another blade – this allows you to map another blade on the same partition.
• Map another partition – this allows you to map another partition on the same host.
• Map another host – this allows you to map another host.
• Continue and preview all the changes – this allows you to view an online printout of the
change report which presents a preview of all changes, showing whether you added, modified
or deleted any devices.
If your configurations are complete, select Continue and preview all changes.
The LUN Mapping Wizard – Preview All Changes dialog box appears.

8 Prior to finishing and saving your LUN mapping configuration changes, review your newly mapped or
unmapped devices in this dialog box.
• If you would like to create a report of your changes, click View Change Report.
• If you are satisfied with your LUN mapping changes and want complete the wizard process, click
Finish. Your LUN mapping changes are finalized, and then you have the option of viewing the LUN
Mapping Report. For more information on reporting features, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
The LUN Mapping Change Preview Report – Print Preview dialog box appears. This dialog box
displays what types of changes were made to all devices.
The changes on the report include:

• Added Mapping – (A)
• Removed Mapping – (R)
• LUN Modified – (M)
On the LUN Mapping Change Preview Report – Print Preview dialog box, you can select the
following:
• To save the report as a PDF file, click PDF. Specify a file path and file name, and then click
Confirm.
• To print the report, click Print. Specify print options, and then click OK.
• To navigate through the pages of the report, click Back or Next.
• To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click Zoom In or Zoom Out.
• To access the Online Help, click Help.

9 After you have reviewed the LUN Mapping Change Preview Report, click Close to return to the LUN
Mapping Wizard – Preview All Changes dialog box.
10 If you are satisfied with your LUN mapping changes and want to complete the wizard process, click
Finish. Your LUN mapping changes are finalized, and then you have the option of viewing the LUN
Mapping Report.
Using Storage Networking

If your library contains HP LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives attached to Ethernet Expansion blades, use the following
procedures to set up your HP LTO-5 or LTO-6 SNW drives.
To use SNW features, you must install an SNW license. See Enabling Licenses on page 666.
For more information on Control Paths, see Working with Library Control Paths on page 681.
Licensing a Storage Networking Drive

Before you can use a drive for any of the storage networking features, you must assign it to the SNW
license. Your SNW license covers a specific number of drives. Any drive you use for an SNW feature
consumes one license count. A drive consumes only one license count even if you use it for multiple SNW
features
1 If you are not already working from the physical library, select it from the View menu.
2 Click Setup > Drives > Access > SNW Wizard.
3 Click Next.
4 From the Select Storage Networking Options screen, select Storage Networking Drive Licenses and
click Next.
The Storage Networking License Drive Configuration dialog box appears.
5 Select the check boxes belonging to drives you want to license. Click the Select All Drives check box to
select all check boxes.

6 Clear the check boxes of drives you no longer want to license.
Any changes you make are indicated by colors filling the row.
• Green — indicates you are adding the drive to the SNW count.
• Yellow — indicates you are removing the drive from the SNW count.
• White — indicates no change.
7 Click Finish.
Configuring Control Path and Control Path Failover

The control path drive and control path failover settings are configured on the same screen. You do not need
an SNW license to configure a drive as a control path. However, you do need an SNW license to configure
control path failover. See Configuring Data Path Failover on page 718.
Use the Control Path function to configure a partition and the appropriate drives to handle the host
application’s control path commands. When you initially create the library partitions, you can configure the
control paths and how they are assigned. For more information, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
If the partition has multiple drives covered by the SNW license, then you can select a Control Path Failover
(CPF) drive from the CPF Selection table. This drive will be used as the active CP drive in the case where
the primary CP drive fails.
Follow the steps below to select a partition and configure the control path for your EEB- connected HP LTO-
5 or LTO-6 SNW drive.
These steps should be completed for all EEB-connected drives, even if they
Note
are NOT licensed for storage networking (SNW).
2 From the main console, select Setup > Partitions > Control Path.
The Storage Networking Partitions dialog box appears.
3 Highlight the partition you want to configure, and click OK.

The Control Path dialog box appears.
4 In the CP Drive Selection field, click the Enable Control Path check box.
A check box appears and the CP Drive drop-down list is enabled.
5 From the CP Drive drop-down menu, select the drive you want to configure as the control path.
The primary control path drive you selected is highlighted in yellow.
You must have a SNW license with sufficient drive counts to configure a CPF
Note
drive.
6 To select a CPF drive, click the Select check box for the desired drive.
7 Click OK.
An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
The CP and CPF drives are configured.
Configuring Data Path Failover

For details and requirements, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
To enable or disable data path failover functionality:
1 From the main console, select Setup > Drives > Access > Data Path Failover. Or, via the SNW
Wizard: Select Setup > Drives > Access > SNW Wizard. Click Next. From the options screen, select
Data Path Failover and click Next.

The Data Path Failover (DPF) dialog box appears. Drives with DPF configured have check marks in
their check boxes.
2 Under Data Path Failover Configuration, click the check box of the drive(s) on which you want to
enable or disable Data Path Failover.
Your choices are indicated by the following colors:
• Green - Add DPF
• Yellow - Remove DPF
• White - No changes
3 Click OK.
An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
Data Path Failover configuration is now complete.
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and

Partitions
The SNW Host Access feature provides a way to limit host access to specific SNW tape drives and partitions
via the library interface.
This section covers:
• Requirements for Host Access on page 720
• Configuring Hosts on page 720
• Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Host Access Groups on page 727
• Viewing All Access Groups on page 741

Without host access restrictions, all hosts can view all drives connected to the SAN and all partitions to
which there is a library control path. Host access gives you the ability to deny/restrict access to specific
hosts.
Details about host access include:
• If a control path drive has an SNW license applied to it, it will not be seen by external applications
until you create an access group and add the host and partition to the access group.
• Access is granted using “access groups.” An access group is made up of partitions, drives, and
hosts. Drives and partitions can be in multiple access groups, but each host can only be in one
access group.
• A partition can be assigned to a host access group if its control path is through an SNW-licensed
tape drive.
• Drives must be licensed for SNW before they can be added to access groups. Once a drive has
been licensed for SNW, it is inaccessible to hosts until they are granted access via the host access
feature. See Licensing a Storage Networking Drive on page 716.
• Tape drives that are licensed for SNW can only be accessed by hosts that are in the same host
access group as the drives.
• Tape drives that are not licensed for SNW can be accessed by all hosts.
• If the control path and any control path failover tape drives for a partition are licensed for SNW, then
only the hosts in the same access group as that partition will be able to send medium changer
commands to that partition. Hosts not in the same access group as a partition will not be able to
send medium changer commands to that partition. However, hosts that are not in the same access
group as a partition do still have access and can send commands to any non-SNW-enabled tape
drives in that partition.
• Host access to a partition means the host can issue media changer commands to the partition.
• Host access to a drive means the host can issue SCSI commands to the drive.
Requirements for Host Access

To use host access, you need the following:
• A Storage Networking license on the library (see Enabling Licenses on page 666)
• Drives licensed for Storage Networking (see Licensing a Storage Networking Drive on page 716).
• To add a partition to a host access group, the partition must have its control path via a SNW drive
(see <Link>Configuring Control Path and Control Path Failover on page 717).
• Hosts configured (see Configuring Hosts on page 720).
• Host access groups configured (see Viewing All Access Groups on page 741).
Configuring Hosts
All hosts that are connected to your SAN are available to be assigned to host access groups. You may wish
to modify existing hosts to make their names more “user friendly” for when you add them to access groups.
You may wish to delete hosts that are not connected to the SAN. Using the host configuration option, you
can do the following:

• Create Host — You can add hosts that are not currently connected to the SAN (i.e., “prep” your
library for a future host). These are hosts that you plan to add to the SAN later, but want to pre-
configure in host access groups now. If you don’t eventually add the hosts to the SAN, they will not
be able to access the drives/partitions you choose. In most cases, you will not need to create hosts
in this way.
• Modify Host — You can modify the name, type, port, or WWPN of a visible host. Unmodified hosts
that are connected to the SAN have no predefined name and are named “Unknown” by default. You
may wish to change the name to a more “user friendly” name to distinguish one host from another.
• Delete Host — You can delete hosts that are no longer connected to the SAN. You can only delete
hosts whose state is offline (i.e., not connected to the SAN). Any time you delete a host you remove
all host mappings configured for that host.
Create Host
To create a host:
1 Select Setup > Drives > Access > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
2 Click Next to display the Select Storage Networking Option screen.
3 Select Host Access and click Next to display the Select Host Access Options screen.

4 Select Host Configuration and click Next to display the Select Hosts Configuration Options screen.

5 Select Create Host and click Next to display the Create New Host dialog box.
6 Type an appropriate value into the Name field.

7 Select the operating system of the host from the Type field pull-down menu.
8 Type the port number into the Port field.
9 Type the world wide port name into the WWPN field.
10 The string must be 8 hexadecimal numbers, a colon (:), and 8 hexadecimal numbers
(########:########).
11 Click Finish to create the host.
12 Click OK in the The Host was created successfully dialog box.

Modify Host
To modify an existing host:

4 Select Modify Host.

5 Click the appropriate box in the Select column to select the host to modify.
6 Click Next to access the Modify Existing Host dialog box, which displays current information for the host.
7 Correct the information in the Name, Type, Port, and WWPN fields.
8 Click Finish to save the modifications.
9 Click OK in the The Host was modified successfully dialog box.

Delete Host
To delete an existing host:

4 Select Delete Host.

5 Click the appropriate box in the Select column to select the host to delete.
6 Click Finish to delete the host.
A warning message appears letting you know that deleting the host will remove all host mappings
configured for the host.
7 Click Yes to continue.
8 Click OK in the The Host was deleted successfully dialog box.
9 If necessary, click Cancel then Yes to exit the dialog box.
Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Host Access Groups

If necessary, you can make the following modifications to host access groups:
• Creating Host Access Groups on page 727
• Changing an Access Group Name on page 731
• Deleting a Host Access Group on page 733
• Adding a Host to an Access Group on page 733
• Removing a Host from an Access Group on page 735
• Adding and Removing Drives and Partitions to/from Host Access Groups on page 737
• Viewing All Access Groups on page 741
Creating Host Access Groups

A host access group is composed of at least one host, one drive, and one partition. Each host in the
access group can send read/write commands to the drives in the group, and can send move commands
to the partitions in the group. A host can only be in one access group. Drives and partitions can be in
multiple access groups.

To create host access groups:
4 Select Access Group Configuration and click Next to display the Host Access Group Configuration
Wizard.

5 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Option screen.
6 Select the Create New Host Access Group radio button and click Next to display the Select Group
Access Name dialog box.
7 Type a name into the Group Name field.

8 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts dialog box. All the hosts visible on the SAN are
displayed.

9 Select one or more check boxes in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts to include in the
access group, or select the Select All Hosts check box to include all of the hosts in the group.
10 Click Next to display the Select the drives for host access dialog box.
11 To add drives to the host access group, select their check boxes in the Select column.
If control path failover is configured for a partition you are planning to
CAUTION add to this host access group, make sure you assign both the control
path drive and the control path failover drive to this host access
group. If you do not, then if the control path fails over, you will lose
host access to the partition.
12 For each drive selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port 2 for processing drive commands (the
default is Port 1). Both drive ports are active and have different WWPNs, so the port you choose must
be physically connected to a host or switch or the host will not see it. Exception: If the drive is

configured for Data Path Failover, you should only select Port 1(if the data path fails over to Port 2, the
host will still be able to access it because DPF is configured).
13 Click Next to display the Select the partitions for host access dialog box. In order for a partition to
appear on the list, both the following conditions must apply:
• the partition has its control path configured via control path bridging (meaning, the control path
is via an HP LTO-5or LTO-6 drive connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade); and
• the control path drive has an SNW license applied to it.
14 To add partitions to the host access group, select their check boxes in the Select column.
15 For each partition selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port 2 for processing host medium
changer commands (the default is Port 1). Both drive ports are active and have different WWPNs, so
the port you choose must be physically connected to a host or switch or the host will not see it. The port
you choose depends on which ports on the control path drive are physically cabled.
16 Click Finish to create the new access group.
17 Click OK in the The Host Access was updated successfully dialog box.
Changing an Access Group Name

1 Display the Host Access Group Configuration Wizard as described in Viewing All Access Groups on
page 741.
2 Select the Change Access Group name radio button.

3 Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
4 Select the Expand Tree check box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of
the dialog box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the Access Group whose name you want to change.

6 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Name dialog box.
7 Type the new name into the Group Name field.

8 Click Finish.
Deleting a Host Access Group
When you delete a host access group, all host mappings for this
CAUTION group are deleted.
To delete a host access group:

page 741
2 Select the Delete Host Access Group radio button.
4 Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog
box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the Access Group to delete.
6 Click Finish to display the Warning dialog box.
7 Click Yes to delete the Access Group.
8 Click OK in the The Group Access was deleted successfully dialog box.
Adding a Host to an Access Group

To add a host or hosts to a host access group:
page 741.
2 Select the Add Host to Group radio button.

box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the Access Group to modify.

6 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts to Add dialog box.
7 Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts to add to the group, or select the
Select All Hosts box to add all of the hosts in the group.
8 Click Finish to save the modification.
9 Click OK in the The Group Access was updated successfully dialog box.
Removing a Host from an Access Group
Deleting a host from an access group will remove all host mappings
CAUTION configured for the host.
To remove a host from a host access group:

page 741.
2 Select the Remove Host from Group radio button.

box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the Access Group from which to remove a host.

6 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts to Remove dialog box.
7 Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts to remove from the group, or select
the Select All Hosts box to remove all of the hosts from the group.
8 Click Finish to save the modification.
9 Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.
10 Click OK in the The Group Access was updated successfully dialog box.
Adding and Removing Drives and Partitions to/from Host Access Groups
To add devices to or remove devices from an existing group, or to select which ports the hosts will use to
access devices, use the Host Access Configuration option. To do so:

4 Select the Host Access Configuration radio button.

5 Click Next to display the Select the Group to modify screen
box.
7 Select the box corresponding to the Access Group you want to modify.

8 Click Next to display the Select the drives for host access dialog box which shows the current
settings.
9 Select or clear boxes in the Select column to indicate which drive or drives to include in the host access
group. You do not have to include drives in the host access group.
If control path failover is configured for a partition you are planning to

CAUTION add to this host access group, make sure you assign both the control
path drive and the control path failover drive to this host access
group. If you do not, then if the control path fails over, you will lose
host access to the partition.
10 For each drive selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port 2 for processing drive commands (the
default is Port 1). Both drive ports are active and have different WWPNs, so the port you choose must
be physically connected to a host or switch or the host will not see it. Exception: If the drive is
configured for Data Path Failover, you should only select Port 1(if the data path fails over to Port 2, the
host will still be able to access it because DPF is configured).

11 Click Next to display the Select the partitions for host access dialog box. In order for a partition to
appear on the list, both the following conditions must apply:
• the partition has its control path configured via control path bridging (meaning, the control path
is via an HP LTO-5 or LTO-6 drive connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade); and
• the control path drive has an SNW license applied to it.
12 Select or clear boxes in the Select column to indicate which partitions to include in the host access
group.
13 For each partition selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port 2 for processing host medium
changer commands (the default is Port 1). Both drive ports are active and have different WWPNs, so
the port you choose must be physically connected to a host or switch or the host will not see it. The port
you choose depends on which ports on the control path drive are physically cabled.
14 Click Finish to update host access.
15 Click OK in the The Host Access was updated successfully dialog box.
Viewing All Access Groups

If you want to see all of the access groups you configured:
2 Click Next.
3 Select the Host Access radio button and click Next.
4 Select the Host Access Configuration radio button.
5 Click Next to display the Select the Group to configure screen.
box.
7 Click Cancel to exit.
8 Click Yes.

Putting Physical Library and Partitions Online
Individual partitions, as well as the physical library, must be online in order for a host to communicate with
them.
Putting a Partition Online

1 Select the partition using the View menu.
2 Click Operations > Change Mode.
The Change Library Mode dialog box appears.
3 Select Online.
4 Click OK.
Putting the Physical Library Online

1 Select the physical library using the Change Library Mode menu.
2 Click Operations > Change Mode.
The Change Library Mode dialog box appears.
3 Select Online.
4 Click OK.
Proceed to Configuring Screen Saver Preferences on page 747.

Online and Offline Functionality
Some library functions require the physical library or partitions to be in a particular state (either online or
offline) before they can be performed. If you choose a function that requires the library or partition state to
be changed from its current state, you are prompted to do so.
Table 12 below summarizes the library functions that require the physical library or partitions to be either
online or offline.
Table 12 Library Functions Requiring Online or Offline State
Function Physical Library Partition
Operations > Import Online Offline

Operations > Export
Operations > Drives > Load
Operations > Drives > Unload
Operations > Move Media
Operations > Inventory (partition view)
Setup > Partitions > Configure (create, modify, or
delete)
Tools > Partitions Defragmentation — Offline
Operations > Inventory (physical library view) Offline —

Tools > Teach
Tools > Save/Restore (restore, revert, or rescue)
Tools > Verification Tests (start test)
Tools > Update Software > Library (update or
reinstall library software)
Service > Manual Diagnostics
Tools > Update Software > Drives (Offline)

Current view (library or partition) must
be offline

Configuring Drive Cleaning
When you create or modify a partition, you can specify that tape drives in that partition be automatically
cleaned each time the drive requests a cleaning operation.
For automatic drive cleaning to function, you must configure drive cleaning for the library. To configure drive
cleaning, first assign cleaning magazines, and then import cleaning media. Designated cleaning media can
also be used when manually cleaning drives. (Cleaning magazines and media are not part of any logical
partition, and so are not visible to the host application.)
If cleaning magazines are no longer needed, you can unassign them. In addition, you can export expired
cleaning media to remove it from the library.
Note
application does not support the coordination of drive cleaning. If drive cleaning
functionality is enabled on the host application, do not enable automatic drive
cleaning for any partitions in the library.
For more information about enabling automatic drive cleaning for a partition,
see Creating Partitions on page 684. For more information about manually
cleaning drives, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.
Assigning Cleaning Magazines and Importing Cleaning Media

To configure the library for drive cleaning, first assign one or more magazines as cleaning magazines, and
then import cleaning media.
At least one magazine must be assigned for cleaning before you can import
Note
cleaning media. Also, only magazines that do not belong to a partition can be
assigned for cleaning.
1 Insert one or more pieces of cleaning media into the I/E station and close the I/E station door.
Use a standard barcode label for cleaning media. Barcode numbers do not require a specific prefix or
suffix.
library.
3 On the menu bar, click Setup > Drive Cleaning.
The Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box appears.
Click a magazine slot or a piece of media to select it. Details about the selected slot or media appear
under Information, including the type of media, barcode number, location, and the number of times the
media has been mounted in a drive.
If the library has more than one frame, click the arrow buttons to display the next or previous frame.

4 To assign a magazine for cleaning, click any slot in the magazine to select it. Click Menu, and then click
Assign magazine for cleaning.
The magazine is assigned for cleaning. Repeat this step to assign additional cleaning magazines.
5 To import cleaning media, click the cleaning media in the I/E station to select it, and then do one of the
following:
• To import only the selected piece of media, click Menu, and then click Import <barcode number>
as cleaning media.
• To import all media in the selected I/E station magazine, click Menu, and then click Import all tapes
in magazine as cleaning media.
The cleaning media is moved to an available cleaning magazine, and can be used for automatic or
manual cleaning.
6 Click Close to close the Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box.
If you are working on the remote LMC, you can right-click a magazine slot or a
Note
piece of cleaning media to see a menu of available options.

Exporting Cleaning Media
Cleaning media can be used a limited number of times. If a piece of media is expired, export it and remove
it from the library
library.
The Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box appears. If the library has more than one frame, click
the arrow buttons to display the next or previous frame.
To determine if a piece of cleaning media has been used the maximum number of times, click the media
to select it, and then check the Mount Count value under Information.
3 Click the cleaning media in a cleaning magazine to select it, and then do one of the following:
• To export only the selected piece of media, click Menu, and then click Export cleaning media
<barcode number>.
• To export all media in the selected magazine, click Menu, and then click Export all cleaning media
in magazine.
The cleaning media is moved to an available I/E station magazine.
Unassigning a Cleaning Magazine

If a magazine is no longer needed for holding cleaning media, first export all cleaning media from the
magazine, and then unassign it.
library.
The Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box appears. If the library has more than one frame, click
the arrow buttons to display the next or previous frame.
3 If the magazine you want to unassign contains cleaning media, export all cleaning media to the I/E
station.
For more information on exporting cleaning media, see Exporting Cleaning Media on page 746.
4 Click any slot in the cleaning magazine to select it.
5 Click Menu, and then click Unassign magazine for cleaning.
The magazine is no longer assigned for cleaning.
If you try to unassign a cleaning magazine that contains cleaning media, a

Note
message appears asking if you are sure you want to continue. If you click Yes,
any media in the magazine is not accessible until you add the magazine to a
partition or assign it again as a cleaning magazine.

Configuring Screen Saver Preferences
Use the Screen Saver preferences tab to customize the images that display on the LMC screen when the
library is not in use. The screen saver starts automatically if the library is idle for a specified amount of time.
Screen saver preferences can only be configured remotely, not using the touch
Note
panel.
1 From the menu bar, click Setup > System Settings > Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box appears with the Screen Saver tab displayed.
2 Do one of the following:
• Select Default to use the default Quantum screen saver with standard settings.
• Select Custom to change screen saver settings such as activation, movement, or images.
• Select Off to disable the screen saver. (The current settings are cleared.)
If you selected Custom, go to Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 6.
3 Under Activation, enter a value in the Wait box to specify how much idle time must pass before the
screen saver is activated.
The activation wait time can be 1–120 minutes.
4 Under Movement, specify the position and the motion of the screen saver image on the screen.
• Select Random to display the screen saver image in a variety of positions.

• Select Stationary to display a static screen saver image that does not move.

• Select Linear to display the screen saver image as a floating image.
Enter values in the horizontal and vertical boxes to specify the movement of the screen saver
image in pixels.
Enter a value in the Motion Delay box to specify the movement speed of the screen saver image.
5 Under Images, specify the image files to display for normal functions, warning notices, and failure
notices. You must select image files for all three functions.
To specify an image file, click Browse. Select the image file and then click Open. The image file must
be in GIF, JPEG, or PNG format, and cannot be larger than 1 MB. In addition, image resolution is limited
to 600 x 800 pixels.
Click Preview to preview an image file.
6 Click OK to save the settings and close the Preferences dialog box.
Or click Apply to save the settings without closing the Preferences dialog box.
If you previously made system configuration changes, you are prompted to save the configuration
changes. For more information, see Saving the Library Configuration on page 749.

Saving the Library Configuration
Save a copy of the library configuration as a local rescue image and to a remote location as a restore image.
See the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide for more details on library configuration saving.
The Save/Restore command is not available from the library’s touch screen.
Note
As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the library shuts down.

CAUTION You must have physical access to the library to bring the library back up. If
you are performing a restore, rescue, or revert operation using remote
access, the library will remain shut down until the library is directly powered
back on.
1 Log on as an admin or service user on the remote client.

2 If you are not already working from the physical library, select the physical library from the View menu.
3 Click Tools > Save/Restore.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
4 Click Save.
5 From the File Chooser dialog box, specify where to save the restore image on the remote file system.
You need only to specify the path since the management control blade determines the image file name.
6 Click Open when you are ready to proceed.
7 Click Yes, when you are prompted whether you want to generate a rescue image at the same time the
remote image is saved. You are asked because no rescue image currently exists.
If the save operation is successful, a message dialog box appears indicating the name of the image file that
was saved to the remote file system. The time stamp of the local rescue image will also appear on the Save
and Restore Library Configuration dialog box.
If the save operation is not successful, a message dialog appears describing the error.
Proceed to Logging Off on page 750.

Logging Off
Log off using the touch screen after you are finished with your management session.
Click Operation > Log Off.
You can also log off by clicking Log Off on the toolbar.
Clicking the Log Off command causes the Log On dialog box to appear. To return to library management,
log on again.
Once you have completed the configuration, proceed to Installing Cartridges on page 633. >

Adding Optional Hardware
This chapter describes how to add optional hardware to an existing library. The instructions include:
• Adding Drives to an Existing Installation on page 753

• Adding a Power Supply Chassis on page 760
• Adding a Redundant Power Supply on page 766

• Adding an I/O Management Unit on page 770
• Adding Blades to the I/O Management Unit on page 780
• Adding a 24-Slot I/E Station to an Expansion Module on page 792
• Adding a 72-slot I/E Station to an Expansion Module on page 804
• Adding Aisle Lights on page 820
• Installing a Webcam on page 829
The instructions in this chapter assume that you are adding optional hardware
Note
to an existing library.
If you are installing a new library, use the instructions in:
• Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module (Gen 1 and Gen 2) on page 19

-OR-
• Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 1 on page 43

Shutting Down the Library
Some optional hardware can be installed only if the library is powered off. If you are instructed to shut down
the library, use the following procedure.
1 Log on as an admin or service user.
physical library.
3 Click Operations > System Shutdown.
The System Shutdown dialog box appears with Shutdown selected as the default.
4 Click Yes to accept Shutdown as the default.

5 A message appears that asks you whether you want to continue. If you are sure that all I/O operations
are finished, click OK.
When the shutdown process completes, the LMC display turns dark. The library is now ready to be
powered off.
Status indicator
Robotics Enabled
indicator/indicator
touch screen
752 Adding Optional Hardware

Adding Drives to an Existing Installation
The instructions in this section assume that you are adding optional drives to an existing installation.
• If you are installing drives in a new library, see the instructions in Installing Drives and Blades on
page 601.
• If you are adding drives to an existing library, you must remove storage magazines and drive plates
to gain access to the drive positions. You must also modify the partition to accommodate the
changes to storage and drives. Adding Drives to an Existing Installation on page 753.
• If you are removing and replacing failed drives in an existing library, see the Scalar i2000/i6000
Maintenance Guide.
If you are installing drives in expansion modules that have been added to an existing library you may need
to replace all of the LBX cards in all modules as well as the LBX terminator with new versions that support
the new configuration. For information on the LBX board and terminator versions, see LBX Board and
Terminator on page 873. For information on replacing the LBX board and terminator, see “Removing and
Replacing Satellite Boards” in the Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide
If you are adding drives in an expansion module that has never contained drives, you must add a power
supply to the expansion module. See Adding a Power Supply Chassis on page 760.
If you plan to connect drives to FC I/O blades in the I/O management unit, remember that each FC I/O blade
supports up to 4 drives and that you may need to add FC I/O blades and CMBs. See Adding an I/O
Management Unit on page 770, Adding Blades to the I/O Management Unit on page 780, and Installing a
Control Management Blade on page 782.

Drive Numbering Sequence
An example of the numbering sequence for drives is shown in Figure 256 below.
For information on the library’s coordinate system, see Storage Addressing System Overview on page 634.
Gaps between drive locations are not supported. Drives must be added to each module in the order shown
in Figure 256 . The control module must be fully populated with 12 drives before adding any drives in the
first expansion module. The first expansion module must be fully populated before adding any drives to
additional expansion modules. Each additional expansion module must be fully populated before adding
any drives to subsequent expansion modules.
Figure 256 Drive Sled Positions
1,1,1,12,1,1
1,1,1,11,1,1
1,1,1,10,1,1
1,1,1,9,1,1
1,1,1,8,1,1
1,1,1,7,1,1
1,1,1,6,1,1
1,1,1,5,1,1
1,1,1,4,1,1
1,1,1,3,1,1
1,1,1,2,1,1
1,1,1,1,1,1

The following procedure provides instructions for adding drives to an existing library. See Installing Drives
on page 608 for installing drives in a new library.
Required tools: 2.5 mm hex wrench, #2 Phillips screwdriver, ESD strap
7 Before removing any magazines in the access door of the expansion module you are upgrading,
determine if the magazines are used in any partitions.
8 If the Automatic Teach mode is being used, disable it to perform this upgrade procedure.
9 Remove the magazines in the access door from each partition(s) using the following procedure:
All partition elements associated to this upgrade procedure must be

CAUTION modified before proceeding with this procedure.


a. Click Physical on the View menu.

b. Click Setup > Partitions > Configure.
The Partitions dialog box is displayed.
c. Select the partition that include the affected magazines and click Modify.
d. Return the affected magazines to the physical pool.
e. Repeat Steps a through d for each partition associated with the access door you are upgrading.
10 On the operator panel, press the Robotics Enabled button to return the accessor assembly to the
home position.
The power remains on for all other components.
11 Open the access door.
12 Remove the magazines in front of the lowermost vacant drive location to make room for the drive. To
remove, push the magazine upward with both hands until it unsnaps, and then pull the magazine toward
you.

You might need to remove more than one magazine to create enough space for the drive you are
adding. It is recommended that you remove all of the magazines in the column and remove them from
the top down.
magazines
13 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to unscrew the retaining screws (two screws per plate) and remove the cover
plates from the drive position.
cover plates
two 2.5 mm hex screws
14 Reinstall the magazines above the new drive position.
Make sure that you fully seat each magazine by inserting each of the
Note
magazine’s four corner tabs into the available holes in the cover plate.

15 Close the access door.
16 On the front panel, press the Robotics Enabled button and verify that the button’s status light
illuminates in solid green state.
Before inserting drives, you must enable the robotics, otherwise the RCU
Note
cannot perform the necessary functions to add drives to the configuration.

19 In the corresponding drive location, using the #2 Phillips screwdriver or your fingers, unscrew the
retaining thumbscrews and remove the drive cover plates. You must remove two cover plates for each
drive that you are adding.
thumbscrews on cover plates
20 Using the markings on the drive slot, insert the drive slowly so the guide rails engage. The drive should
be flush with no gaps above or below it.
Use the bottom of the empty drive cluster as a guide if you are adding the drive to the Drive 1 or Drive
7 position.

.
cover plate
glide rail
drive
21 Use the #2 Phillips screwdriver or your fingers to tighten the two retaining thumbscrews of the UDS drive
sled.
22 Add any additional tape drives in the lower drive cluster. When the lower cluster is full, add the next tape
drive to the upper drive cluster.
23 Verify that the green LED on the back of the drive is on. If it is not on, the drive is not installed properly.
24 Observe the state of the green LED while the drive sled firmware automatically loads. It could take up
to 20 minutes to complete the drive sled firmware download. When the green LED is solid on for three
seconds, then blinks twice and repeats, the drive firmware is downloading. The drive sled firmware
download is complete when the green LED blinks one time every second, the amber LED is off, and the
blue LED blinks one time every 10 seconds. See Interpreting Drive Status LEDs on page 884 for a
complete listing of the LED blinking codes.
• After you add a drive, the robotics control unit ensures that the drive
Note
sled is loaded with the proper firmware. This firmware is based on the
currently installed level of library firmware on the management control
blade (MCB). If the autoleveling process fails, the drive sled becomes
inoperable and the library creates a ticket to report the issue.
• If more than one drive is added into the library, when the library is
already powered up, the RCS autolevels the drive after approximately
30 seconds. The autolevel countdown restarts if another drive is added
within 30 seconds of the last added drive. The RCS queues up all drives
inserted before performing the autolevel.
• Because UDS-2 and UDS-3 sleds require different application images,
if your library contains both types of sleds, the RCS may need to
autolevel twice.
25 Use the instructions in Cabling on page 615 to connect the new drives.
The power is on.
27 From the LMC, click Tools > Teach.
28 Click Configure, and then click Start.

The Working screen appears. Once the teach is completed, a message appears in the Results field,
for example, “Command Completed.”
29 Add the new drive(s) to a partition using the following procedure:

a. Log into the LMC as service user.
b. Click View > Physical.
c. Click Setup > Partitions.
d. Select the partition(s) that include the affected magazines and click Modify.
e. Select a partition and add the new drive(s).
30 To avoid confusion, add the affected magazines back into the appropriate partition. The partition should
be the same size as the original partition.
Due to licensing requirements, the physical location of the affected magazines

Note
may not be available until the procedures completes.

Adding a Power Supply Chassis
Required tools: 7 mm socket wrench, ESD strap
While the following instructions apply for adding either an AC or DC power

WARNING supply, there is one important distinction. When you come to the step
instructing you to attach the power cable to the PDU, you are not authorized to
connect the power cable to a DC power supply. The cable can only be attached
by a licensed electrician, supplied by the customer. Do not attempt to attach the
power cable to the DC power supply.
1 Open the service door on the control module or expansion module where you are adding the power
supply chassis.
3 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the down (0) position.
4 Remove the four thumbscrews retaining the cover plate from the power chassis opening.
thumbscrews

5 Remove the LBX cover plate.
thumbscrews
6 Unpack the power chassis.

7 Slide the power chassis into the module and attach it using the four 7 mm screws.
7 mm screws
Ensure that the arms of the connectors are all the way down. If they are not,
Note
they will be sheared off when the chassis is installed.

8 Install the power supplies and power distribution units.
Not all expansion modules will receive redundant power supplies, as those shown below.
power distribution units
power supplies
9 Through the space the LBX occupied, connect all the cables to the top of the power chassis.
The connections include four white connectors and one gray ribbon cable (the LBX ribbon (W5)). You
only need to connect the white connectors from the power chassis.
10 Connect the LBX ribbon cable (W5).
connector: J48AP
plug: W17 to I/O
connector: J48S management unit connector: J48L
plug: W5 to LBX plug: Gen 1 robotics: W12 to BPI
plug: Gen 2 robotics: W33 to BPI
connector: J48B
plug: W13 to upper drive cluster
connector: J48A

11 Insert and tighten the LBX/IEX cover plate using the thumbscrew.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew
12 For AC power supplies, insert the power cords into the power distribution units and turn them clockwise.
plug the power cables into

the power distribution units

For DC power supplies, the power cables must be attached to the power
CAUTION distribution unit by a licensed electrician before the library can be powered on.
See the Scalar i6000 Maintenance Guide for more details.
Attach the DC power cables
The top terminal (black) is Negative DC, the middle terminal (green) is
Note
Protective Earth, and the bottom terminal (red) is Positive DC.
13 Once attached, plug the power cords into a power source.

14 On the power distribution units, toggle the power switch to the up (I) position to turn on the power. If you
have power coming to other modules of the library, they must be turned on as well.
AC Power - turn both power switches

to the on position (I)
DC Power - turn both power switches


16 To turn on power to the library, press the Power button on the indicator panel.

The library begins to boot up. Within five minutes, the LMC display appears on the library’s touch
screen. A library with only a few drives usually will be fully powered on and ready for use within 10
minutes. However, if a library is large with a high number of drives, it can take more than an hour for the
library to fully power on, complete its discovery process, and become ready for use. During the power-
on process, the Robotics Enabled indicator flashes. When the library is fully up and ready to receive
commands, the Robotics Enabled indicator turns solid green.
Adding a Redundant Power Supply

The library supports both non-redundant and redundant power configurations. The non-redundant
configuration has a single power supply and power distribution unit. The redundant configuration has two
power supplies and two power distribution units.
For a redundant DC power supply, the power cable must be attached by a

Note
licensed electrician before the library can be powered on. See the Scalar i6000
Maintenance Guide for more details.
This subsection provides step-by-step instructions for installing a second power supply into a module.
These instructions work for both the control module and expansion modules as well as AC and DC power
distribution units.
You do not need to take the library offline in order to add the second power
Note
supply for redundancy.
Power supplies are not used in expansion modules eight through eleven. Only
the control module and first seven expansion modules support a power supply.
A power supply in an expansion module powers the drives and, therefore, a
power supply must be present for each module that has a drive.

1 Open the service door on the control module or expansion module where you are adding the power
supplies.
3 Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the thumbscrews that retain the cover plate over the power supply
slot. Discard the cover plate or leave them with the customer for future use.
thumbscrews

4 Carefully unpackage the power supply and power distribution unit and remove them from the antistatic
bags.
5 Slide in the power supply and tighten the thumbscrew.
power supply
thumbscrew
6 Slide in the power distribution unit and tighten the thumbscrew.
thumbscrew

7 Route the power cord through the cable access opening at the bottom of the module.
cable access opening
8 Connect the power cord to the power distribution unit.
For DC power supplies, the power cables must be attached to the power
CAUTION distribution unit by a licensed electrician before the library can be powered on.
See the Scalar i6000 Maintenance Guide for more details.
Attach the DC power cables

The top terminal (black) is Negative DC, the middle terminal (green) is
Note
Protective Earth, and the bottom terminal (red) is Positive DC.
9 Route and connect the power cord to the power source.

10 On the power distribution unit, toggle the circuit breaker switch to the On position (I) to turn on the
power.
circuit breakers
DC Power - turn both power switches

The power supply in the top position is represented as power supply 1 in

Note
the Library Management Console (LMC) and the power supply in the
bottom position is represented as power supply 2.

Adding an I/O Management Unit
There must be a power chassis in the expansion module when adding an I/O
Note
management unit.
Required tools: 7 mm socket wrench, Phillips screwdriver, ESD strap

4 Use your finger or a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the thumbscrews on the cover plate where the I/O
management unit will be installed.
thumbscrews
5 Remove the vented cover plate from in front of the LBX board. The cover plate will be reused later in
this procedure.
thumbscrews

6 Use your fingers or a Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two tall covers next to the drive clusters and
the mid-module cover plate. Remove the cover plates and set them aside. They will be reused later in
this procedure.
thumbscrews
thumbscrews
thumbscrews
7 Open the box containing the new I/O management unit.

8 Feed the I/O management unit’s cables into the space behind where the I/O management unit is
installed. The cables must go downward towards the LBX board.
9 Insert the I/O management unit into the opening. Make sure the cables are not bent and continue going
down towards the LBX board.

10 Use the 7 mm nut driver to secure the four retaining screws.
7 mm screws
11 Through the space behind the LBX board, connect the W17 cable to the J48AP connection on top of
the power chassis. This is the connection to the power distribution unit.
connector:J48AP

12 Connect the I/O management cables to the LBX board. This includes connecting the CAN cable (W7)
to J13, connecting the Ethernet cluster cable (W11) to J10, and connecting power supply status cable
(W16) to J16.
For more LBX version information, see LBX Board and Terminator on page
Note
873.
connector: J13 connector: J10 connector: J16

plug: W7 to I/O plug W11 to I/O plug: W16 to power
management unit management unit supply status cable
and CAN interface and Ethernet from LBX board
13 Insert and tighten the LBX/IEX cover plate using the thumbscrew.
LBX/IEX cover
plate thumbscrew

14 Insert and tighten the two tall covers next to the drive clusters and the mid-module cover plate.
tall top cover plate
mid-module cover plate
tall bottom cover plate
15 Install the grated covers on the side and top of the I/O management unit.
thumbscrews
thumbscrews

16 Use the 7 mm nut driver to attach the cable bracket.
7 mm screws
17 Insert the I/O management unit cooling assembly and push the handle up to lock it in place. Use a #1
Phillips screwdriver tighten the screw.
Phillips screw

18 Evenly apply pressure to both ends of the control management blade (CMB) and slide it into bay 2 of
the I/O management unit. As you insert the CMB, the latchhooks will begin to move towards the middle
of the blade. Push the latchhooks towards the middle of the blades and into the lock position. You will
feel the blade pins connect with the I/O management unit’s backplane as the blade locks into place.
CAUTION
Figure 257 I/O Management Unit Bay Layout
cooling assembly

expansion blade)
bay 6 (not used)
bay 2 (CMB)


expansion blade)
bay 1 (not used)

19 Evenly apply pressure to both ends of the blades and slide them into the correct bay of the I/O
management unit until the latchhooks begin to move towards the middle of the blade. Push the
latchhooks towards the middle of the blades and into the lock position. You will feel the blade pins
connect with the I/O management unit’s backplane as the blade locks into place.
latchhooks
20 Install cover plates over any bays that are not populated with blades.
CAUTION the cover plate is not installed, blade temperature errors will occur.
cover plate
latchhooks

21 Connect the six-foot Fibre optical cables to the appropriate Fibre Channel connections on the blades.
Ports 1 and 2 default to target and ports 3, 4, 5, and 6 default to initiator mode.
22 Route the cable through the cable keepers and down the right side of the module.


to drive in drive sled position 1

24 Gather the Fibre optical cables and put them inside the Velcro straps that are mounted on the right side
of the module.
use Velcro straps

to secure cables

26 To turn on power to the library, press the Power button on the indicator panel.
The library begins to boot up. Within five minutes, the LMD display appears on the library’s touch
screen. A library with only a few drives usually will be fully powered on and ready for use within 10
minutes. However, if a library is large with a high number of drives, it can take more than an hour for the
library to fully power on, complete its discovery process, and become ready for use. During the power-
on process, the Robotics Enabled indicator flashes. When the library is fully up and ready to receive
commands, the Robotics Enabled indicator turns solid green.

Adding Blades to the I/O Management Unit
The instructions in the following subsections are to be used for upgrading existing library configurations. If
you are installing blades in a new library, see Installing Drives and Blades on page 601 for instructions.
If you are adding blades to the I/O management unit, you must first install a cooling assembly if there is not
one in the module.
You do not need to take the library offline in order to install the I/O management
Note
cooling assembly, CMBs, or FC I/O blades. However, if the library is not taken
offline RAS tickets will be posted.
Installing the I/O Management Unit Cooling Assembly

The I/O management unit cooling assembly contains the fans that regulate temperature for the I/O
management unit.
1 Open the service door of the module.
3 Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the cover over the slot where the I/O management unit cooling
assembly will be installed.
cooling assembly cover
4 Remove the I/O management unit cooling assembly from the packaging.

5 Slide the I/O management unit cooling assembly into the top slot of the I/O management unit until fully
seated.
cooling assembly
latch handle I/O management unit
6 Push the latch handle into the up position.

7 Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the thumbscrew on the I/O management unit cooling assembly.
Phillips screw

Installing a Control Management Blade
3 Remove the cover plate from bay 2, the CMB slot.
bay 2
4 Remove the CMB from the protective anti-static bag.

5 Press up and out to open the latchhooks on each side of the CMB.
6 Carefully align the CMB with the guide slots in bay 2. The LEDs will be on the top.
CAUTION
LEDs
CMB

7 Use your thumbs on each end of the blade to evenly apply pressure and slide it into the I/O management
unit. When you feel the pins of the CMB lock into the backplane, push the latchhooks towards the middle
of the blade and into the lock position.
CAUTION the cover plates are not installed, FC I/O blade temperature errors will
occur.
Installing an FC I/O Blade

3 Remove the cover plate from bay where the FC I/O blade will be installed. The population order for the
FC I/O blades is shown below.
Make sure you install the FC I/O blade into the correct bay.
Note
cooling assembly

expansion blade)
bay 6 (not used)
bay 2 (CMB)


expansion blade)
bay 1 (not used)
4 Remove the FC I/O blade from the protective anti-static bag.

5 Press up and out to open the latchhooks on each side of the FC I/O blade.

6 Carefully align the FC I/O blade with the guide slots in the bay. The status LEDs must be at the top.
CAUTION
status LEDs
FC I/O blades installed

in bays 3, 4, and 5
7 Use your thumbs on each end of the blade to evenly apply pressure and slide it into the I/O management
unit. When you feel the pins of the FC I/O blade lock into the backplane, push the latchhooks towards
the middle of the blade and into the lock position.
CAUTION the cover plates are not installed, FC I/O blade temperature errors will
occur.
8 Remove and discard the white plastic covers from the FC connectors on the tape drives.
9 Remove and discard the necessary number of the black rubber protective covers from the ports on the
FC I/O blades.
10 Carefully unwrap the six-foot Fibre optical cables and remove the two white plastic protective caps from
each end of the cable.

11 Connect the Fibre optical cable to port FC-3 on the FC I/O blade that is installed in bay 3 of the I/O
management unit. See Table 7 on page 617 for information about the cable connection requirements.
port FC-3 on the

FC I/O blade in
in bay 3
module.

cable connected to FC 3 on
FC I/O blade in bay 3 of the
I/O management unit

to drive in drive sled position 1

14 Repeat Step 10 on page 784 through Step 13 on page 785 for each drive that will be installed.
The FC port and drive numbers will change according to Table 7 on page
Note
617.
15 Gather the Fibre optical cables and put them inside the Velcro straps that are mounted on the right side
of the module.
use Velcro straps

to secure cables

Installing an Ethernet Expansion Blade
3 Remove the cover plate from bay where the Ethernet Expansion blade will be installed. The population
order for the Ethernet Expansion blades is shown below.
Make sure you install the EEB into the correct bay.
Note
cooling assembly

expansion blade)
bay 6 (not used)
bay 2 (CMB)


expansion blade)
bay 1 (not used)
4 Remove the Ethernet Expansion blade from the protective anti-static bag.
5 Press up and out to open the latchhooks on each side of the Ethernet Expansion blade.

6 Carefully align the blade with the guide slots in the bay. The status LEDs must be at the top.
CAUTION
status LEDs
Ethernet expansion blades installed

in bays 7 and 8
7 Use your thumbs on each end of the blade to Figure 256 on page 754 evenly apply pressure and slide
it into the I/O management unit. When you feel the pins of the blade lock into the backplane, push the
latchhooks towards the middle of the blade and into the lock position.
CAUTION the cover plates are not installed, blade temperature errors will occur.
8 Remove and discard the plastic covers from the Ethernet connector on the tape drives.
9 Remove and discard the protective covers from the ports on the Ethernet Expansion blades.
10 Carefully unwrap the EEB cables and remove the two plastic protective caps from each end of the cable.

11 Connect the cable to ETH 1 on the Ethernet Expansion blade that is installed in bay 7 of the I/O
management unit. See Cabling on page 615 for information about the cable connection requirements.
port 1 on the
EEB in
in bay 7
module.
EEB cable routed

through cable
keepers

13 Insert the EEB cable into the EEB port connection on the drive.
EEB cable connected

to drive in drive sled 1
14 Repeat Step 10 on page 788 through Step 13 on page 790 for each drive that will be installed and
connected to an EEB.
The EEB port and drive numbers will change according to Cabling on page
Note
615.

15 Gather the EEB cables and put them inside the Velcro straps that are attached to the right side of the
module.
use Velcro straps

to secure cables
16 Connect the designated host to the port on the EEB.


Adding a 24-Slot I/E Station to an Expansion Module
This section describes how to upgrade an expansion module to include a 24-slot I/E station.
You can add 24-slot I/E stations to the control module and any of the first seven
Note
expansion modules.
Required tools: #2 Phillips screwdriver, 2.5 mm hex wrench, disposable screw capture tool, wire cutters (for
plastic ties), ESD strap
1 You must export all media from the access door being upgraded.
a. Log into the Library Management Console (LMC).
b. Click Operations > Export.

6 Open the access door of the expansion module that is to receive the I/E station.
7 Remove the magazines in columns 1 through 4, sections 1 through 5 of rack 2 to access screws and to
make room for the I/E station. Also removing the magazines in columns 3 and 4, section 6 provides
additional space when installing the I/E station.
Make a note of the target magazine location when it is removed. Keep this
Note
magazine within reach. You will need it to perform Step 26 on page 802 of
this procedure.
If you are adding the I/E station to the control module, none of the
magazines in column 4 will be present.
column
1 2 3 4
2 I/E station location
5
section
6 remove all magazines

inside the boxed area
10

8 For each of the six screws on the top cover of the access door:
a. Place the disposable screw capture tool over the screw.
b. Insert the #2 Phillips screwdriver through the disposable screw capture tool until seated on the
screw.
c. Remove the screw and set it aside.
Be careful when removing the last screw that the skin does not fall off the front
Note
of the access door.
six #2 Phillips screws
top cover on
access door

9 Use the 2.5 mm hex wrench to remove the six screws that hold the top-right magazine filler panel to the
inside of the access door.
10 Remove the filler panel. Set the screws aside.
magazine filler panel
2.5 mm hex screws
11 From the inside of the access door, mount the I/E station by first inserting the top of the I/E station over
the top rim flange of the door’s I/E station opening. Once the top is in place, the I/E station should hang
in the opening with the screw holes cut in the sides of the I/E station lining up with the holes in the door.

12 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to attach the I/E station to the door using the six screws removed in Step 8
on page 794.
2.5 mm screws
13 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to mount the new expansion module skin onto the upper area of the
access door next to the I/E station using three screws.
three #2
Phillips screws

14 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to insert and tighten the four screws that secure the I/E station panel cover
onto the I/E station door.
four #2 Phillips screws

I/E station door
15 Test the fit of the outer covers by opening and closing the I/E station. Adjust the door as necessary.
16 Cut and remove the two cable ties that hold the door interlock cables to the expansion module frame.
cable ties
17 Open the service door of the expansion module.

18 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the top drive cluster cover plate, the mid-module cover plate,
the bottom drive cluster cover plate, and the LBX/IEX cover plate.
top drive cluster

cover plate
LBX/IEX cover plate

bottom drive cluster
cover plate
19 Connect cable W6 to the I/E station lock assembly and route the cable around the cable tray.
W6 cable
I/E station lock
assembly

20 Following the cutouts on the cable tray ramp, secure cable W6 to the cable tray using the eight Velcro
straps provided.
Velcro straps
W6 cable
21 Secure the cable to the expansion module frame and cable tray using the five cable ties provided.
cable ties

22 Plug the W6 cable into the I/E station and secure the cable using the plastic ties.
W6 cable
23 Route the I/E station cable (W6) from the I/E station lock assembly following the door interlock cable to
toward the rear of the expansion module. Continue routing cable W6 through the drive cluster clamps
down toward the LBX board.
24 Connect cable W6 to the J7 connector on the LBX board.
W6 cable
J7 connector

25 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to replace the top drive cluster cover plate, the mid-module cover plate,
top drive cluster

cover plate
LBX/IEX cover plate

bottom drive cluster
cover plate

26 Reinstall the magazines you removed. Replace the upper target magazine in the column 2, section 1
position on the access door. If the target magazine is not in the correct position, the library will fail
calibration.
column 2, section 1
magazine position
magazines
27 Install four magazines into the I/E station.

.
install four magazines

into the I/E station

29 Press the Power switch on the operator panel.

30 Log on to the library as service.
31 Run the Configure and Calibrate teach commands by clicking Tools > Teach from the LMC.
32 Select Configure and click Start. The WORKING screen appears.
Once the teach is completed, a message appears in the Results field, for example, “Command
Completed.”
33 For a library that is already configured, you must modify any existing partition that includes resources
altered or removed by the change in the expansion module physical configuration to incorporate the
new I/E station.
In the LMC, click Setup > Partitions > Configure to modify partitions and create new ones. See the
Scalar i6000 User’s Guide for more information about working with partitions.

Adding a 72-slot I/E Station to an Expansion Module
This section describes how to upgrade an expansion module to include an access door with a 72-slot I/E
station. The first seven expansion modules can contain 72-slot I/E stations.
Make certain the firmware installed on the library system is the required version
Note
for the 72-slot I/E station functionality. Check Quantum site:
www.quantum.com/osr for the latest firmware information.
Required tools: #2 Phillips screwdriver, 2.5 mm hex wrench, 3 mm hex wrench, wire cutters (for plastic ties),
foot jack, M4x10 screws, ESD strap
1 You must export all media from the access door being replaced.
a. Log into the Library Management Console (LMC).
b. Click Operations > Export.
All partition elements associated to this upgrade procedure must be

CAUTION modified before proceeding with this procedure.



6 Open the service door of the expansion module that you are upgrading.

top drive cluster

cover plate
LBX/IEX cover plate bottom drive cluster

cover plate
8 Identify which version of the IEX card is currently installed in the library, If the library contains an IEX2
card (identified by a red sticker), skip to Step 12 on page 807. Otherwise, proceed to Step 9 on page
806.

9 Use your thumb to unsnap the IEX1 board from the two standoffs.
IEX1 board
standoffs
10 Unplug the IEX board from the LBX board, and then remove the IEX board.
connection between IEX1

and LBX boards

To complete this upgrade procedure, you must replace the existing IEX1
Note
board with an IEX2 board. A small red label on the IEX2 board
distinguishes it from the IEX1 board.
red sticker
mounting hole
11 Plug the IEX2 board into the LBX board.

12 Use your thumb to snap the IEX2 board onto the two standoffs
IEX2 board
standoffs
13 Determine if an I/E cable is already present and routed, if is present proceed to Step 16 on page 809.
Otherwise, proceed to Step 14 on page 807.
I/E connection
J7 connector W6 cable
14 Connect the I/E cable W6 to the J7 connector on the LBX board.

15 Route the W6 cable from the LBX board following the door interlock cable to the front of the expansion
module, allowing the W6 cable to hang near where the I/E station lock assembly will be located.
W6 I/E station cabling
I/E W6 cable and

LBX board
connection

top drive cluster

cover plate

cover plate

17 If there is an expansion module immediately to the right of the expansion module you are upgrading,
open its access door for clearance.
18 To avoid scratching the new access door on the door latches of the expansion module to the right, use
a 3 mm hex wrench to remove the four door latches.
top latches
bottom latches

19 To lighten the weight of the access door you are replacing, uninstall the magazines prior to removing
the door.
20 If a 24-slot I/E station exists, disconnect the I/E station cable from the I/E lock and release the cable
from the Velcro straps securing it to the cable carrier.
W6 cable
21 Use the supplied hex wrench to remove the two screws that secure the flex cable bracket to the top of
the expansion module. The flex cable bracket will not be used with the 72-slot I/E station upgrade.
Use caution when removing the screws securing the spring-loaded

CAUTION flex cable bracket.
2 screws 2 screws

22 On only the access door side, detach both the top and bottom door dampers. Slide the small flat-head
screwdriver into the space under the spring clip of each damper and lift the spring clip to release the
damper from the ball joint.
insert small flat-head

screwdriver in opening
and lift to release damper
23 Place the foot jack in front of the expansion module being upgraded. The right side of the foot jack
should be in the down position which will allow it to pass under the access door
24 Close the door to a 45 degree angle and press one foot downward on the foot jack while carefully
supporting the access door.
Removing the access door requires two people. The access door is
CAUTION heavy and may become unstable after it is freed from the hinge pins.
25 To raise the door off the hinge pins, gently swivel the access door clockwise and lift the door free.
Be careful when handling the door to avoid damaging its plastic cover (skin).
Note
26 Carefully lift the new access door from the crate and position it in front of the expansion module at a 45
degree angle.
27 Lift and mount the door onto the hinges.
28 Verify the door is seated upon all three hinge pins.
29 Reattach the two door dampers. For each damper, press the damper onto the ball joint.
30 Install the twelve supplied magazines into the storage area beneath the 72-slot I/E station opening.
31 Install the two calibration targets on the storage magazines beneath the 72-slot I/E station opening.
• Column 2, section 8
• Column 2, section 10

32 Mount the IEM1 circuit card onto the access door filter bracket and snap it over the four pegs on the
bracket.
33 Use a 2.5mm hex wrench to install the M4x10 screw to secure the IEM1 card in place.
M4x10 screw
34 Insert the I/E cable into the slit of the protective cable sheath. Bend the cable sheath away from the I/E
cable and gently press the cable into the sheath.
35 Drape the I/E cable (W6) over the top damper and insert the cable’s connector into the top connection
on the IEM1 card until it snaps into place.
36 Use a 2.5 mm hex wrench to secure the I/E cable to the door using a P clamp.
Place the P clamp around the cable (not the sheath) and secure it to the upper damper bracket
mounting hole.
p-clamp
roof p-clamp
37 Place the second P clamp around the I/E cable and secure it to the carrier bracket in the roof of the
expansion module using a 2.5 mm hex wrench to install one screw to the right of the vacant cable carrier
screw holes.
38 With the access door fully open, verify that the I/E cable has a small amount of slack.
When the access door is closed the slack from the I/E cable forms a “U” shape and protrudes toward
the firewall. See the following illustration.
40 From an adjacent module, view the I/E cable and verify that the I/E cable is within 12.7mm (1/2 inch)
from the frame cable bracket’s main surface and that the cable is flush within +/- 12.7mm from the edge
of the frame cable bracket. See the following illustration.

“U” protrusion
small amount of slack
edge of frame cable bracket
cable bracket’s main surface
41 From inside the access door of the expansion module you are upgrading, position the I/E station so that
its bottom edge rests on the bottom of the opening in the access door.
To avoid scratching or damaging the I/E stations handle them with care.
Note
42 Align the I/E station side flange mounting holes with those on the access door.
43 After testing the cable clearance, open the access door.
44 To initiate securing the I/E station to the door frame before mounting it to the door, use a 2.5 mm hex
wrench to insert (do not tighten) the eight screws in the door.

eight 2.5 mm screws

45 After inserting the screws, tighten the screws to ensure the bottom edge of the shroud is flat against the
cross bar of the door opening. Make certain there is no gap.
Make certain bottom edge of

shroud is flat against the cross
bar and there is NO gap
46 Repeat Step 40 through Step 45 to install the second I/E station.

47 On the left I/E station door, attach the 12-pin connector end of the cable to the door lock connector and
the 10-pin cable connector into IEM1 card.
48 On the right I/E station door, connect the 12-pin connector end of the cable to the door lock connector
and the 10-pin connector end to the IEM1 card.
W6 I/E cable
10-pin connector
10-pin connector
12-pin connector
12-pin connector
49 On the I/E station closest to the door hinge, tuck the cable behind the door gasket flange.
50 Open and close each I/E station door to ensure proper alignment. If the doors are not opening and
closing properly, return to Step 41 on page 814.

51 Install the supplied magazines into each of the I/E stations.
I/E station magazines
storage
52 Using a 3 mm hex wrench to reinstall the access door latches of the expansion module to the right of
the new access door. Make certain the latches are positioned correctly.
Top two
latches have
rollers pointing
down
bottom 2 latches
have rollers pointing
up

53 Close the I/E stations and all access doors.
55 Log on to the library as a service user. See the Scalar i2000 / i6000 Maintenance Guide.
56 From the LMC, run Configure by clicking Tools > Teach > Configure.
See the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide for more information.
57 After completing the configure process, run Calibrate click Tools > Teach > Calibrate.
58 Run a complete Install Verification Test est to verify proper installation by clicking Tools > Verification
Tests > Install. The results appear on the Verification Tests dialog box after the test is complete.
59 If using Auto Teach, make certain to turn this feature back on.
60 You must modify and configure any existing partitions that include resources altered or removed by the
change in the expansion module physical configuration to incorporate the new I/E station.
In the LMC, click Setup > Partitions > Configure to modify partitions and create new ones.
See the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide for more information about working with partitions.
61 Assign the new I/E station and storage slot in the new access to their appropriate partitions.
62 If the magazines on the access door are assigned to partitions, you must import all the cartridges you
removed from the previous expansion module access door to the appropriate partitions in the new
access door.
63 If there is not enough space for all the cartridges from the previous access door due to the larger I/E
station, reassign the access door’s storage slots to appropriate partitions.
64 If appropriate, perform Partitions Defragmentation. Click Tools > Partitions Defragmentation.
The Partitions Defragmentation dialog box appears. This dialog box shows a graphical representation
of the tape magazines in the library. Magazines are color-coded to indicate which partition they belong
to. If the library has more than one module, click the arrow buttons to display the next or previous
module. If one or more partitions are fragmented, you can defragment them.
65 For more information on the I/E station features, see the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide.

Adding Aisle Lights
This section describes how to install aisle lights into your i2000 / i6000 library.
If you are installing aisle lights in conjunction with a webcam, install the
Note
webcam before the aisle lights. See Installing a Webcam on page 829.
The aisle light upgrade feature requires certain hardware levels be present in
Note
the i2000/i6000 library. Not all i2000’s in the install base have the necessary
hardware features. The Control Module serial number in your i2000/i6000
library configuration must be at least 203102253 or begin with 263.
Any i2000 / i6000 system with the required serial numbers should have the
proper hardware pre-installed.
Required hardware:
• Threaded studs in frame roof

• LBX2 Gen 2 (blue label) or LBX2 Gen 3 (red label)
If the library you are upgrading does not meet the required hardware criteria, do
NOT attempt to work around or upgrade the system. Instead, escalate the
situation through normal escalation paths. The customer must be contacted and
notified that the system is not compatible with the aisle light feature option.
Required tools: ESD strap, 7mm nut driver, wire cutters, Phillips #2 screwdriver
2 Open the access door.

aisle light assembly location
front of library
access door
4 Start the nuts onto the threads but do not tighten them down.
5 Slide the aisle light assembly through the keyholes and push toward the front of the library.
4 nuts
keyhole
aisle light assembly
6 Using a 7mm nut driver, tighten the 4 nuts snug against the keyholes.

4 nuts tightened

7 Route the cable into the P-clamp.
aisle light cable

P-clamp
8 Plug the aisle light cable into the aisle light assembly connector.
9 Install the P-clamp to the bolt and partially tighten the nut.
aisle light assembly

connector
bolt
nut
10 Pull any excess aisle light cable through the P-clamp towards the front of library.
11 Completely tighten the P-clamp nut.
12 Run the aisle light cable along top panel of the frame, routing it with any cables that exist, and feed the
cable through the rear access hole to the back side of the library.
rear access hole

13 Remove any cable ties along this route.
14 Install the three zip ties to secure the aisle light cable (and any other cables routed with it) in place along
the frame.
rear access hole
zip ties

top drive cluster

cover plate

cover plate
17 Complete routing the cable through the back side of the library.

aisle light cabling
aisle light cable to

LBX board
18 Plug the cable’s 1 x 2 connector end into the LBX board connector J19. For more information on the
LBX board, see LBX Board on page 873.
aisle light cable

top drive cluster

cover plate

cover plate

To avoid interference with the scanner, the aisle lights are automatically turned
Note
off whenever the Teach or Inventory functions are used.
22 After the Robotics Enabled Indicator turns solid green, log in to the library.
physical library.
24 From the LMC, select Setup > System Settings > Aisle Lights.

25 The Aisle Light Settings dialog box appears.
26 Initially to turn the lights on you must choose either 30 minutes or 1 Hour. If you choose Always Off
the aisle lights will not come on.
27 Click OK.
See the Scalar i6000 User’s Guide for more information concerning aisle lights.
28 Visually verify all the aisle lights in your system are on. You can view the aisle lights either through the
top filter of each access door or you can look down the aisle of the system via the side windows.
29 Open and close any I/E station and verify that the aisle lights shut off automatically when the robot scans
the I/E station.
Aisle lights can be configured to automatically switch on and off when the
Note
library’s webcam is operating, so if you see aisle lights coming on and off
unexpectedly, it could be because the webcam is operating. (For more
information about webcams, see Installing a Webcam on page 829.)

Installing a Webcam
This section lists the requirements for and describes how to install a webcam inside a module, which can
be used to monitor activity inside the library. Webcam requirements include:
• Fire suppression hole is not currently in use
• External 110v power source
• Cable from external ethernet port to webcam interface module
• Aisle lights
• Scalar i6000, Library Code i10.2 (minimum)
If an external power source is not available, the webcam may be powered

Note
by the library using the adapter cable included in the webcam kit.
The webcam can be mounted in any module which does not have a loader bracket. For maximum efficiency,
the webcam should be installed in the middle module of a multi-module configuration. This allows the
webcam to zoom and pan equally in all directions. For maximum visibility, you should consider installing two
webcams in large libraries with multiple expansion modules.
1 From the inside of the library, locate the round hole at the top of the library. If the hole is covered with
a plastic plug, remove the plug and discard it. The camera mounts from inside the frame through this
hole.
2 Loosen the four screws securing the aisle light assembly, and slide the assembly backwards so that it
hangs freely. You will re-install this assembly after the webcam is mounted.

3 Remove the metal mounting bracket from the installation packet. Loosen the T10 screw enough to allow
both sides of the bracket to slide freely.
This stud screws into

the bottom of the
camera
T10 Screw
Mounting hole edges fit into these slot
4 With the stud facing downwards, position and expand the mounting bracket so that the edges of the
mounting hole fit inside the bracket’s slots. The side of the mounting bracket with the stud should face
away from the place where the aisle lights assembly was bolted to the top of the frame.
5 Make sure the mounting bracket is expanded as much as possible to ensure a tight fit, and then tighten
the T10 screw securely.
6 Screw the webcam onto the protruding stud on the mounting bracket. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. The
webcam may not pan properly if it is overtightened. To orient the webcam in the correct direction, turn
the webcam clockwise or counter clockwise until the cable attached to the webcam points to the rear of
the module, again taking care to not overtighten.

7 Replace the aisle light assembly and tighten the screws securing it to the top of the frame.
8 Remove the webcam interface module from the installation kit. This rectangular module has two data
ports on one end, and a female input for an AC power cable on the other end. Remove the rectangular
piece of double-sided velcro included in the kit, and then remove the paper backing from one side of the
velcro piece. Apply the sticky side of the velcro to the back of the interface module.
9 If necessary, remove the mid-module cover plate. Remove the remaining paper backing from the velcro
and attach the sticky side of the interface module to the open area between the top and bottom drive
clusters.
Route webcam cable downwards

through the channel on the other side
of this panel
Remove this mid-module cover

plate and attach interface module
10 Route the webcam cable through the channel on the right side of the frame.
11 Insert the customer’s Ethernet cable into the interface module’s Data In port.
12 Insert the included Ethernet cable into the interface module’s Data Out port, and then insert the other
end of the cable into the end of the webcam’s power cord.

13 Insert the included power cable into the end of the interface module opposite the end where ports are
located, and then connect the power cable to an AC power source. Depending on where the power
source is located, route the power cable either upwards through the same channel containing the
webcam cord, or downward in the channel on the right so it can exit the frame at the bottom.
14 Assist the customer with Installation of the webcam software included in the kit on a customer provided
host. Then configure the webcam as described in the webcam’s user’s guide. (Refer to the
documentation that came with the webcam, or download webcam documentation from www.axis.com.)
During the installation and configuration process you must specify an administrator who has
permissions to change webcam parameters and adjust functionality.
15 Test webcam operation by verifying that the webcam can pan, tilt, and zoom in all directions.
Entering the Webcam’s IP Address

When you install a webcam in your library, the library aisle lights can be configured to turn on when the
camera is operated and then turn off when the camera is stopped. To enable the library to control when
the aisle lights should be switched on and off in synchronization with camera usage, you must enter the
camera's IP address.
1 From the main console, select Setup > System Settings > Camera Host/IP.
The Camera Host/IP dialog box appears.
2 Specify the host name or IP address of the Web camera that's connected to your intranet.
3 Click OK.

Installation Testing and Verification
This chapter contains testing procedures for performing the following:
• Verifying the Hardware Installation on page 833

• Installation Verification Test Overview on page 835
• Running the Installation Verification Test on page 853
• Completing the Installation Verification Checklist on page 860
Verifying the Hardware Installation

To verify the hardware, follow these steps:
1 Verify that the library is leveled based on the instructions in the appropriate section:
• Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module (Gen 1 and Gen 2) on page 19 (see Verifying Level
Condition on page 23)
• Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 1 on page 43 (see Verifying Level Condition on page 49)
• Installing a Multi-Module Library - Gen 2 Dual-Robot Configuration on page 185 (see Verifying
Level Condition on page 191)
3 On the operator panel, press the Robotics Enabled button to turn on power to the accessor assembly.

4 Verify that the Robotics Enabled and Status indicators above the Library Management Console (LMC)
are illuminated in solid green state.
Status indicator
Robotics Enabled
indicator/button
touch screen
5 Log onto the LMC as a service user.

6 Verify that the LMC is displayed and there are no yellow or red sub-system statuses. If there are yellow
or red statuses, see the Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide for corrective procedures.
7 For each partition, verify that all drives are ready by performing the following:
a. From the LMC, select the partition using the view menu.
b. Click Monitor > Drives and verify all expected drives are available.
8 Proceed as follows:
• For Gen 2 new installs and upgrades from Gen 1 to Gen 2 systems, proceed to Installation
Verification Test Overview on page 835.
• For all other configurations, go to next step.
9 From the LMC, click Tools > Teach to perform a configuration and a calibration on the library.
The Teach dialog box appears. The default choice is Configure.
10 Click Start.
Completed.”
834 Installation Testing and Verification

11 Select Calibrate and click Start.
During the calibration teach process, the picker moves to the home position, which is X-Y coordinate
position 0,0. It then moves to a magazine at the top and a magazine at the bottom on each side of each
module, and stores those positions in coordinates relative to the 0,0 position. Teach results appear in
the Results area when the process completes. If the calibration teach process completes successfully,
the dialog box closes automatically.
Once you have verified the hardware using this procedure, go to the Installation Verification Test Overview
on page 835 and proceed with those instructions.
If hardware verification indicates problems, consult the troubleshooting procedures in the Scalar i2000/
i6000 Maintenance Guide.
Installation Verification Test Overview

The installation verification test enables you to verify that the library’s installation and configuration is
complete and functioning correctly. The installation verification test runs the following individual tests:
• Library alignment test

• Picker assembly test
• I/E station assembly test
• Get/Put test
• Scanner fiducial test
These tests require that you log on as an admin or service user. The accessor assembly must be ready and
functional, and the library must be powered on. In addition, the library must be in an offline state, and at
least one scratch tape must be inserted in the I/E station.
The smaller library configuration will require about 1 hour and the larger configurations will require as long
as 4 hours to run the installation verification test. The time to complete individual tests on an twelve module
configuration is approximately:
• Library alignment test - 45 minutes

• Picker assembly test - 4 minute
• I/E station assembly test - 7 minutes for each I/E station
• Get/Put test - 2 hours and 45 minutes
• Scanner fiducial test - 75 minutes
These times do not include debug or repair time.

Note
For dual-robotics libraries: All tests should be run using the active robot.
Note
There is no need to fail over and re-test using the passive robot, except under
the following circumstances:
• When initially installing a dual robotics library, or when upgrading a single-
robotics library to a dual-robotics library: Run full IVT on the active robot, then
fail over and run just the Accessor FRU test and the Picker FRU test on the
passive robot.
• If there is a problem with the passive robot, you will need to run tests
specifically on it.

Installation Verification Test Functions
Use the Verification Tests dialog box to run the installation verification test and view results. Figure 258
shows the parts of the Verification Tests dialog box. To display the dialog box, click Tools > Verification
Tests.
Figure 258 Verification Tests Dialog Box
test results area
selected test
drive inventory
library inventory
blade inventory
test report output
display test logs
close window
refresh window
start/stop test
view Help window

Library Alignment Test
The library alignment test is a part of the Installation Verification Test, but you can choose Custom to run
this test independently. You can use this test to performs the following tasks:
• Performs accessor X-axis and Y-axis travel test (also calls the FRU accessor assembly test; see
Accessor Assembly Test on page 837)
• Calibrates library and checks calibration offsets by comparing them to the default values for the
drives and I/E stations
• Checks magazine offsets
• Checks collected offset alignments for magazines, I/E stations, and drive sleds
• Checks joint alignment quality
• Verifies robot alignment (Gen 2 only)
• Tests preload tensioner is set properly (Gen 2 only)
Get/Put Test
The Get/Put test performs the following tasks:
• Performs a Get/Put of a scratch tape in the top and bottom slots of each magazine that supports
the scratch tape’s media
• Performs a Get/Put of existing media if no scratch tape is found or if the top or bottom is occupied
• Moves a scratch tape to one row in each frame to test cross-frame alignment
• Uses a scratch tape to perform a Get/Put in each compatible drive
Accessor Assembly Test

The accessor assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Checks for the module terminator (the terminator on the LBX board in the last expansion module)
• Checks the joint alignment (makes sure all the joints on the X-axis are flush)
• Checks the x-axis gear rack and power rail across all frame and gear rail joints (Gen 2 libraries)
• Performs two passes around the library to ensure the X-axis and Y-axis encoders are reading
correctly and the belts are not slipping
• Tests the calibration sensor
• Checks the alignment of the accessor to the control module
Picker Assembly Test

The picker assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Performs pivot left and right check

• Performs reach and retract five times
• If the LMC gets its side done, performs a Get/Put of the selected cell
• Scans the control module serial number to make sure the scanner is reading properly
Drive Sled Assembly Test

The drive sled assembly test performs the following tasks:

• Calibrates the drive sled
• Checks the quality of the sled’s fiducial
• Performs Get/Put to the drive
I/E Assembly Test

The I/E assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Locks and unlocks the I/E station

• Calibrates the I/E station and check offsets collected
• Checks each magazine’s fiducial in the I/E station
• Performs Get/Put tests on all the I/E station cells
Scan Barcode Test

The scan barcode test performs the following tasks:
• Moves to selected cell coordinate and scans the barcode label

• Checks to ensure the label reads the same from top to bottom
• Verifies the quality of the barcode labels and checks to make sure barcode labels are in a readable
position
Scanner Fiducial Test

The scanner fiducial test performs the following tasks:
• Scans and checks each magazine fiducial

• Scans and checks each drive sled fiducial
• Tests the calibration sensor
• Calibrates and checks repeatability, up to three times for failed calibration targets
Library Inventory
This inventory list provides the following statistical information:
• Frame card serial numbers

• Power supply serial numbers
• Number of cartridges in the library
• Controller serial number and firmware information for the following:
• Management control blade
• Control management blade
• Robotic control unit or RCU
• Picker
• I/E stations
Drive Inventory
This inventory list provides the following information about each drive:

• Drive sled locations
• Drive sled controller serial numbers
• Drive sled controller boot and application firmware versions
• Drive brick serial numbers and firmware versions
• Drive logical serial number if the library is configured for logical serial number addressing
Blade Inventory
This inventory list provides the following information about each Fibre Channel I/O blade:
• Location of each blade

• Serial number of the blades
• Firmware version
Test Results
The results of all subtests are displayed on the Verification Tests dialog box after each individual test is
completed. See Table 13 for an explanation of test results.
Table 13 Test Results
Test Results Explanation
PASSED Completed the test without reported errors.
FAILED An error has been found and needs to be corrected. A fatal error, or an error that
causes a part of the system to become disabled, will halt the test.
INCOMPLETE This portion of a test was incomplete due to an interruption or a portion of the test
was run (for example, no scratch tape was used so must only use existing tapes).
An incomplete will occur when the door is opened, an abort command is issued, or
when the Robotics Enabled button is pressed.
SKIPPED This portion of the test was skipped. The cause is that either a scratch tape was
not present or the library was not configured for the test.
WARNING A warning is additional information about the test that the user should know. For
example, if a calibration failed, but the stored offsets are analyzed, a warning
should be posted that states that the offset check might not be accurate.
STOPPED The test was interrupted. The log will show the result to provide a record of test
interruption.
A single problem in the library can cause failed results in multiple tests. After
Note
taking action to correct a failed result, run tests that yielded failed results again.

Verification Test Reports
Verification tests produce graphical reports that let you easily see if the test generated passed or failed
results. Each result is shown in a different color:
• P - passed (green)
• F - failed (red)
There are eight types of graphical reports. Each individual test generates two or more graphical reports
(except for the scan barcode test, which does not generate graphical reports). The following sections show
an example of each type of graphical report and actions to take to correct a failed result.
To view the graphical reports for a test, click Reports on the Verification Tests dialog box. Figure 259
shows the parts of the report window.
Each test also produces a log that provides useful information about the test, failures, and troubleshooting
actions. Click the Text tab to view the text for each report. See Verification Test Logs on page 851 for more
information.

Figure 259 Report Window
click to see results click to see results

for the next frame for the next test
click to save a copy of click to view Online

the results in PDF format Help
click to display results

for a previously run test
(results for the last three
tests are retained)
click to close the report

window
click to view the text log
graphic showing
P (passed) and F (failed)
results

Joint Alignments
The joint alignment report shows the results for tests of alignment between frames. It also shows the results
for tests of accessor travel to all corners of the library.
If the report shows one or more failed results for joint alignment, do one of the following:
• Click the Text tab to view the log for more detailed information about failure location and
troubleshooting actions. See Verification Test Logs on page 851 for more information.
• If all the joints passed testing but accessor movement failed, manually move the accessor down the
aisle in each direction to locate any places where motion of the accessor is not smooth or is
restricted. Determine the cause of the binding and fix.
• Gen 1 libraries — Realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom
X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
• Gen 2 libraries — Realign the rack or rail at the location of the failure.
Figure 260 Joint Alignments Graphical Report

Vertical Alignments
The vertical alignments report shows the results for test of vertical alignment of tape magazines on the drive-
side and door-side of each frame, and for vertical alignment of each I/E station.
• If the report shows a failed result for the drive-side or door-side, make sure that all tape magazines
are installed properly on that side and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on to the
magazines.
• If the report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make sure the I/E station and front door are
completely shut.
• Gen 1 libraries — If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the middle X-axis
rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
• Gen 2 libraries — If the test continues to fail, the robot may be installed incorrectly. Check the text
report under Robot Alignment to see if it is. If the library has two robots, you can perform a robot
failover operation and re-run the Accessor Assembly FRU test using the other robot to help
determine if the problem is with the frame or with the robot. If the test fails with the second robot,
the problem is most likely with the frame.
Figure 261 Vertical Alignments Graphical Report

Horizontal Alignments
The horizontal alignments report shows the results for tests of horizontal alignment of tape magazines on
the drive-side and door-side across frames, and for horizontal alignment of I/E stations across frames.
This graphical report is not generated for libraries with only one frame.
Note
• If the report shows a failed result for the drive-side or door-side, make sure that all tape magazines
are installed properly on that side and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on to the
magazines. If still not corrected, you may need to shim the door.
completely shut.
• If running the test again still generates failed results:
• Gen 1 libraries — Realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom
X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
• Gen 2 libraries — Gather a snapshot and the VT logs, and escalate to Engineering.
Figure 262 Horizontal Alignments Graphical Report

Calibration Offsets
The calibration offsets report shows the results for tests of tape magazine, drive sled, and I/E station offsets
compared to predefined tolerances. Reports are generated for drive-side and door-side for all frames.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, make sure the
magazines at the location of the failure are installed properly and that the calibration targets are
correctly snapped on to the magazines and are in the correct locations. See the Scalar i6000
Maintenance Guide for correct placement of Gen 1 calibration targets. See Calibration Target
Positions on page 470 for correct positioning of Gen 2 calibration targets. If calibration targets are
affected, run the Teach Calibrate test again as follows before re-running the IVT:
a. From the LMC, click Tools > Teach to perform a configuration and a calibration on the library.
The Teach dialog box appears.
b. Select Calibrate and click Start.
Completed.”
• Make certain the magazines are fully seated in the I/E station.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make sure the I/E station and front
door are completely shut.
• Gen 2 libraries — Check to make sure the robot is installed properly (see the Robot Alignment
section of the text report) and the X-preload tensioner is set correctly (see the text report).

Figure 263 Calibration Offsets Graphical Report

Boundary/Accessibility
The boundary/accessibility test checks to see how close the magazines and sleds are to the maximum
allowable move range of the accessor. This test is a database check only. It confirms that the robot/picker
can physically access the slots installed in the library because its range of motion allows the robot/picker to
reach the coordinate’s X,Y position.
• If the report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, make sure the magazines at the
location of the failure are installed properly and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on
to the magazines.
completely shut.
• Gen 2 libraries — Gather a snapshot and the VT logs, and escalate to Engineering.
Figure 264 Boundary/Accessibility Graphical Report

Get/Put
The Get/Put report shows the results for tests of the picker assembly while performing one get and one put
function for each tape magazine. The picker will use the selected scratch tape or the existing tape if it finds
one at the target.
• If the report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, make sure the magazines at the
location of the failure are installed properly.
• If there are a large number of issues, use rubbing alcohol to clean the picker fingers and the detents
in the side of the tapes.
• If the problems persist, you may need to replace the picker assembly (Gen 1) or robot (Gen 2).
Figure 265 Get/Put Graphical Report

Scan Fiducials
The scan fiducials report shows the results for tests of the fiducial barcode on each tape magazine and drive
sled, including the width, expected Y position (shift), and the number of hits the scanner receives while
traveling up and down. (Only known magazines are tested.)
• If the report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, replace the affected magazines.
Ensure the labels on the replacement magazines look good.
• If the library is aligned and there are multiple failed results, the scanner should be inspected and
replaced if necessary. (Gen 2 libraries, replace entire robot.). If the library contains two robots,
perform a robot failover, then re-run test to confirm the problem lies with the robot.
Figure 266 Scan Fiducials Graphical Report

Picker Pivot/Reach
The picker pivot/reach report shows the results for tests of the picker while performing rotation and reach/
retract actions.
• If the report shows one or more failed results, inspect the picker. It should rotate easily by hand, and
the fingers should spring into a clamped position. Make sure both rotation axis belts are free of
debris. Also make sure that the storage is correctly seated in the I/E station and that the I/E station
and front door are completely shut.
• If the problems persist, you may need to replace the picker assembly (Gen 1) or robot (Gen 2).
Figure 267 Picker Pivot/Reach Graphical Report

Verification Test Logs
Each verification test produces a test log that details all information and results from the individual tests and
subtests. In addition, the log includes information to help you understand the test results and to help resolve
any problems encountered. To view a test log, click Reports on the Verification Tests dialog box to display
the report window, and then click the Text tab.
You can view results for the five most recent tests. Click Reports, and then click the test results you want
to view.
This log file is appended with data as each test finishes. You can repeat the test if any problems are found
and fixed. If the Verification Tests dialog box was not closed during the retesting, all results are contained
in one log file.
To save the information that the test generates, click Send. If you are using the remote LMC client, you can
choose to save the log to your hard drive. If you choose to save directly to your hard drive, the report listing
and test log are combined into one text file.
Figure 268 shows an example of a test log. It provides the following information:
• The test output is from the library alignment test.

• The test output is for the robot on which the test was run (the currently active robot).
• The test title is always shown between rows of equal signs.
• A brief guide for understanding coordinates and offsets used in the test results is provided near the
beginning of the log.
• The X-axis and Y-axis limits applied by this test are shown. FAILED output is placed between
brackets; for example, (30) and [45].
• The results of the subtest are displayed between dashed lines.
• Coordinates are represented as A (aisle), F (frame), R (rack), S (section), C (column), and R (row).
• All location values are in 0.1 mm.
• All results that you should review are identified with four arrows (>>>>) in the column to the left of
the detailed results.
• At the end of every test, summary results of every subtest are given. The overall test result is
displayed between asterisk lines, and a summary of subtest results follows. SeeTable 13 on page
839 to determine the meaning of the results.

Figure 268 Example Test Log Output

Running the Installation Verification Test
When the installation verification test is running, no one else can log on to the library. The message,
“Verification Test is Running,” is displayed in the Activity area of the main LMC display.
1 Log on as an admin or service user.
library.
3 Click Tools > Verification Tests.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears.
4 From the Select Test drop-down list, click Install.

5 Click Start.

6 If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes.
The IVT Pre-Test Questionnaire appears. The Gen 1 and Gen 2 questionnaires are slightly different,
as shown below.
Gen 1 Pre-test Questionnaire
Gen 2 Pre-test Questionnaire
7 Complete the pre-test questionnaire by clicking inside the box next to the questions.
You cannot continue with the installation verification test until you have completed and verified the
question requests on this questionnaire.
Make sure you physically verify each of the questions on the questionnaire.
Note
Each of the items listed can cause the installation verification test to have
unexpected behavior and unreliable results. The tests must be re-run if
they fail.

8 After you complete the questionnaire, click Next.
The following dialog box appears.
9 Insert a “scratch” cartridge into the I/E station, and then click Next.
• Make sure that your scratch tapes are formatted and contain no data that
Note
cannot be overwritten. Scratch tapes must have barcode labels with valid
volume serial (volser) numbers on them. Also, you might find it useful to
write down the volser number so that you can identify your scratch tapes.
• This procedure will not damage any cartridges that are already installed
in the library.
• If the scratch cartridge becomes lodged in a drive or magazine, it must be
manually removed from the library. If not removed, the cartridge will
become part of the partition the next time the accessor assembly is
enabled.
The I/E station will be locked until the inventory is complete.

10 Select a “scratch” cartridge of each media type listed on the following dialog box.
You can select one “scratch” cartridge per media type. Each test that
Note
requires a scratch cartridge will call the media types as needed.

11 After you select the cartridges, click Finish.
As the tests run, the library will generate RAS tickets if problems are discovered. You must close the
Verification Tests dialog box to view those tickets. Return to the Verification Tests dialog box to view
test results.

12 After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
The report window appears with the Graphical tab displayed. Use the Graphical tab to view graphical
reports and to quickly identify areas where failed results occurred.
Use the toolbar to navigate between graphical reports or to save the results in PDF format. For more
information about how to work with graphical reports, see Verification Test Reports on page 840.

13 For more detailed test results, click the Text tab to view the test log generated by the LMC.
Review the test log to see troubleshooting information. To e-mail the test log or save it as a text file, click
Send and then specify the output location. For information about how to interpret and save test logs,
see Verification Test Logs on page 851.
14 To see the results for a previous test, click Reports, and then click a test. The LMC saves the most
recent five test results.
15 When you are finished working with the test results, click Close to close the result window.
If you are finished performing verification tests, click Close to close the Verification Tests dialog box.

Completing the Installation Verification Checklist
This Installation Verification checklist provides a convenient way to review the configuration of the library
and, in some cases, document the settings as configured. Before leaving the site, perform the following
checklist in the following sequence. Most of these procedures are performed in the Library Management
Console (LMC).
?Verify that the proper library system firmware level and drive brick firmware level are loaded on the library.
Review the Quantum Support site for current releases at www.quantum.com/osr/.
? Review all Tech Bulletins and Release Notes applicable to the firmware being loaded or running on the
library.
? Verify that there are no subsystems with a Failed, Degraded, or Warning status. If there are, open the
RAS ticket and resolve according to the repair instructions.
? Verify all physical components, connections, and cabling.

• Visually inspect connections to ensure all cables are fully plugged in.
• Check the status and connection LED's on all blades to ensure proper functionality and
connectivity
• Ensure power has been applied to all components.
• Ensure there are no RAS “amber” LEDs flashing or solidly lit indicating component error.
? Verify proper network configuration.

1 Click Setup > Network Configuration > IPv4 Configuration and verify all entries.
• Under Host Settings:
• DHCP Enabled OR Disabled per customer network ________________
• Library Name ________________
• IP Address ________________
• Subnet Mask ________________
• Default Gateway ________________
• Under Port Settings
• Auto Negotiate ________________
• Speed ________________
2 Have the customer system administrator ping the library.
• From within the subnet
• From outside the subnet

? Verify the proper Time and Date is established within the library. Click Setup > Date and Time. The
following entries are visible from this screen:
• NTP Setting ________________
• Primary Server IP Address ________________
• Secondary Server IP Address ________________
• Tertiary Server IP Address ________________
• Date ________________
• Time ________________
• Time Zone ___________________
? Verify proper e-mail configuration.
1 Click Setup > Email Configuration to verify that the e-mail server is configured correctly.
2 Click Setup > Notifications > System Setup and click the Rules tab. Each Severity has an associated
list of addresses to send automatic notification messages. Severity 1 should contain
techsup@quantum.com and any customer specified addresses. Severity 2 – 3 are optional and can be
disabled in certain library firmware levels. (Note: 4 columns are provided below for convenience, there
is no requirement for or limitation to 4 entries).
Table 14 Automatic E-mail Notification
Severity e-mail 1 e-mail 2 e-mail 3 e-mail 4
1 techsup@quantum.com
3 Send an e-mail to an address specified by the customer system administrator to confirm end-to-end e-
mail functionality. Go to Monitor > System. Select Send and type in the e-mail address.
?Verify that the Physical Library is properly set up. The library’s default configuration is to disable Automatic
Teach and Automatic Inventory. This setting is recommended to save start-up time during a library power
on or a Robotics Enable. If a customer will be routinely performing bulk load operations or removing/
installing media without using the I/E station, it is recommended that Automatic Inventory be enabled.
• Automatic Teach _____Enable______Disable

• Automatic Inventory_____Enable______Disable
• Logical SN Addressing_____Enable______Disable
• Automatic Drive Unload_____Enable______Disable

?Verify that all licenses installed per the customer's order are properly functioning. Click Setup > Licenses.
(Note: 8 rows are listed below for convenience, but there is no required number of entries).
Table 15 Customer License Verification
License Key Feature Name Status Expiration
?Verify partitioning. Click View and select the partition you want. Then click Monitor > Partitions > Status.
Verify that the information displayed for each partition is correct. Make sure the partition’s status field states
“Online.”
Table 16 Library Partitioning
Library Number of Drives Drive Type Number of Storage Cells I/E
Physical Library
Partition 1
Partition 2
Partition 3
Partition 4
Partition 5
Partition 6
Partition 7
Partition 8
Partition 9
Partition 10
Partition 11
Partition 12
Partition 13
Partition 14
Partition 15
Partition 16

? Verify all FC I/O blade port configurations. Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > Port Configuration.
Select each installed FC I/O blade and one of the 6 ports. All FC I/O blades have the same port mode
settings, as shown in Table 17 .
Table 17 FC I/O Blade Default Port Settings
Connection
Port Loop ID Speed Frame Size Port Mode Private/Public
Option
? Verify that the physical library and all partitions are online.
• In the LMC, click View and select a partition. On the screen that displays, verify the Status shows
as Online. If offline, click Operations > Change Mode and set to Online. Repeat this for each
partition that was created.
? Verify Host Type Settings.
• In the LMC, click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host to verify the values.
? Verify all Host LUN Mapping.
• In the LMC, click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host , and then click LUN Mapping to verify the
values.
? Verify proper switch zoning, if one or more are connected to the library.
? Verify the host bus adapter (HBA) configuration and port settings on the host(s).
? Verify that the Media Changer and Devices appear in the device list for each host.
? Save the library’s configuration file onto a remote computer running the remote LMC client.
Perform the following steps after verifying configuration and connectivity:

1 Two sets of keys are shipped with each module. Two keys (FRU ID 401) open the front (access) door.
Two keys (FRU ID 402) open the rear (service) door. All modules are keyed the same, so there is no
chance that a customer who has two or more modules could end up with different keys. All keys are to
be left with the customer and should be stored in a safe location.

2 Store the library tools, manuals, and miscellaneous items (for example, tools and spare fuse box). Keep
them available for service activity.

Testing and Calibrating the Digital Level
This appendix provides step-by-step instructions for performing the following:
• Testing the Digital Level on page 865

• Calibrating the Digital Level on page 867

Perform this test before each use of the Pro 3600 digital level and any time the digital level has been
dropped or is being used in an environment that varies ±9°F from the environment in which it was last
calibrated. If the digital level fails the accuracy test you must recalibrate the level before use.
Follow this procedure to test the digital level:

upside down. Be sure to set the level in the exact spot as in Step 1 on page 865. Wait 10 seconds for
should be on the right side. Be sure to set the level in the exact spot as in Step 1 on page 865. Wait 10
seconds for the level to completely settle and take note of the angle on the display.
5 Compare the level display readings that you captured from Step 1 through Step 4. If any of the four
readings vary from one another more than 0.1 degree, you must recalibrate the level. For more
information, see Calibrating the Digital Level on page 867. If the variance between the readings are
within the 0.1 degree limit, the level is within compliance and is ready to be used.
866 Testing and Calibrating the Digital Level

Calibrating the Digital Level
This section describes how to calibrate the Pro 3600 digital level.This procedure re-calibrates the level
through its entire 360 degree range by recording four horizontal and four vertical settings. You should
perform this procedure whenever the accuracy test shows a variance larger than ±0.1 degree.
Follow this procedure to calibrate the digital level:
1 Turn on the level by pushing the ON/OFF button. Place the level on a flat surface free of dust or debris.
You can use any horizontal surface within 10 degrees of level and any vertical surface within 10 degrees
of plumb to perform the calibration. You must use the same surface(s) throughout the entire calibration
process. If at any time the calibration process fails or will not continue, you can turn the level off and on
and then restart the calibration procedure from Step 2.
Each time you position the level during the calibration process, wait a minimum
Note
of 10 seconds before pressing the HOLD button to advance to the next step.
Also ensure that the level is placed in the same position each time it is moved.
2 Press and hold the HOLD and ALT ZERO buttons simultaneously until SUP is displayed; this usually
takes three seconds. Release the buttons once SUP is displayed. SUP will display for a few seconds
and then the [ 0 ] is displayed. The level is now ready to be calibrated.

3 Place the level so that the display is facing you and lettering on the face of the level is right-side up.
Mark the position of the level so you can place the level back in the same spot when you move it during
this calibration process. Wait 10 seconds for the level to completely settle. Without moving the level,
gently press the HOLD button until [ 1 ] appears on the display.
4 Rotate the level so that it faces away from you and the screw on the back of the level is on the left side.
Ensure that the level is positioned in the same spot as Step 3. Wait 10 seconds for the level to
completely settle. Without moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until [ 2 ] appears on the
display.
5 Roll the level towards you so the display is facing you but the lettering on the face of the level is upside
down. Ensure that the level is positioned in the same spot as Step 3. Wait 10 seconds for the level to
completely settle. Without moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until an upside down [ 3 ]
appears on the display.

6 Rotate the level so that it faces away from you and the screw on the back of the level is on the right side.
Ensure that the level is positioned in the same spot as Step 3. Wait 10 seconds for the level to
completely settle. Without moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until an upside down [ 4 ]
appears on the display. At this time, all of the horizontal calibration settings are done.
7 Stand the level on its end so the display is facing you and the text on the face of the level can be read
from bottom to top. Mark the position of the level so you can place it in the same spot when you move
it during this vertical calibration process. Wait 10 seconds for the level to completely settle. Without
moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until a [ 5 ] appears on the display.

8 Turn the level around so the display is facing away from you and the screw on the back of the level is
at the top. Ensure that the level is positioned in the same spot as Step 7. Wait 10 seconds for the level
to completely settle. Without moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until a [ 6 ] appears on the
display.
9 Rotate the level end-for-end so the display is facing you and the text on the face of the level can be read
from top to bottom. Ensure that the level is positioned in the same spot as Step 7. Wait 10 seconds for
the level to completely settle. Without moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until a [ 7 ]
appears on the display.

10 Turn the level around so the display is facing away from you and the screw on the back of the level is
at the bottom. Ensure that the level is positioned in the same spot as Step 7. Wait 10 seconds for the
level to completely settle. Without moving the level, gently press the HOLD button until an [ 8 ] appears
on the display. If this last step is performed correctly the [ 8 ] will display for a short amount of time and
then the level will display the current angle measurement that it detects. The level is now calibrated and
is ready for use.

LBX Board and Terminator
This appendix describes the LBX board and terminator.
LBX Board
A module may contain one of three versions of the LBX board shown in Figure 269.
For information on the LBX terminator, see LBX Terminator on page 877.
• Library configurations of four modules or fewer may contain LBX2 Gen 1 or Gen 2 boards.
• Library configurations of five to eight modules must contain LBX2 Gen 2 boards.
• Library configurations of nine to twelve modules:

• Modules one through seven must contain LBX2 Gen 2
• Modules eight through twelve must contain LBX2 Gen 3
• If you are adding one or more expansion modules to an existing eight-module library, and the LBX
board is an earlier version, you must remove the LBX board from expansion module seven (position
eight) and replace it with the new version, LBX2 Gen 3.
For instructions on removing and replacing the LBX board and terminator, see the Scalar i2000/i6000
Maintenance Manual.
Red stickers identify the LBX2 Gen 3 board required in the expansion
Note
modules added to a library configuration greater than eight modules.

Figure 269 Comparison of LBX Board Versions
LBX2 Gen 01 LBX2 Gen 2

note connector position connector rotated 90°
blue label
on both connectors
LBX2 Gen 3
J19 rotated and moved beside connector J9
red label
on both connectors
874 LBX Board and Terminator

Figure 270 LBX Connections (LBX2 Gen 2)
connector: J14
connector: J1
plug: W1 to BPI or
from previous LBX
connector: J11
plug: W15 to door interlock (or
W43 to door switch loop in Gen 2 connector: J16
CMs with Dual Robotics )
connector: J10
CAN interface
connector: J19
plug: aisle light
connector: J3
connector: J17
connector: J2

Figure 271 LBX Connections (LBX2 Gen 3)
connector: J14
connector: J1
plug: W1 to BPI or
from previous LBX
connector: J11
plug: W15 to door interlock (or
W43 to door switch loop in Gen 2 connector: J16
CMs with Dual Robotics )
connector: J10
CAN interface
connector: J19
connector: J3
connector: J17
connector: J2

LBX Terminator
For information on the LBX board, see LBX Board on page 873. For information on interpreting the LBX
terminator LEDs, see Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs on page 892
• Any LBX board version LBX2 Gen 1 located in the last module in the library
Note
must be terminated using LBX terminator version 01 shown in Figure 272.
must be terminated using LBX terminator version 03 shown in Figure 272.
must be terminated using LBX terminator version 03 shown in Figure 272
Figure 272 Comparison of LBX Terminator Versions
Version 01 Version 03
Figure 273 LBX Board and Terminator Installed
LBX terminator
LBX board

Interpreting LED Codes
Blade status and Fibre port link LEDs can provide you with useful information to help you assess the state
of a library component. The primary library LEDs can be broken down into four groups based on behavior.
LEDs can help you assess the state of a library component. The primary library LEDs can be grouped as
follows:
• Interpreting Robot Status LEDs on page 879

• Interpreting Blade Status LEDs on page 881
• Interpreting Drive Status LEDs on page 884
• Interpreting Fibre Port Link LEDs on page 886
• Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs on page 889
• Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs on page 889
• Interpreting MCB Port LEDs on page 890
• Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs on page 892
• Interpreting Power Supply LEDs on page 894
Interpreting Robot Status LEDs

Six LEDs on the panel attached to the robot provide status about the robot. (See Figure 274.)
Table 18 describes what each LED means and how to troubleshoot.

Figure 274 Robot Status LEDs
Robot
LEDs
Table 18 Robot Status LEDs
When ON, indicates the

LED Troubleshooting
following
If the wrong LED is on, do the following:

• Remove the robot and start over with Step 1 on
page 497. Reset the collectors to the proper
Right Indicates this is a right-side robot position and reinstall the robot. (To remove
Position robot. the robot, first move it so that it is not directly
underneath the loader bracket. Open the
collector door, unlatch the yellow plastic locking
lever, lift the robot up so that its rollers clear the
racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
The Lock/Unlock handle is in the If this LED is off, do the following:

fully Locked position, and the
Sensors home/parking sensors are • Make sure the locking lever is in the full locked
Engaged positioned correctly for robot position.
operations. It is safe to use the • If the lever is locked and the LED is still off,
robot for library operations. replace the robot.
If this LED is off, do the following:

• If the Power Rail Engaged LED is also off,
troubleshoot that first and see if this LED comes
Robot Power Robot control power is ON
on.
• If the Power Rail Engaged LED is on, while this
LED is off, replace the robot.
880 Interpreting LED Codes

Table 18 Robot Status LEDs
When ON, indicates the

LED Troubleshooting
following
If this LED is off, do the following:

• Verify all four robot collectors are properly
engaged in the power rail. See Step 12 on page
506.
• Verify that all the power rails are installed
correctly and connected to each other. See
Installing the Power Rails on page 440)
Power Rail • Verify that the aisle cable assembly is connected
Connection to power rail is OK to the power rails on the front of library and to the
Engaged
SPA/SCC mount assembly on the back of the
library.
• Verify the three SPA/SCC mount assembly
cables are connected properly into the LMM
backplane. See Installing the SPA/SCC Mount
Assembly in the Control Module on page 477.
• If none of the above fixes the problem, replace
the robot.
If the wrong LED is on, do the following:

• Remove the robot and start over with Step 1 on
page 497. Reset the collectors to the proper
robot position and reinstall robot. (To remove the
Left Position Indicates this is a left-side robot robot, first move it so that it is not directly
underneath the loader bracket. Open the
collector door, unlatch the yellow plastic locking
lever, lift the robot up so that its rollers clear the
racks, and pull it out of the library, top end first.)
The robot’s X-axis home/parking If this LED is on, do the following:

sensors are disengaged. The
Sensors • Make sure the yellow locking lever is in the full
robot locking lever is fully
Disengaged locked position.
unlocked. It is safe to remove
the robot from the library. • Replace the robot.
Interpreting Blade Status LEDs

Each of the following library blades has a set of green, amber, and blue LEDs that indicate blade processor
status, health status, and power control status:
• Management control blade (MCB)
• Control management blade (CMB)
• Fibre Channel (FC) I/O blade
• Robotics control unit (RCU)

• Library motor drive (LMD)

Figure 275 shows the locations and colors of the status LEDs of the five blades that can be in the library.
Figure 275 Locations and Colors of Blade Status LEDs
management control blade blade LEDs

robotics control unit - left = blue
library motor drive - middle = amber
- right = green
blade LEDs
- left = green
- middle = amber control management blade
- right = blue FC I/O blade
Blade status LEDs provide troubleshooting information that you can use in conjunction with tickets that the
library creates. However, the LEDs might not directly correspond to tickets. The LEDs can indicate a
firmware or hardware problem so severe that the library cannot create or display a ticket. For example, if
the MCB firmware becomes inoperable, the amber LED flashes at 1 Hz, but the library might not be able to
display any related tickets.
For a description of each LED color and what its state might mean, see Table 19. For a description of how
the blade status LEDs appear under normal conditions, see Table 20.
Table 19 Explanations of Blade Status LED States
LED Color Represents Possible States and Explanations
Green Processor status • Solid off — blade’s main processor is not operating (or blade
is booting)
• Solid on — blade’s main processor is not operating
(however, this does not apply to the LMD; solid on indicates
that the LMD’s main processor is operating normally)
• Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — blade’s main
processor is operating normally
• Blinks 10 times every second (10 Hz) — identify mode
• Solid on for three seconds, then blinks twice at 1 Hz, and
then repeats — blade firmware is downloading

Table 19 Explanations of Blade Status LED States (Continued)
Amber Health status • Solid off — blade’s power and control subsystem is
operating normally
• Solid on — blade’s power and control subsystem has failed
Solid on also can mean that the blade’s power and control
subsystem firmware is autoleveling. In conjunction with the
blue amber LED blinking one time every 10 seconds, this is
a normal condition. Autoleveling takes about three minutes
for each blade, and blades within an I/O management unit
autolevel in series. It can take as long as three minutes for
the power and control subsystem to download. Never
remove a blade when the amber LED is solid on unless it has
been on continuously for at least 10 minutes.
Blue Power control status • Solid off — blade is not receiving power
• Solid on — blade is powered down; ready to be replaced
(swap mode)
• Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — blade is powered
on; operating normally
Table 20 Explanations of Blade Status LED States Under Normal Conditions
LED Color State and Explanation
Green Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — blade’s main processor is operating normally
(however, this does not apply to the LMD; solid on indicates that the LMD’s main
process is operating normally)
Amber Solid off — no errors are detected; blade’s power and control subsystem is operating
normally
Blue Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — blade is powered on; operating normally
Actions Based on LED States

When the RAS system is operating properly, service actions should be based on tickets first and foremost.
However, some situations occur when the amber LED indicates problems that are not detected by the ticket
system. You should always act on any amber LED that is solidly on, which indicates that the blade’s power
and control subsystem has failed. In this case, replace the blade.
When you replace a blade FRU or escalate a problem based on LED states, perform the following steps:
1 Observe and report the timing pattern of the blue, amber, and green LED group. Spend at least 30
seconds observing the LEDs and record the results in the service request (SR) and on any equipment
failure report form that is returned with the part. Proper reporting of all LED states is critical for
determining the root cause of the failure.
2 Capture a system snapshot and send it to technical support for analysis.

Interpreting Drive Status LEDs
The library reports all drive issues that can affect customer operations. In addition to examining library
reports, you should observe drive sled link LED and status LED activity.
The blinking codes described in Table 21 on page 885 are the same for Fibre
Note
Channel and SCSI drives in the UDS-2 drive sleds.
Figure 276 shows the locations of the status LEDs and the Fibre Channel link LED on the rear of a UDS-2
drive sled.
Figure 276 Rear View of Fibre Channel Drive Sled (UDS-2)
status LEDs:
- top = blue
- middle = amber
fibre port - bottom = green
FC link LED

Figure 277 shows the locations of the status LEDs and the Fibre Channel link LED on the rear of a UDS-3
drive sled.
Figure 277 Rear View of Fibre Channel Drive Sled (UDS-3 LTO-4 and LTO-5 Drives))
LTO-4
status LEDs:
- top = blue
fibre port
- middle = amber
- bottom = green
fibre ports
LTO-5
1 2
EEB port
Table 21 describes how to interpret the drive sled status LED activity that you might see on the rear of a
UDS-2 or UDS-3 drive sled. For a description of how the blade status LEDs appear under normal conditions,
see Table 22 on page 886. For information about interpreting the drive link LED, see Drive Sled Fibre
Channel Link LED on page 886.
Table 21 Explanations of Drive Sled Status LED States (UDS-2 and UDS-3)
Green Processor status • Solid on / solid off — tape drive’s main processor is not
operating
• Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — drive sled’s main
processor is operating normally
• Two quick blinks within 1.25 seconds; then on solid for 1.25
seconds; repeat — tape drive sled firmware is downloading
• Three quick blinks within 1.25 seconds; then off for 1.25
seconds; repeat — tape drive is activating.
• Ten blinks in 1.25 second; then off for 1.25 seconds; repeat
— tape drive firmware is downloading
• Ten blinks per second — identify mode
Amber Health status • Solid off — drive sled’s controller (drive DC to DC converter
[DDC]) is operating normally
• Solid on — drive sled’s DDC has failed

Table 21 Explanations of Drive Sled Status LED States (UDS-2 and UDS-3) (Continued)
Blue Power control status • Solid off — drive sled is not receiving power
• Solid on — drive brick is powered down; ready to be
replaced (swap mode) or varied on
• Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — drive brick is
powered on; operating normally
Table 22 Explanations of Drive Sled Status LED States Under Normal Conditions
LED Color State and Explanation
Green Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — drive sled’s main processor is operating
normally. The green LEDs for all drive sleds that are operating normally blink together.
Amber Solid off — no errors are detected; drive sled’s controller is operating normally.
Blue Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — drive sled is powered on; operating
normally.
Table 23 Explanations of Ethernet Port LED States
LED Color Possible States and Explanations
Green • Solid on — the link is up; data can be sent or received through the Ethernet port
• Solid off — the link is not up; data cannot be sent or received through the Ethernet port
Amber • Flashes at irregular intervals — data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
• Solid off — no data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
Interpreting Fibre Port Link LEDs

A fibre port link LED shows the state of the Fibre Channel link and whether the link is ready to transmit
commands.
Drive Sled Fibre Channel Link LED

The Fibre Channel link LED for a drive sled is located on the rear of the drive sled. Figure 276 on page 884
shows the location of the Fibre Channel link LED on the rear of the UDS-2 drive sled, and Figure 277 on
page 885 shows the location of the Fibre Channel link LED on the rear of the UDS-3 drive sled.
Table 24 describes how to interpret the Fibre Channel link LED activity that you might see on the rear of the
UDS-2 drive sled. Table 25 on page 887 describes the Fibre Channel link LED activity on the rear of the
UDS-3 drive sled.
Table 24 Explanations of Fibre Drive Sled Link LED States (UDS-2)
LED Color Represents State and Explanation
Green LIP and • Solid on — loop initialization protocol (LIP) has occurred.
activity • Blinks at irregular intervals — host command/data activity is occurring.

Table 24 Explanations of Fibre Drive Sled Link LED States (UDS-2) (Continued)
Amber Online and • Solid on — the library has enabled the drive data bus; it can detect light
light detected through a fiber optic cable.
No color • Solid off — the drive brick is varied off or the drive cannot detect light
through a fiber optic cable (equivalent to no fibre cable plugged in). If
the drive brick is varied off, the blue status LED will be solid on.
Table 25 Explanations of Fibre Drive Sled Link LED States (UDS-3)
Green LIP and • Solid on — loop initialization protocol (LIP) has occurred.
activity • Blinks at irregular intervals — host command/data activity is occurring.
Amber Online and • Solid on — the library has enabled the drive data bus; it can detect light
light detected through a fiber optic cable.
• Blinks at regular intervals — the library has enabled the drive data bus,
but light is not detected through the fiber optic cable.
No color • Solid off — the library has not enabled the drive data bus or the drive
brick is varied off. If the drive brick is varied off, the blue status LED will
be solid on.
A UDS-2 drive with no fiber optic cable plugged in is healthy if the link LED is
Note
solid off. A UDS-3 drive with no fiber optic cable plugged in is healthy if the LED
is amber and blinking at regular intervals, indicating that the library has enabled
the drive data bus, but no light is detected.
FC I/O Blade Fibre Port Link LED

The link LED for an FC I/O blade fibre port is located next to the port. On the FC I/O blade faceplate, black
lines indicate how each link LED belongs to a port. Figure 278 shows the locations of the I/O blade Fibre
port link LEDs.

Figure 278 Locations and Colors of I/O Blade Fibre Port Link LEDs
FC I/O blade link LEDs

- left = green (belongs
to port below)
- right = green (belongs
to port above)
Table 26 describes how to interpret the link LED activity that you might see. There are two different models
of I/O blade: 6404 and 7404. LED behavior varies based on which model is installed in the library.
Table 26 Explanations of I/O Blade Link LED States
Blade Model Possible Green LED States and Explanations
6404 • Solid on — the I/O blade has established a proper link and is ready to use. The
blade FC port detects light through the fiber optic cable.
• Blinks slowly — the link is up and currently transporting commands.
• Blinks rapidly — when the I/O blade is beginning to reboot or power up, all I/O blade
link LEDs, along with the I/O blade’s green status LED, blink rapidly to indicate that
the blade is starting the Power On Self Test (POST).
• Blinks with other link LEDs in a racetrack pattern — when all of the I/O blade link
LEDs blink consecutively in a clockwise order, the blade is booting up. This pattern
stops when the blade is powered and ready. If the pattern doesn’t stop, the blade
is unable to completely boot up. In this situation, follow the repair page instructions.
• Solid off — the I/O blade does not detect light through the fiber optic cable.
7404 • Solid on — the I/O blade has established a link but is not currently transporting
data.
• Blinks — the link is active and is currently transporting data.
• Solid off — the I/O blade has not established a link OR the link is active and is
currently transporting a large amount of data.
For the 7404 I/O blade, fibre port LEDs are off while the blade is booting up.
Note

Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs
The status LEDs for an Ethernet Expansion blade are located at the top of the EEB above ETH 6. Figure
279 shows the locations of the I/O blade Fibre port link LEDs.
Figure 279 Location and Colors of Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LEDs
EEB LED status
Table 27 Explanations of Ethernet Expansion Blade LED States
Blue Green Amber Description
Off Off Off No power
1 Hz Off Off Powered Down - Ready for removal
Off Off On Booting
Flash 1 Hz Off Normal
Flash 10 Hz Off Normal - Identify
Table 28 Explanations of EEB Ethernet Port LED States

Interpreting MCB Port LEDs
The MCB has LEDs for the Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and SCSI ports.
MCB Ethernet Port LEDs

The LEDs on the MCB Ethernet port indicate status and activity. Figure 280 shows the locations and colors
of the MCB Ethernet port LEDs.
Figure 280 Locations and Colors of MCB Ethernet Port LEDs
MCB Ethernet
port LEDs
- top = green
- bottom = amber
Table 29 describes how to interpret the Ethernet port LED activity that you might see.
Table 29 Explanations of MCB Ethernet Port LED States

MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI Port LEDs
The LEDs for the MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI ports are shown below. Figure 281 shows the locations and
colors of the LEDs.
Figure 281 Locations and Colors of MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI Port LEDs
MCB port LEDs

- left = green (belongs to
SCSI port below)
- right = green (belongs
to FC port above)

Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs
The LBX terminator has two versions. Version 01 has four LEDs and Version 03 has six LEDs. For more
information, see LBX Board and Terminator on page 873.
LBX Terminator Version 01 LEDs

The LBX terminator has four green LEDs that indicate the presence of modules in the library. Figure 282
shows the locations of the LEDs. Table 30 describes how to interpret LED activity on the LBX terminator.
The terminator must be located in the LBX of the last expansion module. The LED status should reflect the
physical installed module count of the system.
Figure 282 Locations of LBX Terminator LEDs (Version 01)
Table 30 Explanations of LBX Terminator LED States (Version 01)
LED On/Off Combinations

Explanation
1 2 3 4
Off Off Off Off Robotics are disabled, the access door is open, or the LBX
terminator is misaligned.
On Off Off Off The library has one control module and no expansion modules.
On On Off Off The library has one control module and one expansion module.
On On On Off The library has one control module and two expansion modules.
On On On On The library has one control module and three expansion modules.
On Off On On The library has one control module and four expansion modules.
On On Off On The library has one control module and five expansion modules.
On Off On Off The library has one control module and six expansion modules.
On Off Off On The library has one control module and seven expansion modules.

LBX Terminator Version 03 LEDs
The LBX terminator version 03 has six green LEDs that indicate the presence of modules in the library.
Figure 283 shows the locations of the LEDs. Table 31 describes how to interpret LED activity on the LBX
terminator.
Figure 283 Locations of LBX Terminator LEDs (Version 03)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Table 31 Explanations of LBX Terminator LED States (Version 03)
LED On/Off Combinations

Explanation
1 2 3 4 5 6
Off Off Off Off Off Off Robotics are disabled, the access door is open, or the LBX
terminator is misaligned.
On Off Off Off Off Off The library has one control module and no expansion modules.
On Off Off On Off Off The library has one control module and one expansion module.
On Off Off On On Off The library has one control module and two expansion modules.
On Off Off On On On The library has one control module and three expansion modules.
On Off Off Off On On The library has one control module and four expansion modules.
On Off Off On Off On The library has one control module and five expansion modules.
On Off Off Off On Off The library has one control module and six expansion modules.
On Off Off Off Off On The library has one control module and seven expansion modules.
On On Off Off Off Off The library has one control module and eight expansion modules.
On On Off On Off Off The library has one control module and nine expansion modules.
On On Off On On Off The library has one control module and ten expansion modules.
On On Off On On On The library has one control module and eleven expansion modules.

Interpreting Power Supply LEDs
Power supply problems are reported in tickets. To physically identify a power supply, note the power supply
number and module number in the ticket details. Modules can have up to two power supplies each. The top
supply is #1 and the bottom supply is #2.
The library can be physically configured to include up to eleven expansion

Note
modules. The first seven expansion modules can contain power supplies if
drives are present.
Figure 284 shows the locations and colors of the power supply LEDs.
Figure 284 Locations and Colors of AC Power Supply LEDs
power supply LEDs

- top (AC OK) = green
- middle (DC OK) = green
- bottom (FAULT) = blue
Table 32 describes how to interpret LED activity that you might see on an AC Power Supply.
Table 32 Explanations of AC Power Supply LED States
Green AC OK • Solid on — power supply’s AC input is above minimum requirements

(top LED) to operate
• Solid off — power supply’s AC input is below minimum requirements
to operate
Green DC OK • Solid on — power supply’s output voltage is within specifications

(middle LED) • Solid off — power supply’s output voltage is outside of specifications
Blue (bottom Fault • Solid on — indicates any of the following conditions:

LED)
•Power supply output is outside of specifications
•Current limit has been exceeded
•Temperature limit has been exceeded
•Fan failed while AC input is present and above minimum operating
voltage
•AC input is below minimum operating voltage
•PDU is on, but the Power button on the library’s indicator panel is off
• Solid off — no faults are detected

Table 33 describes how to interpret LED activity that you might see on a DC Power Supply.
Table 33 Explanations of DC Power Supply LED States

Green IN OK • Solid on — power supply’s DC input is above minimum requirements

(top LED) to operate
• Solid off — power supply’s DC input is below minimum requirements
to operate
Green DC OK • Solid on — power supply’s output voltage is within specifications

(middle LED) • Solid off — power supply’s output voltage is outside of specifications
Blue (bottom Fault • Solid on — indicates any of the following conditions:

LED)
•Power supply output is outside of specifications
•Current limit has been exceeded
•Temperature limit has been exceeded
•Fan failed while DC input is present and above minimum operating
voltage
•DC input is below minimum operating voltage
•PDU is on, but the Power button on the library’s indicator panel is off
• Solid off — no faults are detected

Special Instructions For 13+ Modules
If your library contains more than 12 modules, alignment adjustments may be necessary to compensate for
the accumulated module-to-module tolerance differences between the tops and bottoms. This section
describes how to determine when adjustments are necessary, and how to make those adjustments.
This information applies only if you have more than 12 modules. If your library is 12 modules or less, you
can safely assume the modules are within the acceptable tolerance range and operating correctly.
After you are satisfied that the tops and bottoms are properly aligned from end to end, you must install
custom X-axis rails called "X-axis rail terminators" in the last module. This terminator looks similar to the
standard X-axis rail, except it is a different length. Installing this X-axis rail terminator compensates for
accumulated free-play when you have more than 12 modules.
Alignment Instructions For 13+ Modules

Following is an overview of the alignment steps required if you have more than 12 modules:
1 Measure the total end-to-end width of the library at both the top and bottom to determine if the variance
between those measurements is significant enough to require correction.
2 If the variance is significant, install a shim between the last existing module and the new module at
either the top or bottom, depending on where the variance is located. If the variance is not significant,
you can bolt the new module onto the existing module.
The variance between the top and bottom measure is considered significant enough to adjust if
the difference equals or exceeds 4 millimeters. If the variance is less than 4 millimeters, no
adjustment is required.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional module you are adding.
Assumptions
Note the following assumptions prior to beginning the alignment procedure:
• The measuring process requires two people. Make sure you have someone to assist you before
beginning the procedure.
• The end panel on the right-most module should be removed before you begin.
• The procedure is written assuming that the left-most module is either installed against a wall or the
panel door installed, restricting access at the far left end of the library.

• The first 11 modules are assumed to be within the acceptable tolerance range and do not need to
be adjusted for alignment. If your measurements show that adjustments are necessary, the first
adjustment will be between the twelfth and thirteenth module.
Determining Where to Measure and Shim

The following illustrations show where to begin measuring and, if necessary, where to add a shim for either
a single robot or dual robot configuration.
For a Single-Robot Configuration:
For a Dual-Robot Configuration:
Measuring the Library Width and Making Adjustments

Follow this procedure to determine whether the top and bottom measurements (measuring from the left-
most module to the right-most module) differ enough to make an adjustment. This procedure assumes you
are ready to add the first new module to the right of the library, so the end panel of the old right-most module
has already been removed.
1 Open the door on the left-most module.
898 Special Instructions For 13+ Modules

2 Starting at the top of the first module closest to the door, hold one end of the measuring tape to the joint
between the right side of the first module and the left side of the adjoining module.
3 While the first person holds the end of the measuring tape, the second person should extend the
measuring tape to the right edge of the right-most module.
4 Making sure the tape is tight, make a note of the measurement for the top of the library.
5 Repeat the measuring procedure at the bottom of the library closest to the door, starting and ending at
the same locations you used at the top of the library in the previous steps.
6 If the variance between the top and bottom measurements is less than 4 millimeters, no alignment is
necessary. Proceed to Step 8.
7 If the variance between top and bottom is 4 millimeters or more, you must correct the discrepancy.
Between the old last module and the new module, insert over the bolts connecting the two modules one
.5 millimeter shim (provided in the installation/upgrade kit). Make sure to insert one shim each over the
bolts at both the front and rear of the module.

Insert the shims at either the top or the bottom of the module, depending on where the variance occurs.
Do not insert shims at both the top or the bottom of the module, and never insert more than one shim
over a connecting bolt.
8 Bolt the new module onto the existing module.

9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 for each additional module you are adding. As needed, you will insert a set of
shims (for front and rear at either the top or bottom) between module 13 and 14, 14 and 15, and/or 15
and 16.
Installing The X-Axis Rail Terminators

Follow this procedure to install the X-axis rail terminators in the right-most (last) module. You will need to
attach both top and bottom rails.
The X-axis rail terminator looks similar to this:

1 Use the 2.5 mm hex screws to attach the X-axis rail terminator at the top of the module loosely.
2 Push the rail to the left and align it front to back with the previous rail so that the joint is smooth.
3 Tighten each screw on the rail beginning at the left end.
4 Repeat steps 1 - 3 to install the bottom X-axis rail terminator.

Glossary
This glossary consists of terms unique to the library along with some storage industry terminology.
Access door
Refers to the doors on either the control module or expansion module from which you can access the
magazines and accessor assembly.
Capacity on demand (COD)
A Scalar library feature that enables users to have a large physical library, but users pay only for what
capacity they are currently using. License upgrades enable more capacity to be added without a system
interruption.
Control management blade (CMB)
A version of the MCB that has no I/O ports for Ethernet, SCSI, serial, or Fibre Channel. It is the controller
board for the I/O management unit.
Control module
The first module of the library. It consists of an library management module, cartridges, drives, power, and
an I/E station.
Data path
One of the many possible paths that data can move over in the storage area network environment,
potentially involving many components or connections between initiators and targets that have been set
since the initial configuration occurred.
Drive pooling
Drives to be held in a pool (or pools) of drives. You can specify policy settings for the drive pools to configure
how each pool will react to a drive failure and load balancing.
Drive sled position
A slot where a Fibre Channel or SCSI drives reside in the control module or expansion module in one of the
two drive clusters. There are six drive sled positions in each of the two drive clusters.
Encryption Key Management (EKM)
A generic term used to encompass any encryption key management solution.
Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB)
Provides Ethernet connectivity to 6 Ethernet drives. This connectivity is to the library's internal Ethernet and
should not be connected to an external Ethernet source.
Expansion module
Expansion modules enlarge the library configuration by adding modules for additional media storage. You
can add up eleven expansion modules to a library configuration. The first seven expansion modules may
contain optional hardware, such as additional drives, I/O blades, and I/E stations.

I/E station
A door on the access door of the control module (or expansion modules) that contains magazines into which
cartridges can be imported into or exported out of the library.
All single door I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at the control module. All double door I/E stations
are numbered with a number and a letter—for example 2A and 2B—the module number (1–8), with A as
the left I/E station and B the right.
I/O management unit
A management and connectivity interface for the library. The control module and first seven expansion
modules can have I/O management units installed. The I/O management unit may contain a CMB, FC
I/O blades and Ethernet Expansion blades.
Latchhook
The latches used to lock the printed circuit blades into place when they are inserted into the I/O
management unit or library management module (LMM).
Library Management Console (LMC)
The management software client for the library. You can use the LMC either locally from the touch screen
operator panel on the control module or remotely through a web browser running a Java applet.
Library management module (LMM)
The connectivity interface for the three blades that provide intelligence and connectivity to the library
through the control module. The management control blade (MCB), robotics control unit (RCU), and library
motor drive (LMD) blades are installed in the LMM.
Library management partition (LMP)
Partition in the i6000 that is like any other partition, except it is not visible to any backup applications or
hosts. Allows the library to be able to manage the partition, rather than the backup application managing the
partition. Use the LMP partition as a workspace for library to do value-added features outside environment—
like MeDIA (automated data integrity checking routine).
Linear Tape-Open (LTO)
A media technology that is open format. LTO comes in two formats, Accelis and Ultrium. Accelis is the fast
access implementation, while Ultrium is the high capacity implementation.
Management control blade (MCB)

The library controller board, which resides in the LMM. The MCB has I/O ports for Fibre Channel, Ethernet,
serial, and SCSI.
Partition
A partition is a logical portion of the physical library that is viewed by the host as if it is a complete library.
Partitions present the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for purposes of file management, access
by multiple users, or dedication to one or more host applications.
Picker
The robotic hand portion of the accessor assembly that handles cartridges.
Quantum Encryption Key Manager (Q-EKM)
Quantum's encryption key management solution that supports IBM LTO-4,LTO-5, and LTO-6 FC tape
drives.
Scalar Key Manager (SKM)
Quantum's encryption key management solutions that supports HP LTO-4,LTO-5, and LTO-6 FC tape
drives.
Service door
The door on either the control module or expansion module that provides access to the I/O management
unit, LMM, power supplies, drive sleds and other components.
Storage area network (SAN)
A SAN is a dedicated, high-performance network whose primary purpose is the transfer of data along FC
or high-speed Ethernet connections between servers, interconnect devices, and storage peripherals.
904 Glossary
Storage networking (SNW)
A licensable feature that allows you to take advantage of the control path failover and host access
configuration features of 8 Gbps/LTO-5and LTO-6 tape drives, without those drives being connected to a 4
Gbps/Fibre Channel I/O blade.
Universal drive sled (UDS)
A sheet metal case that houses LTO drives in the drive clusters.
WORM
The Scalar i6000 library supports write once, read many technology in LTO-3 and greater tape drives.
WORM allows non-erasable date to be written once and provides extra data security by prohibiting
accidental data erasure.
X-axis
The horizontal position of the accessor assembly.
Y-axis
The vertical position of the accessor assembly.

906 Glossary
Index
A cartridge addressing system
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
accessories location coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
adding cartridges
blades to existing libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 importing using the I/E stations . . . . . . . . . . 119
expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
I/E stations to existing libraries . . . . . . . . . 260 manually bulk loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
redundant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 client, remote
addressing installation on UNIX platforms . . . . . . . . . .187
aisle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 installation on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 CMB
rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 configuring
section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 FC host port failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
addressing system using the setup wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 connecting
applying drives directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
barcode labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 FC drives to hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
applying power SCSI drives to hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
to library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 connection requirements
audience SDLT-320 drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 contacting
Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B control module
component location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
barcode labels installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 26
placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 verifying level condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 29
blades customer service center
adding to existing libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
bulk loading
cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 D
C data path conditioning
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
cable connection requirements digital level
FC drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
calibrating testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
the digital level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 DLT-S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
cartridge addressing
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

documents installation
additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 adding an expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
latest versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 attaching drives directly to hosts . . . . . . . . . 99
release notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CMB and FC I/O blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
connecting drives to FC I/O blades . . . . . . . 94
E connecting FC drives to hosts . . . . . . . . . . 102
connecting SCSI drives to hosts . . . . . . . . 103
electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 drives and blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
example Fibre optical cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
cartridge addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 LTO drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
cartridge addressing system . . . . . . . . . . . 115 multi-module system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
direct attached FC drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 of cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
direct attached SCSI drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 optional hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
FC I/O blades connected to drives . . . . . . . 95 SDLT drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
expansion module stand-alone control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
adding to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 65 installation verification checklist
leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 completing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
preparing for attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 installation verification test
routing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 accessor leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
blade report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
F drive report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
get/put tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
FC drives I/E station assembly test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
cable connection requirements . . . . . . . . . . 94 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
FC host port failover results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
FC I/O blades saving reports and logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 intended use
Fibre optical cables statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
L
G
LBX board
glossary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
H LBX terminator
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
help
versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
contacting Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
leveling
customer service center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
service requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
library
logging off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
I
loading
I/E station cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
adding to existing libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 loading cartridges
I/O management unit bulk loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
numbering sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
illustration logging off
8-module library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
importing LTO drives
cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
importing cartridges WORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
using the I/E stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 LUN Mapping Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
908 Index
M System, Safety, and Regulatory Information
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
manually bulk loading SCSI drives
cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 connecting to hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
SDLT drives
N installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
SDLT-320 drives
numbering sequences attaching through an SNC . . . . . . . . . . .93, 105
FC drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 connection requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
I/O management unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 example configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
O service requests
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
optional hardware set up procedure
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 road map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
setup wizard
P configuring library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
partitions
specifications
expert resource allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
media type checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Support for WORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
return media identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
symbols and notes
power
explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
LMC keyboard displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
T
turning on the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
power supply terminator
adding redundant unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 LBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
terminology
Q glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
testing
Quantum
the digital level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
contacting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
tools
R needed for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
training
redundant power supply contact Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 troubleshooting
release notes LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
remote client W
Installing on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
website
installing on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
customer service center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
required tools
WORM
for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
support for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
results
installation verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
road map
initial set up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
set up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
safety
intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
symbols and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

910 Index

InstallationGuide I10 - 3 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

InstallationGuide I10 - 3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

i

Copyright 2012 by Quantum Corporation. All rights reserved.

SDLT and Super DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation.

Other trademarks may be mentioned herein which belong to other companies

3 Installing a Stand-Alone Control Module

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide iii

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide v

7 Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to a Gen 2

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide vii

8 Upgrading a Gen 1 Single-Robot Library to

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide ix

9 Upgrading a Gen2 Single-Robot Library to a Gen2

10 Applying Power 593

11 Installing Drives and Blades 601

13 Installing Cartridges 633

14 Setting up Your Library for Access 647

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xi

15 Configuring the Library 655

16 Adding Optional Hardware 751

17 Installation Testing and Verification 833

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xiii

A Testing and Calibrating the Digital Level 865

B LBX Board and Terminator 873

C Interpreting LED Codes 879

D Special Instructions For 13+ Modules 897

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xv

Table 2 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Table 3 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Table 4 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Table 5 Electrical Specifications for Control and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Table 7 Cable Connection Requirements for FC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

Table 8 Cable Connection Recommendations for Ethernet Expansion Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

Table 9 Control Path Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

Table 10 Return Media Identifier Behavior Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Table 11 FC I/O Blade Default Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Table 12 Library Functions Requiring Online or Offline State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Table 13 Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Table 14 Automatic E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

Table 15 Customer License Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Table 16 Library Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Table 17 FC I/O Blade Default Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Table 18 Robot Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Table 19 Explanations of Blade Status LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Table 23 Explanations of Ethernet Port LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Scalar i6000 Installation Guide xvii

Table 26 Explanations of I/O Blade Link LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Table 27 Explanations of Ethernet Expansion Blade LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

Table 28 Explanations of EEB Ethernet Port LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

Table 29 Explanations of MCB Ethernet Port LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Table 30 Explanations of LBX Terminator LED States (Version 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

Table 31 Explanations of LBX Terminator LED States (Version 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

Table 32 Explanations of AC Power Supply LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894

Table 33 Explanations of DC Power Supply LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Figure 2 Front View of a Two-Module Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 3 Control Module, Front View Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 4 Control Module, Rear View Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Figure 5 Expansion Module, Back View Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 6 Robot Handle and Lift Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 8 Setting the Power Rail collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 9 X-Preload Tensioner – Inserting Pin Into Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Figure 10 Lifting the Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Figure 11 Engaging the Kickstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 12 Robot Loader Bracket Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33